JP7843557B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

This invention relates to a gaming machine equipped with a performance control means for controlling the performance of the game.

For example, in amusement machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters the starting slot, a determination is made as to whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player. After the special symbols are displayed in a variable manner, the special symbols indicating the result of the above determination are displayed in a stopped manner. When the special symbols indicating that the special game has been determined to be executed are displayed in a stopped manner, the special game in which the player can acquire game tokens is executed. Some of these types of amusement machines execute various effects, such as step-up announcements that change and display effect symbols in conjunction with the variable special symbols, developing step by step up to a predetermined number of steps or less; dialogue announcements that show characters speaking lines; group announcements that show multiple characters moving in a predetermined direction; and cut-ins that superimpose a predetermined cut-in image onto the currently displayed effect image (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Publication No. 2020-80893

By the way, the visual effects used in conventional gaming machines were not always sufficiently entertaining, and there was room for improvement in terms of enhancing their entertainment value.

Therefore, the objective of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of performing highly entertaining and engaging gameplay.

The first invention, a gaming machine for solving the aforementioned problems,
A movable, actionable display unit,
A determination means for determining whether or not to perform a special game that is advantageous to the player,
When the above determination is made, a symbol display control means is provided which causes a special symbol to be displayed in a variable manner on a predetermined symbol display means, and then stops displaying the special symbol indicating the result of the determination.
When the special game is executed and a special symbol indicating that the determination means has determined to be executed is stopped and displayed on the symbol display means, the special game execution means executes the special game,
It comprises a performance control means for controlling the performance,
The aforementioned performance control means is
The special symbol is displayed in conjunction with the display of its variation, and the performance symbol indicating the result of the determination is displayed in conjunction with the display of the special symbol's stop.
The performance can be controlled using any of several performance modes, including a first performance mode and a second performance mode that is different from the first performance mode.
After the variable display period in which the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner ends and the display transitions to a stop display period in which the special symbol is displayed in a stationary manner, a predetermined stop display effect can be executed.
When the performance is controlled in the first performance mode, the first performance setting process is executed in response to the player's operation during the execution of the performance while the stop display is running. On the other hand, when the performance is controlled in the second performance mode, a second performance setting process different from the first performance setting process can be executed in response to the player's operation during the execution of the performance while the stop display is running.
If the first performance setting process described above is executed, the first performance based on the performance settings from the first performance setting process can be executed.
If the second performance setting process described above is executed, the second performance based on the performance settings from the second performance setting process can be executed .
The effects controlled by the aforementioned effect control means include a swinging effect that swings the effect movable body, and an attention effect that draws attention to an effect symbol in a manner that indicates the execution of the special game while the effect symbol is being displayed in a changing state.
The aforementioned performance control means is
During the display of the aforementioned performance symbols, there are two cases: when the performance symbols are displayed in a first display mode, and when the performance symbols are displayed in a second display mode.
The aforementioned rocking effect includes a first rocking effect, a second rocking effect, and a third rocking effect.
When the performance symbols are displayed in the second display mode, the third oscillation effect and the attention effect are more likely to be executed than when the performance symbols are displayed in the first display mode.
When the first oscillation effect is performed, the third oscillation effect and the attention effect are more likely to be performed than when the first oscillation effect is not performed.
The present invention is characterized in that the third oscillation effect and the attention effect are more likely to be performed when the second oscillation effect is performed than when the second oscillation effect is not performed .

According to this gaming machine, the first (or second) performance is executed with different performance settings depending on the performance mode, allowing for more engaging performances in each mode. Furthermore, players can arbitrarily choose whether or not to apply performance settings in either the first or second performance mode, enabling them to execute more effective performances tailored to their preferences.

This invention makes it possible to perform highly engaging and entertaining performances.

Front view of gaming machine 1 Front view of game board 2 Enlarged view of the main display unit 40 in Figure 2. Diagram illustrating the opening and closing control of the second main prize slot 28 and the V prize slot 287. Block diagram showing an example of the configuration of the control device provided by the gaming machine 1. An explanatory diagram for explaining the jackpot random number and symbol random number. Diagram illustrating the flow of gameplay in Gaming Machine 1 An explanatory diagram illustrating the flow of major effects during normal gameplay. An explanatory diagram illustrating the sequence of events following the reach-winning animation and subsequent reach-winning animations. This screen diagram shows a specific example of the sequence of events from the start of the spin to the winning animation during normal gameplay. A screen diagram showing a specific example of the first performance route of the SPSP Reach. Screen diagrams showing specific examples of the first and second symbol-focused performance sequences. Screen diagram showing a specific example of a winning symbol highlighting effect. Screen diagram (Part 1) showing a specific example of the second performance route of the SPSP Reach. Screen diagram (part 2) showing a specific example of the second performance route of the SPSP Reach. A screen diagram showing a specific example of a "double-digit symbol highlighting" effect that draws attention to three symbols that show the repeating number "222". This screen diagram shows a specific example of a series of animations in which a winning symbol highlight animation is followed by a winning symbol shrinking and moving animation. This screen diagram shows a specific example of the sequence of events that occur when a losing notification is performed after a failed reach animation. This diagram explains the characteristics of each notable effect and its related effects that are performed in normal performance mode. Screen diagram showing an example of the display when a V-win is announced during a jackpot game. Diagram illustrating the robot-type gimmick 15 and the rocking motion effect using the robot-type gimmick 15. An explanatory diagram illustrating the sequence of effects during the pre-target fluctuations. An explanatory diagram illustrating the sequence of events in a predictive target change. This diagram explains the characteristics of each shaking effect and related effects that are performed in the normal performance mode. Diagram illustrating the pre-swing effect. This diagram illustrates the memory area of the main RAM 83 and the information stored in each memory area. A flowchart illustrating the interrupt processing performed on the main control board 80. Detailed flowchart of the sensor detection process in step S2, shown in Figure 27. Detailed flowchart of the pre-determination process in steps S211 and S219 in Figure 28 Detailed flowchart of special pattern processing in step S3, Figure 27 Detailed flowchart of the jackpot determination process in step S308 of Figure 30 Detailed flowchart of the variation pattern selection process in step S309 of Figure 30 Detailed flowchart of the special stop processing in step S317 of Figure 30 Detailed flowchart of the opening and closing control process for the grand prize slot in step S6 of Figure 27 (Part 1) Detailed flowchart of the opening and closing control process for the grand prize slot in step S6 of Figure 27 (Part 2) Detailed flowchart of the opening and closing control process for the grand prize slot in step S6 of Figure 27 (Part 3) A flowchart illustrating the interrupt processing performed on the sub-control board 90. Detailed flowchart of the command reception process in step S10, Figure 37 Detailed flowchart of the pending command reception process in step S13 of Figure 38 Detailed flowchart of the icon change animation pattern setting process in step S135 of Figure 39 Detailed flowchart of the chance event pattern setting process in step S136 of Figure 39 Detailed flowchart of the process for setting the performance pattern of the performance symbols in step S137 in Figure 39 Detailed flowchart of the pre-oscillation effect pattern setting process in step S138 of Figure 39 Detailed flowchart of the process for receiving the variation start command in step S16, as shown in Figure 38. Detailed flowchart of the variable animation pattern setting process in step S163 of Figure 44 Detailed flowchart of the preview animation pattern setting process in step S164 of Figure 44 Detailed flowchart of the process for setting the featured performance pattern in step S165 of Figure 46 Detailed flowchart of the oscillation effect pattern setting process in step S169 of Figure 46 A flowchart illustrating the interrupt processing performed on the image and sound control board 100. Detailed flowchart of the image display control process in step S71 of Figure 49 A flowchart illustrating the interrupt processing performed on the lamp control board 120. Block diagram showing an example of the configuration around the performance control board 90 in the gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment. A diagram explaining the characteristics of each performance mode. A time chart illustrating the flow of the animations during the stop display in each animation mode. This diagram explains the performance settings that can be executed in each performance mode. Screen diagram illustrating the effect that promotes the customization of effects in normal performance mode. Screen diagram (1) illustrating the character performance animation and animation customization promotion animation during the non-variable display period in normal performance mode. Screen diagram (part 2) illustrating the character performance animation and animation customization promotion animation during the non-variable display period in normal performance mode. Screen diagram (1) illustrating game presentation in the probability variation mode (or time reduction mode). Screen diagram (part 2) illustrating game presentation in the probability variation mode (or time reduction mode). Screen diagram (part 3) illustrating game presentation in the probability variation mode (or time reduction mode). Detailed flowchart of the prize-winning waiting command reception process executed on the performance control board 90 in the second embodiment of the gaming machine 1. Detailed flowchart (Part 1) of the operation response processing executed on the performance control board 90 in the gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment. Detailed flowchart of operation response processing executed on the performance control board 90 in the gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment (Part 2) Detailed flowchart of operation response processing executed on the performance control board 90 in the gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment (Part 3) Detailed flowchart of in-game performance processing executed on the performance control board 90 in the second embodiment of the gaming machine 1. An explanatory diagram illustrating the flow of a series of special effects that constitute a special variation effect performed in the gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment. Screenshot (Part 1) illustrating a specific example of a special variation effect. Screenshots illustrating specific examples of special variation effects (Part 2) Diagram (Part 1) illustrating the characteristics of each effect performed during special variations. Diagram (Part 2) illustrating the characteristics of each effect performed during special variations. A flowchart illustrating the flow of each effect that makes up a complex transformation effect. Screen diagram (Part 1) illustrating a specific example of a complex transformation effect. Screen diagram (part 2) illustrating a specific example of a complex transformation effect.

[First Embodiment]
Hereinafter, a game machine (pachinko game machine) 1 according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings as appropriate.

[Example configuration of gaming machine 1]
First, an example of the configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to Figures 1 and 2. Here, Figure 1 is a front view of the gaming machine 1, and Figure 2 is a front view of the game board 2. As shown in Figures 1 and 2, the gaming machine 1 comprises a gaming machine frame 30 and a game board 2 mounted inside the gaming machine frame 30. The gaming machine frame 30 is composed of a front frame 31 having a decorative surface, a main frame for mounting the game board 2, etc., and an outer frame for fixing the gaming machine 1 to the island equipment in the hall. The front frame 31 supports a glass plate that is arranged parallel to the game board 2 at a predetermined distance, and this glass plate and the game board 2 form a game area 3 through which game balls can flow.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 1, the front frame 31 is provided with a launching handle 32 for launching game balls, an upper tray 33 for storing game balls supplied to the launching device (not shown), and a lower tray 34 for storing game balls that cannot be stored in the upper tray 33. When a player grips the launching handle 32 and rotates it clockwise, the game balls stored in the upper tray 33 are guided to the launching device and launched with a launching force corresponding to the rotation angle of the launching handle 32. The launched game balls move along the rail member 4 located on the left side of the game area 3, and are then guided to the upper position of the game area 3. There, they flow down the game area 3 along the game board 2, changing their direction of movement by coming into contact with game pins, windmills, etc., provided in the game area 3.

Furthermore, a ball return prevention piece 6 is provided at the end of the rail member 4. This piece prevents game balls that have entered the game area 3 from returning to the launching device. Additionally, a stop button is provided close to the launching handle 32. By operating this stop button, the player can temporarily stop the launch of game balls without returning the launching handle 32 to its initial position.

When the player rotates the launch handle 32 by a small angle ("left-handed shot"), the game ball is launched with a relatively weak launch force and flows down the left game area 3L. Conversely, when the player rotates the launch handle 32 by a large angle ("right-handed shot"), the game ball is launched with a relatively strong launch force and moves along the rail member 4 located to the upper right of the center decorative element 10 before flowing down the right game area 3R.

In the left game area 3L, the path of the game ball is provided with a first start opening 21, a second start opening 22, an opening/closing member 23, and three general prize openings 24 as mechanisms related to prize entry and judgment (see Figure 2). Furthermore, in the right game area 3R, the path of the game ball is provided with the same mechanisms related to prize entry and judgment, including the second start opening 22, the opening/closing member 23, one general prize opening 24, a gate 25, a first large prize opening 26, an opening/closing member 27, a second large prize opening 28, and an opening/closing member 29 (see Figure 2).

The game balls launched from the launching device may enter one of the following locations as they flow down the game area 3 along the game board 2: the first starting opening 21, the second starting opening 22, the general prize opening 24, the first large prize opening 26, and the second large prize opening 28. In this case, a predetermined number of prize balls corresponding to the location of entry are dispensed into the upper tray 33 or lower tray 34. For example, four prize balls are dispensed for each game ball that enters the first starting opening 21, one prize ball is dispensed for each game ball that enters the second starting opening 22, and five prize balls are dispensed for each game ball that enters the general prize opening 24. Also, ten prize balls are dispensed for each game ball that enters the first large prize opening 26, and ten prize balls are dispensed for each game ball that enters the second large prize opening 28. Furthermore, any game balls that do not win any prizes are discharged from the game area 3 through an outlet formed at the lower end of the game board 2.

Furthermore, a center ornament 10 is provided in the opening formed in the center of the game board 2. This center ornament 10 consists of a stage section 11 having a game ball rolling surface on which game balls can roll, and a warp section 12 with a warp entrance and a warp exit at both ends. Game balls flowing down the left game area 3L may enter the warp section 12 from the warp entrance, and these game balls are discharged from the warp exit and guided to the stage section 11. A guide groove is formed at the left-right center of the stage section 11, guiding game balls rolling on the stage section 11 towards the first starting opening 21. Therefore, game balls guided to the stage section 11 via the warp section 12 are more likely to enter the first starting opening 21 than game balls flowing down the left game area 3L without passing through the warp section 12.

The first starting port 21 is a starting area that is always open. The second starting port 22 is a starting area that is closed when the opening/closing member 23, which is a normal electric mechanism, is not operating, and is opened when the opening/closing member 23 operates. In the game machine 1, when a game ball enters the first starting port 21 (or the second starting port 22), it is determined whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player. Then, in the first special symbol display 41 (or the second special symbol display 42), which will be described later, the symbols are displayed in a changing manner, and the symbol indicating the result of the above determination (jackpot symbol or losing symbol) is displayed in a stopped state. If the jackpot symbol is displayed in a stopped state, a jackpot game is executed, which opens the first large prize port 26 and the second large prize port 28.

In the following explanation, the judgment performed in response to a game ball entering the first starting opening 21 will be referred to as the "first special symbol judgment," the judgment performed in response to a game ball entering the second starting opening 22 will be referred to as the "second special symbol judgment," and these will be collectively referred to as the "special symbol judgment."

The first large prize opening 26 is a special prize area that is opened according to the result of the special symbol determination. An opening/closing member 27, which is a plate that opens and closes the first large prize opening 26, is provided at the opening of the first large prize opening 26. Normally, the first large prize opening 26 is closed by the opening/closing member 27 because it maintains a closed position in which the opening/closing member 27 forms the same plane as the game board 2. However, when the first special symbol (or the second special symbol) as the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol indicator 41 (or the second special symbol indicator 42), a jackpot game is executed in which the opening/closing member 27 is activated to open the first large prize opening 26. During this jackpot game, a long-open round game is performed in which the opening/closing member 27 maintains an open position (see Figure 2) that opens the first large prize opening 26, and then returns to a closed position that closes the first large prize opening 26. The long-opening round game, in which the first large prize slot 26 is open, continues until a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10) enter the first large prize slot 26, or until a predetermined time (for example, 25 seconds) has elapsed since the first large prize slot 26 was opened (without the predetermined number of game balls entering it). Thus, during a jackpot game, a long-opening round game is played in which the first large prize slot 26 is kept open for an extended period. Therefore, by shooting to the right during the long-opening round game in which the first large prize slot 26 is kept open, players can obtain more prize balls compared to when a jackpot game is not in progress.

The second large prize slot 28 is a special prize area that opens according to the result of the special symbol determination. An opening/closing member 29, which is a wing-type member that opens and closes the second large prize slot 28, is provided at the opening of this slot 28. Normally, the second large prize slot 28 is closed by this opening/closing member 29 (see Figure 4(A)). However, when the first special symbol (or the second special symbol) as the winning symbol is displayed on the first special symbol indicator 41 (or the second special symbol indicator 42), a jackpot game is executed in which the opening/closing member 29 is activated to open the second large prize slot 28. During this jackpot game, a round of game is played in which the opening/closing member 29 maintains an open position (see Figures 2, 4(B) and (C)) before returning to a closed position that closes the second large prize slot 28.

As will be explained in detail later, the round game involving the opening and closing of the second large prize slot 28 includes a long-opening round game where the second large prize slot 28 is opened for a long time so that a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) can easily enter the second large prize slot 28, and a short-opening round game where the second large prize slot 28 is opened for a short time so that it is extremely difficult for game balls to enter the second large prize slot 28. In the long-opening round game where the second large prize slot 28 is opened for a long time, 100 prize balls (= 10 balls x 10 counts) are dispensed when the player shoots to the right. Therefore, by shooting to the right during the long-opening round game where the second large prize slot 28 is opened for a long time, the player can obtain more prize balls than when a jackpot game is not being played.

In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, when the main CPU 81 determines that a jackpot game should be executed, the operation of the opening/closing members 27 and 29 is controlled, and a jackpot game is executed in which the player can acquire game balls as the game medium.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, regarding the short-opening round game in which the second large prize opening 28 is briefly opened, the opening time, which is the time that the opening/closing member 29 maintains the open position of the second large prize opening 28, is set to an extremely short time of 0.1 seconds. Therefore, even if the player shoots to the right during the short-opening round game of the second large prize opening 28, the game ball will basically not enter the second large prize opening 28, and no prize balls will be paid out.

For the sake of explanation, Figure 2 shows the opening and closing members 27 and 29 in the open position, opening the large prize slots 26 and 28, while the display screen 70 of the image display device 7 is showing a changing animation pattern. However, in reality, the opening and closing members 27 and 29 do not open while the animation pattern is being displayed. Furthermore, in each round of a jackpot game, only one of the first large prize slot 26 or the second large prize slot 28 is used; therefore, in reality, these large prize slots do not open simultaneously as shown in Figure 2.

An opening/closing member 23 (see Figure 2) is positioned close to the second start port 22. This opening/closing member 23 can change its position between a closed position, where it blocks the second start port 22, and an open position, where it opens the second start port 22 (see Figure 2).

The second starting port 22 is normally closed by the opening/closing member 23. However, when a game ball shot by the player passes through gate 25, although no prize balls are dispensed, a determination is made as to whether or not to open the second starting port 22. If it is determined that the second starting port 22 should be opened, the opening/closing member 23 maintains an open position for a predetermined time before returning to a closed position, a predetermined number of times. Thus, while the second starting port 22 is difficult for game balls to pass through when the opening/closing member 23 is not operating, it becomes easier for game balls to pass through when the opening/closing member 23 is operating.

In the following explanation, the judgment performed based on the passage of a game ball through gate 25 will be referred to as "normal symbol judgment."

The general prize slot 24, like the first starting slot 21, is always open and dispenses a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, 5 balls) when a game ball enters it. However, unlike the first starting slot 21, no judgment is made when a game ball enters the general prize slot 24.

[Example configuration of the main display unit 40]
Figure 3 is an enlarged view of the main display unit 40 in Figure 2. As illustrated in Figure 3, the main display unit 40 is composed of a first special symbol display unit 41, a second special symbol display unit 42, a regular symbol display unit 43, a first special symbol hold display unit 44, a second special symbol hold display unit 45, a regular symbol hold display unit 46, a round display unit 47, a game status display unit 48, a launch direction display unit 49, and the like.

The first special symbol indicator 41 is composed of eight LEDs, indicated by "i" to "p". When the first special symbol determination is performed, the indicator displays a changing symbol and then stops displaying the symbol indicating the determination result of the first special symbol determination. Specifically, for example, the changing symbol is displayed by sequentially lighting the eight LEDs, and the symbol is stopped by lighting each LED for a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) in a combination corresponding to the determination result of the first special symbol determination.

The second special symbol indicator 42 is composed of eight LEDs, indicated by "a" through "h". When a second special symbol determination is made, the indicator displays a changing symbol and then stops displaying the symbol indicating the determination result, thereby notifying the determination result of the second special symbol determination. Specifically, for example, the changing symbol is displayed by sequentially lighting the eight LEDs, and the symbol is stopped by lighting each LED for a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) in a combination corresponding to the determination result of the second special symbol determination.

The first special symbol indicator 41 (or the second special symbol indicator 42) displays either a "jackpot symbol" indicating a win or a "losing symbol" indicating a loss, as a symbol indicating the result of the first special symbol judgment (or the second special symbol judgment). In the gaming machine 1, multiple different jackpot symbols are provided depending on the type of jackpot. When a jackpot symbol is displayed, a jackpot game is played by opening the first and second large prize slots 26 and 28 in an opening pattern corresponding to the type of jackpot symbol.

The standard symbol indicator 43 is composed of two LEDs, indicated by "s" and "t". When a standard symbol determination is made, the indicator displays a changing symbol and then stops the symbol indicating the determination result, thereby notifying the player of the standard symbol determination. Specifically, for example, the two LEDs are alternately lit to display a changing symbol, and the symbol is stopped by lighting each LED for a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) in a lighting pattern corresponding to the determination result of the standard symbol determination. If a winning symbol is displayed as stopped, an auxiliary game is performed by operating the opening/closing member 23 in an opening pattern corresponding to the current game state to open the second start opening 22.

In the following explanation, the symbols displayed on the first special symbol indicator 41 and the second special symbol indicator 42 will be referred to as "special symbols," and the symbols displayed on the regular symbol indicator 43 will be referred to as "regular symbols." Furthermore, the special symbols displayed on the first special symbol indicator 41 may be referred to as "first special symbols," and the special symbols displayed on the second special symbol indicator 42 may be referred to as "second special symbols" to distinguish between the two.

The first special symbol hold indicator 44 is composed of two LEDs labeled "u" to "v," and the lighting pattern of these LEDs indicates the number of holds for the first special symbol judgment. The second special symbol hold indicator 45 is composed of two LEDs labeled "w" to "x," and the lighting pattern of these LEDs indicates the number of holds for the second special symbol judgment. In this embodiment, the upper limit for these holds is set to "4." The normal symbol hold indicator 46 is composed of two LEDs labeled "q" to "r," and the lighting pattern of these LEDs indicates the number of holds for the normal symbol judgment.

The round indicator 47 displays the number of rounds in the jackpot game that will be played in response to the jackpot symbol displayed on the first special symbol indicator 41 or the second special symbol indicator 42. In this embodiment, the game machine 1 may have either a jackpot game with 3 rounds or a jackpot game with 10 rounds. Therefore, in this embodiment, the round indicator 47 is configured with an LED for 3 rounds and an LED for 10 rounds, and the number of rounds is indicated by the illumination of either of these LEDs.

The game status indicator 48 is composed of three LEDs, indicated by "a1 to a3," and displays the game status of the game machine 1 by the way these LEDs light up. The launch direction indicator 49 is composed of two LEDs, indicated by "y to z," and displays the launch direction of the game ball by the way these LEDs light up. That is, it indicates whether the player should be shooting to the left or to the right.

[Example of the configuration of the performance features provided by the gaming machine 1]
As illustrated in Figures 1 and 2, the game board 2 is equipped with various elements for performing different effects, such as decorative members 13, movable decorative members 14, effect indicators 125, first special effect symbol hold indicator 126, second special effect symbol hold indicator 127, etc., and an image display device 7 is provided at the rear of the game board 2. In addition, the front frame 31 is equipped with various elements for performing different effects, such as frame lamps 37, speakers 38, and robot-type gimmicks 15.

The decorative component 13 incorporates a panel lamp 5 (see Figure 5) composed of multiple color LEDs. By changing the lighting and flashing patterns of each LED, or by changing the light color of each LED, various light effects can be created.

The movable decorative member 14 is positioned in front of the display screen 70 of the image display device 7 and behind the decorative member 13. This movable decorative member 14 incorporates multiple color LEDs, and performs predetermined effects through both its movement and/or light. In this embodiment, a predetermined space is provided between the game board 2 and the display screen 70, allowing the movable decorative member 14 to operate. The movable decorative member 14 is configured to move up and down along the display screen 70. Normally, the movable decorative member 14 is positioned in an initial position (see Figure 2) where most of it is hidden behind the decorative member 13, with only its lower end visible. In contrast, when a pre-announcement effect indicating a relatively high probability of a jackpot is performed using the display screen 70 or speaker 38, the movable decorative member 14 emits light in a predetermined pattern and drops to an operating position that covers most of the display screen 70.

The frame lamp 37 is composed of multiple LEDs built into various locations on the front frame 31. By changing the lighting and flashing patterns of each LED, or by changing the light color of each LED, various lighting effects can be created.

The robot-type gimmick 15 (an example of a "movable performance element") is positioned on the front frame 31 in a location that can be viewed from above by a seated player. Specifically, the robot-type gimmick 15 is located on the front frame 31 to the left of the first performance button 35 when the gaming machine 1 is viewed from the front, and at the back of the upper tray 33. In this way, because the robot-type gimmick 15 is located at the back of the upper tray 33, the robot-type gimmick 15 will not get in the way, for example, when a player takes game balls from the lower tray 34 and puts them into the upper tray 33, or when they touch game balls stored in the upper tray 33, by the player's hand touching the robot-type gimmick 15. The robot-type gimmick 15 has multiple color LEDs built in, and the robot-type gimmick 15 performs predetermined effects by both the movement of the robot-type gimmick 15 itself and the light, or both. In this embodiment, the robot-type gimmick 15 is configured to perform a rocking motion, swaying its upper body 151 (see Figure 21) alternately from side to side while emitting light in a predetermined light-emitting pattern. This rocking motion will be described in detail later based on Figure 21 and other figures.

The image display device 7 is a liquid crystal display device that displays performance images on its display screen 70. The player can view the display screen 70 through an opening formed in the center of the game board 2. This display screen 70 displays performance images including various display objects such as performance symbols that announce the result of the special symbol judgment, characters and items, reserved images (reserved icons) displayed in the same number as the number of reserved symbols for the first special symbol judgment (or second special symbol judgment), and variation indication images (the said icons) that indicate that the special symbol is currently changing. Note that the image display device 7 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device; it may also be other image display devices such as an EL display device, as long as it is capable of displaying performance images.

The speaker 38 outputs sound effects such as music, voices, and sound effects, either in sync with or asynchronously with the display effects performed on the display screen 70, thereby creating sound effects.

The performance indicator 125 is composed of two LEDs and displays changing symbols in accordance with the changing display of special symbols and performance symbols. It also displays a symbol indicating the result of the special symbol judgment when the special symbols and performance symbols stop. This performance indicator 125 indicates the result of the special symbol judgment through the combination of lighting and extinguishing states and the lighting colors of each LED.

The first special symbol hold indicator 126 is composed of two LEDs, and the combination of the on/off states of each LED displays the same number of holds for the first special symbol judgment as displayed on the first special symbol hold indicator 44. The second special symbol hold indicator 127 is composed of two LEDs, and the combination of the on/off states of each LED displays the same number of holds for the second special symbol judgment as displayed on the second special symbol hold indicator 45.

[Example of the configuration of the input means provided in the gaming machine 1]
As illustrated in Figure 1, the front frame 31 is provided with a first performance button 35 and a second performance button 36 as input means that can be used by the player. The first performance button 35 is a push button for inputting operation information by pressing it. The second performance button 36 is a push button for inputting operation information by grasping the gripping part of the second performance button 36 and pressing it down. In the gaming machine 1, performances may be displayed in response to the operation of the first performance button 35 or the second performance button 36.

The configuration of the input means is not limited to that exemplified in this embodiment; other configurations are also possible. For example, while this embodiment describes a case where the gaming machine 1 has two input means, there may be one or three or more input means. Furthermore, the input means are not limited to push buttons; they may include other input means such as a touch panel capable of detecting the player's touch operation, a light sensor capable of detecting the player's hand held over the display screen 70, a joystick that can be moved forward, backward, left, or right to specify position and direction, or an operating means that the player can grasp and use to change their posture.

[Example of the internal configuration of the second major prize winning slot 28]
Figure 4 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the opening and closing control of the second large prize opening 28 and the V prize opening 287. An opening/closing member 29 for opening and closing the second large prize opening 28 is provided at the opening of the second large prize opening 28 (see Figures 1 and 4(A)). In addition, as illustrated in Figures 4(A) to (C), the second large prize opening sensor 281, the V prize opening sensor 283, the discharge port sensor 284, the sliding member 285, etc. are provided inside the second large prize opening 28.

The second large prize slot sensor 281 detects game balls that have entered the second large prize slot 28, and in this embodiment, 10 prize balls are dispensed each time a game ball passes through the second large prize slot sensor 281. The V prize slot sensor 283 detects the passage of game balls into the V prize slot 287, which is partitioned by the V prize slot sensor 283. The discharge port sensor 284 detects the passage of game balls into the discharge port, which is partitioned by the discharge port sensor 284. The sliding member 285 guides the game balls that have passed through the second large prize slot sensor 281 to the V prize slot 287 or the discharge port, and is configured to slide in the left-right direction (width direction of the game machine 1) in Figure 4. Figures 4(A) and 4(B) illustrate a state in which the slide member 285 is positioned to the right, closing the V-prize opening 287, while Figures 4(C) and 4(D) illustrate a state in which the slide member 285 is positioned to the left, opening the V-prize opening 287.

When a jackpot game is not being played, or during a long-open round game in which the first jackpot opening 26 is kept open for an extended period, the second jackpot opening 28 is closed by the opening/closing member 29, and the V-jacket opening 287 is closed by the sliding member 285 (see Figure 4(A)). In contrast, during a round game in which the second jackpot opening 28 is opened and closed, the second jackpot opening 28 and the V-jacket opening 287 may be in the following states.

Specifically, in round games where the second large prize opening 28 is opened and closed, as illustrated in Figures 4(A) and (B), the opening/closing member 29 may rotate while the sliding member 285 remains in the right position, opening the second large prize opening 28. In this case, although the second large prize opening 28 is open, the V prize opening 287 remains closed by the sliding member 285. Therefore, even if a game ball enters the second large prize opening 28, it will not pass through the V prize opening 287, but will instead pass through the discharge sensor 284.

Furthermore, in round games where the second large prize opening 28 is opened and closed, as illustrated in Figures 4(B) and (C), the sliding member 285 may move from the right position to the left position while the second large prize opening 28 remains open, resulting in the V prize opening 287 also being opened. In this case, since both the second large prize opening 28 and the V prize opening 287 are open, game balls that enter the second large prize opening 28 will pass through the V prize opening 287 (i.e., be detected by the V prize opening sensor 283).

The V-entry slot sensor 283 functions as a so-called probability change switch. As described above, if a game ball enters the V-entry slot (the game ball is detected by the V-entry slot sensor 283) while both the second large entry slot 28 and the V-entry slot 287 are open, the game will be controlled in the "probability change game state" described later after the jackpot game in which the V-entry occurred has ended. On the other hand, if a game ball does not enter the V-entry slot while both the second large entry slot 28 and the V-entry slot 287 are open, the game will be controlled in the "time-saving game state" described later after the jackpot game has ended.

Furthermore, in round games where the second large prize opening 28 is opened and closed, as illustrated in Figure 4(D), the opening/closing member 29 may not be operating, resulting in the second large prize opening 28 being closed. At the same time, the sliding member 285 may move from the right position to the left position, opening the V prize opening 287. In this case, although the V prize opening 287 is open, the second large prize opening 28 is difficult to enter, and therefore, no game balls will enter the second large prize opening 28.

Furthermore, in the transparent member located in a position corresponding to the area containing the second large prize slot sensor 281, the V prize slot sensor 283, the discharge port sensor 284, the sliding member 285, etc., the letter "V" is marked in a position corresponding to the V prize slot sensor 283 (see Figure 2). Therefore, players can easily identify the position of the V prize slot sensor 283 (the position of the V prize slot 287) by looking at this "V" letter.

[Configuration of the control device provided by the gaming machine 1]
Figure 5 is a block diagram showing an example of the configuration of the control device provided by the gaming machine 1.
A control device for controlling the operation of the gaming machine 1 is provided on the back of the game board 2. As illustrated in Figure 5, the control device of the gaming machine 1 consists of a main control board 80 that controls the progress of the game using game balls, a sub-control board 90 that comprehensively controls the effects based on information from the main control board 80, an image and sound control board 100 that controls the effects using images and sounds, and a lamp control board 120 that controls the effects using various lamps and movable members. In this embodiment, the main control board 80 functions as a game control unit that controls the progress of the game, and the sub-control board 90, the image and sound control board 100, and the lamp control board 120 function as effect control units that control the effects. Note that the configuration of the control device is not limited to this, and for example, the sub-control board 90, the image and sound control board 100, and the lamp control board 120 may be composed of a single board.

<Example of the configuration of the main control board 80>
The main control board 80 includes a main CPU 81, a main ROM 82, and a main RAM 83. The main CPU 81 performs various calculations related to judgment and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the program stored in the main ROM 82. The main RAM 83 is used as a storage area for temporarily storing various data used by the main CPU 81 when executing the above program, and as a work area for data processing, etc.

The main control board 80 is connected to the following sensors: first start port sensor 211, second start port sensor 221, gate sensor 251, first large prize port sensor 261, second large prize port sensor 281, V prize port sensor 283, discharge port sensor 284, general prize port sensor 241, second start port solenoid 222, first large prize port solenoid 262, second large prize port solenoid 282, and V prize port solenoid 286. Note that the gaming machine 1 in this embodiment is equipped with four general prize port sensors 241 corresponding to the four general prize ports 24, but for the sake of explanation, only one general prize port sensor 241 is shown in Figure 5.

The first start port sensor 211 detects when a game ball enters the first start port 21 and outputs a detection signal to the main control board 80. The second start port sensor 221 detects when a game ball enters the second start port 22 and outputs a detection signal to the main control board 80. The gate sensor 251 detects when a game ball passes through the gate 25 and outputs a detection signal to the main control board 80. The first large prize port sensor 261 detects when a game ball enters the first large prize port 26 and outputs a detection signal to the main control board 80. The second large prize port sensor 281 detects when a game ball enters the second large prize port 28 and outputs a detection signal to the main control board 80. The V prize port sensor 283 detects when a game ball passes through the V prize port 287 and outputs a detection signal to the main control board 80. The discharge port sensor 284 detects the passage of a game ball into the discharge port and outputs a detection signal to the main control board 80. The general prize port sensor 241 detects when a game ball enters the general prize port 24 and outputs a detection signal to the main control board 80.

The second start port solenoid 222 is an electric solenoid connected to the opening/closing member 23 so as to be able to transmit driving force. Based on a control signal from the main control board 80, it operates the opening/closing member 23 to open and close the second start port 22. The first large prize port solenoid 262 is an electric solenoid connected to the opening/closing member 27 so as to be able to transmit driving force. Based on a control signal from the main control board 80, it operates the opening/closing member 27 to open and close the first large prize port 26. The second large prize port solenoid 282 is an electric solenoid connected to the opening/closing member 29 so as to be able to transmit driving force. Based on a control signal from the main control board 80, it operates the opening/closing member 29 to open and close the second large prize port 28. The V prize port solenoid 286 is an electric solenoid connected to the sliding member 285 so as to be able to transmit driving force. Based on a control signal from the main control board 80, it operates the sliding member 285 to open and close the V prize port 287.

Although not shown in the diagram, the gaming machine 1 is equipped with a payout control board that controls a drive motor that sends game balls from a ball tank located on the back side of the game board 2 to supply game balls to the upper tray 33 or lower tray 34. When the main CPU 81 receives detection signals from the first start port sensor 211, the second start port sensor 221, the first large prize port sensor 261, the second large prize port sensor 281, or the general prize port sensor 241, it instructs the payout control board to dispense a predetermined number of prize balls corresponding to the location where the game ball entered. Furthermore, it manages the number of prize balls to be dispensed based on information from the payout control board.

Furthermore, the main CPU 81 acquires various random numbers as acquired information when a detection signal is input from the first start-up sensor 211, and uses the acquired random numbers to perform the first special symbol determination. Also, the main CPU 81 acquires various random numbers as acquired information when a detection signal is input from the second start-up sensor 221, and uses the acquired random numbers to perform the second special symbol determination. Here, the various random numbers specifically refer to the jackpot random number, the symbol random number, the reach random number, and the variation pattern random number.

The jackpot random number is used to determine whether the game results in a jackpot or a loss. The symbol random number, when a jackpot is determined, is used to determine the type of jackpot (such as the number of rounds in the jackpot game or the game state after the jackpot game ends). The reach random number, when a loss is determined, is used to determine whether a reach animation is performed or not. The variation pattern random number is used to determine the variation pattern of special symbols when they are displayed in a variation state.

The main CPU 81 acquires these random numbers at the moment a game ball enters the first starting gate 21 (or the second starting gate 22). First, it determines whether to execute a jackpot game based on whether the acquired jackpot random number matches a predetermined random value (winning value) stored in the main ROM 82. If it determines to execute a jackpot game based on the jackpot random number matching a winning value, it determines the type of jackpot based on which of the predetermined random values (compared with the symbol random number) stored in the main ROM 82 matches the symbol random number acquired along with the jackpot random number.

On the other hand, if the main CPU 81 determines that it will not execute a jackpot game based on the fact that the acquired jackpot random number does not match the winning value, it decides whether to perform a reach animation or a non-reach animation based on whether the reach random number acquired along with the jackpot random number matches a predetermined random value stored in the main ROM 82 (which is compared with the reach random number). Furthermore, regardless of the result of the determination based on the jackpot random number, the main CPU 81 determines the variation pattern of the special symbols when displaying them based on the variation pattern random number acquired along with the jackpot random number. This determines the variation time of the special symbols.

The main CPU 81, upon determining whether to execute a jackpot game and deciding on the type of jackpot, controls the opening and closing of the first large prize slot 26 (operation of the opening/closing member 27) via the first large prize slot solenoid 262, the opening and closing of the second large prize slot 28 (operation of the opening/closing member 29) via the second large prize slot solenoid 282, and the opening and closing of the V prize slot 287 (operation of the sliding member 285) via the V prize slot solenoid 286, thereby executing the jackpot game according to the type of jackpot.

Furthermore, the main CPU 81 acquires a random number (a normal symbol random number) at the timing of the detection signal input from the gate sensor 251, and performs a normal symbol determination using the acquired normal symbol random number. If the normal symbol determination determines that the second start opening 22 should be opened, the CPU controls the opening and closing of the second start opening 22 (operation of the opening/closing member 23) via the second start opening solenoid 222, thereby executing an auxiliary game to open the second start opening 22.

Furthermore, the main control board 80 is connected to the following: a first special symbol indicator 41, a second special symbol indicator 42, a regular symbol indicator 43, a first special symbol hold indicator 44, a second special symbol hold indicator 45, a regular symbol hold indicator 46, a round indicator 47, a game status indicator 48, and a launch direction indicator 49.

The main CPU 81 controls these displays 41-49 that constitute the main display unit 40, and executes the display processing described above based on Figure 3.

<Example of configuration of sub-control board 90>
The sub-control board 90 includes a sub-CPU 91, a sub-ROM 92, a sub-RAM 93, and an RTC (real-time clock) 94. The sub-CPU 91 performs calculations to control the performance based on the program stored in the sub-ROM 92. The sub-RAM 93 is used as a storage area to temporarily store various data used by the sub-CPU 91 when executing the above program, and as a work area for data processing, etc. The RTC 94 measures the current date and time.

The sub-control board 90 is connected to a first performance button detection sensor 96 and a second performance button detection sensor 97. The first performance button detection sensor 96 outputs operation information (operation signal) to the sub-control board 90 when the first performance button 35 (see Figure 1) is operated. The second performance button detection sensor 97 outputs operation information (operation signal) to the sub-control board 90 when the second performance button 36 (see Figure 1) is operated.

The sub-CPU 91 sets the presentation content based on game information transmitted from the main control board 80, such as special symbol judgment, normal symbol judgment, and information regarding jackpot games. In some cases, it also accepts operation information from the first presentation button 35 and the second presentation button 36, and sets the presentation content accordingly. The sub-CPU 91 then sends commands to the image and sound control board 100 and the lamp control board 120 to instruct them to execute the set presentation content.

<Example of the configuration of the image and sound control board 100>
The image and sound control board 100 controls the image display by the image display device 7 and the output of sound effects by the speaker 38. In this embodiment, the image and sound control board 100 includes an image and sound control CPU 101, a control ROM 102, a control RAM 103, a VDP (Video Display Processor) 104, a CGROM 105, a VRAM 106, an acoustic DSP (Digital Signal Processor) 107, an acoustic ROM 108, an SDRAM 109, and an amplifier 110.

The control ROM 102 is composed of a mask ROM and stores various tables, including the control program for the image and sound control CPU 101, a display list generation program for generating a display list, and a display list creation table used in the process of creating the display list. Here, the display list consists of a set of commands for instructing the execution of drawing on a frame-by-frame basis, and includes various parameters such as the type of image to be drawn, the position (coordinates) where the image is drawn, the display priority, the display magnification, the rotation angle, and the transparency. The control RAM 103 is used as a storage area for temporarily storing various data used by the image and sound control CPU 101 when executing the control program, and as a work area for data processing.

The image and sound control CPU 101, based on the control program, various tables such as the display list creation table, and commands received from the sub-control board 90, instructs the VDP 104 to display the image data stored in the CGROM 105 on the image display device 7. This instruction is primarily performed by outputting the display list. The image and sound control CPU 101 also instructs the sound DSP 107 to output the sound data stored in the sound ROM 108 from the speaker 38.

CGROM 105 stores the necessary performance data for executing performances associated with the display of special symbols and performances associated with jackpot games. This CGROM 105 consists of flash memory, EEPROM, EPROM, mask ROM, etc., and stores compressed sprite data (a single image file) consisting of a collection of pixel information for a predetermined range of pixels (e.g., 32 x 32 pixels), and movie data consisting of a collection of multiple image files. The pixel information consists of color number information specifying a color number for each pixel and an α value indicating the transparency of the image. Furthermore, CGROM 105 stores uncompressed palette data, etc., where color number information specifying color numbers is associated with display color information for actually displaying the colors.

Furthermore, it is possible to compress only a portion of the image data stored in CGROM 105. Also, various known compression methods, such as MPEG4, can be used for compressing the movie data.

The VRAM 106 is composed of SRAM capable of high-speed writing and reading of image data. Although not shown in the diagram, it includes a display list storage area, a decompression storage area, a frame buffer, and other components.

The display list storage area temporarily stores the display list output from the image and sound control CPU 101. The decompression storage area stores the image data that has been decompressed after being read from the CGROM 105. The frame buffer is a frame buffer used for both drawing and displaying the image data shown on the display screen 70.

The VDP 104 decompresses the image data stored in the CGROM 105 in a compressed state and stores the decompressed image data in the decompression storage area. Furthermore, the VDP 104 performs drawing processing on the frame buffer using the image data stored in the decompression storage area, based on the display list stored in the display list storage area. The VDP 104 also generates RGB signals, which are video signals indicating the colors of the image, from the image data stored in the frame buffer, and outputs the generated RGB signals to the image display device 7.

The audio DSP 107 is connected to an audio ROM 108, an SDRAM 109, and an amplifier 110. The audio ROM 108 stores various audio data related to music, voices, sound effects, warning sounds, etc. The SDRAM 109 is used as a workspace for data processing by the audio DSP 107. The audio DSP 107 reads audio data corresponding to instructions from the image/audio control CPU 101 from the audio ROM 108 into the SDRAM 109, performs data processing, and outputs the processed audio data (via the amplifier 110) to the speaker 38. The amplifier 110 adjusts the volume according to instructions regarding volume obtained from the image/audio control CPU 101 via the audio DSP 107 and outputs the audio data to the speaker 38.

In this embodiment, we describe a case where the VDP is responsible for rendering management and the audio DSP is responsible for sound management. However, in other embodiments, a configuration in which the VDP handles both rendering and sound management may be adopted. In this case, it is not necessary to provide a separate audio DSP.

<Example of the configuration of the lamp control board 120>
The lamp control board 120 includes a lamp CPU 121, a lamp ROM 122, and a lamp RAM 123, to which the frame lamp 37, the panel lamp 5, the movable decorative member motor 141, the robot-type gimmick oscillation motor 154, the performance indicator 125, the first special effect hold indicator 126, and the second special effect hold indicator 127 are connected. The lamp ROM 122 stores programs executed by the lamp CPU 121, light emission pattern data, operation pattern data, etc. Here, the light emission pattern data is data indicating the respective light emission patterns of the frame lamp 37, the panel lamp 5, the LEDs built into the movable decorative member 14, the LEDs built into the robot-type gimmick 15, etc. The operation pattern data is data indicating the operation patterns of the movable decorative member 14 and the robot-type gimmick 15, etc., and as operation pattern data for the robot-type gimmick 15, multiple oscillation pattern data indicating oscillation patterns for oscillating the robot-type gimmick 15 in various oscillation patterns are stored in the lamp ROM 122.

The lamp CPU 121 performs calculations to control the operation of the frame lamp 37, the panel lamp 5, the movable decorative member 14, the robot-type gimmick 15, the performance indicator 125, the first special symbol hold indicator 126, the second special symbol hold indicator 127, etc., based on the program stored in the lamp ROM 122.

The lamp CPU 121 reads the light emission pattern data corresponding to the command received from the sub-control board 90 from the light emission pattern data stored in the lamp ROM 122 into the lamp RAM 123, and controls the illumination of the frame lamp 37, the panel lamp 5, the LEDs built into the movable decorative member 14, and the LEDs built into the robot-type gimmick 15. Furthermore, the lamp CPU 121 reads the operation pattern data (or, in the case of the robot-type gimmick 15, the oscillation pattern data) corresponding to the command received from the sub-control board 90 from the operation pattern data stored in the lamp ROM 122 into the lamp RAM 123, and controls the driving of the movable decorative member motor 141 (a stepping motor in this embodiment) that operates the movable decorative member 14, and the robot-type gimmick oscillation motor 154 (a stepping motor in this embodiment) that operates the robot-type gimmick 15.

Furthermore, the lamp CPU 121 controls the display of changing and stopping symbols on the performance indicator 125 based on commands from the sub-control board 90. The lamp CPU 121 also controls the display of the number of reserved symbols related to the first special symbol determination by the first special symbol reserved indicator 126, and the display of the number of reserved symbols related to the second special symbol determination by the second special symbol reserved indicator 127, based on commands from the sub-control board 90.

[Regarding the game status]
Next, the game states of the gaming machine 1 will be described. In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the game is controlled in one of three game states: "normal game state,""probability variation game state," and "time reduction game state."

The "normal game state" is a game state in which special symbol determination is performed in a low-probability state where the probability of executing a jackpot game is relatively low, and support functions that assist in the entry of game balls into the second start opening 22 (functions commonly referred to as "electric support") are not provided. In the normal game state, the probability of executing a jackpot game through special symbol determination is set to a relatively low probability (e.g., 1/210) (see Figure 6(A)). Also, the probability of determining that the second start opening 22 will be opened through normal symbol determination is set to a relatively low probability (e.g., 1/11), the variation time of normal symbols is set to a relatively long time (e.g., 20 seconds), and the opening time of the second start opening 22 when it is determined to be opened is set to a relatively short time (e.g., 0.1 seconds x 1 time).

The "probability variation game state" is a game state in which special symbol judgment is performed in a high-probability state where the probability of executing a jackpot game is relatively high, and the above-mentioned support functions are provided. Specifically, in the probability variation game state, the probability of executing a jackpot game through special symbol judgment is set to a relatively high probability (e.g., 1/60) (see Figure 6(A)). Furthermore, the probability of opening the second start gate 22 through normal symbol judgment is set to a relatively high probability (e.g., 11/11), the variation time of the normal symbols is set to a relatively short time (e.g., 1.5 seconds), and the opening time of the second start gate 22 when it is determined to open is set to a relatively long time (e.g., 1.5 seconds x 3 times).

The "Shortened Play Mode" is a play mode in which special symbol judgment is performed in the low-probability state described above, and the electric reel support function is added. Specifically, in the shortened play mode, the probability of determining that a jackpot will be executed through special symbol judgment is set to a relatively low probability (e.g., 1/210). Furthermore, the probability of determining that the second start gate 12 will open through normal symbol judgment is set to a relatively high probability (e.g., 11/11), the variation time of the normal symbols is set to a relatively short time (e.g., 1.5 seconds), and the opening time of the second start gate 12 when it is determined to open is set to a relatively long time (e.g., 1.5 seconds x 3 times).

Comparing the variation times of special symbols in these game states, the variation times of special symbols in "probability variation game state" and "time-saving game state" tend to be set to be relatively shorter compared to the variation times of special symbols in "normal game state." It should be noted that the probabilities of executing a special game (jackpot probability), the probability of opening the second start gate 22 (winning probability for normal symbol determination), the variation time of normal symbols, and the opening time of the second start gate 22, as shown in the explanation of each game state, are merely examples, and other probabilities and times are also possible.

In the following explanation, the state in which it is easy for game balls to enter the second starting opening 22 due to the presence of the above-mentioned support function will be referred to as the "high base state," and the state in which it is difficult for game balls to enter the second starting opening 22 due to the absence of the support function will be referred to as the "low base state." In this embodiment, the "normal game state" corresponds to the low base state, and the "probability variation game state" and the "time reduction game state" correspond to the high base state.

[How to play the game]
When a player shoots a game ball to the right, it may not enter the first starting opening 21 but may enter the second starting opening 22. However, in a low base state, the second starting opening 22 is difficult to open, and even if it is opened, the opening time is short. For this reason, when the game is controlled in a low base state (which corresponds to the "normal game state" in this embodiment), the player will play by shooting to the left, aiming for the first starting opening 21.

When a game ball shot to the left during normal gameplay enters the first starting slot 21, the first special symbol judgment is performed. After the first special symbol is displayed in a rotating pattern, either a jackpot symbol or a losing symbol is displayed as the first special symbol indicating the judgment result.

If a losing symbol is displayed at the stop, the jackpot game will not be played, and the game state will not change. On the other hand, if a jackpot symbol is displayed as the first special symbol, a jackpot game will be played for a predetermined number of rounds corresponding to that jackpot symbol. After the jackpot game ends, the game will be controlled in either a "probability variation game state" or a "time reduction game state."

Furthermore, when the game state transitions to a "probability variation game state" or a "time-saving game state" following the end of a jackpot game, that is, when the game state transitions from a low base state to a high base state, the above-mentioned support function, which facilitates the entry of game balls into the second starting opening 22, makes it easier for game balls to enter the second starting opening 22 than the first starting opening 21. Therefore, when the game is controlled in a high base state, the player will play by shooting to the right, aiming for the second starting opening 22. Also, if both the right to determine the first special symbol and the right to determine the second special symbol are reserved, the determination of the second special symbol takes precedence over the determination of the first special symbol. Therefore, when the game is controlled in a probability variation game state or a time-saving game state, the determination of the second special symbol is basically performed.

If a jackpot symbol stops and is displayed as the second special symbol during a probability-increasing game state or a time-saving game state, the game will generally be controlled in the probability-increasing game state after the jackpot ends, although it may also be controlled in the time-saving game state. On the other hand, if a jackpot is not won during the probability-increasing game state or time-saving game state, the game state will return from the probability-increasing game state (or time-saving game state) to the normal game state.

[Regarding the use of random numbers for determining special patterns]
Next, the determination process using the jackpot random number and the symbol random number will be explained with reference to Figure 6. Here, Figure 6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the jackpot random number and the symbol random number. Note that in the explanatory diagrams for each random number exemplified from Figure 6 onward, the range of possible random numbers is set to a smaller range than the actual range in order to simplify the explanation. In the gaming machine 1, when a game ball passes through the first start opening 21 (or the second start opening 22), acquired information such as the jackpot random number, the symbol random number, the reach random number, and the variation pattern random number is obtained.

<Processing based on jackpot random numbers>
The jackpot random numbers illustrated in Figure 6(A) are random numbers used in the jackpot determination process (step S308 in Figure 30) to determine whether or not to execute a jackpot game. These random numbers are set individually for both the low-probability state, where the probability of determining that a jackpot game will be executed is relatively low, and the high-probability state, where the probability of determining that a jackpot game will be executed is relatively high.

In this embodiment, four winning values for the low probability state are stored in the main ROM 82. The main CPU 81 determines to execute a jackpot game when the acquired jackpot random number matches one of these four winning values while the game is being controlled in the low probability state (in this embodiment, this corresponds to the "normal game state" and the "time-saving game state"). Furthermore, fourteen winning values for the high probability state (in this embodiment, this corresponds to the "probability-changing game state") are stored in the main ROM 82. When the game is being controlled in the high probability state, the main CPU 81 determines to execute a jackpot game when the acquired jackpot random number matches one of these fourteen winning values.

In this embodiment, the jackpot random number can take on 840 values from "0" to "839" in both the low-probability and high-probability states (see Figure 6(A)). Therefore, the jackpot probability in the low-probability state is 1/210 (= 4/840), and the jackpot probability in the high-probability state is 1/60 (= 14/840).

<Processing based on random numbers for the symbols>
When the main CPU 81 determines that it is time to execute a jackpot game, it determines the type of jackpot based on which of the random numbers pre-set for each type of jackpot matches the random number of symbols obtained along with the jackpot random number used in the determination. In other words, it selects the first special symbol (or second special symbol) to be stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41 (or second special symbol display 42) as the jackpot symbol.

(Types of jackpots related to the determination of the first special symbol)
As illustrated in Figure 6(B), in this embodiment, there are two types of jackpots that can be won when a game ball enters the first starting opening 21 during normal gameplay: "3R probability variation A" and "3R normal".

Here, "3R Probability Change A" (see Figure 6(B)) is a jackpot that, in response to the jackpot symbol X1 stopping and being displayed on the first special symbol display 41, executes a jackpot game consisting of a total of three long-opening round games: one long-opening round game (the first round game) in which the second large prize entry point 28 is opened for a long time, and two long-opening round games (the second and third round games) in which the first large prize entry point 26 is opened for a long time.

If the "3R Probability Change A" is won, both the second large prize slot 28 and the V prize slot 287 will be fully open during the first round of gameplay. Therefore, the player can simply shoot to the right to pass the game ball through the V prize slot 287. If even one game ball is detected by the V prize slot sensor 283 during the first round of gameplay, the game will be controlled in "Probability Change Gameplay State" after the jackpot game ends.

In this embodiment, after the jackpot game related to "3R probability variation A" ends, the number of times the second special symbol judgment (or first special symbol judgment) and the variation display of the second special symbol (or first special symbol) are performed in the "probability variation game state" (the number of ST rounds in Figure 6(B)) is set to 100. If a jackpot is not determined during this time, the probability variation game state continues until 100 special symbol judgments have been performed. If all 100 special symbol judgments are unsuccessful, then 100 rounds of time-saving gameplay are granted. Here, "time-saving gameplay" refers to gameplay that includes the second special symbol judgment (or first special symbol judgment) performed in the "time-saving game state" and the variation display of the second special symbol (or first special symbol) performed according to that special symbol judgment.

On the other hand, "3R Normal" (see Figure 6(B)) is a jackpot that, when the jackpot symbol X2 stops and is displayed on the first special symbol display 41, is executed. This jackpot consists of a total of three rounds: one short-opening round (the first round) where the second large prize slot 28 is briefly opened, and two long-opening rounds (the second and third rounds) where the first large prize slot 26 is opened for a longer period. When "3R Normal" is won, no prize balls are paid out during the first round because, in principle, no game balls enter the second large prize slot 28. Therefore, when "3R Normal" is won, since there are two long-opening rounds during the jackpot, "3R Normal" can be considered a jackpot of effectively two rounds.

If a "3R Normal" win occurs, the first round of the game involves a short-opening round where the second large prize slot 28 is briefly opened. Therefore, no game balls will enter the V-slot during the 3R Normal jackpot game, and after the "3R Normal" jackpot game ends, the game is controlled in a "time-saving game state." In this embodiment of the game machine 1, the number of time-saving rounds for "3R Normal" is set to 100. When a jackpot game is executed in response to the jackpot symbol X2 (indicating a "3R Normal" win) being displayed on the first special symbol display 41, and no jackpot is determined during the game, the game is controlled in a time-saving game state until 100 second special symbol judgments (or first special symbol judgments) are performed after the jackpot game ends, unless a jackpot is determined midway through.

Thus, "3R Probability Change A" is a jackpot where the ST (Special Time) rounds are "100" and the time-saving rounds (the number of rounds of time-saving play) are also "100," while "3R Normal" is a jackpot where the ST rounds are "0" and the time-saving rounds are "100" (see Figure 6(B)).

Incidentally, even though the player has acquired the right to have the game controlled in a "probability variation game state" after the jackpot game ends by winning "3R probability variation A," it is conceivable that a situation may occur where, for example, a ball jam in the game area 3 causes the game ball not to be detected by the V-entry port sensor 283 during the first round of the game. Therefore, in this embodiment of the game machine 1, even if such a situation occurs, in order to allow the player to easily aim for a jackpot after the jackpot game ends, if the game ball does not enter the V-entry port during the first round of the game related to "3R probability variation A," 100 rounds of time-saving gameplay are granted after the jackpot game ends. In other words, the game control is performed in the same way as after the jackpot game related to "3R normal."

In this embodiment, when the result of the first special symbol judgment during normal gameplay is a jackpot, random values for determining the type of jackpot are stored in the main ROM 82. Specifically, as illustrated in Figure 6(B), 50 random values are stored for "3R probability variation A" and 50 random values are stored for "3R normal".

In this embodiment, the possible range of the symbol random number is set to 100 values, from "0" to "99". When a jackpot is determined based on the jackpot random number obtained in response to a game ball entering the first starting opening 21, the type of jackpot related to the first special symbol determination is selected as follows: "3R probability variation A" is selected 50% of the time (= 50/100 x 100), and "3R normal" is selected 50% of the time (= 50/100 x 100) (see Figure 6(B)).

Therefore, when the result of the first special symbol judgment is a jackpot, the probability that the jackpot symbol X1 indicating "3R probability variation A" will stop and be displayed on the first special symbol display 41, and the probability that the jackpot symbol X2 indicating "3R normal" will stop and be displayed on the first special symbol display 41, are both 50%.

Thus, if the result of the first special symbol judgment during normal gameplay is either "3R probability variation A" or "3R normal," in either case, the game enters a high-base state after the jackpot game ends. Therefore, the player should play by shooting to the right, aiming for gate 25 and the second start opening 22.

(Types of jackpots related to the second special symbol determination)
As illustrated in Figure 6(C), there are four types of jackpots available for the second special symbol determination, which is performed when a game ball enters the second starting opening 22: "10R probability variation A", "10R probability variation B", "3R probability variation B", and "3R probability variation C".

Here, "10R Probability Change A" (see Figure 6(C)) is a jackpot that, in response to the jackpot symbol Y1 being displayed on the second special symbol display 42, executes a jackpot game consisting of a total of 10 long-opening rounds, including one long-opening round game (the first round) in which the second large prize slot 28 (and the V prize slot 287) are opened for an extended period, and nine long-opening round games (the second to tenth rounds) in which the first large prize slot 26 is opened for an extended period.

"10R Probability Change B" (see Figure 6(C)) is a jackpot that, in response to the jackpot symbol Y2 being displayed on the second special symbol display 42, executes a jackpot game consisting of a total of 10 long-opening rounds, including one long-opening round game (the first round) where the second large prize slot 28 (and the V prize slot 287) are opened for an extended period, and nine long-opening round games (the second to tenth rounds) where the first large prize slot 26 is opened for an extended period, similar to when "10R Probability Change A" is won.

On the other hand, if you win "3R Probability Variation B," the jackpot symbol Y3 will be displayed on the second special symbol display 42, and if you win "3R Probability Variation C," the jackpot symbol Y4 will be displayed on the second special symbol display 42 (see Figure 6(C)). Furthermore, if you win "3R Probability Variation B" or "3R Probability Variation C," a total of three long-opening round games will be executed, including one long-opening round game (the first round) where the second large prize slot 28 (and the V prize slot 287) are opened for an extended period, and two long-opening round games (the second and third rounds) where the first large prize slot 26 is opened for an extended period, similar to when you win "3R Probability Variation A" (see Figure 6(B)).

Thus, in the case of winning "10R Probability Change A," "10R Probability Change B," "3R Probability Change B," and "3R Probability Change C," both the second large prize slot 28 and the V prize slot 287 are fully open during the first round of gameplay. Therefore, as long as the player is shooting to the right during the first round of gameplay related to these jackpots, they can easily acquire the right to continue playing in "probability change game state" after the jackpot game ends.

Furthermore, regarding these four types of jackpots related to the second special symbol judgment, the ST (Special Time) rounds and time-saving rounds are set as follows: Specifically, for "10R Probability Change A" and "3R Probability Change B," both the ST rounds and time-saving rounds are set to "100." For "10R Probability Change B" and "3R Probability Change C," the ST rounds are set to "100" and the time-saving rounds are set to "0." Therefore, if you win "10R Probability Change B" or "3R Probability Change C," and all 100 special symbol judgments after the jackpot game end are misses, the game state returns to "Normal Game State." However, if you win "10R Probability Change A" or "3R Probability Change B," and all 100 special symbol judgments after the jackpot game end are misses, the game state transitions from "Probability Change Game State" to "Time-Saving Game State."

Therefore, in a high-base state, the probability of a player hitting a jackpot is higher when winning "10R probability variation A" or "3R probability variation B" than when winning "10R probability variation B" or "3R probability variation C".

In this embodiment, when the result of the second special symbol judgment is a jackpot, random values for determining the type of jackpot are stored in the main ROM 82. Specifically, as illustrated in Figure 6(C), 30 random values are stored for "10-Probability Variation A," 45 random values are stored for "10-R Probability Variation B," 10 random values are stored for "3-Probability Variation B," and 15 random values are stored for "3-Probability Variation C."

In this embodiment, as described above, the possible range of the symbol random number is set to 100 values from "0" to "99". When a jackpot is determined based on the jackpot random number obtained in response to a game ball entering the second starting opening 21, the types of jackpots related to the second special symbol determination are as follows: "10R probability variation A" is selected at a rate of 30% (= 30/100 x 100), "10R probability variation B" at a rate of 45% (= 45/100 x 100), "3R probability variation B" at a rate of 10% (= 10/100 x 100), and "3R probability variation C" at a rate of 15% (= 15/100 x 100) (see Figure 6(C)).

Therefore, when the result of the second special symbol judgment is a jackpot, the probability that the jackpot symbol Y1 indicating "10R probability variation A" will stop and be displayed on the second special symbol display 42 is 30%, the probability that the jackpot symbol Y2 indicating "10R probability variation B" will stop and be displayed on the second special symbol display 42 is 45%, the probability that the jackpot symbol Y3 indicating "3R probability variation B" will stop and be displayed on the second special symbol display 42 is 10%, and the probability that the jackpot symbol Y4 indicating "3R probability variation C" will stop and be displayed on the second special symbol display 42 is 15%.

<Processing based on reach random numbers>
If the main CPU 81 determines that it will not perform a jackpot game, it decides whether to perform a reach animation or a no-reach animation based on whether the reach animation obtained along with the jackpot random number used in that determination matches the random number corresponding to a reach animation or the random number corresponding to a no-reach animation.

Although not shown in the diagram, in this embodiment, the main ROM 82 stores 10 random values for reach-type animations. The main CPU 81 decides to perform a reach-type animation if the acquired reach-type random number matches any of these 10 random values. Similarly, 90 random values are stored for non-reach-type animations. The main CPU 81 decides to perform a non-reach-type animation if the acquired reach-type random number matches any of these 90 random values. In this embodiment, the possible range of the reach-type random number is set to "0" to "99". When it is determined that a jackpot game will not be executed, the probability of a reach-type animation being performed is 10% (= 10/100 x 100), and the probability of a non-reach-type animation not being performed (the probability of a non-reach-type animation being performed) is 90% (= 90/100 x 100).

If the main CPU 81 decides to perform a reach-in-the-win animation, it selects a variation pattern for the special symbols that will be selected by the sub-control board 90 as the variation pattern for the animation symbols that will be involved in the reach-in-the-win animation. Conversely, if the main CPU 81 decides to perform a non-reach-in-the-win animation, it selects a variation pattern for the special symbols that will be selected by the sub-control board 90 as the variation pattern for the animation symbols that will not be involved in the reach-in-the-win animation.

[Regarding the flow of the game]
Next, the flow of the game will be explained with reference to Figure 7. Here, Figure 7 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of the game in the game machine 1. Due to the configuration of the game board 2, game balls launched into the left game area 3L can enter the first starting opening 21, while game balls launched into the right game area 3R cannot enter the first starting opening 21. Also, in the normal game state, the second starting opening 22 is unlikely to open, and even if it does open, the opening time of the second starting opening 22 is extremely short, making it very unlikely that a game ball will enter the second starting opening 22. For this reason, there is no advantage for the player to shoot to the right in the normal game state. As is clear from these points, the normal game state is a left-side advantageous state where it is easier to hit a jackpot (special symbol judgment is more likely to be performed) by launching the game ball into the left game area 3L than by launching it into the right game area 3R. For this reason, the player shoots to the left in the normal game state.

When a game ball shot to the left during normal gameplay enters the first starting opening 21, the first special symbol judgment is performed. The first special symbol is then displayed on the first special symbol display 41, and after a change in display, the first special symbol indicating the judgment result is displayed. If the judgment result is "miss," the missing symbol is displayed as the first special symbol. On the other hand, if the judgment result is "jackpot," one of the jackpot symbols X1 to X2 (see Figure 6(B)) is displayed as the jackpot symbol, and the jackpot game corresponding to the displayed jackpot symbol is executed. These jackpot games are as described above based on Figure 6(B).

When the result of the first special symbol judgment during normal gameplay is "Big Win," there are two possibilities: the jackpot symbol indicating a probability-increasing jackpot (jackpot symbol X1: see Figure 6(B)) stops and is displayed (see Figure 7(A)); or the jackpot symbol indicating a normal jackpot (jackpot symbol X2: see Figure 6(B)) stops and is displayed (see Figure 7(D)).

If the jackpot symbol X1, which indicates a probability variation jackpot, is displayed at the stop, the jackpot game described above is executed based on Figure 6(B). If this jackpot game is executed, and the game ball enters the V-entry point during the long-open round game (during the first round of the game) in which the second large entry point 28 and the V-entry point 287 are kept open for an extended period, the game is controlled in a probability variation state after the jackpot game ends (see Figure 7(B)). As described above, this probability variation state continues until 100 special symbol judgments (and special symbol variation displays) are performed, unless a jackpot is determined along the way. On the other hand, even if a jackpot game, including the long-open round game described above, is executed, if the game ball does not enter the V-zone due to, for example, a ball jam in game area 3, the game is controlled in a time-saving game state after the jackpot game ends, which may continue until the second special symbol judgment (or first special symbol judgment) is executed 100 times (see Figure 7(C)).

In this state, during the probability variation game mode, the probability of winning the normal symbol judgment, which is performed when the game ball passes through gate 25, is set to a relatively high probability (11/11 in this embodiment). Furthermore, the opening time of the second start port 22 when the normal symbol judgment is successful is set to a relatively long time (1.5 seconds x 3 times in this embodiment). Therefore, the probability variation game mode is a right-side advantageous state where shooting the game ball into the right game area 3R is more likely to result in a jackpot (special symbol judgment is more likely to be performed) than shooting it into the left game area 3L. For this reason, when the game is controlled in the probability variation game mode, the player should shoot to the right. This is also true when the game is controlled in the time-saving game mode, which is a high-base state similar to the probability variation game mode.

When a game ball shot to the right enters the second start opening 22 while the game is controlled in a probability variation state, a second special symbol judgment is performed. The second special symbol is then displayed in the second special symbol display 42, and after the second special symbol is displayed in a variable position, the second special symbol indicating the result of the second special symbol judgment is displayed in a stopped position. If the result of the second special symbol judgment is "miss," the miss symbol is displayed as the second special symbol. On the other hand, if the result of the second special symbol judgment is "jackpot," one of the jackpot symbols Y1 to Y4 (see Figure 6(C)) is displayed as the jackpot symbol for a probability variation jackpot (see Figure 7(F)), and the jackpot game corresponding to the displayed jackpot symbol is executed. In this scenario, if a game ball enters the V-zone during a jackpot, the game is controlled again in a probability-increasing state after the jackpot ends (see Figure 7(B)). If a game ball does not enter the V-zone during a jackpot, the game is controlled in a time-saving state after the jackpot ends (see Figure 7(C)).

Furthermore, when the game is controlled in the time-saving game state and a game ball shot to the right enters the second start opening 22, a second special symbol judgment is performed. The second special symbol is then displayed in the second special symbol display 42, and after the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the second special symbol indicating the result of the second special symbol judgment is displayed in a stopped position. If the result of the second special symbol judgment is "miss," the miss symbol is displayed as the second special symbol. On the other hand, if the result of the second special symbol judgment is "jackpot," one of the jackpot symbols Y1 to Y4 (see Figure 6(C)) is displayed as the jackpot symbol for a probability-changing jackpot (see Figure 7(I)), and the jackpot game corresponding to the displayed jackpot symbol is executed. In this scenario, if a game ball enters the V-zone during a jackpot, the game is controlled in a probability-increasing state after the jackpot ends (see Figure 7(J)). If a game ball does not enter the V-zone during a jackpot, the game is controlled again in a time-saving state after the jackpot ends (see Figure 7(K)).

Furthermore, if no jackpot is determined during the time-saving game mode, which continues until 100 special symbol judgments (and special symbol variation displays) have been performed, the game mode will revert from the time-saving game mode to the normal game mode (see Figure 7(L)).

Furthermore, as described above based on Figure 6(C), the jackpots related to the second special symbol judgment include "10R probability change A" and "3R probability change B," which grant 100 rounds of probability change games followed by 100 rounds of time-saving games, and "10R probability change B" and "3R probability change C," which do not grant time-saving games after 100 rounds of probability change games. Therefore, if the game transitions to a probability change game state upon the end of a jackpot game related to "10R probability change A" or "3R probability change B," and no jackpot is determined until 100 rounds of special symbol judgment (and display of special symbol fluctuations) have been performed, the game will transition to a time-saving game state that continues until 100 rounds of time-saving games have been performed (see Figure 7(H)). On the other hand, if the game transitions to a probability variation state upon the end of a jackpot game related to "10R probability variation B" or "3R probability variation C," and no jackpot is determined even once after 100 special symbol checks (and special symbol variation displays), the game state will revert from the probability variation state to the normal game state (see Figure 7(G)).

[Regarding the variable animations]
In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, various effects are performed on the display screen 70 as the first special symbol (or second special symbol) is displayed in a variable state and then stopped. Here, we will explain the variable effect performed on the display screen 70 in conjunction with the variable display of the first special symbol.

In the gaming machine 1, when a game ball enters the first starting port 21 and the first special symbol judgment is performed, the first special symbol is displayed in a variable state on the first special symbol display unit 41, and then the first special symbol indicating the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment is displayed in a stopped state. The display screen 70 is provided with a performance symbol display area 73 (see Figure 2) where performance symbols that notify the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment (or second special symbol judgment) are displayed. On the display screen 70, a variable performance is performed, including the variable display of performance symbols, in conjunction with the variable display of the first special symbol (see Figure 2). Then, when the first special symbol is displayed in a variable state for a variable time corresponding to the variable pattern selected when the first special symbol judgment was performed, the first special symbol is displayed in a stopped state, and the performance symbols indicating the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment are displayed in a stopped state.

During the display of these changing symbols, a so-called "reach" effect may occur. Specifically, in the symbol display area 73 of the display screen 70, for example, a portion of the symbol rows of the symbols, in which the numbers 1 to 9 are written vertically from bottom to top, are displayed horizontally in three columns. When the changing display of the first special symbol begins, these symbol rows are displayed in a scrolling manner from top to bottom. In contrast, when a reach effect occurs, before all the symbols are displayed to stop, for example, the symbols in the left column (left symbols) and the symbols in the right column (right symbols) are pseudo-stopped sequentially or simultaneously, without stopping completely. Figure 2 illustrates a state in which three symbols are pseudo-stopped as the left symbols, and three symbols are pseudo-stopped as the right symbols, while the middle column of symbols continues to scroll. A "pseudo-stop" is a visual effect where the symbols are swayed in place without moving significantly. In the following explanation, the term "pseudo-stop" may be used to distinguish it from a "true stop" (sometimes simply called a "stop display"), where the symbols are completely still.

When the same special symbols appear to stop on the active payline as the left and right symbols, a "reach" is established, and a reach animation is performed to make the player anticipate three identical special symbols appearing. This reach animation involves the special symbols (middle symbols) in the middle row scrolling slowly so that the player can identify them, while the reach symbols (left and right symbols) are pseudo-stopped. Finally, the animation indicates whether a win or loss has occurred by stopping a middle symbol that is either the same as the reach symbols or a different middle symbol on the active payline.

While a detailed explanation will be omitted, these reach-out sequences utilize other display objects besides the symbols themselves, such as characters and items. Furthermore, in the following explanation, the sequences that occur before a reach is achieved in a spinning sequence are sometimes referred to as "pre-reach sequences."

The types of reach animations will be explained in detail later, but if the result of the first special symbol judgment is "miss," three animation symbols indicating a reach-miss combination (e.g., "323") will pseudo-stop to notify the miss, and then these three animation symbols will actually stop as the miss symbol is displayed as the first special symbol. On the other hand, if no reach animation occurs, three animation symbols indicating a scattered combination (e.g., "629") will pseudo-stop to notify the miss, and then these three animation symbols will actually stop as the miss symbol is displayed as the first special symbol. In this way, if it is determined that a jackpot game will not be executed, a miss notification animation is performed in which three animation symbols indicating a reach-miss combination or scattered combination pseudo-stop before actually stopping to notify the miss (that a jackpot game will not be executed).

If this losing notification animation is executed, the jackpot game will not be played. If the right to determine the first special symbol is reserved, the first special symbol and the animation symbols will be displayed for a predetermined confirmation time (for example, 0.5 seconds) before the reserved determination of the first special symbol is performed, and the display of the first special symbol corresponding to this determination will begin.

On the other hand, if the result of the first special symbol judgment is "jackpot," a reach animation is usually performed while the first special symbol is displayed. Three special symbols showing repeating numbers (for example, "333") are pseudo-stopped to announce the jackpot, and then these three special symbols actually stop when the jackpot symbol is displayed as the first special symbol. In this way, if it is determined that a jackpot game will be played, a win notification animation is performed, in which the three special symbols pseudo-stop before actually stopping to announce the jackpot (that a jackpot game will be played). When this win notification animation is performed, the jackpot game is played.

[Screen configuration of display screen 70]
Figure 2 illustrates the screen configuration of the display screen 70 in the normal game state. When the game is controlled in the normal game state, a hold icon display area 71, the icon display area 72, and the performance symbol display area 73 are formed on the display screen 70, as illustrated in Figure 2. The performance symbol display area 73 is a display area in which the left symbol constituting the left column of symbols, the middle symbol constituting the middle column of symbols, and the right symbol constituting the right column of symbols are displayed, as described above.

<Hold icon display area 71>
The hold icon display area 71 is a display area where a hold icon is displayed to indicate that the first special symbol judgment is pending. In the gaming machine 1, if a game ball enters the first start port 21 in a situation where the special symbol judgment and the special symbol fluctuation display cannot be started immediately, such as when the special symbol fluctuation display is in progress or during a jackpot game, the right to judge the first special symbol is pending up to a predetermined number (four in this embodiment).

Thus, when the right to determine the first special symbol is reserved, the number of reserved icons in the reserved icon display area 71 is the same as the number of reserved first special symbol determinations indicated by the first special symbol reserved indicator 44. Figure 2 illustrates a state where two reserved icons are displayed in the reserved icon display area 71 to indicate that the number of reserved first special symbol determinations is "2".

Furthermore, if a hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 71 during a high-reliability reach animation, such as the SPSP reach described later, it not only limits the display area used for the reach animation, but the display of the hold icon may also reduce the excitement of the reach animation. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, during normal reaches and SP reaches, the display objects (in this embodiment, the hold icon base) and hold icons constituting the hold icon display area 71 are displayed. However, as the reach animation progresses from a normal reach or SP reach to an SPSP reach, the display objects and hold icons constituting the hold icon display area 71 are removed from the display screen 70. After the SPSP reach ends, the display objects and hold icons constituting the hold icon display area 71 are displayed again.

Furthermore, when the game is controlled under normal gameplay conditions, the game ball will generally not enter the second start port 22. Therefore, under normal gameplay conditions, the right to determine the second special symbol is generally not reserved, and neither a reserved icon related to the second special symbol determination is displayed on the display screen 70, nor is a display area for displaying this reserved icon formed.

<Icon display area 72>
The icon display area 72 is a display area for displaying the icon as a variation suggestion image that indicates the first special symbol is being displayed in a variation state. The icon is displayed in the icon display area 72 when the variation state of the first special symbol begins, and is removed from the icon display area 72 when, for example, the first special symbol is displayed in a stopped state. However, the timing of the removal of the icon is not limited to this, and the icon may be removed while the variation state of the first special symbol is being displayed, for example, when the SPSP reach develops as described later, or in the middle of the SPSP reach.

Incidentally, if a game ball enters the first starting slot 21 while the special symbol variation display is not being performed and the right to determine the special symbol is not reserved, the icon will be displayed in the icon display area 72 as the variation display of the first special symbol begins. On the other hand, if a reserved icon is displayed in the reserved icon display area 71, and the variation display of the symbol corresponding to the icon displayed in the icon display area 72 ends, the first special symbol determination corresponding to the earliest reserved icon displayed in the reserved icon display area 71 (the reserved icon displayed in the position closest to the icon display area 72) will be performed. Then, as the variation display of the first special symbol begins in response to the execution of this first special symbol determination, the earliest reserved icon will shift from the reserved icon display area 71 to the icon display area 72 and be displayed as the new icon. In this way, the reserved icon that has shifted to the icon display area 72 (in this case, the icon) will be displayed larger than when it was displayed in the reserved icon display area 71 (see Figure 2). Therefore, it is possible to direct the player's attention to the icon displayed in the icon display area 72 rather than the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 71.

Furthermore, if a different hold icon than the first hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 71, as the first hold icon shifts to the icon display area 72, the other hold icons in the hold icon display area 71 will shift toward the icon display area 72. As is clear from the above explanation, in the gaming machine 1, the icon corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 71 may be displayed in the icon display area 72. Therefore, in the following explanation, when there is no distinction between the hold icon and the icon in question, they may be collectively referred to simply as "icons."

(Regarding the icon change animation)
By the way, the hold icon is usually displayed as a white hold icon (the default hold icon). However, when a hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 71, an icon change animation may occur in which the color of the hold icon changes. When this icon change animation occurs, the white hold icon changes to a hold icon of a color that suggests the probability of a big win, such as blue, green, or red. The colors that suggest the probability of a big win, as exemplified here, are listed in order from the lowest probability of a big win to the highest probability of a big win. Red is more likely to be selected when the result of the first special symbol judgment corresponding to that red hold icon is a "big win," or when it is a "miss" but the special symbol variation time is set to a relatively long time. Green is more likely to be selected when it is a "big win" or when it is a "miss" but the special symbol variation time is set to a medium time. Blue is more likely to be selected when it is a "miss" or when it is a "miss" and the special symbol variation time is set to a relatively short time. In this embodiment, the probability of hitting the jackpot is set to approximately 1% for white hold icons, approximately 3% for blue hold icons, approximately 15% for green hold icons, and approximately 45% for red hold icons.

In this explanation, we have described an example where the icon change effect occurs when a hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 71 and its display color changes only once. However, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, other icon change effects may also occur. That is, for example, when a white hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 71, it may change to a blue hold icon, and then to a green hold icon. In this way, an icon change effect may occur where the display color of a single hold icon changes multiple times. Furthermore, when a white hold icon shifts from the hold icon display area 71 to the icon display area 72 and is displayed as that icon, an icon change effect may occur where its display color changes.

Furthermore, there are cases where the display color of the held icon changes in both the held icon display area 71 and the icon display area 72. For example, the display color of the held icon changes in the held icon display area 71, and then, when that held icon shifts to the icon display area 72 and is displayed there, its display color changes again. There are also cases where the held icon is initially displayed in a color other than white (for example, blue), or where the display color of a held icon whose initial color is not white changes.

Thus, the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment displays pending information on the display screen 70 indicating that the right to determine a special symbol is pending, and it is possible to change the display manner of this pending information. In the following description, pending icons with a display color other than white, or such icons, may be referred to as "special icons" to distinguish them from normal pending icons and such icons that have a display color of white.

[Variations on display control of pending information]
The display control of the pending information is not limited to that exemplified in this embodiment, but may also be as follows. That is, in this embodiment, for the sake of explanation, the display colors of the icons (pending icon and the icon in question) are described as four colors: white, blue, green, and red. However, in other embodiments, other colors may be available, such as gold, which suggests an even higher probability of a jackpot than red, or rainbow colors, which are selected only when a "jackpot" is achieved.

Furthermore, while this embodiment describes an example of an icon change effect that changes the display color of an icon (such as a hold icon), the icon change effect is not limited to the effect exemplified in this embodiment. It may also include an icon change effect that changes the shape or size of the icon, or an icon change effect that changes the display color in addition to the shape or size of the icon.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, we describe a case where, in addition to the icon change animation targeting the held icon displayed in the held icon display area 71, an icon change animation targeting the same icon displayed in the icon display area 72 can also be performed. However, in other embodiments, a configuration may be adopted in which only the former icon change animation can be performed without providing the icon display area 72 (without displaying the icon).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, a pending icon representing pending information is displayed on the display screen 70, and the display color of the pending icon is changed as an example. In contrast, in other embodiments, for example, four color LEDs with changeable emission colors may be provided, and the same number of LEDs as the number of pending symbols in the first special symbol determination may be lit. By changing the emission color of any of these LEDs, the display manner of the pending information may be changed.

[Regarding pre-determination processing]
In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, if the right to perform a first special symbol determination (or second special symbol determination) is reserved, a pre-determination process may be performed to determine whether or not to perform a jackpot game before the first special symbol determination (or second special symbol determination) is executed for that right. For example, if a game ball enters the first start port 21 while the first special symbol is being displayed in the normal game state, the main CPU 81 acquires information such as a jackpot random number in response to the game ball entering the first start port 21, and based on the acquired jackpot random number, performs a similar jackpot determination process prior to the jackpot determination process in the first special symbol determination performed at the start of the first special symbol display (see step S308 in Figure 30), and determines in advance whether or not it will be determined to be a "jackpot" when the first special symbol determination is executed. Furthermore, based on the random variation pattern numbers obtained along with the jackpot random number, the same process as the variation pattern selection process in step S309 of Figure 30 is performed to determine in advance which variation pattern will be selected when the first special symbol determination is executed.

Thus, when the main CPU 81 performs a pre-determination process in response to the right to determine the first special symbol being reserved, it transmits a reservation command containing pre-determination information indicating the result of that pre-determination to the sub-control board 90. In response, the sub-CPU 91, based on the pre-determination information contained in the reservation command, executes a pre-announcement animation that suggests the player expects a winning notification animation to be performed as a result of the display of the first special symbol's variation, which occurs when the reserved first special symbol determination is executed.

One example of this predictive effect is the icon change effect described above. When the sub-CPU 91 receives a hold command containing pre-determination information from the main control board 80, it decides whether or not to execute the icon change effect based on that pre-determination information. If it decides to execute the icon change effect, it then decides what kind of change pattern to use for the display of the icons (hold icon and the icon in question) (such as the icon's color), and instructs the image and sound control board 100 to execute the icon change effect based on that decision.

Furthermore, in addition to the icon change effect, the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment can also perform various pre-announcement effects such as the weak chance symbol effect (see Figure 8(C)), the first symbol attention effect (see Figure 8(D)), the strong chance symbol effect (see Figure 8(E)), the second symbol attention effect (see Figure 8(F)), and the pre-fluctuation effect (see Figure 22(B)). These pre-announcement effects will be described in detail later.

[The main sequence of events during normal gameplay]
Next, with reference to Figure 8, the flow of major effects in normal gameplay will be explained. Here, Figure 8 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the flow of major effects in normal gameplay. In Figure 8, "pre-read target variation" refers to the variation display of the first special symbol (and effect symbols) that occurs in response to the execution of the first special symbol determination that is the target of the pre-determination process, and "pre-target variation" refers to the variation display of the first special symbol (and effect symbols) that occurs before the pre-read target variation.

(Changes before the target)
First, as a "pre-target variation," the variation display of the first special symbol and the performance symbols begins (see Figure 8(A)). Specifically, as the variation display of the first special symbol begins, the display screen 70 starts scrolling display of the three symbol rows in the performance symbol display area 73 (see Figure 2). Here, if the result of the first special symbol judgment performed by the main CPU 81 at the start of the pre-target variation is "miss," and a variation pattern in which a "no-reach performance" is performed is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol, then at least three performance symbols whose left and right symbols are different from each other (for example, the three performance symbols "436") may be pseudo-stopped and displayed at the end of the variation display of the first special symbol, and as the losing symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, a no-reach miss notification performance may be executed in which the above three performance symbols are stopped as they are (see Figure 8(B)).

The sub-CPU 91 uses the symbol fluctuations where no reach animation occurs (i.e., no reach animation) as "pre-target fluctuations" to execute various pre-announcement animations. In the example shown in Figure 8, the sub-CPU 91 executes a weak chance-eye animation (see Figure 8(C)) and a first-animation symbol attention animation (see Figure 8(D)) during the "pre-target fluctuation" based on the pre-determination result related to the "pre-announcement target fluctuation."

(Weak chance event)
The weak chance symbol effect (see Figure 8(C)) is an effect in which, during the display of the first special symbol's variation related to the pre-reach variation in which no reach effect is performed, three effect symbols representing a weak chance symbol, including two first effect symbols, are pseudo-stopped. In this embodiment, the first effect symbols are even-numbered symbols, and examples of weak chance symbols include "221", "443", and "889", which are composed of two even-numbered symbols and one odd-numbered symbol. Figure 12(C) shows an example of the weak chance symbol effect displaying the "443" weak chance symbol, which is composed of two 4-numbered symbols and one 3-numbered symbol. Note that the combination of three effect symbols representing a weak chance symbol is merely an example, and in other embodiments, a different configuration may be adopted, for example, by displaying three even-numbered symbols as a weak chance symbol.

(First stage design highlight)
The first symbol attention effect (an example of "other attention effects": see Figure 8(D)) is an effect that draws attention to the first symbol (in this embodiment, even-numbered symbols) when a reach effect is not being performed. Figure 12(D) illustrates how the left 4 and middle 4 symbols displayed in the weak chance effect of Figure 12(C) are enlarged, and how blue rain falls from rain clouds onto the left 4 and middle 4 symbols, increasing the attention given to these two 4 symbols. When this first symbol attention effect is performed, a sound effect for the first symbol attention effect is output from speaker 38. In this way, the first symbol attention effect in this embodiment displays an effect showing blue rain falling onto the left 4 and middle 4 symbols, which can guide the player's gaze to the left 4 and middle 4 symbols and effectively increase the attention given to the left 4 and middle 4 symbols.

In this embodiment, the explanation uses the example of two first-effect symbols that draw the player's attention. However, the number of first-effect symbols that draw attention is not limited to two; it could be one or three. Furthermore, the first-effect symbols are not limited to even-numbered symbols; they could be odd-numbered symbols. Also, in this embodiment, the explanation uses the example of the weak chance symbol effect and the first-effect symbol attention effect occurring sequentially. However, these effects may be executed simultaneously. Additionally, a different configuration may be adopted, such as executing the first-effect symbol attention effect when the weak chance symbol effect is not occurring (for example, when the first-effect symbols are displayed during a pre-read target variation without a reach occurring).

On the other hand, the sub-CPU 91 may execute a strong chance symbol animation (see Figure 8(E)) and a second animation symbol attention animation (see Figure 8(F)) during the "pre-target animation" based on the pre-determination result related to the "pre-target animation."

(Strong chance event)
The strong chance symbol effect (see Figure 8(E)) is an effect in which, during the display of the first special symbol's variation related to the pre-reach variation in which no reach effect is performed, three effect symbols representing a strong chance symbol, including two second effect symbols, are displayed as pseudo-stops. In this embodiment, the second effect symbols are odd-numbered symbols, and examples of strong chance symbols include "334", "556", and "776", which are composed of two odd-numbered symbols and one even-numbered symbol. Figure 12(G) illustrates the strong chance symbol effect displaying the "776" strong chance symbol, which is composed of two 7 symbols and one 6 symbol. Note that the combination of three effect symbols representing a strong chance symbol is merely an example, and in other embodiments, a different configuration may be adopted, for example, by displaying three odd-numbered symbols as a weak chance symbol.

(Second stage design highlight)
The second symbol attention effect (an example of "other attention effects": see Figure 8(F)) is an effect that draws attention to the second symbol (in this embodiment, odd-numbered symbols) when a reach effect is not being performed. Figure 12(H) illustrates how the left 7 and middle 7 symbols displayed in the strong chance effect of Figure 12(G) are enlarged, and how red lightning strikes the left 7 and middle 7 symbols, increasing the attention given to these two 7 symbols. When this second symbol attention effect is performed, a sound effect for the second symbol attention effect is output from speaker 38. In this way, the second symbol attention effect in this embodiment displays an effect showing red lightning striking the left 7 and middle 7 symbols, thereby guiding the player's gaze to the left 7 and middle 7 symbols and effectively increasing the attention given to them.

Comparing the image used in the first and second symbol-focusing sequences, the first sequence (see Figure 12(D)) uses an image representing rain clouds and blue rain, while the second sequence (see Figure 12(H)) uses an image representing red lightning. Thus, the second sequence uses a more conspicuous colored image than the first sequence. Therefore, when comparing these sequences, the second sequence is more effective at drawing attention to the left and middle symbols than the first sequence.

In this embodiment, the explanation uses the example of two second-effect symbols that draw the player's attention. However, the number of second-effect symbols that draw attention is not limited to two; it could be one or three. Furthermore, the second-effect symbols are not limited to odd-numbered symbols. For example, only a specific odd-numbered symbol (e.g., the 7 symbol) could be designated as the second-effect symbol. Also, in this embodiment, the explanation uses the example of the strong chance symbol effect and the second-effect symbol attention effect occurring sequentially. However, these effects may be executed simultaneously. Additionally, a different configuration may be adopted, such as executing the second-effect symbol attention effect when the strong chance symbol effect is not occurring (for example, when the second-effect symbol is displayed during a pre-read target variation without a reach occurring).

(Number of times the change before the target was performed)
Up to this point, we have explained the various pre-announcement effects that are performed in the pre-target variation based on the pre-determination result related to the right to determine the first special symbol corresponding to the pre-announcement target variation. However, as is clear from the flow of the effects returning from Figure 8(B) to Figure 8(A), the number of pre-target variations in which the pre-announcement effect is performed is not limited to one, and there may be multiple pre-target variations in which the pre-announcement effect is performed before the pre-announcement target variation.

For example, if two pre-target spins occur before a pre-target spin, the first pre-target spin may execute a weak chance symbol effect (see Figure 8(C)) and a first symbol focus effect (see Figure 8(D)), and then the second pre-target spin may execute a strong chance symbol effect (see Figure 8(E)) and a second symbol focus effect (see Figure 8(F)). Also, for example, if two pre-target spins occur before a pre-target spin, the first pre-target spin may execute a weak chance symbol effect (see Figure 8(C)) and a first symbol focus effect (see Figure 8(D)), and the second pre-target spin may also execute a weak chance symbol effect (see Figure 8(C)) and a first symbol focus effect (see Figure 8(D)). Furthermore, for example, if two pre-target changes occur before a pre-target change, the strong chance symbol effect (see Figure 8(E)) and the second symbol attention effect (see Figure 8(F)) may be executed during the first pre-target change, and the strong chance symbol effect (see Figure 8(E)) and the second symbol attention effect (see Figure 8(F)) may also be executed during the second pre-target change.

Furthermore, if three pre-target spins occur before the target spin, for example, the first pre-target spin might execute a weak chance symbol animation (see Figure 8(C)) and a first symbol focus animation (see Figure 8(D)), followed by the second pre-target spin, where the same animation is executed. Then, the third pre-target spin might execute a strong chance symbol animation (see Figure 8(E)) and a second symbol focus animation (see Figure 8(F)). Alternatively, for example, the weak chance symbol animation (see Figure 8(C)) and the first symbol focus animation (see Figure 8(D)) might be executed in all three pre-target spins, or the strong chance symbol animation (see Figure 8(E)) and the second symbol focus animation (see Figure 8(F)) might be executed in all three pre-target spins.

(First performance pattern focus performance and second performance pattern focus performance)
As is clear from the explanation so far, the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is capable of executing both a first symbol attention effect, which draws attention to the first symbol, and a second symbol attention effect, which draws attention to the second symbol, when a reach effect is not being executed. Therefore, by executing the first symbol attention effect (see Figure 12(D)) in the pre-target spin, it is possible to make the player expect that various attention effects described later will be executed in the pre-read target spin. Also, by executing the second symbol attention effect (see Figure 12(H)) in the pre-target spin, it is possible to make the player expect that various attention effects will be executed in the pre-read target spin.

Furthermore, when comparing the first and second symbol-focused animations, the probability of various highlight animations and win notification animations occurring during the pre-announcement target spin is higher when the second symbol-focused animation is performed than when the first symbol-focused animation is performed. Therefore, the second symbol-focused animation can be said to have a higher probability of a big win than the first symbol-focused animation. For this reason, players can enjoy the game while anticipating that the second symbol-focused animation will be performed instead of the first symbol-focused animation during the target pre-spin, or that the second symbol-focused animation will be performed in a pre-spin that follows a pre-spin where the first symbol-focused animation was performed.

Furthermore, although not shown in Figure 8, when a pre-target variation is occurring, a hold icon indicating that the pre-read target variation is being held is displayed in the hold icon display area 71 (see Figure 2). An icon change animation may also be performed targeting this hold icon corresponding to the pre-read target variation. The synergistic effect of the icon change animation targeting the hold icon corresponding to the pre-read target variation, the weak chance symbol animation (or strong chance symbol animation), and the first symbol focus animation (or second symbol focus animation) can yield a high level of performance effect. By combining and executing these pre-read animations, it is possible to effectively increase the player's expectation that a win notification animation will be performed during the pre-read target variation.

In this embodiment, the explanation is based on the case where the first symbol-focusing animation is always executed in conjunction with a weak chance symbol animation. However, in other embodiments, a configuration may be adopted in which the first symbol-focusing animation is executed only in some cases when a weak chance symbol animation is performed. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the explanation is based on the case where the second symbol-focusing animation is always executed in conjunction with a strong chance symbol animation. However, in other embodiments, a configuration may be adopted in which the second symbol-focusing animation is executed only in some cases when a strong chance symbol animation is performed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the performance images used for the first and second performance symbol highlighting effects are merely examples, and it goes without saying that the content and display colors of the performance images used may be different. In other embodiments, it is also conceivable to employ configurations such as executing the first performance symbol highlighting effect when a weak chance symbol effect has not occurred in the preceding spin, or executing the second performance symbol highlighting effect when a strong chance symbol effect has not occurred in the preceding spin.

Furthermore, while this embodiment describes the case where the display screen 70 and speaker 35 are used for the first and second symbol attention effects, the effects means used for these effect effects are not limited to these. In other embodiments, these effect effects may be executed using one of several effects means, such as the display screen 70, speaker 35, frame lamp 37, panel lamp 5, and movable decorative member 14, or by combining two or more of these effects means. For example, when the panel lamp 5 is used alone to execute the first effect effect, one example of this effect is to make the color LEDs closest to the left and middle symbols emit blue light, while the other color LEDs emit light in a color different from blue.

(Predicted target changes)
Next, we will explain the effects during the pre-read target variation (the variation in question). In the pre-read target variation, as in the case when the pre-target variation starts, first, as the variation display of the first special symbol begins, the display screen 70 starts scrolling display of the three symbol rows in the effect symbol display area 73. Here, if the result of the first special symbol judgment performed at the start of the variation of the pre-read target variation is "miss" and it is decided to perform a "no-reach effect", then usually a no-reach effect (see Figure 8(H)) is performed in which a reach is not established by the effect symbols during the variation display of the first special symbol related to the pre-read target variation, and the three effect symbols indicating scattered symbols are displayed in order or simultaneously in a pseudo-stop display, and then, as the missing symbol is displayed as the first special symbol, a miss notification effect (see Figure 8(I)) is performed in which the three effect symbols indicating scattered symbols are stopped as they are.

In this embodiment of the gaming machine 1, if a weak chance symbol effect and a first symbol attention effect are executed during the pre-target spin, or if a strong chance symbol effect and a second symbol attention effect are executed during the pre-target spin, a reach effect is always executed during the pre-read target spin. Therefore, in this embodiment of the gaming machine 1, if none of these pre-read effects are executed during the pre-target spin, a no-reach effect (see Figure 8(H)) and a miss notification effect (see Figure 8(I)) are performed.

On the other hand, in some cases where the result of the first special symbol judgment performed at the start of the pre-read target fluctuation is "Big Win," or where the result of the first special symbol judgment is "Miss" and it is decided to perform a "Reach-in-A-Round" animation, or where the result of the first special symbol judgment is "Miss" and it is decided to perform a "No-Reach" animation, the following animations will be performed.

In other words, between the start of the display of the first special symbol and the performance symbol related to the pre-read target variation and the establishment of a reach by the performance symbol, a pre-reach performance (see Figure 8(J)) may occur. This pre-reach performance is a notification performance that suggests the possibility of a win notification performance occurring in the pre-read target variation, and the likelihood of such a possibility, before a reach is established by the performance symbol in the pre-read target variation. This pre-reach performance will be described in detail later based on Figure 10.

Next, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the display of the first special symbol and the performance symbol related to the pre-read target variation began, a reach-establishment animation is performed to indicate that a reach has been established by the performance symbols. For example, the left symbol is pseudo-stopped on the active line, and then the right symbol, which is the same as the left symbol, is pseudo-stopped on the active line (see Figures 8(K) and 10(I)). Once a reach is established by the performance symbols in this way, a predetermined reach animation is then performed to make the player expect that the middle symbol, which is the same as the reach symbols (left and right symbols), will stop on the active line to complete a symbol match (i.e., that the performance symbols with matching numbers will be displayed).

In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, three types of reach sequences are provided that can be executed in conjunction with the display of the first special symbol during normal gameplay: a normal reach (see Figure 8(L)), an SP reach (see Figure 8(O)), and an SPSP reach (see Figure 8(P)).

(Normal reach)
Here, a normal reach (see Figure 8(L)) is a reach animation with a relatively low probability of winning a jackpot and infrequent execution of the win notification animation. In this embodiment, the probability of winning a jackpot is set to approximately 3%. When the reach formation animation shown in Figure 8(K) occurs, a normal reach (see Figure 8(L)) is performed first. During a normal reach, the two reach symbols (left symbol and right symbol) are displayed as if they have stopped on the active line, and an animation is displayed showing that the scrolling speed of the middle row of symbols, which was scrolling rapidly between the left and right symbols, gradually decreases.

Here, if the result of the first special symbol judgment performed by the main CPU 81 at the start of the pre-read target variation is "jackpot," and if the variation animation pattern that announces a jackpot with a normal reach is set by the sub-CPU 91 at the start of the pre-read target variation, then at the end of the pre-read target variation, the same middle symbol as the reach symbol is pseudo-stopped on the active line, thereby pseudo-stopping three animation symbols representing the repeating numbers (for example, the "333" animation symbols). As the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, the three animation symbols representing the repeating numbers are then stopped in their original positions in a jackpot announcement animation (see Figure 8(M)).

Furthermore, if the result of the first special symbol judgment performed by the main CPU 81 at the start of the pre-read target variation is "miss," and a variation animation pattern that notifies a miss in a normal reach is set by the sub-CPU 91 at the start of the pre-read target variation, then at the end of the pre-read target variation, a middle symbol different from the reach symbol is pseudo-stopped on the active line, thereby pseudo-stopping three animation symbols representing a reach miss (for example, the "343" animation symbols). As the miss symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, the three animation symbols representing the reach miss are then stopped in their original positions in a miss notification animation (see Figure 8(N)).

(SP Reach)
Furthermore, if the result of the first special symbol judgment performed by the main CPU 81 at the start of the pre-read target variation is "jackpot", and a variation performance pattern that announces a jackpot in an SP reach (see Figure 8(O)) developed from a normal reach is set by the sub-CPU 91 at the start of the pre-read target variation, then at the end of the pre-read target variation, three performance symbols representing matching numbers (for example, the "444" performance symbols) are pseudo-stopped and displayed, and as the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, the three performance symbols representing matching numbers are stopped as they are in a jackpot announcement performance (see Figure 8(M)).

Furthermore, if the result of the first special symbol judgment performed by the main CPU 81 at the start of the pre-read target variation is "miss," and if a variation animation pattern that notifies a miss in an SP reach (see Figure 8(O)) developed from a normal reach is set by the sub-CPU 91 at the start of the pre-read target variation, then at the end of the pre-read target variation, three animation symbols representing a reach miss (for example, the "454" animation symbols) are pseudo-stopped and displayed. As the miss symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, a miss notification animation (see Figure 8(N)) is performed, in which the three animation symbols representing the reach miss are stopped as they are.

Here, the SP Reach (see Figure 8(O)) is a reach animation that, while more likely to trigger a win notification than a normal reach, is not necessarily more likely to trigger a win notification. In this embodiment, its jackpot reliability is set to approximately 16%. The content of the SP Reach animation can be anything, but in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the SP Reach animation depicts a battle between the main character and the enemy character. If the result of the first special symbol judgment performed at the start of the pre-read target variation is "jackpot," a victory animation depicting the main character's victory over the enemy character is performed prior to the win notification animation (see Figure 8(M)). Conversely, if the result of the first special symbol judgment performed at the start of the pre-read target variation is "miss," a defeat animation depicting the main character's defeat over the enemy character is performed prior to the miss notification animation (see Figure 8(N)).

(SPSP Reach)
Furthermore, the sub-CPU 91 performs a variation animation pattern setting process at the start of the pre-read target variation, which may set a variation animation pattern that develops from a normal reach (see Figure 8(L)) to an SP reach (see Figure 8(O)) and then to an SPSP reach (see Figure 8(P)), or a variation animation pattern that develops directly from a normal reach to an SPSP reach without going through an SP reach. In these cases, the SPSP reach starts midway through the pre-read target variation.

Here, if the result of the first special symbol judgment performed by the main CPU 81 at the start of the pre-read target variation is "miss," then at the end of the pre-read target variation, three performance symbols representing a reach miss (for example, the "767" performance symbols) are pseudo-stopped and displayed. As the miss symbol is displayed as the first special symbol, the three performance symbols representing the reach miss are then permanently stopped in a miss notification animation (see Figure 8(N)). Figure 11(I) illustrates the state where, as a result of the SPSP reach being executed, the three performance symbols representing the "454" reach miss are pseudo-stopped and displayed.

On the other hand, if the result of the first special symbol judgment performed by the main CPU 81 at the start of the pre-read target variation is "jackpot," then a "double-digit symbol attention effect" (an example of "another attention effect": see Figure 8(Q)) is performed at the end of the pre-read target variation, drawing attention to three symbols representing the same number (for example, the "777" symbol). Following this, these three symbols representing the same number are displayed as pseudo-stops, and as the jackpot symbol is displayed as the first special symbol, a win notification effect (see Figure 8(R)) is performed, where the three symbols representing the same number are stopped in their original positions.

Figures 15(D) to (E), described later, illustrate how a "double-digit symbol focus" animation is performed prior to the win notification animation in Figure 15(F), drawing attention to the three symbols representing the repeating number "777". Similarly, Figures 16(G) to (H) illustrate how a "double-digit symbol focus" animation is performed prior to the win notification animation in Figure 16(I), drawing attention to the three symbols representing the repeating number "222". These "double-digit symbol focus" animations occur at the end of the SPSP reach when the result of the first special symbol judgment, performed at the start of the pre-read target variation, is a "jackpot". These "double-digit symbol focus" animations will be described in more detail later.

Here, the SPSP Reach (see Figure 8(P)) is the reach animation that most likely to trigger a win among the three types of reach animations, and its jackpot reliability is set to approximately 38% in this embodiment. While the content of the SPSP Reach animation can be anything, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the SPSP Reach animation depicts a battle between the main character and the enemy character. If the result of the first special symbol judgment performed at the start of the pre-read target variation is "jackpot," a victory animation depicting the main character's victory over the enemy character is performed prior to the win notification animation (see Figure 8(R)). Conversely, if the result of the first special symbol judgment performed at the start of the pre-read target variation is "miss," a defeat animation depicting the main character's defeat over the enemy character is performed prior to the miss notification animation (see Figure 8(N)).

As described above, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, battle sequences are performed during both SP Reach and SPSP Reach. However, if a variation sequence pattern that develops from SP Reach to SPSP Reach is set at the start of the pre-read target variation, then, for example, the battle sequence during SP Reach (first half battle) will not determine the winner, and a series of sequences showing the development from SP Reach to SPSP Reach and the start of a new battle sequence (second half battle) will be performed before and after the start of the SPSP Reach. On the other hand, if a variation sequence pattern that develops directly from a normal reach to an SPSP Reach (without going through the SP Reach sequence) is set at the start of the pre-read target variation, the second half battle will begin without the first half battle being performed.

Furthermore, the victory animations for the later battles during the SPSP Reach feature multiple animation patterns. These include a pattern where the main character defeats the enemy character alone, as well as a pattern where the main character and an ally character introduced midway through the battle team up to defeat the enemy character.

So far, we have explained the three types of reach animations: normal reach, SP reach, and SPSP reach. If we arrange these three types of reach animations in order from lowest to highest probability of winning a jackpot, the order is normal reach, SP reach, and then SPSP reach. Therefore, players can enjoy the game while hoping that it will ultimately develop into an SPSP reach.

(Pre-reach animation)
Returning to the explanation of Figure 8, after the pre-reach animation in Figure 8(J) is performed, a reach-establishment-teasing animation (see Figures 8(S), 13(C), and 18(A)) may be performed to heighten the player's anticipation for a reach to be established based on the animation symbols. If this reach-establishment-teasing animation is performed, then either a reach-establishment animation (see Figure 8(U)) or a reach-establishment failure animation (see Figure 8(T)) may be performed afterward.

If a failed reach animation (see Figure 8(T)) occurs here, the subsequent reach animation will not be performed, and a loss notification animation (see Figure 8(N)) will be performed. Figures 18(C) to (I) illustrate how, after a failed reach animation is performed in response to the player's operation of the first animation button 35, a loss notification animation is performed in which three animation symbols indicating scattered symbols are displayed as pseudo-stops before being displayed as actual stops.

(Winning animation)
Figure 13(F) illustrates how the reach formation animation shown in Figure 8(U) is performed. When this reach formation animation is performed, the subsequent animation changes depending on the type of animation symbols that make up the reach symbols. Specifically, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, when a reach is formed with odd-numbered symbols, the reach formation animation (see Figure 8(U)) is followed by a reach symbol attention animation (see Figure 8(V)), and then it develops directly into an SPSP reach (see Figure 8(P)) without going through a normal reach or SP reach. On the other hand, when a reach is formed with even-numbered symbols, the reach formation animation (see Figure 8(U)) and the reach symbol attention animation (see Figure 8(V)) that accompanies it are not performed, and it develops directly into an SPSP reach (see Figure 8(P)) without going through a normal reach or SP reach.

Figures 13(F) to (I) and 14 illustrate how, after a reach announcement animation indicating a 7-symbol reach, a reach symbol focus animation is performed to draw attention to the 7-symbol, and then the game directly develops into an SPSP reach without going through a normal reach or SP reach. Similarly, Figures 16(D) to (F) illustrate how, after a reach announcement animation indicating a 2-symbol reach, the game directly develops into an SPSP reach without a reach symbol focus animation or going through a normal reach or SP reach.

The characteristics of the reach symbol focus effect will be described in detail later, but the sub-CPU 91 is configured to execute a reach symbol focus effect that draws attention to the second symbol (odd-numbered symbols in this embodiment) when a reach is achieved by the symbols, while not executing a reach symbol focus effect that draws attention to the first symbol (even-numbered symbols in this embodiment).

Furthermore, after the reach formation animation shown in Figure 8(U) occurs, regardless of whether the reach symbol attention animation shown in Figure 8(V) is performed, the game will directly develop into an SPSP reach (see Figure 8(P)). The series of animations that occur after the development into an SPSP reach will be described in detail later based on Figure 9.

<Specific examples of pre-reach animations in normal gameplay>
Next, with reference to Figure 10, a specific example of a pre-reach performance performed during the display of the first special symbol's variation in the normal game state will be described. Here, Figure 10 is a screen diagram showing a specific example of a series of performances from the start of the variation to the reach establishment performance in the normal game state. The game machine 1 of this embodiment can perform various pre-reach performances (see Figure 8(J)) between the start of the variation display of the first special symbol's variation in the normal game state (from the start of the variation in Figure 8(G)) and the performance of the reach establishment performance (see Figure 8(K)).

Figure 10(A) illustrates a state in the display screen 70 where, with one hold icon (for example, a red hold icon) displayed in the hold icon display area 71, the system indicates that the result of the first special symbol judgment corresponding to the icon displayed in the icon display area 72 is "miss." As the "miss" symbol stops and is displayed as the first special symbol, the "526" scattered symbol is also stopped and displayed. In this way, after a predetermined confirmation time (0.5 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed since the "miss" symbol stopped and was displayed as the first special symbol, the first special symbol judgment corresponding to the earliest hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 71 (in this case, a red hold icon) is executed. If the result of this first special symbol judgment is "miss," and a variation animation pattern that directly develops from a normal reach (see Figure 8(L)) to an SPSP reach (see Figure 8(P)) is set by the sub-CPU 91, the following animation is performed.

In other words, when the first special symbol determination corresponding to the earliest held icon is performed, the display of the first special symbol changes, and the earliest held icon displayed in the held icon display area 71 shifts to the icon display area 72, and the scrolling display of the three symbol rows begins (see Figures 10(A) and (B)). After a predetermined time has elapsed since the scrolling display of these three symbol rows began, the first pre-reach effect (see Figure 8(J)) may be executed (see Figure 10(C)). For example, as the first pre-prediction, a step-up pre-prediction is executed in which the display mode of the effect image (first pre-prediction effect image) related to the step-up pre-prediction displayed in the central area of the display screen 70 changes in stages, and the effect sound related to the step-up pre-prediction is output from the speaker 38.

Following the first announcement described above, a pseudo-consecutive win animation may be performed (see Figure 10(D)). Here, the pseudo-consecutive win animation is an animation that makes it appear as if the animation symbols displayed in the animation symbol display area 73 have been displayed multiple times during the display of a single special symbol (in this case, the first special symbol). The following animation displays are performed for this pseudo-consecutive win animation.

Specifically, the scrolling speed of the left column of symbols decreases, causing the left symbol (for example, symbol 6) to pseudo-stop. Subsequently, the scrolling speed of the right column of symbols decreases, causing the right symbol (different from the left symbol that pseudo-stopped earlier) (for example, symbol 4) to pseudo-stop. After that, the scrolling speed of the middle column of symbols decreases, causing symbol 7 to pseudo-stop as the middle symbol to signal the execution of a pseudo-consecutive-symbol effect (see Figure 10(D)).

Thus, after the left and right symbols, which are different, have pseudo-stopped, and then the 7 symbol pseudo-stops in the middle column, the pseudo-second consecutive variation animation (see Figure 10(E)) begins, following the pseudo-first consecutive variation animation. Specifically, the characters "×2," indicating the start of the pseudo-second consecutive variation animation, are displayed largely in the central area of the display screen 70. Then, these "×2" characters are displayed smaller in the upper left area of the display screen 70. Consequently, the left 6 symbol, the middle 7 symbol, and the 4 symbol resume their downward movement, and the scrolling display of the three symbol columns resumes in the animation symbol display area 73 (see Figures 10(D) and (E)).

When this pseudo-second variation animation is being performed, a second pre-announcement is executed, such as a dialogue pre-announcement. Specifically, as illustrated in Figure 10(F), an animation image (second pre-announcement animation image) showing a predetermined character speaking a line of dialogue is displayed in the central area of the display screen 70, and an animation sound related to the dialogue pre-announcement (for example, the character's voice) is output from the speaker 38.

Although not shown in Figure 10, when the pseudo-second variation animation begins, a first animation button operation prompt animation similar to that exemplified in Figure 18(C) described later is performed. If the player operates the first animation button 35 during the effective period of this first animation button operation prompt animation, the above-mentioned dialogue予告 (dialogue announcement) is executed as a corresponding animation. As is clear from the explanation so far, the step-up announcement is a pre-reach animation that occurs independently of the player's actions, while the dialogue announcement is a pre-reach animation that occurs in response to the player's actions; thus, the two differ from each other.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 10, as described above, if a dialogue announcement is executed as a second announcement during the pseudo-second consecutive reel spin animation, then the second pseudo-consecutive reel spin animation will be executed during the reel spin display of the first special symbol (see Figure 10(G)). Specifically, as illustrated in Figure 10(G), the scroll speed of the left column of symbols decreases and the left symbol (for example, symbol 2) pseudo-stops, then the scroll speed of the right column of symbols decreases and the right symbol (for example, symbol 5) pseudo-stops, and then the scroll speed of the middle column of symbols decreases and symbol 7 pseudo-stops as the middle symbol.

When the second pseudo-consecutive reel spin sequence is performed during the display of the first special symbol, the pseudo-third consecutive reel spin sequence begins, following the pseudo-second consecutive reel spin sequence. Specifically, the characters "×3," indicating the start of the pseudo-third consecutive reel spin sequence, are displayed largely in the central area of the display screen 70. Then, these "×3" characters are displayed more faintly in the upper left area of the display screen 70, and consequently, the scrolling display of the three symbol rows in the reel symbol display area 73 resumes (see Figures 10(G) and (H)).

Then, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the pseudo-third consecutive variation animation began, the scrolling speed of the left column of symbols slows down, causing the left symbol (for example, the number 4) to pseudo-stop. Subsequently, the scrolling speed of the right column of symbols slows down, causing the right symbol (in this case, the number 4) to pseudo-stop (same as the left symbol), and a reach-establishment animation (see Figure 8(K)) is performed to announce that a reach has been established with the number 4 (see Figure 10(I)).

Note that while this explanation uses the example of a "pre-reach pseudo-consecutive display" where the scrolling display of each symbol row is resumed before a reach is achieved, there are also cases where a "post-reach pseudo-consecutive display" is executed, where the scrolling display of each symbol row is resumed after a reach is achieved.

<Specific examples of the first and second symbol-focused performances>
Next, with reference to Figure 12, specific examples of the first and second symbol-focused performances will be explained. Here, Figure 12 is a screen diagram showing specific examples of the first and second symbol-focused performances. In Figure 12, the hold icon labeled "Hold 1" indicates that the first pre-target variation described above is being held; the hold icon labeled "Hold 2" indicates that the second pre-target variation described above is being held; and the hold icon labeled "Hold 3" indicates that the pre-read target variation described above is being held.

Figure 12(A) illustrates a state where, on the display screen 70, a total of three hold icons—hold 1, hold 2, and hold 3—are displayed in the hold icon display area 71. To indicate that the result of the first special symbol judgment corresponding to the icons displayed in the icon display area 72 is "miss," the losing symbol is displayed as the first special symbol, and simultaneously, the "965" scattered symbol is displayed. In this way, after a predetermined confirmation time (0.5 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed since the losing symbol was displayed as the first special symbol, the first special symbol judgment corresponding to the earliest hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 71 (here, the hold 1 icon indicating that the first pre-target variation is held: see Figure 12(A)) is executed. If the result of this first special symbol judgment is "miss" and it is decided to execute the "no reach" animation, the following animation is performed.

(Pre-target change for the first time)
In other words, when the first special symbol determination corresponding to the hold icon of hold 1 is performed and the display of the first special symbol variation begins, the hold icon of hold 1 shifts from the hold icon display area 71 to the icon display area 72, and the scrolling display of the three symbol rows related to the first pre-target variation begins (see Figures 12(A) and (B)). In addition, as illustrated in Figures 12(A) and (B), the hold icons of hold 2 and hold 3 shift to the left within the hold icon display area 71 and are displayed as the first hold icon and the second hold icon, respectively.

(Weak chance event and first event symbol attention event)
Thus, after a predetermined amount of time has elapsed since the scrolling display of the three symbol rows related to the first target variation began, the three performance symbols indicating weak chance symbols—the left four symbols, the middle four symbols, and the right three symbols—simultaneously stop (see Figure 12(C)). Consequently, the left four and middle four symbols displayed in the pseudo-stopped state are enlarged, while the right three symbols are reduced in size. Blue rain then falls from rain clouds onto the left four and middle four symbols, and the first performance symbol attention performance is carried out to increase the attention given to these two sets of four symbols (see Figure 12(D)). The flow of the performance that executes this weak chance symbol performance and the first performance symbol attention performance is as described above based on Figures 8(C) and (D).

Figure 12(D) illustrates how the first symbol attention-raising feature is performed to increase the attention of two 4-symbols as the first symbol (in this embodiment, even-numbered symbols). However, there are also cases where the first symbol attention-raising feature is performed to increase the attention of two 2-symbols, or where the first symbol attention-raising feature is performed to increase the attention of two 8-symbols.

Subsequently, towards the end of the first pre-target variation, although not shown in the diagram, an animation is displayed that returns the sizes of the left four symbols, middle four symbols, and right three symbols to their normal size. After this, these three animation symbols, representing "443," are displayed as pseudo-stops, and as the losing symbol is displayed as the first special symbol, a losing notification animation is performed in which these three animation symbols actually stop. Figure 12(E) illustrates the state in which the three animation symbols representing "443" have actually stopped.

After a predetermined confirmation time (0.5 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed since the first special symbol related to the first pre-target variation stopped and was displayed, a first special symbol determination corresponding to the earliest held icon displayed in the held icon display area 71 (here, the held icon for held 2, which suggests that the second pre-target variation is held: see Figure 12(E)) is performed. If the result of this first special symbol determination is "miss" and it is decided to execute the "no-reach" animation, the following animation is performed.

(Pre-target change for the second time)
In other words, as the first special symbol variation display begins in response to the execution of the first special symbol determination corresponding to the hold icon of hold 2, the hold icon of hold 2 shifts from the hold icon display area 71 to the icon display area 72, and the scrolling display of the three symbol rows related to the second target variation begins (see Figures 12(E) and (F)). In addition, as illustrated in Figures 12(E) and (F), the hold icon of hold 3 shifts to the left within the hold icon display area 71 and is displayed as the first hold icon.

Thus, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the scrolling display of the three symbol rows related to the second target fluctuation began, the three special symbols indicating a strong chance combination—the left 7, the middle 7, and the right 6—simultaneously stop (see Figure 12(G)). Consequently, the left and middle 7 symbols, which are displayed in a pseudo-stopped state, are enlarged, while the right 6 symbol is reduced. A red lightning strike then directly hits the left and middle 7 symbols, triggering a second special symbol highlighting effect that increases the attention given to these two 7 symbols (see Figure 12(H)). The flow of the effects that execute this strong chance combination effect and the second special symbol highlighting effect is as described above based on Figures 8(E) and (F).

Figure 12(H) illustrates how the second-stage symbol attention-raising feature is performed to increase the attention of two 7 symbols (odd-numbered symbols in this embodiment). However, there are also cases where the second-stage symbol attention-raising feature is performed to increase the attention of two 3 symbols, or two 5 symbols.

Subsequently, towards the end of the second pre-target variation, although not shown in the figure, an animation is displayed that returns the left 7 symbol, middle 7 symbol, and right 6 symbol to their normal size. After this, these three symbols representing "776" are displayed as pseudo-stops, and as the losing symbol is displayed as the first special symbol, a losing notification animation is performed in which these three symbols are permanently stopped. Figure 12(I) illustrates the state in which the three symbols representing "776" have permanently stopped. Thus, after a predetermined confirmation time (0.5 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed since the losing symbol was displayed as the first special symbol related to the second pre-target variation, a first special symbol determination corresponding to the earliest held icon displayed in the held icon display area 71 (here, the held icon for held 3, which suggests that the pre-read target variation is held: see Figure 12(I)) is performed. The animations in the pre-read target variation that occur in response to this first special symbol determination will be described in detail later based on Figure 13.

<Pre-reach animation and failed reach animation>
Next, referring to Figure 18, we will explain a specific example of a sequence of animations when a reach formation announcement animation (see Figure 8(S)) is followed by a reach formation failure animation (see Figure 8(T)). Here, Figure 18 is a screen diagram showing a specific example of a sequence of animations when a loss notification animation is performed after a reach formation failure animation.

(Pre-announcement animation for when a winning combination is achieved)
As described above based on Figure 8, in the pre-read target fluctuation, a reach-establishment prompting presentation (see Figure 8(S)) may be performed after the pre-reach presentation (see Figure 8(J)). Figure 18(A) illustrates a situation in which a reach-establishment prompting presentation is performed, in which a specific character and a speech bubble representing the character's line, "A big chance if a reach is established!?" are displayed, making the player expect a reach to be established by the performance symbols.

After this reach-establishment prompting animation is performed, a slow-movement animation of the left and right symbols is performed, in which the left symbol and the right symbol identical to the left symbol are simultaneously and slowly descended (see Figure 18(B)). Figure 18(B) illustrates how the left four symbols and the right four symbols descend simultaneously and slowly during the slow-movement animation of the left and right symbols. When this slow-movement animation of the left and right symbols begins, the scrolling speed of the middle row of symbols increases, the middle row of symbols becomes invisible, and when the left four symbols and the right four symbols have descended to a predetermined height in the vertical direction of the display screen 70, a first-performance button operation prompting animation is performed, prompting the player to operate the first performance button 35 (see Figure 18(C)). Figure 18(C) illustrates a state in which, as a first-effect button operation prompting effect occurs, the display screen 70 shows an image of the first-effect button 35, the words "Press!" indicating the operation of the first-effect button 35 prompting the player, and an effective period gauge showing the remaining time during which the operation of the first-effect button 35 is valid.

(Reach failed animation)
Here, if the sub-CPU 91 has set at the start of the pre-read target variation to execute a reach formation failure animation (see Figure 8(T)) after the reach formation anticipation animation (see Figure 8(S)), then a series of reach formation failure animations exemplified in Figures 18(D) to (G) will be performed. Here, Figure 18(D) illustrates the situation where the left four symbols pseudo-stop at a predetermined height in the vertical direction of the display screen 70, and the downward movement speed of the right four symbols, which were about to pseudo-stop at the predetermined height, increases, and the scrolling display of the right column of symbols resumes. Furthermore, Figure 18(E) illustrates the situation where the scrolling speed of the right column of symbols decreases again, and the right five symbols that appeared in the upper right slowly descend. Furthermore, Figure 18(F) illustrates the situation where the left four symbols and the right five symbols pseudo-stop at the predetermined height, and the above-mentioned specific character and a speech bubble representing the specific character's line, "Too bad...", are displayed. Furthermore, Figure 18(G) illustrates how the scrolling speed of the middle row of symbols decreases sharply, causing the middle 5 symbols that appeared at the top to slowly descend.

After this series of failed reach animations, the three animation symbols representing the scattered "455" combination are pseudo-stopped, and as the losing symbol is displayed as the first special symbol, a losing notification animation is performed in which these three animation symbols are actually stopped (see Figures 18(H) and (I)).

[The sequence of events following the "reach" announcement and the subsequent "reach" announcement.]
Next, referring to Figure 9, we will explain the sequence of events when a reach formation prompt (see Figure 8(S)) is followed by a reach formation animation (see Figure 8(U)) and directly develops into an SPSP reach (see Figure 8(P)). Here, Figure 9 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the flow of the sequence of events following the reach formation prompt and subsequent reach formation animations.

The above explanation regarding Figure 18 described a specific example of the sequence of events when a reach formation prompt (see Figure 8(S)) is followed by a reach formation failure prompt (see Figure 8(T)), and then a loss notification prompt (see Figure 8(N)). Next, referring to Figure 9, we will explain the sequence of events when a reach formation prompt (see Figure 8(S)) is followed by a reach formation prompt (see Figure 8(U)), and then the game directly develops into an SPSP reach (see Figure 8(P)) without going through a normal reach or SP reach.

If a variation pattern is set by the sub-CPU 91 at the start of the pre-readable variation shown in Figure 8, where a reach-establishment prompt (see Figure 8(S)) is followed by a reach-establishment animation (see Figure 8(U)), and then develops into an SPSP reach (see Figure 8(P)), the following series of animations will be performed.

In other words, when the above-mentioned variation pattern is set, the reach-establishment prompting animation (see Figure 9(A)) and the reach-establishment animation (see Figure 9(B)) are performed sequentially during the variation display of the first special symbol and the animation symbol related to the pre-read target variation. The reach-establishment prompting animation is as described above based on Figure 18(A). The subsequent reach-establishment animation (see Figure 9(B)) may be an even-numbered symbol reach-establishment animation that notifies the establishment of a reach with an even-numbered symbol (for example, see Figure 16(D)) or an odd-numbered symbol reach-establishment animation that notifies the establishment of a reach with an odd-numbered symbol (for example, see Figure 13(F)). The post-reach animation (an example of an "expectation animation") shown in Figure 9(C) and subsequent animations is initiated after either of these reach-establishment animations has occurred.

Thus, in this embodiment, the gaming machine 1 can execute two main types of reach-winning animations: even-numbered symbol reach-winning animations and odd-numbered symbol reach-winning animations. However, the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment has the characteristic that the subsequent animation flow changes depending on the type of reach-winning animation.

Specifically, the sub-CPU 91 is configured to perform the following animation control: If it executes the odd-numbered symbol reach-establishment animation (see Figure 9(B)), it executes the reach-symbol attention animation (see Figure 9(C)) following the odd-numbered symbol reach-establishment animation; however, if it executes the even-numbered symbol reach-establishment animation (see Figure 9(B)), it does not execute the reach-symbol attention animation (see Figure 9(C)). The following section will explain a specific example of the reach-symbol attention animation, which draws attention to odd-numbered symbols as reach-symbols, with reference to Figure 13.

<Specific examples of the "Reach" symbol highlighting effect>
Figure 13(A) illustrates the situation immediately after the start of the pre-target variation (symbol variation corresponding to the hold icon of hold 3: see Figure 8(G)) following the first pre-target variation (symbol variation corresponding to the hold icon of hold 1: hold 1 variation) and the second pre-target variation (symbol variation corresponding to the hold icon of hold 2: hold 2 variation), as explained based on Figure 12. Specifically, when the first special symbol determination corresponding to the hold icon of hold 3 corresponding to the pre-target variation is performed, the variation display of the first special symbol starts, and the earliest hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 71 (in this case, the hold icon of hold 3) shifts to the icon display area 72, and the scrolling display of the three symbol rows starts (see Figure 13(A)).

Then, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the scrolling display of these three pattern rows began, a pre-reach animation (see Figure 8(J)) is performed, which suggests that a winning notification animation will be executed in the current pre-read target variation (see Figure 13(B)). Although not shown in Figure 13, between the start of the current pre-read target variation and the performance of the reach establishment prompting animation (see Figures 8(S), 9(A), and 13(C)), a first-performance button operation prompting animation is performed, similar to the first-performance button operation prompting animation described above based on Figure 18(C), prompting the player to operate the first-performance button 35. Figure 13(B) illustrates how a dialogue予告 (dialogue announcement) is performed as a pre-reach animation in response to the player operating the first-performance button 35 during the effective period of this first-performance button operation prompting animation. In this dialogue announcement, an animation image showing a predetermined character saying the line "It's your chance!" is displayed on the display screen 70, and audio with the same content as this line is output from the speaker 38.

Note that this explanation uses the example of a pre-reach animation where a dialogue notification is performed. However, there are other cases, such as when the aforementioned step-up notification is performed as a pre-reach animation, or when both the step-up notification and the dialogue notification are performed as pre-reach animations.

(Pre-announcement animation for when a winning combination is achieved)
After these pre-reach animations (see Figures 8(J) and 13(B)) are performed, a reach-establishment-teasing animation (see Figures 8(S) and 9(A)) is performed (see Figure 13(C)). The reach-establishment-teasing animation exemplified in Figure 13(C) is as described above based on Figure 18(A), so a detailed explanation is omitted here.

Next, a slow-motion animation of the left and right symbols is performed, in which the left symbol and the right symbol (which is identical to the left symbol) are simultaneously and slowly descended (see Figure 13(D)). Figure 13(D) illustrates how the left and right 7 symbols simultaneously and slowly descend as a result of this slow-motion animation. When this slow-motion animation of the left and right symbols begins, the scrolling speed of the middle row of symbols increases, and the middle row of symbols becomes invisible. Once the left and right 7 symbols have descended to a predetermined height in the vertical direction of the display screen 70, a first-action button operation prompting animation is performed, prompting the player to operate the first-action button 35 (see Figure 13(E)). The first-action button operation prompting animation illustrated in Figure 13(E) is performed in the same manner as the first-action button operation prompting animation described above, based on Figure 18(C).

(A winning combination is achieved with odd-numbered symbols)
Here, since the sub-CPU 91 has pre-set that a reach with the number 7 will be achieved at the start of the pre-read target variation, a reach achievement animation (see Figure 9(B)) is performed to notify that a reach with the number 7 has been achieved, either when the player operates the first performance button 35, or when the effective period related to the first performance button operation promotion animation in Figure 13(E) ends without the player operating the first performance button 35 (see Figure 13(F)). Figure 13(F) shows an example of a reach achievement animation in which the left and right 7 symbols are displayed as pseudo-stopped symbols, reach lines extending left and right passing over these 7 symbols, the words "Reach!", a specific character, and a speech bubble representing the specific character's line "You did it!!", and along with these display animations, the same audio as the words "Reach!" is output from the speaker 38.

(Attention-grabbing effect for the winning combination)
Next, since a reach is achieved with the odd-numbered 7 symbol, the reach achievement animation (see Figure 9(B) and Figure 13(F)) is followed by a reach symbol highlighting animation (see Figure 9(C)) (see Figures 13(G) to (I)). Figure 13(G) illustrates how the left 7 symbol, which is displayed as a pseudo-stop during the reach achievement animation, expands and moves to the right, while the right 7 symbol, which is also displayed as a pseudo-stop during the reach achievement animation, expands and moves to the left. Figure 13(H) illustrates how, as the left and right 7 symbols expand and move closer to each other, these 7 symbols rotate clockwise with the scrolling direction of each symbol row (downward in this case) as the axis. Figure 13(I) then shows a merging animation representing the merging of the left and right 7 symbols when they have come close to each other, and illustrates how a single giant 7 symbol is displayed as a result of the merging animation. Although not shown in the diagram, during the period when the "reach" symbol highlighting effect is performed, a specific sound effect is output from speaker 38.

In this embodiment of the gaming machine 1, in addition to the display screen 70 and speaker 38, various other presentation means such as frame lamps 37, game board lamps 5, and movable decorative members 14 are also provided. Therefore, it is possible that the player may not be looking at the winning symbols displayed during the winning combination animation. In contrast, in this embodiment of the gaming machine 1, a winning symbol attention animation is performed when an odd-numbered symbol combination is achieved, which is expected to shift the player's gaze to the display screen 70 and draw their attention to the winning symbols.

In this embodiment of the gaming machine 1, the reach-winning animation, which notifies the player of the formation of a reach with odd-numbered symbols, is immediately followed by the reach-symbol attention animation. Therefore, it can be understood that the reach-symbol attention animation is performed when a reach is formed. The reach-symbol attention animation is performed using the display screen 70 and speaker 38. Although not shown in the figure, when the reach-symbol attention animation is in progress, the frame lamp 37 and the game board lamp 5 illuminate using a specific lighting pattern for the reach-symbol attention animation.

<Specific examples of sequences of animations when the "Reach Symbol Highlight" animation is not performed>
Next, referring to Figure 16, we will explain a specific example of the series of effects following the reach formation prompt when the reach symbol attention effect described in Figure 13 is not performed. Here, Figure 16 is a screen diagram showing a specific example of the matching number symbol attention effect that draws attention to the three effect symbols showing the matching number "222". Note that Figure 16 omits the illustration of the effects that occur during the SPSP reach, and these effects during the SPSP reach will be described in detail later based on other diagrams.

(Pre-announcement animation for when a winning combination is achieved)
Figure 16(A) illustrates the process of building anticipation for a winning combination, as shown in Figures 8(S) and 9(A). This process is carried out in the same way as the process described above based on Figure 13(C), so a detailed explanation is omitted here.

When the reach-establishment prompt shown in Figure 16(A) occurs, the next step is a slow-moving left and right symbol animation, in which the left symbol and the identical right symbol simultaneously descend slowly (see Figure 16(B)). Figure 16(B) illustrates how the two left and two right symbols descend slowly simultaneously during this slow-moving left and right symbol animation. The slow-moving left and right symbol animation shown in Figure 16(B) is performed similarly to the slow-moving left and right symbol animation described above, based on Figure 13(D), except that the descending left and right symbols are different.

As shown in Figure 16(B), when the left two symbols and the right two symbols descend to a predetermined height in the vertical direction of the display screen 70 due to the slow movement of the left and right symbols, a first-stage button operation prompting animation is performed to prompt the player to operate the first-stage button 35 (see Figure 16(C)). This first-stage button operation prompting animation, exemplified in Figure 16(C), is performed in the same manner as the first-stage button operation prompting animation described above, based on Figure 18(C).

(Even-numbered symbols trigger a winning combination)
Here, since the sub-CPU 91 has pre-set that a reach will be achieved with two symbols at the start of the pre-read target variation, a reach achievement animation (see Figure 9(B)) is performed to notify that a reach has been achieved with two symbols, either when the player operates the first performance button 35, or when the effective period for the first performance button operation promotion animation in Figure 16(C) ends without the player operating the first performance button 35 (see Figure 16(D)). Figure 16(D) shows an example of a reach achievement animation in which the left two symbols and the right two symbols are displayed as pseudo-stopped, reach lines extending left and right passing over these two symbols, the words "Reach!", a specific character, and a speech bubble representing the specific character's line "You did it!!", and along with these display animations, the same audio as the words "Reach!" is output from the speaker 38.

Figure 9 illustrates the sequence of events (the first event route described later) in which, after the even-numbered symbol reach formation animation (see Figure 9(B)) is performed to announce the formation of a reach with even-numbered symbols, the reach symbol shrinking and moving animation (see Figure 9(D)), the reach symbols being displayed in a reduced size in the upper left and right areas (see Figure 9(E)), the start of the SPSP reach (see Figure 9(F)), the matching number symbol attention animation (see Figure 9(R)), and the win announcement animation (see Figure 9(S)) are performed in order. In contrast, Figures 16(E) to (I) show specific examples of these animations illustrated in Figure 9.

(Reach symbol shrinking and moving animation)
Figure 16(E) shows a specific example of the reel symbol reduction and movement effect shown in Figure 9(D). Figure 16(E) illustrates an effect that suggests development into an SPSP reel, in which the two left symbols are reduced in size as they move to the upper left area of the display screen 70, rotating once clockwise with the scroll direction as the axis before moving to the upper left area, and simultaneously, the two right symbols are reduced in size as they move to the upper right area of the display screen 70, rotating once clockwise with the scroll direction as the axis before moving to the upper right area.

Figure 16(F) shows a specific example of the pseudo-stop display effect in which the reach symbols in Figure 9(E) are reduced to the upper left and right areas, and the start of the SPSP reach in Figure 9(F). Figure 16(F) illustrates how the two left symbols are pseudo-stopped in the upper left area, and the two right symbols are pseudo-stopped in the upper right area. Furthermore, although not shown in Figure 16, once the SPSP reach begins, images such as the battle animation images from the second half are displayed on the display screen 70 as SPSP reach animation images.

(Double-digit symbol display highlight)
Figures 16(G) and (H) show specific examples of the attention-grabbing effect of the matching number effect symbols in Figure 9(R), which is an effect that draws attention to effect symbols that suggest a jackpot game is about to be played. If the result of the first special symbol judgment performed by the main CPU 81 at the start of the pre-read target variation is "jackpot", the victory effect in Figure 9(Q) is performed as the result effect of the SPSP reach, and thereafter, three effect symbols showing matching numbers (in this case, "222") are displayed on the display screen 70. The attention-grabbing effect of the matching number effect symbols exemplified in Figures 16(G) and (H) is an effect that draws attention to the three effect images showing matching numbers that are displayed as the SPSP reach ends, and Figures 16(G) to (H) illustrate how the effect increases attention to these three effect symbols by gradually enlarging the three "222" effect symbols that are displayed as pseudo-stopped.

Although not shown in Figures 16(G) and (H), when the matching number symbol highlighting effect is active, the frame lamp 37 and the panel lamp 5 light up in a rainbow-colored pattern using a special lighting pattern for the matching number symbol highlighting effect.

In this way, after the "Double Number Symbol Focus" animation, which draws attention to the three symbols representing the repeating number "222," the three symbols representing "222" return to their normal size and are displayed as a pseudo-stop (see Figure 16(I)). Then, as the jackpot symbol is displayed as the first special symbol, these three symbols representing "222" come to a permanent stop.

Up to this point, while referring to Figure 16, we have explained a specific example of the series of animations, using the case where an even-numbered symbol reach formation animation (see Figure 9(B)) is performed followed by a reach symbol reduction and movement animation (see Figure 9(D)). However, as is clear from the notation in Figure 9, the same reach symbol reduction and movement animation (see Figure 9(D)) may occur not only when an even-numbered symbol reach formation animation (see Figure 9(B)) is performed, but also when an odd-numbered symbol reach formation animation is performed, followed by a reach symbol attention animation (see Figure 9(C)).

<About the characteristics of each symbol and the notable symbols used in the winning combination>
Up to this point, we have explained, with reference to each diagram, the case in which when a reach is achieved with an odd-numbered symbol (for example, the 7 symbol) (see Figure 13(F)), a reach symbol attention effect (for example, see Figures 13(G) to (I)) is executed to draw attention to that odd-numbered symbol, and when a reach is achieved with an even-numbered symbol (for example, the 2 symbol) (see Figure 16(D)), an SPSP reach is executed without executing the reach symbol attention effect exemplified in Figures 13(G) to (I). Here, however, we will first explain the characteristics of each effect symbol displayed on the display screen 70.

(Characteristics of symbols 3 and 7)
In the normal game state, if the result of the first special symbol judgment is "jackpot", three special symbols indicating repeating numbers are pseudo-stopped on the display screen 70 before the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol. As the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, the three special symbols indicating repeating numbers will then stop in their original position. In the game machine 1 of this embodiment, nine types of repeating numbers are available: "111", "222", "333", "444", "555", "666", "777", "888", and "999". Of these nine types of repeating numbers, for the two types "777" and "333", if the jackpot symbol X1 (see Figure 6(B)) that indicates a win in 3R probability variation A is displayed, the three performance symbols representing the repeating numbers "777" or "333" may stop in place. On the other hand, if the jackpot symbol X2 (see Figure 6(B)) that indicates a win in 3R normal is displayed, the three performance symbols representing the repeating numbers "777" or "333" will not stop in place. From this, it can be said that both the three performance symbols representing the repeating numbers "777" and the three performance symbols representing the repeating numbers "333" are performance symbols that definitively indicate a probability variation jackpot.

(Characteristics of symbols 2, 4, 6, and 8)
On the other hand, regarding the four types of matching numbers consisting of three identical even-numbered symbols, "222", "444", "666", and "888", when the jackpot symbol X2 (see Figure 6(B)) that indicates a 3R regular win is displayed, in most cases the three performance symbols representing one of the four types of matching numbers will stop. However, when the jackpot symbol X1 (see Figure 6(B)) that indicates a 3R probability variation A win is displayed, the probability of the three performance symbols representing one of the four types of matching numbers stopping is extremely low. From this, it can be said that the three performance symbols representing one of the four types of matching numbers consisting of three even-numbered symbols are basically performance symbols that cannot be expected to result in a probability variation jackpot.

(Characteristics of symbols 1, 5, and 9)
Furthermore, the following characteristics apply to the three types of matching numbers consisting of the same three odd numbers (excluding the 3 and 7 symbols): "111", "555", and "999". Specifically, whether the jackpot symbol X2 (see Figure 6(B)) indicating a 3R regular win is displayed or the jackpot symbol X1 (see Figure 6(B)) indicating a 3R probability variation A win is displayed, the three symbols representing one of the three types of matching numbers mentioned above will stop in both cases. However, the three symbols representing one of the matching numbers "111", "555", or "999" are more likely to stop in the latter case (3R probability variation A) than in the former case (3R regular). Therefore, the three symbols showing any of the repeating numbers "111,""555," or "999" are more likely to result in a jackpot than the three symbols showing any of the four repeating numbers composed of three even numbers mentioned above.

(Features of the "Reach" symbol highlighting effect)
By the way, as is clear from the above description of each performance symbol, the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment has the characteristic that, when three performance symbols showing one of the four types of matching numbers, "222", "444", "666", or "888", stop in a pseudo-stop before actually stopping, a probability variation jackpot cannot be expected (i.e., the possibility of a 3R normal jackpot is extremely high). For this reason, if a configuration such as the even-numbered symbol reach formation performance exemplified in Figure 16(D) is easily applied, the player will become aware of a 3R normal jackpot at the time the reach is formed, and instead of improving the excitement by performing the reach symbol attention performance, it may actually decrease the excitement.

Therefore, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, as described above, when a reach is achieved with odd-numbered symbols, as illustrated in Figure 13(F), a reach symbol attention-grabbing effect is performed to draw attention to the reach symbols (in this case, odd-numbered symbols). On the other hand, when a reach is achieved with even-numbered symbols, as illustrated in Figure 16(D), a reach symbol attention-grabbing effect is not performed to draw attention to the reach symbols (in this case, even-numbered symbols). By adopting this configuration, the above-mentioned problems are suppressed while performing a highly entertaining reach symbol attention-grabbing effect.

Although not shown in the diagram, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, for example, when the left 3rd and left 4th symbols constituting the left column of symbols are displayed as pseudo-stops, and the right 3rd and right 4th symbols constituting the right column of symbols are also displayed as pseudo-stops, there are times when a reach with 3rd symbols and a reach with 4th symbols are achieved simultaneously. In this way, when two reaches with different reach symbols are achieved simultaneously, a reach symbol focus effect is executed to draw attention to the 3rd symbol, while a reach symbol focus effect to draw attention to the 4th symbol is not executed.

(Other configurations related to the "reach" symbol highlighting effect)
Regarding the highlighting of the winning symbols, other embodiments may adopt the following configuration. In this embodiment, the highlighting of the winning symbols is executed when a winning combination of odd-numbered symbols is achieved, while the highlighting of the winning symbols is not executed when a winning combination of even-numbered symbols is achieved. In contrast, other embodiments may adopt a configuration in which, taking into account the above characteristics of each performance symbol, the highlighting of the winning symbols is executed when a winning combination of 7 or 3 is achieved (i.e., when it is confirmed that a jackpot game related to 3R probability variation A will be executed if the symbols line up as is), while the highlighting of the winning symbols is not executed when a winning combination of performance symbols other than 7 and 3 is achieved (i.e., when it is confirmed that a jackpot game related to 3R normal will be executed if the symbols line up as is).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, we will explain, as an example, a case in which a combination of the following is executed as a reach symbol attention effect: the enlargement and movement of the left and right symbols displayed as pseudo-stopped reach symbols (see Figure 13(G)), the rotation of these left and right symbols (see Figure 13(G)), and the merging effect of these left and right symbols (see Figure 13(I)). In contrast, in other embodiments, a configuration may be adopted in which a reach symbol attention effect is executed without moving or changing the size of the left and right symbols displayed as pseudo-stopped reach symbols. To adopt such a configuration, for example, decorative images that enhance the attention of the reach symbols (left and right symbols) may be displayed around the reach symbols, or decorative images that enhance the attention of the reach symbols (left and right symbols) may be displayed so as to overlap a part of the reach symbols.

Furthermore, in other embodiments, a combination of two or more elements may be used as a "reach symbol attention effect": a change in the display manner of the reach symbols (left and right symbols) (for example, at least one of their size, shape, or display color), a change in the display position of the reach symbols, and the display of the decorative image described above.

Furthermore, another possible winning symbol highlighting effect involves two characters appearing on the display screen 70, with one character pointing to the left winning symbol and the other pointing to the right winning symbol, accompanied by a voice prompt from speaker 38 saying "Pay attention!!"

Furthermore, in other embodiments, a special effect may be performed at a different timing than when a reach is achieved, drawing attention to the second symbol (an odd-numbered symbol in this embodiment). In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, as described above based on Figures 10(D) and (G), the 7 symbol pseudo-stops as the middle symbol that signals the execution of a pseudo-consecutive win effect. Therefore, a special effect may be performed at the moment this middle 7 symbol pseudo-stops, drawing attention to this middle 7 symbol.

[Regarding the SPSP Reach animation sequence]
In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, two performance routes, a first performance route and a second performance route, are provided as a series of performances that take place during an SPSP reach, as illustrated in Figure 9. Figure 9 illustrates a performance flow in which, after a reach establishment prompting performance (see Figure 9(A)), there is a performance branching, and the performance of either the first performance route or the second performance route proceeds. On the other hand, as described above based on Figure 8, the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment provides a development pattern in which a normal reach (see Figure 8(L)) progresses to an SP reach (see Figure 8(O)) and then to an SPSP reach (see Figure 8(P)), and a development pattern in which a normal reach progresses directly to an SPSP reach without going through an SP reach. In the case of development to an SPSP reach using either of these development patterns, the performance of either the first performance route or the second performance route illustrated in Figure 9 will proceed during the SPSP reach.

<The first production route of the SPSP Reach>
Here, we will first explain the sequence of effects in the first effect route and specific examples of these effects, referring to Figures 9 and 11. Figure 11 is a screen diagram showing a specific example of the effects in the first effect route of the SPSP reach, illustrating a specific example of the sequence of effects from a normal reach directly to an SPSP reach and then to the execution of the losing notification effect.

When the SPSP Reach animation proceeds along the first animation route shown in Figure 9, there are mainly three patterns. The first pattern is one in which the Reach Establishment animation (see Figure 9(B)) (announcing the establishment of a reach with odd-numbered symbols) is followed by the Reach Symbol Focus animation (see Figure 9(C)) (drawing attention to the odd-numbered symbols as the reach symbols), and then the Reach Symbol Shrinkage and Movement animation (see Figure 9(D)) takes place. The second pattern is one in which the Reach Establishment animation (see Figure 9(B)) (announcing the establishment of a reach with even-numbered symbols) takes place, and then the Reach Symbol Shrinkage and Movement animation (see Figure 9(D)) takes place without the Reach Symbol Focus animation (see Figure 9(C)). The third pattern is one in which the Reach Symbol Shrinkage and Movement animation (see Figure 9(D)) occurs when the SPSP Reach develops from a normal reach (or SP reach), as shown in Figure 8.

Here, a specific example of the sequence of events when the second pattern of events is performed and then the events proceed along the first production route is as described above, based on Figure 16. Here, we will explain the sequence of events and specific examples when the third pattern of events is performed and then the events proceed along the first production route.

Figure 11(A) illustrates the sequence of events following the reach formation animation shown in Figure 10(I), which notifies the player of a reach formed by four symbols, followed by a normal reach. In this normal reach, as illustrated in Figure 11(A), after the reach formation by the left four symbols and the right four symbols, the scrolling speed of the middle row of symbols gradually decreases, and the middle four symbols (in this case, the same as the reach symbols, the left four symbols and the right four symbols) descend towards the winning line determined by the reach symbols.

(Reach symbol shrinking and moving animation)
Here, if a variation pattern that directly develops from a normal reach to an SPSP reach without going through an SP reach is set by the sub-CPU 91 at the start of the variation, the reach symbol shrinking and moving effect (see Figure 9(D)) is performed following the normal reach (see Figure 11(B)). Specifically, when the middle row of symbols is scrolling during the normal reach, the same middle symbol as the reach symbol (in this case, the middle 4 symbol) passes the active line without stopping on the active line, and then the scrolling speed of the middle row of symbols increases, making it difficult to identify the middle symbol, until the middle symbol is hidden. Then, as illustrated in Figure 11(B), the left 4 symbols shrink as they move to the upper left area of the display screen 70, rotating once clockwise with the scroll direction as the axis before moving to the upper left area, and simultaneously, the right 4 symbols shrink as they move to the upper right area of the display screen 70, rotating once clockwise with the scroll direction as the axis before moving to the upper right area.

(The display of the animation symbols is shown in the first display mode.)
This shrinking and moving animation of the reach symbols causes the reach symbols to be displayed in a pseudo-stop state, shrunk to the upper left and right areas, until the end of the variation display of the first special symbol (see Figures 9(E) and 11(C)). Figure 11(C) shows an example where the four left symbols are displayed in a pseudo-stop state, shrunk to the upper left area, and the four right symbols are displayed in a pseudo-stop state, shrunk to the upper right area.

When the reach symbols are displayed in a pseudo-stop state, reduced to the upper left and right areas, the SPSP reach (first route animation) begins (see Figures 9(F) and 11(D)). Once this SPSP reach begins, although not shown in Figure 11(D), the animation images for the second half of the battle, etc., are displayed in the central area of the display screen 70 as SPSP reach animation images (see Figure 9(G)).

(First possibility suggestion)
Next, during the SPSP reach, while the reach symbols remain in a pseudo-stopped state, reduced to the upper left and right areas, a first possibility indication effect may be performed to suggest that a win notification effect (see Figure 9(S)) may be executed (see Figures 9(H) and 11(E)). In this embodiment, the first possibility indication effect is an effect in which possibility indication characters indicating the degree of probability that a win notification effect will be executed are displayed between the left and right reach symbols in the upper area of the display screen 70. Figure 11(E) shows an example where the characters "CHANCE" are displayed as possibility indication characters.

In this embodiment, two types of characters are provided to indicate a possibility: "CHANCE" and "VERY GOOD CHANCE." The first possibility indication, which displays "VERY GOOD CHANCE," has a higher probability of resulting in a jackpot than the first possibility indication, which displays "CHANCE."

Furthermore, this first possibility suggestion animation is an animation that can be executed when the SPSP Reach animation is progressing along the first animation route, and will not be executed when the SPSP Reach animation is progressing along the second animation route. Therefore, it can be said that it is an animation exclusive to the first animation route.

Although not shown in Figure 9, Figure 11(F) illustrates how, during the latter half of the SPSP reach, a first-performance button operation prompting animation is performed to encourage the player to operate the first-performance button 35. In this first-performance button operation prompting animation, an image of the first-performance button 35 and an effective period gauge indicating the remaining time during which the operation of the first-performance button 35 is valid are displayed on the display screen 70.

Here, if the player operates the first performance button 35 within the validity period related to the first performance button operation promotion performance in Figure 11(F), or if the validity period ends without the first performance button 35 being operated, a cut-in is performed, for example, by superimposing a predetermined cut-in image onto the performance image (other than the reach symbol) displayed on the display screen 70 (see Figure 11(G)). This cut-in is an effect that indicates the likelihood of a win notification performance being executed in the current symbol variation, and there are three types of cut-ins: weak cut-in, medium cut-in, and strong cut-in. The weak cut-in is an effect that is entirely represented in green and displays a cut-in image representing one character, the medium cut-in is an effect that is entirely represented in red and displays cut-in images representing two characters, and the strong cut-in is an effect that is entirely represented in gold and displays cut-in images representing three characters. Here, if we arrange the three types of cut-ins described above in order from lowest to highest probability of a jackpot (the likelihood of a jackpot notification occurring during this symbol change), we get the order: weak cut-in, medium cut-in, and strong cut-in. Figure 11(G) shows an example of a strong cut-in in action.

As shown above, when the cut-in occurs and the SPSP reach reaches its final stages, a second-stage button operation prompting animation is performed (see Figure 11(H)), although this is not shown in Figure 9. In this second-stage button operation prompting animation, as illustrated in Figure 11(H), an image of the second-stage button 36 is displayed, along with the text "Press!" indicating the operation of the second-stage button 36, and an effective period gauge showing the remaining time during which the operation of the second-stage button 36 is valid.

Here, if the result of the first special symbol judgment performed by the main CPU 81 at the start of the symbol change is "miss," then, depending on whether the second performance button 36 was operated during the valid period of the second performance button operation promotion effect, or whether the valid period of the second performance button operation promotion effect ended without the second performance button 36 being operated, a defeat animation (see Figures 9(I) and 11(I)) depicting the protagonist character being defeated by the enemy character is performed as an operation-response animation. Figure 11(I) illustrates the above defeat animation depicting the enemy character leaving after defeating the protagonist character.

Thus, if a defeat animation occurs as the result of the battle animation (second half battle) during the SPSP Reach, although not shown in Figure 11, three animation symbols indicating a failed reach (for example, the three animation symbols "434" in this case) are displayed as pseudo-stops just before the end of the current symbol change. As the losing symbol is displayed as the first special symbol, a loss notification animation (see Figure 9(J)) is performed, in which the three animation symbols indicating the failed reach are actually stopped. In this way, when a loss notification animation is performed, the matching number animation is not performed.

(Double-digit symbol display highlight)
On the other hand, in the example shown in Figure 11, if the result of the first special symbol judgment performed at the start of the symbol change is "jackpot", then, depending on whether the second performance button 36 was operated during the effective period related to the second performance button operation promotion effect, or whether the effective period related to the second performance button operation promotion effect ended without the second performance button 36 being operated, the following operation-corresponding effects will be performed: a victory effect (see Figure 9(Q)) showing the main character defeating the enemy character, and a matching number performance symbol attention effect (see Figure 9(R)) that draws attention to the performance symbols that suggest a jackpot game will be performed. In the example shown in Figure 11, since a reach has been achieved with 4 symbols, the matching number performance symbol attention effect will draw attention to the three performance symbols that show the matching numbers "444". Thus, when a victory animation or a matching number animation is performed, the three animation symbols representing the matching number "444" are displayed as a pseudo-stop in their normal size, and as the jackpot symbol is displayed as the first special symbol, these three animation symbols representing the matching number "444" will then stop in their actual position.

Up to this point, referring to Figure 11 (and Figure 9), we have explained the effects performed during an SPSP reach, using the example of a direct progression from a normal reach to an SPSP reach, where the effects of the first effect route proceed. However, the effects of the first effect route are performed similarly when the effects proceed directly from the reach formation effect in Figure 9(B) (here, the even-numbered symbol reach formation effect) to the reach symbol reduction and movement effect in Figure 9(D), or when the effects proceed from the reach formation effect in Figure 9(B) (here, the odd-numbered symbol reach formation effect) via the reach symbol attention effect in Figure 9(C) to the reach symbol reduction and movement effect in Figure 9(D).

<Reach symbol highlighting effect → First effect route effect>
Figure 17 is a screen diagram showing a specific example of a series of animations from the moment the reach symbol attention animation (see Figure 9(C)) is performed, through the reach symbol shrinking and moving animation (see Figure 9(D)), until just before the animation of the first animation route begins as part of the SPSP reach animation.

Figure 17(A) illustrates the process of triggering a reach (see Figure 9(A)), similar to that shown in Figure 16(A) above. Here, if the sub-CPU 91 has set the game to trigger a reach using the number 7 symbol at the start of the symbol change, the following animation will occur.

In other words, once the reach-establishment prompting animation shown in Figure 17(A) occurs, the next step is a slow-movement animation of the left and right 7 symbols, where they are simultaneously and slowly lowered (see Figure 17(B)). This slow-movement animation of the left and right symbols, exemplified in Figure 17(B), is performed in the same manner as the slow-movement animation of the left and right symbols described above, based on Figure 13(D).

As shown in Figure 17(B), when the left and right 7 symbols descend to a predetermined height in the vertical direction of the display screen 70 due to the slow movement of the left and right symbols, a first-effect button operation prompting animation is performed to prompt the player to operate the first-effect button 35 (see Figure 16(C)). Similar to the above based on Figure 13(E), a first-effect button operation prompting animation is performed to prompt the player to operate the first-effect button 35.

(A winning combination is achieved with odd-numbered symbols)
Here, since the setting for achieving a reach with the number 7 is established at the start of this symbol change, a reach establishment animation (see Figure 9(B)) is performed to notify that a reach with the number 7 has been established, either when the player operates the first performance button 35, or when the effective period for the first performance button operation promotion animation in Figure 17(C) ends without the player operating the first performance button 35 (see Figure 17(D)). This reach establishment animation in Figure 17(D) is performed in the same way as the reach establishment animation described above, based on Figure 13(F).

(Attention-grabbing effect for the winning combination)
Thus, when a reach is established using the number 7 symbol (odd-number symbol reach establishment animation: see Figure 9(B)), a reach symbol attention animation (see Figure 9(C)) is performed following this reach establishment animation (see Figures 17(E) to (G)). Note that the reach symbol attention animation here is performed in the same way as the reach symbol attention animation described above, based on Figures 13(G) to (I), so a detailed explanation is omitted here.

Next, when the animation progresses from the Reach Symbol Attention Animation (see Figures 9(C), 17(E)-(G)) to the animation of the first animation route of the SPSP Reach (see Figure 9), the following animation takes place. Specifically, the single giant 7 symbol displayed by the merging animation in Figure 17(G) separates into a left 7 symbol and a right 7 symbol, and a Reach Symbol Separation and Shrinking Animation is performed, showing these 7 symbols shrinking and moving away from each other (see Figure 17(H)). Figure 17(H) shows the left 7 symbol moving to the left while the right 7 symbol moves to the right. Thus, as shown in Figure 17(H), when the single large 7 symbol is separated into two 7 symbols (the left 7 and the right 7), although not shown in the figure, the left and right 7 symbols return to the positions they were displayed in during the reach formation animation (see Figure 17(D)), and are temporarily displayed in a pseudo-stopped state at those positions.

Thus, after the "Reach Symbol Focus" animation (see Figures 9(C) and 17(E)-(G)) is performed to draw attention to the 7 symbol as the reach symbol, the "Reach Symbol Separation and Reduction" animation (see Figure 17(H)) is performed. Next, the "Reach Symbol Reduction and Movement" animation is performed (see Figures 9(D) and 17(I)). The "Reach Symbol Reduction and Movement" animation exemplified in Figure 17(I) is performed in the same way as the "Reach Symbol Reduction and Movement" animation described above, based on Figure 11(B), except that the animation symbols being reduced and moved are different. As is clear from the notation in Figures 11(B)-(I), once the "Reach Symbol Reduction and Movement" animation in Figure 17(I) is performed, the animation progresses to the first animation route of the SPSP reach.

Here, we have explained using an example where, after a "reach symbol focus" animation (see Figures 17(E) to (G)) that draws attention to the 7 symbol as a winning symbol, a "reach symbol separation and reduction" animation (see Figure 17(H)) and a "reach symbol reduction and movement" animation (see Figure 17(I)) are performed, separating one large 7 symbol into two 7 symbols (left 7 and right 7). However, if a "reach symbol focus" animation is performed to draw attention to an odd-numbered symbol other than the 7 symbol (for example, the 3 symbol), and then the animation of the first animation route is performed, the animation will proceed in the same order as in Figures 17(E) to (I), except that the winning symbol is different.

Furthermore, the reach symbol separation and reduction effect (see Figure 17(H)) and the reach symbol reduction and movement effect (see Figure 17(I)) are performed when the animation progresses from the reach symbol focus effect to the first animation route of the SPSP reach. If the animation progresses from the reach symbol focus effect to the second animation route of the SPSP reach (see Figure 9), these reach symbol separation and reduction effects and the reach symbol reduction and movement effect will not be performed, and other animations will be performed instead.

<The second production route of the SPSP Reach>
Next, with reference to Figures 9, 14, and 15, the flow and specific examples of the second performance route shown in Figure 9 will be explained. Here, Figures 14 and 15 are screen diagrams showing specific examples of the performance of the second performance route in SPSP reach. Figures 14 and 15 show specific examples of the performance of the second performance route shown in Figure 9 (performance from Figure 9(K) onwards) when the reach establishment performance (see Figure 9(B) and Figure 13(F)) and the reach symbol attention performance (see Figure 9(C) and Figures 13(G) to (I)) have been performed.

If the second animation route proceeds after the "Reach Symbol Highlight" animation (see Figures 9(C) and 13(G)-(I)), the "Reach Symbol Split" animation (see Figures 9(K) and 14(A)-(B)) will follow the "Reach Symbol Highlight" animation. This "Reach Symbol Split" animation splits a single large reach symbol (a single large 7 symbol in the example shown in Figure 13(I)) into numerous tiny reach symbols (in this case, tiny 7 symbols). Figures 14(A)-(B) illustrate this by showing a series of explosions occurring around a single large 7 symbol, causing numerous tiny 7 symbols to scatter from it, and consequently, the large 7 symbol gradually shrinking.

Furthermore, the reach symbol separation and reduction effect described above, based on Figure 17(H), involves separating one large 7 symbol into two normal-sized 7 symbols in order to advance the effect to the first effect route of the SPSP reach. However, the reach symbol splitting effect (see Figures 14(A) to (B)) differs from the reach symbol separation and reduction effect in that the resulting miniature 7 symbols are considerably smaller than the two normal-sized 7 symbols, and the number of these miniature 7 symbols is significantly larger (compared to the two normal-sized 7 symbols).

The reach symbol splitting effect (see Figure 9(K), Figures 14(A)-(B)) is an effect that splits a single large reach symbol (for example, a 7 symbol) displayed by the reach symbol attention effect (see Figure 9(C)), which draws attention to the reach symbol (in this case, an odd-numbered symbol), into numerous tiny reach symbols (for example, tiny 7 symbols). Therefore, while the reach symbol splitting effect (see Figure 9(K)) may be performed after the reach symbol attention effect, it will not occur if the reach symbol attention effect is not performed, i.e., if the reach establishment effect (see Figure 9(B)) which notifies of a reach established by an even-numbered symbol is performed.

(The display of the animation symbols is shown in the second display mode.)
Next, when the reach symbol splitting animation (see Figure 9(K), Figures 14(A)-(B)) is performed, a background image representing the tiny reach symbol is displayed (see Figure 9(L), Figure 14(C)). Specifically, the sub-CPU 91 changes the background image from the normal background image state (not shown) to a background image with a pattern of tiny odd-numbered symbols (in this case, a background of tiny 7 symbols with a pattern of tiny 7 symbols). This makes it possible for the player to identify the reach symbol based on the background image displayed during the animation of the second animation route in SPSP reach. Furthermore, since the 7 symbol in this embodiment is an animation symbol that guarantees a win of 3R probability variation A (see Figure 6(B)) if the symbols line up, continuously displaying the tiny 7 symbol background during the animation of the second animation route makes it possible to effectively increase the player's expectation of a probability variation jackpot.

Furthermore, since the miniature 7-symbol background is displayed during the fluctuation display of the first special symbol in normal gameplay, for example, the miniature 7-symbol background is displayed in full screen on the display screen 70 so that each miniature 7-symbol represented by the background appears to be fluctuating. Therefore, the player can recognize that the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is in progress by observing the fluctuation of each miniature 7-symbol.

Here, we compare the display patterns of the reach symbols when the SPSP reach progresses via the first presentation route and when it progresses via the second presentation route.

When the SPSP Reach proceeds along the first performance route, as described above, for example based on Figures 11(C) to (I), the left symbol, as the reach symbol, is displayed in a reduced state as a pseudo-stop in the upper left area, and the right symbol, also as the reach symbol, is displayed in a reduced state as a pseudo-stop in the upper right area. Note that these left and right symbols, displayed when the performance is progressing along the first performance route, are superimposed on the background image, although they are not shown in the figures.

On the other hand, when the SPSP reach proceeds via the second presentation route, there is no concept of left or right symbols. Instead, as illustrated in Figures 14(C) to (I) and Figure 15(A), the reach symbols are represented by odd-numbered symbol backgrounds, such as the extremely small 7 symbol background mentioned above.

Thus, because the display patterns of the winning symbols differ between the first and second performance routes, players can easily determine whether the performance is progressing via the first or second performance route based on the display patterns of the winning symbols during the SPSP reach.

Figures 14(C) to 14(I) and 15(A) illustrate the display of a miniature 7-symbol background because a winning combination of 7 symbols has been achieved. However, for example, if a winning combination of 3 symbols is achieved, a miniature 3-symbol background with a miniature 3-symbol pattern will be displayed. Similarly, if a winning combination of 5 symbols is achieved, a miniature 5-symbol background with a miniature 5-symbol pattern will be displayed.

However, this extremely small odd-numbered symbol background is only displayed when an odd-numbered symbol combination is achieved and a special effect (see Figure 9(C)) is performed to draw attention to the odd-numbered symbol as the winning combination. Therefore, the extremely small even-numbered symbol background with an even-numbered symbol pattern will never be displayed.

As described above, when the display of the extremely small odd-numbered symbol background (in this case, the extremely small 7 symbol background) begins, the intermittent illumination of the extremely small reach symbols (in this case, the extremely small 7 symbols) represented by the extremely small odd-numbered symbol background begins (see Figure 9(M)). This intermittent illumination of the extremely small reach symbols in the background is an effect in which each extremely small odd-numbered symbol (in the example shown in Figure 14, the extremely small 7 symbols) represented by the extremely small odd-numbered symbol background is illuminated intermittently. Figures 14(D), (F), and (H) illustrate the state in which each extremely small 7 symbol is illuminated, while Figures 14(E), (G), and (I) illustrate the state in which each extremely small 7 symbol is not illuminated.

In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, when a reach is achieved with odd-numbered symbols, a reach symbol attention effect is performed to draw attention to those odd-numbered symbols. However, when the SPSP reach effect is progressing through the second effect route, the intermittent flashing effect of tiny reach symbols in the background is performed intermittently, as described above. Therefore, it is possible to draw attention to the reach symbols (odd-numbered symbols) not only when a reach is achieved with odd-numbered symbols, but also during the second effect route of the SPSP reach.

Next, the SPSP Reach begins (see Figures 9(N) and 14(E)). The SPSP Reach's presentation is basically the same as when the first presentation route progresses. Once the SPSP Reach begins, although not shown in Figure 14(E), the SPSP Reach presentation images displayed during the SPSP Reach include images from the second half of the battle, etc., which are displayed across the entire screen area of display screen 70 (see Figure 9(O)).

When the first performance route is in progress, the left symbol is displayed in a reduced size in the upper left area, and the right symbol is displayed in a reduced size in the upper right area. Therefore, as described above based on Figure 9(G), the second half of the battle is performed using the central area of the display screen 70. In contrast, when the second performance route is in progress, the reach symbols are represented by a background of extremely small odd-numbered symbols, making it possible to perform the second half of the battle in a wider display area compared to when the first performance route is in progress.

(Suggestion of a second possibility)
Next, during the process of the SPSP Reach's second performance route, a second possibility indication performance may be performed that suggests there is a possibility of a winning notification performance (see Figure 9(S)) being executed (see Figures 9(P) and 14(G)). In this embodiment, the second possibility indication performance is a performance in which a vertically elongated band-shaped image representing text indicating the likelihood of a winning notification performance being executed is displayed on both the left and right sides of the display screen 70. Figure 14(G) illustrates a second possibility indication performance in which a band-shaped image representing the word "SUPER" is displayed on the left side of the display screen 70, and a band-shaped image representing the word "CHANCE!" is displayed on the right side of the display screen 70.

In this embodiment, there is only one type of presentation pattern for the second possibility indication presentation, as illustrated in Figure 14(G). During the progression of the second presentation route, there are cases where the second possibility indication presentation is executed and cases where it is not. The former case has a higher probability of a jackpot than the latter (i.e., the jackpot notification presentation in Figure 9(S) is more likely to be executed during this symbol variation).

Therefore, players can enjoy the game while anticipating the occurrence of a second possibility indication when the second production route of the SPSP reach is progressing.

Furthermore, this second possibility suggestion animation is only possible when the SPSP Reach animation is progressing via the second animation route. It will not be executed when the SPSP Reach animation is progressing via the first animation route; therefore, it can be said to be an animation exclusive to the second animation route.

Although not shown in Figure 9, Figure 14(H) illustrates how, during the latter half of the SPSP reach, a first-performance button operation prompting the player to operate the first performance button 35 is performed. However, since this first-performance button operation prompting is performed in the same manner as during the first performance route described above based on Figure 11(F), a detailed explanation is omitted here.

Figure 14(I) illustrates how a cut-in occurs in response to the operation of the first performance button 35 during the validity period related to the first performance button operation promotion performance in Figure 14(H), or in response to the validity period ending without the first performance button 35 being operated. The cut-ins here include weak cut-ins, medium cut-ins, and strong cut-ins, similar to the cut-ins that occur during the performance of the first performance route. Figure 14(H) illustrates how a medium cut-in occurs.

As described above, when the cut-in occurs and the SPSP reach nears its end, a second-stage button prompting animation is performed (see Figure 11(H)), prompting the player to operate the second-stage button 36, although this animation is not shown in Figure 9. This second-stage button prompting animation is performed in the same way as the second-stage button prompting animation shown in Figure 11(H) during the first-stage sequence, except that it is performed while a very small 7 symbol background is displayed.

Here, if the result of the first special symbol judgment performed by the main CPU 81 at the start of this symbol variation is "miss," then, depending on whether the second performance button 36 was operated during the valid period of the second performance button operation promotion effect, or whether the valid period of the second performance button operation promotion effect ended without the second performance button 36 being operated, a defeat animation similar to the one described above (see Figure 9(T)) is performed based on Figure 11(I), and as a loss indication animation, a background destruction animation is performed showing the panel of the tiny 7 symbol background being destroyed (see Figure 15(G)). The display of the tiny 7 symbol background ends and the background returns to the normal background.

Subsequently, as part of the losing notification animation shown in Figure 9(U), just before the display of the first special symbol ends, three animation symbols indicating a "767" losing combination are displayed as pseudo-stops (see Figure 15(H)). Then, as the losing symbol is displayed as the first special symbol, the three animation symbols indicating the "767" losing combination actually stop (see Figure 15(I)).

(Double-digit symbol display highlight)
On the other hand, if the result of the first special symbol judgment performed by the main CPU 81 at the start of the symbol change is "jackpot", then, depending on whether the second performance button 36 was operated during the valid period related to the second performance button operation promotion effect, or whether the valid period related to the second performance button operation promotion effect ended without the second performance button 36 being operated, a victory effect (see Figure 9(Q)) showing the main character defeating the enemy character, and a matching number performance symbol attention effect (see Figure 9(R)) that draws attention to the performance symbols that suggest a jackpot game will be played, will be performed as operation-response effects. Note that the victory effect is not shown in Figure 15, and specific examples of the matching number performance symbol attention effect are shown in Figures 15(B) to (E).

Here, if the performance proceeds via the first performance route, regardless of whether the three symbols indicating the matching numbers are odd or even, a matching number symbol highlighting effect similar to the one described above will be performed based on Figures 16(G) to (H). This is because, when the performance proceeds via the first performance route, the extremely small odd number symbol background (see Figures 14(C) to (I)) is not displayed. In contrast, as illustrated in Figures 14 and 15, if the performance proceeds via the second performance route with the extremely small odd number symbol background (in this case, the extremely small 7 symbol background) displayed, and then the matching number symbol highlighting effect is performed, the effect will be slightly different from when the performance proceeds via the first performance route. Specifically, it is as follows:

In other words, in response to the operation of the second performance button 36 in response to the second performance button operation prompting performance in Figure 15(A), although not shown in Figure 15, a victory performance is first performed that shows the main character defeating the enemy character. Then, as part of the matching number performance symbol attention performance that follows this victory performance, each of the tiny odd number symbols represented by the tiny odd number symbol background is gathered (moved) into the respective display areas: the left symbol display area where the left symbol is pseudo-stopped, the middle symbol display area where the middle symbol is pseudo-stopped, and the right symbol display area where the right symbol is pseudo-stopped. The tiny odd number symbols gathered in each display area are then combined to generate a performance symbol, and by repeating this series of performances, a gathering, combining, and expanding performance is performed in which the same performance symbol that appears in each display area is gradually enlarged (see Figures 15(B) to (C)). Figures 15(B) to (C) illustrate how the seven tiny symbols displayed in various locations on the display screen 70 converge and combine in one of the three display areas, causing the seven symbols generated in each display area to gradually enlarge.

As a result of the collective combination and expansion effect, when the normal-sized 7 symbols are pseudo-stopped in the right symbol display area, the middle symbol display area, and the right symbol display area, the same repeating number symbol attention effect described above is executed consecutively based on Figures 16(G) to (H) (see Figures 15(D) to (E)). Figures 15(D) to (E) illustrate how the attention given to the three symbols representing the repeating number "777," which were pseudo-stopped by the collective combination and expansion effect in Figures 15(B) to (C), gradually increases as they are enlarged.

Thus, when a victory animation (see Figure 9(Q)) and a double-digit symbol highlight animation (see Figure 9(R), Figures 15(B) to (E)) are performed in response to the operation of the second animation button 36, the three animation symbols representing the double "777" are displayed in a pseudo-stopped state in their normal size (see Figure 15(F)). Then, as the jackpot symbol (here, the jackpot symbol X1 that announces the win of 3R probability variation A: see Figure 6(B)) is displayed as the first special symbol, a win notification animation (see Figure 9(S)) is performed, in which these three animation symbols representing the double "777" are brought to a permanent stop.

(Other configurations related to the double-digit number display and symbol highlighting effects)
Regarding the double-digit symbol attention effect, the following configuration may be adopted. That is, in this embodiment, when the first SPSP reach effect is performed before the win notification effect, the double-digit symbol attention effect illustrated in Figures 16(G) to (H) is executed, and when the second SPSP reach effect is performed before the win notification effect, the double-digit symbol attention effect illustrated in Figures 16(G) to (H), which is slightly different from the double-digit symbol attention effect illustrated in Figures 16(G) to (H), is executed. This will be explained as an example. In contrast, in other embodiments, for example, when the effect of the second effect route is progressing, a configuration may be adopted in which the double-digit symbol attention effect illustrated in Figures 15(D) to (E) is performed without performing the set combination expansion effect of Figures 15(B) to (C), thereby performing the double-digit symbol attention effect when the effect is progressing in the second effect route, the same double-digit symbol attention effect as when the effect is progressing in the first effect route is performed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the example described is the case where the effect of simultaneously enlarging three symbols representing matching numbers is performed as the "matching number symbol attention effect." However, other effects different from the one exemplified in this embodiment may be performed as the "matching number symbol attention effect," as long as they can draw the player's attention to the three symbols representing matching numbers. Examples of other effects include, for instance, an effect in which decorative images of a predetermined color are added to the three symbols representing matching numbers while they are displayed in a pseudo-stopped state. It is also conceivable to employ methods that enhance the attention given to these three symbols by combining their movement or rotation with such other effects.

[Characteristics of each notable effect and related effects performed in normal performance mode]
Up to this point, we have mainly referred to Figures 8 to 18 to explain the flow and specific examples of each notable effect that occurs when the effects are controlled in normal performance mode, as well as the effects related to these notable effects. Below, we will explain the characteristics of each notable effect and its related effects that are executed in normal performance mode, referring to Figure 19. Here, Figure 19 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the characteristics of each notable effect and its related effects that are executed in normal performance mode.

In Figure 19, the animation type "Pre-Target Animation" is a pre-announcement animation performed during a symbol animation prior to the pre-announcement target animation, based on the pre-determination result related to the pre-announcement target animation. Furthermore, the animation type "Pre-announcement Target Animation" (the animation in question) is an animation performed during the pre-announcement target animation, based on the determination result of the first special symbol determination performed at the start of the pre-announcement target animation.

(Attention-grabbing effect for matching numbers)
The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is configured to execute a "different attention-grabbing performance" that is different from any of the following: a reach symbol attention performance that draws attention to a second performance symbol (an odd-numbered symbol displayed as a reach symbol), a first performance symbol attention performance that draws attention to a first performance symbol (for example, an even-numbered symbol), and a second performance symbol attention performance that draws attention to a second performance symbol (for example, an odd-numbered symbol displayed when no reach performance is taking place). Specifically, the gaming machine 1 is configured to execute a repeating number performance symbol attention performance that draws attention to a performance symbol (in this embodiment, three performance symbols showing repeating numbers) that suggests that a jackpot game will be played, after executing a post-reach performance (an example of an "expectation performance") from Figure 9(C) onwards that makes the player expect that the win notification performance will be executed, prior to the win notification performance exemplified in Figure 9(S).

As described above based on Figures 8(Q), 9(R), 15(B)-(E), and 16(G)-(H), the "Double Number Symbol Attention" feature can be executed when the result of the first special symbol judgment performed by the main CPU 81 at the start of the first special symbol's variation in normal gameplay is "Big Win," but it is not executed when the result of this first special symbol judgment is "Loss." Therefore, the "Double Number Symbol Attention" feature is a feature that strongly suggests a big win at the time it occurs (i.e., a feature with 100% jackpot reliability), and can be said to be a definitive indication feature that definitively suggests the execution of a win notification feature.

In this embodiment of the gaming machine 1, the following configuration is adopted: In the first case, where a win notification is performed during an SPSP reach, the matching number symbol highlighting effect is performed prior to the win notification. In the second case, where a win notification is performed during a normal reach, and in the third case, where a win notification is performed during an SP reach, the matching number symbol highlighting effect is not performed. In contrast, in other embodiments, the matching number symbol highlighting effect may be performed prior to the win notification in the second and third cases as well, similar to the first case.

(First stage design highlight)
The first symbol attention effect (see Figure 8(D)) is an effect that draws attention to the first symbol (in this embodiment, an even-numbered symbol) displayed by the weak chance symbol effect (see Figure 8(C)) when the pre-spin of the target where the no-reach effect and the miss notification effect are performed has ended (see Figures 12(C) to (D)). In this embodiment, the probability of a jackpot in the first symbol attention effect is set to approximately 15% (see Figure 19).

In this embodiment, as described above, the probability of a jackpot in the first symbol attention effect is set to a relatively high value of approximately 15%. In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, if the first symbol attention effect is executed in the pre-target spin (in conjunction with the weak chance eye effect), some kind of reach effect will always be executed in the subsequent pre-read target spin. This is because the sub-CPU 91 executes the first symbol attention effect only when it obtains prior determination information indicating that a spin pattern of the first special symbol that will result in the execution of one of the reach effects in the pre-read target spin is selected at the start of the pre-read target spin. Furthermore, if the weak chance eye effect and the first symbol attention effect are combined in the pre-target spin, the matching number symbol attention effect (and the win notification effect) is more likely to be executed in the pre-read target spin than if the weak chance eye effect is executed alone in the pre-target spin. Therefore, by executing a first symbol-focused animation in the pre-target spin before a reach is achieved and the reach animation is performed in the pre-target spin, the player's attention can be directed to the animation symbol. As a result, it is possible to effectively suggest that a special animation, such as a matching-number symbol-focused animation, may be performed in the pre-target spin.

(Second stage design highlight)
The second symbol attention effect (see Figure 8(F)) is an effect that draws attention to the second symbol (in this embodiment, an odd-numbered symbol) displayed by the strong chance symbol effect (see Figure 8(E)) when the pre-spin sequence in which the no-reach effect and the miss notification effect are performed has ended, as described above based on Figures 8 and 12 (see Figures 12(G) to (H)). In this embodiment, the probability of a jackpot during the second symbol attention effect is set to approximately 31% (see Figure 19).

In this embodiment, as described above, the probability of a jackpot being triggered by the second symbol highlighting effect is set to approximately 31%, which is higher than the probability of a jackpot being triggered by the first symbol highlighting effect (approximately 15% in this embodiment). In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, if the second symbol highlighting effect is executed in the pre-target spin (in conjunction with the strong chance symbol effect), then a reach effect of SP Reach or higher (at least one of SP Reach or SPSP Reach) will always be executed in the subsequent pre-read target spin. This is because the sub-CPU 91 executes the second symbol highlighting effect only when it obtains prior determination information indicating that a spin pattern of the first special symbol that will result in the execution of at least one of SP Reach or SPSP Reach in the pre-read target spin is selected at the start of the pre-read target spin. Furthermore, the second symbol-focused演出 (special effect) has the characteristic that when the strong chance symbol effect and the second symbol-focused演出 are combined in the preceding spin, the matching number symbol-focused演出 (and win notification effect) is more likely to be executed in the pre-read target spin than when the strong chance symbol effect is executed alone in the preceding spin. Therefore, by executing the second symbol-focused演出 in the preceding spin before a reach is established and a reach effect of SP reach or higher is performed, it is possible to direct the player's attention to the special effect symbols more than when the first symbol-focused演出 is executed. As a result, it is possible to effectively suggest that there is a possibility of special effects such as the matching number symbol-focused演出 being executed in the pre-read target spin.

(Attention-grabbing effect for the winning combination)
The "Reach Symbol Attention Performance" (see Figures 8(V) and 9(C)) is an attention performance that draws attention to the second performance symbol (an odd-numbered symbol in this embodiment) when a reach is achieved using the performance symbols. This attention performance that draws attention to the first performance symbol (an even-numbered symbol in this embodiment) is not performed when a reach is achieved using the performance symbols.

Furthermore, as is clear from the notation in Figure 8, the "Reach Symbol Attention" effect (see Figure 8(V)) is an effect that is executed before the start of an SPSP Reach (see Figure 8(P)), following the Reach Establishment Prompt effect (see Figure 8(S)) and the Reach Establishment effect (see Figure 8(U)). In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the Reach Symbol Attention effect is not executed after the Reach Establishment effect shown in Figure 8(K). The reason why the Reach Symbol Attention effect is not executed when the Reach Establishment effect shown in Figure 8(K) is executed is that after the Reach Establishment effect shown in Figure 8(K), a normal Reach (see Figure 8(L)) is often followed by a Loss Notification effect (see Figure 8(N)). Performing the Reach Symbol Attention effect before the start of such a normal Reach would cause discomfort to the player, and instead of improving the enjoyment, it would likely decrease it.

Thus, in this embodiment, the reach-establishment animation (see Figure 8(U)) that follows the reach-establishment animation (see Figure 8(S)) and the subsequent reach-symbol attention animation (see Figure 8(V)) has a jackpot reliability of approximately 39%. In this way, the reach-establishment animation, which has a relatively high jackpot reliability, is performed in this embodiment when an odd-numbered symbol reach is established, but not when an even-numbered symbol reach is established. Therefore, players can enjoy the game while expecting the reach-establishment animation (see Figure 8(U)) that announces an odd-numbered symbol reach to be performed, rather than the reach-establishment animation (see Figure 8(U)) that announces an even-numbered symbol reach.

(An effect that displays the winning symbols in a reduced size in the upper left and right areas.)
As described above based on Figures 9(D) to (F) and Figures 16(D) to (F), in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, when the first performance route is performed as an SPSP reach performance, the performance is to display the performance symbols in the first display mode, in which the left symbol as the reach symbol is pseudo-stopped in a reduced state in the upper left area of the display screen 70, and the right symbol as the reach symbol is pseudo-stopped in a reduced state in the upper right area of the display screen 70.

As is clear from the notation in Figure 9, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, in some cases when the matching number symbol attention effect (see Figure 9(R)) and the win notification effect (see Figure 9(S)) are performed, an effect is performed in which the reach symbols are displayed in a reduced size in the upper left and right areas (see Figure 9(E)). In the matching number symbol attention effect, as described above based on Figures 16(G) to (H), an effect is performed to draw attention to the three effect symbols that indicate matching numbers, whereas in the effect of displaying the reach symbols in a reduced size in the upper left and right areas, as is clear from comparing the notation in Figure 16(F) with the notation in Figures 16(G) to (H), an effect is performed to draw attention to the left and right symbols of the three effect symbols in a more subdued manner. Therefore, the animation of displaying the winning symbols in a reduced size in the upper left and right areas suggests that the "double-digit symbol highlighting" animation, as shown in Figure 19, is an animation that indicates the possibility of the "double-digit symbol highlighting" animation being performed, and the probability of a jackpot is set to approximately 27% in this embodiment.

(First possibility suggestion)
The first probability indication effect (see Figures 9(H) and 11(E)) is, as described above, an effect in which probability indication characters indicating the likelihood of a winning notification effect being performed are displayed between the left and right reach symbols in the upper area of the display screen 70. As described above, in this embodiment, two types of probability indication characters are provided: "CHANCE" and "VERY GOOD CHANCE". The probability of a big win in the first probability indication effect displaying the character "CHANCE" is set to approximately 18%, and the probability of a big win in the first probability indication effect displaying the character "VERY GOOD CHANCE" is set to approximately 40%. Figure 11(E) shows an example of the first probability indication effect displaying the character "CHANCE".

Furthermore, as is clear from the notation in Figure 9, this first possibility suggestion animation (see Figure 9(H)) is an animation that can be executed in part when the animation that displays the reach symbols in a reduced size in the upper left and right areas (see Figure 9(E)) is being performed, that is, when the animation of the first animation route is progressing as an SPSP reach animation. It has the characteristic that it is not executed when the animation of the second animation route is progressing as an SPSP reach animation (i.e., when the animation that displays the background image representing the extremely small reach symbols is being executed) (see Figure 19).

Furthermore, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, based on the result of the pre-determination processing (pre-determination information) related to the right to determine the first special symbol corresponding to the pre-read target variation (see Figure 8), it is possible to execute an icon change effect targeting a reserved icon that suggests the pre-read target variation is being held. The first possibility suggestion effect has the characteristic that when the icon change effect is executed, it becomes more likely to be executed compared to when the icon change effect is not executed. Therefore, by executing an icon change effect targeting a reserved icon that suggests the pre-read target variation is being held prior to the start of the pre-read target variation, it is possible to make the player expect that the first effect route will proceed as an SPSP reach effect during the pre-read target variation, and that the first possibility suggestion effect will be executed in that process.

In this embodiment, to achieve the above-mentioned characteristic where the first possibility indication effect is more likely to be executed when the icon change effect is performed compared to when the icon change effect is not performed, the sub-CPU 91 performs the following processing. Specifically, if pre-determination information is obtained regarding the right to determine the first special symbol corresponding to the pre-read target change, indicating that the variation pattern of the first special symbol in which an SPSP reach is executed is selected at the start of the pre-read target change, then the icon change effect targeting the pending icon, which suggests that the pre-read target change is pending, is executed with a higher probability compared to when pre-determination information is obtained indicating that the variation pattern of the first special symbol in which an SPSP reach is not executed is selected at the start of the pre-read target change.

(An effect that displays a background image representing a very small winning combination)
As described above based on Figures 9(K) to (N) and Figure 14, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, when the second performance route performance (see Figure 9) is performed as an SPSP reach performance, the background image of the miniature reach symbol pattern is displayed in full screen on the display screen 70 as a performance that displays the performance symbols in the second display mode. For example, Figure 14(C) shows an example where a reach with the 7 symbol has been achieved, and the background image of the miniature 7 symbol pattern is displayed in full screen as the background image of the miniature reach symbol pattern.

As is clear from the notation in Figure 9, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, in some cases when the matching number symbol attention effect (see Figure 9(R)) and the win notification effect (see Figure 9(S)) are performed, the effect shown in Figure 9(L) is performed, displaying a background image representing a very small reach symbol (in this embodiment, a background of very small odd number symbols). As illustrated in Figure 19, the probability of a jackpot when this effect displaying the background image representing the very small reach symbol is set to approximately 42% in this embodiment, which is higher than the probability of a jackpot when the effect displaying the reach symbols in a reduced size in the upper left and right areas is performed (in this embodiment, approximately 27%). From this, it can be said that the matching number symbol attention effect (see Figure 9(R)) and the win notification effect (see Figure 9(S)) are more likely to be performed when the effect displaying the background image representing the very small reach symbol is performed than when the effect displaying the reach symbols in a reduced size in the upper left and right areas is performed.

As described above based on Figure 9, the effect of displaying the reach symbols in a reduced size in the upper left and right areas (see Figure 9(E)) can be executed regardless of whether the reach symbols are odd or even numbers, whereas the effect of displaying a background image representing the miniature reach symbols (see Figure 9(L)) is executed only when the reach symbols are odd numbers. In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, when the effect of displaying a background image representing the miniature reach symbols (see Figure 9(L)) is executed, the following are always executed prior to it: an odd-number symbol reach announcement effect (see Figure 9(B)) that notifies the establishment of a reach with odd numbers, and a reach symbol attention effect (see Figure 9(C)) that draws attention to the reach symbols (odd numbers in this embodiment). Therefore, players can enjoy the game while anticipating that the game will first display an odd-numbered symbol winning animation, rather than an even-numbered symbol winning animation, and then an animation displaying a background image representing a very small winning symbol.

In this way, by successively executing an odd-number symbol reach formation animation that notifies the formation of a reach with odd-number symbols, a reach symbol attention animation that draws attention to the reach symbols (odd-number symbols in this embodiment), and further executing an animation that displays a background image representing a very small reach symbol, it is possible to effectively increase the player's anticipation for the execution of the matching-number symbol attention animation (and the win notification animation).

Furthermore, the reach symbols (extremely small odd-numbered symbols: see, for example, Figure 14(C)) displayed by the background image displaying the extremely small reach symbols (see Figure 9(L)) are smaller than the reach symbols (left and right symbols: see Figure 16(F)) displayed by the effect of shrinking the reach symbols to the upper left and right areas (see Figure 9(E)). In other words, when the second effect route of the SPSP reach is progressing, the displayed reach symbols are smaller than when the first effect route of the SPSP reach is progressing. Therefore, players can enjoy the game by paying attention to the size of the reach symbols displayed during the SPSP reach.

(Intermittent flashing effect of tiny reach symbols in the background)
The intermittent illumination effect of the tiny reach symbols in the background (see Figure 9(M)) is an effect in which the tiny reach symbols (in this embodiment, the tiny odd-numbered symbols) represented by the tiny odd-numbered symbol background are illuminated intermittently. Figures 14(D) to (I) illustrate how a large number of tiny 7 symbols, as tiny reach symbols, are illuminated intermittently. This intermittent illumination effect of the tiny reach symbols in the background uses the tiny reach symbols represented by the tiny odd-numbered symbol background, and therefore is characterized by the fact that it is only executed when the tiny reach symbols are displayed by the tiny odd-numbered symbol background (see Figure 19).

Furthermore, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, when the effect of displaying a background image representing a very small winning symbol is executed, the intermittent flashing effect of the very small winning symbol in the background is always executed in conjunction with it. Therefore, the probability of a jackpot from the intermittent flashing effect of the very small winning symbol in the background is approximately 42%, the same as the effect of displaying a background image representing a very small winning symbol.

In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, when a reach is achieved with odd-numbered symbols after the reach establishment prompting animation (see Figure 9(A)), the reach establishment animation (see Figure 9(B)) and the reach symbol attention animation (see Figure 9(C)) are executed. Furthermore, during the subsequent second animation route, the intermittent flashing animation described above is executed. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player's attention on the reach symbols not only when a reach is achieved with odd-numbered symbols, but also afterward.

(Suggestion of a second possibility)
The second possibility indication effect (see Figures 9(P) and 14(G)) is, as described above, an effect in which a vertically elongated strip image representing text indicating the likelihood of a winning notification effect being performed is displayed on both the left and right sides of the display screen 70. As illustrated in Figure 19, in this embodiment, the probability of a big win is set to approximately 55%. Figure 14(G) illustrates the second possibility indication effect in which a strip image representing the word "SUPER" is displayed on the left side of the display screen 70, and a strip image representing the word "CHANCE!" is displayed on the right side of the display screen 70.

Furthermore, as is clear from the notation in Figure 9, this second possibility suggestion animation (see Figure 9(P)) is an animation that can be executed in part when the animation displaying a background image representing a miniature reach symbol (see Figure 9(L)) is being performed, that is, when the animation of the second animation route is progressing as an SPSP reach animation. It has the characteristic that it is not executed when the animation of the first animation route is progressing as an SPSP reach animation (i.e., when the animation displaying the reach symbols in a reduced size in the upper left and right areas is being executed) (see Figure 19).

Furthermore, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, based on the result of the pre-determination processing (pre-determination information) related to the right to determine the first special symbol corresponding to the pre-read target variation (see Figure 8), it is possible to execute an icon change effect targeting a reserved icon that suggests the pre-read target variation is being held. The second possibility suggestion effect, similar to the first possibility suggestion effect, has the characteristic that when the icon change effect is executed, it becomes more likely to be executed than when the icon change effect is not executed. Therefore, by executing an icon change effect targeting a reserved icon that suggests the pre-read target variation is being held prior to the start of the pre-read target variation, it is possible to make the player expect that the second effect route will proceed as an SPSP reach effect during the pre-read target variation, and that the second possibility suggestion effect will be executed in that process.

In this embodiment, to achieve the above-mentioned characteristic where the execution of the icon change animation increases the likelihood of the second possibility indication animation being performed compared to when the icon change animation is not performed, the sub-CPU 91 performs the following processing. Specifically, if pre-determination information is obtained regarding the right to determine the first special symbol corresponding to the pre-read target animation, indicating that the animation pattern of the first special symbol that will result in an SPSP reach being executed in the pre-read target animation is selected at the start of the pre-read target animation, then the icon change animation targeting the pending icon, which suggests that the pre-read target animation is pending, is executed with a higher probability compared to when pre-determination information is obtained indicating that the animation pattern of the first special symbol that will not result in an SPSP reach being selected at the start of the pre-read target animation.

By performing this process, the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment can effectively suggest that either the first possibility suggestion effect or the second possibility suggestion effect may be executed by performing an icon change effect targeting the pending icon that indicates that the pre-read target fluctuation is pending.

[Regarding the special effects that occur during jackpot gameplay]
As described above, if the result of the first special symbol judgment in the normal game state is "jackpot", one of the jackpot symbols X1 to X2 (see Figure 6(B)) will be stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41. Accordingly, three performance symbols showing repeating numbers, such as "222", will be stopped on the display screen 70. Here, in the game machine 1 of this embodiment, the repeating numbers "777" and "333" are performance symbols that definitively inform that the game will be controlled in a probability variation game state after the jackpot game has ended. In some cases when 3R probability variation A is selected as the type of jackpot related to the first special symbol judgment (when jackpot symbol X1 is stopped and displayed), one of these repeating numbers will be stopped on the display screen 70 as one of the three performance symbols that inform of a probability variation jackpot.

Thus, when the jackpot symbol X1 stops and the three special symbols indicating either "777" or "333" (which definitively announce a probability-increasing jackpot) stop, a jackpot game including a long-opening round is executed, as described above based on Figure 6(B), in which the second jackpot opening 28 and the V-entry opening 287 are opened for an extended period. Therefore, during this long-opening round, a launch-prompt animation (see Figures 20(B) and (C)) is executed as an in-round animation to encourage the player to launch the game ball towards the V-entry opening 287. When the game ball passes through the V-entry opening 287 during this long-opening round, the launch-prompt animation ends, and a V-entry notification animation (see Figure 20(D)) is executed to announce that the game ball has entered the V-entry opening.

On the other hand, when 3R probability variation A is selected as the type of jackpot related to the first special symbol determination, and when 3R normal (see Figure 6(B)) is selected, one of the seven types of repeating numbers, excluding "777" and "333", will stop on the display screen 70. These are "111", "222", "444", "555", "666", "888", and "999". If the three symbols representing the repeating numbers "777" or "333" stop here, a probability variation confirmation notification is performed during the opening period of the jackpot game to definitively notify that it is a probability variation jackpot. On the other hand, if the three symbols representing any of the above seven types of repeating numbers stop here, during the opening period of the jackpot game, for example, an operation prompting effect is performed to encourage the player to operate the first effect button 35, and depending on the operation of the first effect button 35, a success effect (an effect that notifies that it is a probability variation jackpot) or a failure effect (an effect that notifies that it is a normal jackpot) is performed. Specifically, if the jackpot is a 3R probability variation A, a success animation will be performed according to the operation of the first animation button 35. If the jackpot is a 3R normal jackpot, a failure animation will be performed according to the operation of the first animation button 35.

Thus, if the above-mentioned probability variation confirmation animation or success animation (corresponding to the operation of the first animation button 35) is executed during the opening period of a jackpot game (i.e., if a 3R probability variation A is won), a 3-round long-opening round game is executed, including a long-opening round game in which the second large prize slot 28 and the V prize slot 287 are opened for an extended period. These 3-round long-opening round games are as described above based on Figure 6(B), etc. On the other hand, if the above-mentioned failure animation is executed during the opening period of a jackpot game (i.e., if a 3R normal win is won), a first-round game in which the second large prize slot 28 is opened for a short period, and two long-opening round games in which the first large prize slot 26 is opened for an extended period are executed, as described above based on Figure 6(B).

<If you are notified of winning the V prize>
Figure 20 is a screen diagram showing an example of the presentation when a V-win is announced during a jackpot game. When the result of the first special symbol judgment in the normal game state is "jackpot", and the jackpot symbol X1 (see Figure 6(B)) indicating 3R probability variation A stops on the first special symbol display 41, three performance symbols indicating, for example, "777" may stop on the display screen 70. In this case, the following presentation is performed during the jackpot game related to 3R probability variation A.

First, during the opening period of a jackpot game related to 3R probability variation A, a predetermined opening sequence is executed (see Figure 20(A)). Specifically, as illustrated in Figure 20(A), the words "RUSH Bonus," indicating the type of jackpot, are displayed in the central area of the display screen 70, and the words "Right Shoot" and a right-pointing arrow, prompting the player to shoot to the right, are displayed in the upper right area of the display screen 70. The words "RUSH Bonus" definitively indicate that the game will be controlled in a probability variation state after the jackpot game ends, and the sequence displaying the words "RUSH Bonus" functions as the aforementioned probability variation confirmation sequence.

Following the opening period of the jackpot game related to the 3R probability variation A, which features such an opening sequence, the first round of the game, a long-opening round game in which the second large prize slot 28 and the V prize slot 287 are kept open for an extended period, is accompanied by the execution of predetermined in-round sequences (see Figures 20(B) and (C)). Specifically, as illustrated in Figures 20(B) and (C), three arrows pointing to the V prize slot 287 (with the words "Shoot Right") and the large words "Aim for V" are displayed prominently on the display screen 70, and a sound of "Aim for V" is output from the speaker 38 to encourage players to shoot. In addition, the three "777" symbols that stopped before the start of this jackpot game are displayed in small size in the upper left area of the display screen 70.

In the first round of the game, where a launch-prompt animation encourages the player to aim the game ball at the V-prize opening 287, the second large prize opening 28 is opened for an extended period. 1.5 seconds after the second large prize opening 28 begins to open, the V-prize opening 287 also begins to open for an extended period. This extended opening of the V-prize opening 287 continues until the tenth game ball enters the second large prize opening 28, or until the V-prize opening 287 has remained open for 10 seconds. Therefore, as long as the player follows the launch-prompt animation and shoots to the right, they can easily enter the V-prize opening 287. While this embodiment describes the launch-prompt animation starting at the beginning of the first round of the game, in other embodiments, the launch-prompt animation may start during the opening period or from the beginning of the opening period.

Next, when a game ball passes through the V-entry slot 287 during the first round of gameplay, a predetermined V-entry notification animation is performed to indicate that the game ball has entered the V-entry slot (see Figure 20(D)). Specifically, for example, an animation is displayed showing two characters happily holding up a star-shaped emblem containing the letter "V," and a predetermined V-entry notification sound is output from speaker 38.

Thus, when a V-entry notification is performed during the first round of gameplay to indicate that the game ball has entered the V-entry zone, a predetermined interval period occurs. During the subsequent second round of gameplay (the long-opening round of gameplay with the first large entry point 26), the aforementioned star-shaped emblem is displayed in a small size in the lower left area of the display screen 70 (see Figure 20(E)). Although not shown in Figure 20, the same effect as during the second round of gameplay is performed during the third round of gameplay. Then, as the jackpot game ending period follows the third round of gameplay, the words "Entering the Battle Rush!" are displayed prominently in the central area of the display screen 70, and the voice "Entering the Battle Rush!" is output from speaker 38 to indicate the start of a special mode called "Fierce Battle RUSH," which definitively indicates that the player is in a "probability variation game state."

[Robot-type gimmick 15 and rocking motion effect]
Next, with reference to Figure 21, the general configuration of the robot-type gimmick 15 provided in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment and the rocking effect using this robot-type gimmick 15 will be described. Here, Figure 21 is an explanatory diagram for describing the robot-type gimmick 15 and the rocking effect using the robot-type gimmick 15. As described above based on Figure 1, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the robot-type gimmick 15 is provided in the front frame 31 at a position where it can be seen from above by a seated player. Since this robot-type gimmick 15 is provided at the back of the upper tray 33, the player will naturally see the robot-type gimmick 15 when looking at the upper tray 33.

The robot-type gimmick 15, as illustrated in Figure 21, is composed of an upper body 151, a lower body 152, and a connecting part 153. This robot-type gimmick 15 is a movable performance prop that mimics an ally character that may appear midway through the SPSP Reach (second half battle) described above. The connecting part 153 represents the ally character's waist area, the upper body 151 represents the ally character from the waist up, and the lower body 152 represents the ally character from the waist down.

The lower body 152 is fixed to the front frame 31 at both of its legs (two lower ends) (see Figure 1). In contrast, the upper body 151 and the connecting part 153 are fixed to each other, and the upper body 151 and the connecting part 153 are configured to operate integrally on the lower body 152. Although not shown in the figure, the connecting part 153 is provided with a rotation axis whose axis is perpendicular to the plane of paper in Figure 21. Also, although not shown in the figure, the robot-type gimmick oscillating motor 154 (see Figure 5) that operates the robot-type gimmick 15 is provided within the front frame 31 so that its rotation axis is perpendicular to the plane of paper in Figure 21, just like the rotation axis of the connecting part 153. The rotation axis of the robot-type gimmick oscillating motor 154 is connected to the rotation axis of the robot-type gimmick 15 via a drive transmission mechanism (not shown) so as to be able to transmit power. Therefore, by alternately rotating the rotation axis of the robot-type gimmick oscillating motor 154 in the forward and reverse directions, it is possible to oscillate the upper body 151 (and connecting part 153) in both counterclockwise and clockwise directions.

Figure 21(A) illustrates the robot-type gimmick 15 in its initial position. Figure 21(B) illustrates the robot-type gimmick 15 in a left-tilted position, where the upper body 151 (and connecting part 153) is tilted to the left, by rotating the rotation axis of the robot-type gimmick's oscillating motor 154 forward. Figure 21(C) illustrates the robot-type gimmick 15 in a right-tilted position, where the upper body 151 (and connecting part 153) is tilted to the right, by reversing the rotation axis of the robot-type gimmick's oscillating motor 154.

In this embodiment, the gaming machine 1 is configured to perform various rocking motion effects by having the lamp CPU 121 (see Figure 5) control the rotation of the robot-type gimmick rocking motor 154, thereby rocking the robot-type gimmick 15 between a left-tilted position and a right-tilted position (via an initial position). These rocking motion effects will be described in detail later based on Figures 22 to 25.

[A series of effects including rocking motion]
In the following, various oscillation effects that occur during the display of the first special symbol's variation in the normal game state will be explained with reference to Figures 22 and 23. Here, Figure 22 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the flow of a series of effects in the pre-target variation, and Figure 23 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the flow of a series of effects in the pre-read target variation.

Furthermore, the pre-target variation illustrated in Figure 22 is the same as the pre-target variation described above based on Figure 8. In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, in the pre-target variation illustrated in Figure 8, a series of effects illustrated in Figure 22 may be performed based on the prior determination information relating to the right to the first special symbol determination corresponding to the pre-read target variation. Similarly, the pre-read target variation illustrated in Figure 23 is the same as the pre-read target variation described above based on Figure 8. In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, in the pre-read target variation illustrated in Figure 8, a series of effects illustrated in Figure 23 may be performed based on the determination result of the first special symbol determination performed at the start of the pre-read target variation. In the following description, the effects after the SPSP reach in the pre-read target variation (effects from Figure 23 (J) onwards) will be referred to as "subsequent effects," and effects performed before them will be referred to as "preceding effects."

<The sequence of events during the pre-target fluctuations>
First, as described above based on Figure 8(A), in the normal game state, the right to judge the first special symbol corresponding to the pre-read target variation is reserved, and the display of the first special symbol and the performance symbol variation as the pre-target variation may begin (see Figure 22(A)). Here, if a game ball enters the first start opening 21 while the first special symbol variation is being displayed in the normal game state, and the right to judge the first special symbol related to the pre-read target variation is reserved, the main CPU 81 performs a pre-determination process based on acquired information such as the jackpot random number acquired at the time of entry, and based on the result of this pre-determination process (pre-determination information), the sub-CPU 91 may set to execute a pre-oscillation effect in the pre-target variation.

(Pre-emptive hype)
As described above, when the pre-oscillation effect is set to be executed, the sub-CPU 91 executes a pre-oscillation effect that oscillates the robot-type gimmick 15 when the first special symbol and the effect symbol are being displayed as pre-target fluctuations (see Figure 22(B) for an example of the "first first oscillation effect"). This pre-oscillation effect is an effect that oscillates the robot-type gimmick 15 at ultra-high speed by alternately switching the forward rotation and reverse rotation of the robot-type gimmick oscillation motor 154 at extremely short time intervals (for example, 0.1 second intervals). In the pre-oscillation effect, the oscillation time from when the oscillation of the robot-type gimmick 15 starts until it ends is set in advance to 1 second (see Figure 22(B)). As described above, this robot-shaped gimmick 15 is modeled after an ally character that may appear during the SPSP Reach (second half battle). Therefore, by executing such a pre-swing animation prior to the pre-read target change, it is possible to effectively make the player expect that the second half battle will take place during the pre-read target change and that an ally character will appear during that second half battle.

Furthermore, this pre-spin animation occurs when the result of the first special symbol judgment performed at the start of the pre-spin variation is "miss," and when a variation pattern for the first special symbol that results in a no-reach animation is selected. Therefore, during the pre-spin variation, three animation symbols indicating scattered symbols are displayed as pseudo-stops on the display screen 70. As the losing symbol is displayed as the first special symbol, a no-reach miss notification animation is performed, causing the three animation symbols indicating scattered symbols to actually stop (see Figure 22(C)).

Although not shown in Figure 22, the pre-swing animation is executed using a pre-target variation of the first special symbol with a relatively short variation time (for example, a pre-target variation with a variation time of 5 seconds). Therefore, the pre-swing animation is not executed during the execution of the first performance button operation prompting animation (which prompts the player to operate the first performance button 35), during the execution of the operation response animation in response to the operation of the first performance button 35 in response to this first performance button operation prompting animation, during the execution of the second performance button operation prompting animation (which prompts the player to operate the second performance button 36), or during the execution of the operation response animation in response to the operation of the second performance button 36 in response to this second performance button operation prompting animation.

Up to this point, we have explained using Figure 22 as an example, where a pre-swing animation (see Figure 22(B)) is executed during a pre-target variation. However, there are also cases where a no-reach miss notification animation (see Figure 22(C)) is performed without a pre-swing animation. The pre-swing animation has the following characteristics: Specifically, if the pre-determination result related to the right to determine the first special symbol corresponding to the pre-read target variation indicates a "jackpot," the pre-swing animation is more likely to be executed than if it indicates a "miss." Furthermore, the longer the variation time of the first special symbol identified based on the pre-determination result (pre-determination information) related to the right to determine the first special symbol corresponding to the pre-read target variation, the more likely the pre-swing animation is to be executed.

Furthermore, since the pre-swing animation does not use the display screen 70, it can be combined with other pre-announcement animations. For example, in the pre-swing animation (see Figure 22(B)), the weak chance symbol animation (see Figure 9(C)) and the first symbol attention animation (see Figure 9(D)) may occur before the target reel spin. Alternatively, the pre-swing animation (see Figure 22(B)) may occur before the strong chance symbol animation (see Figure 9(E)) and the second symbol attention animation (see Figure 9(F)). These pre-announcement animations, when combined, generally offer a higher probability of a big win than when performed individually.

<The sequence of events during the prediction target change>
Next, with reference to Figure 23, a series of effects performed during the display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol related to the pre-read target variation will be explained. Here, as an example, a series of effects including various rocking effects using the robot-type gimmick 15 will be explained, with reference to the case where the effects progress in the following order during the display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol related to the pre-read target variation: pre-reach effect (see Figure 8 (J)), reach establishment effect (see Figure 8 (K)), normal reach (see Figure 8 (L)), SP reach (see Figure 8 (O)), and SPSP reach (see Figure 8 (P)).

In normal gameplay, after the previous spin preceding the pre-read target spin has ended and a predetermined confirmation time has elapsed since the first special symbol (a losing symbol) was displayed, the main CPU 81 performs a first special symbol determination corresponding to the pre-read target spin. Furthermore, based on the spin start command from the main control board 80, which includes the determination result of this first special symbol determination, the sub-CPU 91 sets the performance patterns for various effects that occur during the spin display of the first special symbol (and) effect symbols related to the pre-read target spin. Thus, when the main CPU 81 performs the first special symbol determination at the start of the pre-read target spin, and the sub-CPU 91 sets the performance patterns for various effects that occur during the pre-read target spin, the effects may proceed in the following sequence as illustrated in Figure 23.

(Oscillating effect that cannot be controlled at the start of fluctuation)
In other words, when the first special symbol determination corresponding to the pre-read target variation is performed, the variation display of the first special symbol (and performance symbol) related to the pre-read target variation begins (see Figure 23(A)). When the variation display of the first special symbol (and performance symbol) related to the pre-read target variation begins in this way, a variation start operation-independent shaking effect (an example of the "second first shaking effect", see Figure 23(B)) may be performed. This variation start operation-independent shaking effect is a shaking effect in which the robot-type gimmick 15 shakes at approximately the same time as, or immediately after, the variation display of the first special symbol (and performance symbol) begins, and is independent of the player's operation of the first performance button 35 (or second performance button 36). Furthermore, the non-operation-dependent oscillation effect at the start of the variation is an effect in which the robot-type gimmick 15 is oscillated at high speed by alternately switching the forward rotation and reverse rotation of the robot-type gimmick oscillation motor 154 at short time intervals (for example, every 0.2 seconds). In the non-operation-dependent oscillation effect at the start of the variation, the oscillation time from when the oscillation of the robot-type gimmick 15 starts until it ends is set to 2 seconds in advance (see Figure 23(B)).

This fluctuation-independent oscillation effect at the start of the variation (see Figure 23(B)) is an effect that occurs before the reach-establishment effect in Figure 23(F), and therefore, based on Figure 8(J), etc., it can be said to be one of the pre-reach effects described above.

Furthermore, this non-operation-dependent oscillation effect at the start of a variation (see Figure 23(B)) is not always executed at the start of a variation of the first special symbol (and effect symbol) related to the pre-read target variation. There are cases where the non-operation-dependent oscillation effect is executed at the start of a variation, and cases where it is not executed.

Next, after the non-operation-dependent oscillation effect at the start of the variation (see Figure 23(B)) is performed, or after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the pre-read target variation without the non-operation-dependent oscillation effect at the start of the variation being performed, a first-effect button operation prompting effect may be performed to encourage the player to operate the first effect button 35 (see Figure 23(C)). This first-effect button operation prompting effect is performed in the same manner as the first-effect button operation prompting effect described above, for example, based on Figure 11(F), so a detailed explanation is omitted here.

(Preview of lines)
Here, if the player operates the first performance button 35 during the validity period related to the first performance button operation promotion performance in Figure 23(C), or if the validity period ends without the player operating the first performance button 35, a dialogue notification will be performed as an operation-corresponding performance (see Figure 23(D) for an example of the "first operation-corresponding performance"). The dialogue notification here is as described above based on Figure 10(F), and the dialogue notification is configured as an effect that displays an image representing a predetermined character speaking a line of dialogue in the central area of the display screen 70, and outputs sound with the same content as the line of dialogue from the speaker 38.

(Pre-reach operation corresponding to shaking effect)
In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, a pre-reach operation-responsive oscillating effect (an example of the "second first oscillating effect," see Figure 23(E)) may be performed in conjunction with the above-mentioned dialogue notification (see Figure 23(D)). This pre-reach operation-responsive oscillating effect is similar to the dialogue notification in that it is an operation-responsive effect that is performed in response to the operation of the first performance button 35 in response to the first performance button operation prompting effect in Figure 23(C). The pre-reach operation-responsive oscillating effect is an effect that causes the robot-type gimmick 15 to oscillate at a medium speed by alternately switching the forward rotation and reverse rotation of the robot-type gimmick oscillating motor 154 at a medium time interval (for example, at 0.5-second intervals). In the pre-reach operation-responsive oscillating effect, the oscillating time from the start to the end of the oscillating of the robot-type gimmick 15 is set in advance to 3.5 seconds (see Figure 23(E)).

This pre-reach operation-responsive oscillation effect (see Figure 23(E)), like the non-operation-responsive oscillation effect at the start of the variation (see Figure 23(B)) and the dialogue notification (see Figure 23(D)), is an effect that occurs before the reach establishment effect in Figure 23(F). Therefore, based on Figure 8(J), etc., it can be said to be one of the pre-reach effects described above.

The pre-reach operation-responsive shaking effect may occur in parallel with the dialogue予告 (dialogue announcement), or it may occur without the pre-reach operation-responsive shaking effect. The former case has a higher probability of a jackpot than the latter. Therefore, the pre-reach operation-responsive shaking effect can be considered a chance-up effect that increases the probability of a jackpot from the dialogue announcement.

Up to this point, we have explained that in response to the operation of the first performance button 35 in response to the first performance button operation prompting effect shown in Figure 23(C), both the dialogue notification (see Figure 23(D)) and the pre-reach operation corresponding shaking effect (see Figure 23(E)) may be executed, or only the dialogue notification may be executed. However, depending on the effect pattern set by the sub-CPU 91, the first performance button operation prompting effect may not be executed. In this case, since the validity period for the first performance button operation prompting effect is not set, even if the player operates the first performance button 35, neither the dialogue notification nor the pre-reach operation corresponding shaking effect will be performed.

Thus, after the pre-reach animation is performed and a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the pre-read target variation, the reach establishment animation (see Figure 23(F)) is performed, and a normal reach begins (see Figure 23(G)). After that, a predetermined development animation is performed, and the SP reach (first half battle) begins. The sequence of events—reach establishment animation, start of normal reach, and start of SP reach (first half battle)—is as described above, based on Figures 8(K), (L), (O), etc.

During the SP Reach (first half battle), a battle sequence is displayed showing the protagonist character and the enemy character battling. However, at the start of this sequence, a variable animation pattern is set by the sub-CPU 91, which transitions from the SP Reach (first half battle) to the SPSP Reach (second half battle). Therefore, as mentioned above, before and after the start of the SPSP Reach, the outcome of the first half battle during the SP Reach is not determined, and a series of animations are displayed showing the transition from the SP Reach to the SPSP Reach and the start of the second half battle.

(Shaking effect that cannot be controlled during SP reach)
Thus, during the SP Reach where the first half battle takes place, an SP Reach-independent shaking effect (an example of the "second first shaking effect," see Figure 23(I)) may occur. This SP Reach-independent shaking effect is similar to the pre-shaking effect (see Figure 22(B)) and the shake effect at the start of a variation (see Figure 23(B)) in that it shakes the robot-type gimmick 15 independently of the player's operation of the first effect button 35 (or second effect button 36). However, the shaking pattern of the robot-type gimmick 15 in the SP Reach-independent shaking effect differs from that of the pre-shaking effect and the shake effect at the start of a variation. In other words, the non-operation-dependent swinging effect during SP reach is an effect in which the robot-type gimmick 15 swings slowly by alternately switching the forward rotation and reverse rotation of the robot-type gimmick swinging motor 154 at relatively long time intervals (for example, every 0.75 seconds). In the non-operation-dependent swinging effect during SP reach, the swinging time of the robot-type gimmick 15 from the start to the end is set in advance to 4.5 seconds (see Figure 23(I)).

Furthermore, this non-operational shaking effect during SP Reach is not guaranteed to occur every time an SP Reach begins. It may or may not occur during an SP Reach. This non-operational shaking effect during SP Reach has the characteristic that when it occurs, it is more likely to progress from an SP Reach (first half battle) to an SPSP Reach (second half battle) than when it does not occur.

Furthermore, during the SPSP Reach (second half battle), there is a possibility that an ally character represented by the robot-type gimmick 15 will appear (i.e., the ally character appearance display animation shown in Figure 23(N), described later, will occur). Therefore, by executing a non-operational shaking animation during the SP Reach, which involves shaking the robot-type gimmick 15, the player's attention can be directed towards the ally character, effectively increasing the player's anticipation for the ally character's appearance during the SPSP Reach (second half battle).

As is clear from the above explanation, the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment can execute multiple oscillation patterns that differ from each other, including an SP reach-independent oscillation effect (see Figure 23(I)), a pre-oscillation effect (see Figure 22(B)), an oscillation effect at the start of the variation-independent oscillation effect (see Figure 23(B)), and a pre-reach operation-responsive oscillation effect (see Figure 23(E)), in addition to the SP reach-independent oscillation effect (see Figure 23(I)) during the pre-prediction target variation before developing into an SPSP reach (second half battle). By executing these oscillation effects individually or in combination, it is possible to effectively increase the player's expectation of developing into an SPSP reach, which has the highest probability of winning among the three types of reach effects, and of the ally character appearance display effect (see Figure 23(N)) occurring during the SPSP reach.

Comparing the pre-reach oscillation effect (see Figure 22(B)), the non-operation-responsive oscillation effect at the start of the variation (see Figure 23(B)), the operation-responsive oscillation effect before a reach (see Figure 23(E)), and the non-operation-responsive oscillation effect during an SP reach (see Figure 23(I)), we find that the operation-responsive oscillation effect before a reach is executed in conjunction with a dialogue予告 (dialogue announcement) which is an operation-responsive effect, whereas the pre-reach oscillation effect, the non-operation-responsive oscillation effect at the start of the variation, and the non-operation-responsive oscillation effect during an SP reach are different effects in that they are executed when an operation-responsive effect such as a dialogue announcement is not being executed.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, four types of oscillation patterns are provided for the robot-type gimmick 15 in these oscillation effects that can be executed during the pre-effect: ultra-high-speed oscillation for 1 second (see Figure 22(B)), high-speed oscillation for 2 seconds (see Figure 23(B)), medium-speed oscillation for 3.5 seconds (see Figure 23(E)), and low-speed oscillation for 4.5 seconds (see Figure 23(I)). The oscillation effects that can be executed during the pre-effect have the characteristic that the robot-type gimmick 15 oscillates with different oscillation patterns depending on the execution timing.

Up to this point, we have explained the "preliminary effects" that occur before the SPSP Reach begins. From here on, we will explain the effects that occur after the SPSP Reach begins. In this embodiment of the game machine 1, as described above based on Figure 9, there are two types of effects for the SPSP Reach: a first effect route and a second effect route. Various effects are available in both effect routes. However, for the sake of explanation, Figure 23 omits the illustration of some of these effects and will focus on explaining the effects that are directly or indirectly related to the various oscillation effects that can be executed before the SPSP Reach begins.

(SPSP Reach (second half battle) begins)
When the SPSP Reach (second half battle) begins (see Figure 23(J)), a first-stage button operation prompting animation is performed during it (see Figure 23(K)). If the player operates the first-stage button 35 during the effective period of the first-stage button operation prompting animation, a cut-in is performed (see Figure 23(L)). These first-stage button operation prompting animations and cut-ins are as described above based on Figures 11(F) to (G) and Figures 14(H) to (I), etc., and one of the following cut-ins will be performed: a weak cut-in, a medium cut-in, or a strong cut-in (an example of a "second operation corresponding animation").

Next, when a cut-in occurs and the SPSP reach nears its end, a second-effect button operation prompting animation is performed to encourage the player to operate the second-effect button 36, as described above based on Figures 11(H) and 15(A), etc. (see Figure 23(M)). Here, if the result of the first special symbol judgment performed by the main CPU 81 at the start of the current pre-read target variation is "miss," then a defeat animation depicting the protagonist character being defeated by the enemy character is performed, depending on whether the second-effect button 36 was operated during the effective period of the second-effect button operation prompting animation, or whether the effective period of the second-effect button operation prompting animation ended without the second-effect button 36 being operated (see Figure 23(S)). This defeat animation is as described above based on Figures 9(I) and 11(I).

Thus, if a defeat animation occurs as the result of the battle animation (second half battle) during the SPSP reach, as described above based on Figure 9(J), the three animation symbols indicating a failed reach are displayed as pseudo-stops just before the end of the current pre-read target variation. As the losing symbol is displayed as the first special symbol, a loss notification animation is performed in which the three animation symbols indicating the failed reach are actually stopped (see Figure 23(T)).

(Ally character appearance display animation)
If the player operates the second performance button 36 during the valid period related to the second performance button operation promotion performance in Figure 23(M), a performance displaying the appearance of an ally character may be performed as an operation-response performance corresponding to that operation (see Figure 23(N)). When both the ally character appearance display performance (see Figure 23(N)) and the victory performance (see Figure 23(P)) are executed as operation-response performances, an performance pattern will be performed in which an ally character appears in the middle of the second half of the battle, and the protagonist character and the ally character fight together to defeat the enemy character.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, even if the player operates the second performance button 36 during the effective period related to the second performance button operation prompting performance shown in Figure 23(M), the ally character appearance display performance may not be performed. In this case, only the victory performance (see Figure 23(P)) will be executed as the operation-responding performance, resulting in a performance pattern where the main character defeats the enemy character alone.

(Winning indication fluctuation effect)
Furthermore, if the result of the first special symbol judgment performed at the start of this pre-read target fluctuation is "Big Win", the win suggestion fluctuation effect (an example of the "second fluctuation effect," see Figure 23(O)), the victory effect (see Figure 23(P)), and the matching number symbol attention effect (see Figure 23(Q)) will always be executed, regardless of whether the ally character appearance display effect (see Figure 23(N)) is performed or not. Of these three effects, the victory effect and the matching number symbol attention effect are as described above based on Figures 9(R) and (S), etc. On the other hand, the winning indication oscillation effect is an effect that definitively indicates that the matching number effect symbol attention effect (and winning notification effect) will be executed by oscillating the robot-type gimmick 15. This effect causes the robot-type gimmick 15 to oscillate at an extremely slow speed by alternately switching the forward rotation and reverse rotation of the robot-type gimmick oscillation motor 154 at the longest possible time interval (for example, 1.0 second interval). In the winning indication oscillation effect, the oscillation time from when the oscillation of the robot-type gimmick 15 starts until it ends is set in advance to 10 seconds (see Figure 23(O)).

Furthermore, if the ally character appearance display animation (see Figure 23(N)) is performed as part of the operation response animation, the win indication fluctuation animation (see Figure 23(O)) will begin almost simultaneously with the start of the ally character appearance display animation, and the win indication fluctuation animation will continue until the matching number symbol attention animation ends.

Thus, when the ally character appearance display animation (see Figure 23(N)), the win indication fluctuation animation (see Figure 23(O)), the victory animation (see Figure 23(P)), and the matching number symbol highlighting animation (see Figure 23(Q)) occur, the three animation symbols showing the matching numbers, which were enlarged by the matching number symbol highlighting animation, return to their normal size and are then displayed as a pseudo-stop. As the jackpot symbol is displayed as the first special symbol, the three animation symbols showing the matching numbers then stop permanently (see Figure 23(R)).

[Characteristics of each shaking effect and related effects performed in normal gameplay mode (normal game state)]
Next, with reference to Figure 24, the characteristics of each oscillation effect and its related effects that are performed in the normal performance mode (which is the normal game state) will be explained. Here, Figure 24 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the characteristics of each oscillation effect and its related effects that are performed in the normal performance mode. As described above based on Figure 7, etc., in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the game is controlled by the main CPU 81 in one of the following game states: normal game state, probability variation game state, or time-saving game state. In contrast, the sub-CPU 91 controls the effects in the normal performance mode when the game is controlled in the normal game state, in the probability variation performance mode when the game is controlled in the probability variation game state, and in the time-saving performance mode when the game is controlled in the time-saving game state. In this way, by controlling the effects in the performance mode corresponding to each game state, it is possible to perform effects in a manner that is appropriate to the game state. Here, the characteristics of the oscillation effect and its related effects that are performed when the game is controlled in the normal game state and the effects are controlled in the normal performance mode will be explained.

(Pre-emptive hype)
The pre-swing animation, as illustrated in Figure 24, is an animation in which, when the right to judge the first special symbol corresponding to the pre-read target variation is reserved, the robot-type gimmick 15 is swayed during the pre-target variation (a losing variation in which a losing notification animation is performed) that takes place before the pre-read target variation, based on the pre-judgment result (pre-judgment information) related to this right. This pre-swing animation, as described above based on Figure 22(B), sways the robot-type gimmick 15 at ultra-high speed for one second, and its jackpot reliability is set to approximately 28% (see Figure 24).

Thus, since the pre-spin animation has a relatively high probability of resulting in a big win (approximately 28%), it can be said that if the pre-spin animation is executed before the start of the target spin, the likelihood of the win-indicating animation being executed during the target spin is higher than if the pre-spin animation is not executed (see Figure 24). Specifically, the win-indicating animations mentioned here are those that are executed only before the win notification animation (see Figure 23(R)) in the aforementioned ally character appearance animation (see Figure 23(N)), win-indicating animation (see Figure 23(O)), victory animation (see Figure 23(P)), and matching number animation/symbol attention animation (see Figure 23(Q)), based on Figure 23.

In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, if the pre-determination process related to the right to determine the first special symbol corresponding to the pre-read target fluctuation yields a pre-determination result indicating that a fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol that will result in the execution of an SPSP reach (which may be accompanied by the above-mentioned win-indicating fluctuation effect, etc.) is selected, the pre-fluctuating effect will be executed with a higher probability compared to when the pre-determination result indicates that a fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol that will not result in an SPSP reach is selected. Therefore, as described above, when the pre-fluctuating effect is executed, the win-indicating fluctuation effect, etc., is more likely to be executed compared to when the pre-fluctuating effect is not executed, and it is possible to effectively increase the player's expectation that the win-indicating fluctuation effect, etc., will be executed.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, as described above based on Figure 6(B), two types of jackpots are available for the first special symbol determination in the normal game state: "3R probability variation A," where the jackpot symbol X1 is displayed, and "3R normal," where the jackpot symbol X2 is displayed. When pre-determination information indicating that the jackpot symbol X1 will be displayed is obtained as pre-determination information related to the right to determine the first special symbol corresponding to the pre-read target variation, the pre-swing animation is executed with a higher probability compared to when pre-determination information indicating that the jackpot symbol X2 will be displayed is obtained (see Figure 24). Therefore, when the pre-swing animation is executed, the game is more easily controlled in the probability variation state after the end of the jackpot game corresponding to the pre-read target variation, compared to when the pre-swing animation is not executed, effectively increasing the player's expectation of a probability variation jackpot.

(Oscillating effect that cannot be controlled at the start of fluctuation)
The non-operation-dependent oscillation effect at the start of a variation is an effect in which the robot-type gimmick 15 is oscillated at the start of a variation targeted for prediction, as illustrated in Figure 24. Furthermore, as described above based on Figure 23(B), the non-operation-dependent oscillation effect at the start of a variation causes the robot-type gimmick 15 to oscillate at high speed for 2 seconds, and its probability of winning a jackpot is set to approximately 31% (see Figure 24).

Thus, the non-operation-dependent oscillation effect at the start of a variation has a slightly higher probability of resulting in a jackpot, at approximately 31%, compared to the pre-oscillation effect. Therefore, it can be said that when the non-operation-dependent oscillation effect is executed at the start of a pre-read target variation, the likelihood of a jackpot-indicating oscillation effect being executed during that variation is higher than when the non-operation-dependent oscillation effect is not executed (see Figure 24).

In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, when the first special symbol determination performed at the start of the pre-read target variation selects a variation pattern for the first special symbol that results in the execution of an SPSP reach (which may be accompanied by the aforementioned win-indicating fluctuation effect), the fluctuation effect that does not correspond to the operation at the start of the variation is executed with a higher probability compared to when a variation pattern for the first special symbol that does not result in an SPSP reach is selected. Therefore, as described above, when the fluctuation effect that does not correspond to the operation at the start of the variation is executed, the win-indicating fluctuation effect is more likely to be executed compared to when the fluctuation effect that does not correspond to the operation at the start of the variation is not executed, and it is possible to effectively increase the player's expectation that the win-indicating fluctuation effect will be executed.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, if the result of the first special symbol judgment performed at the start of the pre-read target variation is "3R probability variation A," the unresponsive oscillation effect at the start of the variation is executed with a higher probability compared to the case where it is "3R normal" (see Figure 24). Therefore, when the unresponsive oscillation effect at the start of the variation is executed, the game is more easily controlled in a probability variation state after the end of the jackpot game corresponding to the pre-read target variation, compared to when the unresponsive oscillation effect at the start of the variation is not executed. This effectively increases the player's expectation of a probability variation jackpot.

Furthermore, the oscillation effect that does not support operation at the start of the fluctuation differs from the pre-oscillation effect in its oscillation pattern, including the oscillation time of the robot-type gimmick 15, making it relatively easy to distinguish from the pre-oscillation effect.

(Preview of lines)
The dialogue notification in this embodiment (an example of the "first operation-responsive performance," see Figure 23(D)) is an operation-responsive performance that is executed in response to the operation of the first performance button 35 during the effective period related to the first performance button operation promotion performance (see Figure 23(C)). This dialogue notification is a performance that displays a performance image on the display screen 70 that shows a predetermined character speaking a line of dialogue. The reliability of winning a jackpot changes depending on the type of character speaking the line of dialogue, the content of the line of dialogue, and the color of the characters indicating the line of dialogue, and the reliability of winning a jackpot is variable between approximately 6% and approximately 43% (see Figure 24).

Thus, while there is a wide range in the reliability of dialogue-based predictions for big wins, there are instances where dialogue-based predictions have a higher reliability than pre-swing animations or animations that do not respond to input at the start of a spin. Therefore, dialogue-based predictions, like these other shaking animations, can be said to be animations that suggest the possibility of a win-indicating shaking animation occurring. By executing dialogue-based predictions, it is possible to increase the player's expectation that a win-indicating shaking animation will occur.

(Pre-reach operation corresponding to shaking effect)
The pre-reach operation-responsive shaking effect (see Figure 23(E)) is an operation-responsive effect that can be executed in parallel with the dialogue announcement in response to the operation of the first performance button 35 during the effective period related to the first performance button operation promotion effect (see Figure 23(C)) (see Figure 24). As described above based on Figure 23(E), this pre-reach operation-responsive shaking effect shakes the robot-type gimmick 15 at a medium speed for 3.5 seconds, and its jackpot reliability is set to approximately 25% (see Figure 24).

As illustrated in Figure 24, while the pre-reach operation-responsive oscillation effect has a slightly lower probability of resulting in a jackpot compared to pre-reach oscillation effects or oscillation effects not responsive to operation at the start of a spin, it has the characteristic that when the pre-reach operation-responsive oscillation effect is executed in conjunction with a dialogue announcement, it is more likely to trigger a jackpot-indicating oscillation effect during the target spin (see Figure 24) than when the dialogue announcement is executed alone (without the pre-reach operation-responsive oscillation effect).

In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, when the first special symbol determination performed at the start of the pre-read target variation selects a variation pattern of the first special symbol that will result in the execution of an SPSP reach (which may be accompanied by the aforementioned win-indicating fluctuation effect), the pre-reach operation-corresponding fluctuation effect is executed with a higher probability compared to when a variation pattern of the first special symbol that will not result in an SPSP reach is selected. Therefore, as described above, when the pre-reach operation-corresponding fluctuation effect is executed, the win-indicating fluctuation effect is more likely to be executed compared to when a dialogue announcement is executed alone, effectively increasing the player's expectation of the win-indicating fluctuation effect being executed.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, if the result of the first special symbol judgment performed at the start of the pre-read target variation is "3R probability variation A," the pre-reach operation corresponding oscillation effect is executed with a higher probability compared to the case where it is "3R normal" (see Figure 24). Therefore, when the pre-reach operation corresponding oscillation effect is executed, the game is more easily controlled in a probability variation state after the end of the jackpot game corresponding to the pre-read target variation, compared to when the pre-reach operation corresponding oscillation effect is not executed. This effectively increases the player's expectation of a probability variation jackpot.

As is clear from the notation in Figure 24, the pre-reach operation-responsive oscillation effect differs from the pre-oscillation effect and the oscillation effect that does not respond to operation at the start of the variation, both of which are performed at different execution timings. Therefore, the oscillation pattern, including the oscillation time of the robot-type gimmick 15, is different, making it relatively easy to distinguish from the pre-oscillation effect and the oscillation effect that does not respond to operation at the start of the variation.

As is clear from the explanation so far, the pre-swing animation, the non-operation-dependent swing animation at the start of the variation, and the pre-reach operation-dependent swing animation are all more likely to be executed when the result of the first special symbol judgment performed at the start of the pre-read target variation is "3R probability variation A" than when it is "3R normal". By executing at least one of these swing animations, it is possible to effectively increase the player's expectation that the odd-numbered symbol reach formation animation will be executed as a reach formation animation (see Figure 23(F)).

(Shaking effect that cannot be controlled during SP reach)
The SP Reach Non-Operation-Responsive Swinging Effect (see Figure 23(I)) is an effect that causes the robot-type gimmick 15 to swing independently of the player's operation of the first effect button 35 (or second effect button 36) while an SP Reach (first half battle) is in progress. Furthermore, as described above based on Figure 23(I), this SP Reach Non-Operation-Responsive Swinging Effect causes the robot-type gimmick 15 to swing slowly for 4.5 seconds, and its probability of resulting in a jackpot is set at approximately 34%.

Furthermore, while the non-operational shaking animation during SP Reach is similar to other shaking animations in that it involves shaking the robot-type gimmick 15, it differs from other shaking animations in that it occurs during SP Reach (during the first half of the battle). Thus, because the non-operational shaking animation during SP Reach is executed at a different timing than other shaking animations (during the first half of the battle), it can more strongly emphasize the possibility of allied characters appearing during SPSP Reach (during the second half of the battle). In this sense, it can be said to be the most effective animation in suggesting the possibility of the allied character appearance display animation (see Figure 23 (N)), which indicates a high probability of victory (see Figure 24).

As illustrated in Figure 24, the non-operation-dependent oscillation effect during SP reach has a slightly higher probability of a jackpot compared to the pre-reach oscillation effect, the non-operation-dependent oscillation effect at the start of the variation, and the operation-dependent oscillation effect before the reach. Furthermore, when the non-operation-dependent oscillation effect during SP reach is executed, it is more likely that a jackpot-indicating oscillation effect will be executed during the pre-read target variation than when the non-operation-dependent oscillation effect during SP reach is not executed.

In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, when the first special symbol determination performed at the start of the pre-read target variation selects a variation pattern of the first special symbol that results in the execution of an SPSP Reach (which may be accompanied by the aforementioned win-indicating fluctuation effect), the SP Reach non-operation-dependent fluctuation effect is executed with a higher probability compared to when a variation pattern of the first special symbol that does not result in an SPSP Reach is selected. Therefore, as described above, when the SP Reach non-operation-dependent fluctuation effect is executed, it is easier for the SP Reach (first half battle) to develop into an SPSP Reach (second half battle), and the win-indicating fluctuation effect is more likely to be executed, compared to when the SP Reach non-operation-dependent fluctuation effect is not executed. Thus, by executing the SP Reach non-operation-dependent fluctuation effect, it is possible to effectively increase the player's expectation of developing into the second half battle and the execution of the win-indicating fluctuation effect.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, if the result of the first special symbol judgment performed at the start of the pre-read target variation is "3R probability variation A," the SP reach non-operation-dependent oscillation effect is executed with a higher probability compared to the case where it is "3R normal" (see Figure 24). Therefore, when the SP reach non-operation-dependent oscillation effect is executed, the game is more likely to be controlled in a probability variation state after the end of the jackpot game corresponding to the pre-read target variation, compared to when the SP reach non-operation-dependent oscillation effect is not executed. Although not shown in the figure, during the SP reach, the left and right symbols as reach symbols are displayed as pseudo-stops. Therefore, through the synergistic effect of the effect that pseudo-stops two 7 symbols (or 3 symbols) as reach symbols, and the effect that pseudo-stops two odd-numbered symbols (excluding 3 and 7 symbols) as reach symbols, it is possible to further effectively enhance the player's expectation of a probability variation jackpot.

As is clear from the notation in Figure 24, the non-operation-dependent oscillation effect during the SP Reach is different from the pre-reach oscillation effect, the non-operation-dependent oscillation effect at the start of the variation, and the pre-reach operation-dependent oscillation effect, in that it is executed during the SP Reach (during the first half of the battle). Furthermore, the oscillation pattern of the robot-type gimmick 15 in the non-operation-dependent oscillation effect during the SP Reach is also different from these other oscillation effects, making it relatively easy to distinguish from them.

Now, let's describe the winning notification effect of this embodiment. The winning notification effect of this embodiment can be broadly classified into two types: a first-symbol display effect that displays multiple first-symbol displays (for example, three symbols showing even numbers) to indicate that a jackpot game is being played, and a second-symbol display effect that displays multiple second-symbol displays (for example, three symbols showing odd numbers) to indicate that a jackpot game is being played.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the probability of the first oscillation animation (pre-oscillation animation, oscillation animation not compatible with operation at the start of a variation, oscillation animation compatible with operation before a reach, oscillation animation not compatible with operation during an SP reach) being executed prior to the second animation symbol display animation is higher than the probability of the first oscillation animation (pre-oscillation animation, oscillation animation not compatible with operation at the start of a variation, oscillation animation compatible with operation before a reach, oscillation animation not compatible with operation during an SP reach) being executed prior to the first animation symbol display animation. Therefore, by executing at least one of the oscillation animations—pre-oscillation animation, oscillation animation not compatible with operation at the start of a variation, oscillation animation compatible with operation before a reach, and oscillation animation not compatible with operation during an SP reach—as the first oscillation animation, it is possible to effectively increase the player's expectation that the second animation symbol display animation will be executed instead of the first animation symbol display animation.

(Strong cut-in)
As described above based on Figure 11(G), etc., a strong cut-in (an example of a "second operation response effect") is one of the cut-ins (see Figure 23(L)) that are operation response effects performed in response to the operation of the first performance button 35 during the effective period related to the first performance button operation promotion effect (see Figure 23(K)). Its probability of winning a jackpot is higher than that of a weak cut-in or a medium cut-in, and in this embodiment it is set to approximately 57% (see Figure 24).

Thus, since the strong cut-in has an extremely high probability of resulting in a jackpot (approximately 57%), it is clear that when a strong cut-in is executed, the probability of other effects (excluding the jackpot-indicating fluctuation effects) shown in Figure 24 being executed is higher than when other effects are executed.

Furthermore, while the strong cut-in is similar to the dialogue notification mentioned above in that it is an operation-responsive effect executed in response to the operation of the first effect button 35, as is clear from the notation in Figure 24, regardless of the manner in which the dialogue notification is executed, the strong cut-in has a higher probability of resulting in a jackpot than the dialogue notification. Moreover, when a strong cut-in is executed, the likelihood of triggering jackpot-in-in-related effects is higher than when a dialogue notification is executed.

(Winning indication fluctuation effect)
The winning indication shaking effect (see Figure 23(O)) is an effect in which the robot-shaped gimmick 15 shakes in response to the operation of the second action button 36 during the effective period related to the second action button operation promotion effect (see Figure 23(M)) when the SPSP Reach (second half battle) is in progress. As described above based on Figure 23(O), this winning indication shaking effect shakes the robot-shaped gimmick 15 at an extremely slow speed for 10 seconds, and if this winning indication shaking effect is executed, the winning notification effect (see Figure 23(R)) will always be executed afterward, so it can be said that the winning indication shaking effect is a jackpot-like effect in which a jackpot is highly likely when it occurs (see Figure 24).

The "Winning Hint" fluctuation effect is an effect that hints in advance that the winning notification effect will be executed. It is executed during a winning spin (a symbol variation where the winning notification effect, see Figure 23(R)), but not during a losing spin (a symbol variation where the losing notification effect, see Figure 23(T)), is executed.

In this embodiment of the gaming machine 1, nine combinations of repeating numbers are available as symbols that stop on the display screen 70 to announce a jackpot: "111," "222," "333," "444," "555," "666," "777," "888," and "999." However, in the jackpot indication oscillation effect, the oscillation pattern of the robot-type gimmick 15 is fixed regardless of the type of symbols that stop on the display screen 70 in the jackpot announcement effect. Regardless of which of the three symbols representing the repeating numbers stop, the robot-type gimmick 15 will oscillate at an extremely slow speed for 10 seconds.

The winning notification effects of this embodiment can be broadly classified into two types: a first-symbol display effect that displays multiple first-symbol displays (for example, three symbols showing even numbers) to indicate that a jackpot game will be played, and a second-symbol display effect that displays multiple second-symbol displays (for example, three symbols showing odd numbers) to indicate that a jackpot game will be played. The winning suggestion oscillation effect in this embodiment is an effect in which the robot-type gimmick 15 oscillates with a common oscillation pattern in both the winning suggestion oscillation effect when the first-symbol display effect is performed and the winning suggestion oscillation effect when the second-symbol display effect is performed.

As is clear from the explanation so far, the pre-reach swaying effect, the non-operational swaying effect at the start of the variation, the operation-responsive swaying effect before the reach, the non-operational swaying effect during the SP reach, and the win-indicating swaying effect all have different execution timings and swaying patterns of the robot-type gimmick 15. Regarding the swaying time of the robot-type gimmick 15, the win-indicating swaying effect has the longest duration.

As is clear from the explanation so far based on Figures 22 to 24, during the pre-animation sequence, which is the sequence leading up to the start of the SPSP reach (see Figure 23(J)) in the predictive target variation, at least one of the following oscillation sequences can be executed as oscillation sequences that cause the robot-type gimmick 15 to oscillate: a pre-oscillation sequence (see Figure 22(B)), an unresponsive oscillation sequence at the start of the variation (see Figure 23(B)), an unresponsive oscillation sequence before the reach (see Figure 23(E)), and an unresponsive oscillation sequence during the SP reach (see Figure 23(I)).

These fluctuating animations, which may be executed during the pre-animation sequence, are designed to make the player anticipate that the game will progress to an SPSP Reach where the second half of the battle takes place, or that an animation displaying the appearance of an ally character (see Figure 23(N)) or a fluctuating animation suggesting a win (see Figure 23(O)) will be executed during the second half of the battle. Therefore, in this embodiment, these fluctuating animations that may be executed during the pre-animation sequence are not executed during the subsequent animation sequence, which is the sequence that takes place after the SPSP Reach (see Figure 23(J)) has started in the pre-announcement target variation.

Furthermore, during subsequent animations, it is possible to execute a winning-indicating shaking animation (see Figure 23(O)) whose shaking pattern differs from the aforementioned shaking animations of the robot-type gimmick 15. However, if a configuration is easily adopted in which the winning-indicating shaking animation (see Figure 23(O)) is executed during a preceding animation, for example, before the pre-reach operation-responsive shaking animation (see Figure 23(E)), even if the pre-reach operation-responsive shaking animation is executed, it becomes impossible to make the player expect the winning-indicating shaking animation to be executed afterward. As a result, there is a concern that the appeal of the pre-reach operation-responsive shaking animation will be significantly reduced.

Therefore, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the winning indication fluctuation effect (see Figure 23(O)) can be executed during the subsequent effect, while the winning indication fluctuation effect is not executed during the preceding effect.

Furthermore, the execution timing of each oscillation effect illustrated in Figures 23 and 24 is not necessarily limited to the execution timing illustrated in this embodiment. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the oscillation effect that does not correspond to the operation at the start of the fluctuation (see Figure 23(B)) is executed during the subsequent effect with an extremely low probability of execution, or a configuration may be adopted in which the oscillation effect that suggests a win (see Figure 23(O)) is executed during the preceding effect with an extremely low probability of execution.

However, since adopting such a configuration may raise the concerns mentioned above, it is preferable to modify the configuration within the scope of a setup where, during the preceding sequence, other oscillation sequences (oscillation sequences other than the one indicating a win) are more likely to be executed than the one indicating a win, and during the subsequent sequence, the one indicating a win is more likely to be executed than other oscillation sequences (oscillation sequences other than the one indicating a win).

[Regarding the percentage of pre-emptive hype sequences being implemented]
Next, with reference to Figure 25, the execution rate of the pre-swing effect that can be performed in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment will be explained. Here, Figure 25 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the pre-swing effect. As described above, the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is configured to execute the pre-swing effect described above based on Figure 22(B), etc., when the effect is controlled by the sub-CPU 91 in normal effect mode (i.e., when the game is controlled by the main CPU 81 in normal game state). Furthermore, the sub-CPU 91 can also execute the pre-swing effect in the same manner as described above, based on Figure 22(B), etc., when the effect is controlled by the main CPU 81 in normal game state.

Here, referring to Figure 25, we will explain the execution rate of pre-swing animations in the normal game state (normal performance mode) and the execution rate of pre-swing animations in the probability variation game state (probability variation performance mode). First, we will explain the process executed by the main CPU 81 and sub-CPU 91 to execute the pre-swing animation based on the pre-determination information related to the right to determine the first special symbol, which has been reserved.

<Pre-determination processing and execution control of pre-swing animation based on first acquired information>
When a game ball enters the first start slot 21 during the display of the first special symbol variation in normal gameplay (normal performance mode) (or during the display of the second special symbol variation in probability variation gameplay (probability variation performance mode)), the main CPU 81 acquires first acquisition information such as a jackpot random number in response to this entry, and then stores the acquired first acquisition information in one of the hold storage areas 831 to 834 shown in Figure 26(A), described later, as information indicating that the right to judge the first special symbol related to the pre-read target variation is reserved. At that time, the main CPU 81 executes a pre-determination process based on the above first acquisition information before storing it in one of the hold storage areas 831 to 834, and transmits a hold command including pre-determination information indicating the result of the pre-determination process to the sub-control board 90 as information indicating that the right to judge the first special symbol is reserved.

In response, the sub-CPU 91, if the hold command received from the main control board 80 contains the above-mentioned pre-determination information, decides whether or not to execute the pre-oscillation effect based on that pre-determination information. If it decides to execute the pre-oscillation effect, it sends a hold icon display command instructing the execution of the pre-oscillation effect to the image and sound control board 100 and the lamp control board 120.

<Pre-determination processing and execution control of pre-swing effects based on second acquired information>
Next, the process executed by the main CPU 81 and sub-CPU 91 in order to execute a pre-swing animation based on the pre-determination information related to the right to determine the first special symbol will be explained. Specifically, when a game ball enters the second start port 22 during the display of the second special symbol's variation in the probability variation game state (probability variation animation mode), the main CPU 81 acquires second acquisition information such as a jackpot random number in response to this entry, and then stores the acquired second acquisition information in one of the hold storage areas 835 to 838 shown in Figure 26(A), which will be described later, as information indicating that the right to determine the second special symbol related to the pre-read target variation is reserved. At that time, the main CPU 81 executes a pre-determination process based on the above second acquisition information before it is stored in one of the hold storage areas 835 to 838, and transmits a hold command including the pre-determination information indicating the result of the pre-determination process to the sub-control board 90 as information indicating that the right to determine the second special symbol is reserved.

In response, the sub-CPU 91, if the hold command received from the main control board 80 contains the above-mentioned pre-determination information, decides whether or not to execute the pre-oscillation effect based on that pre-determination information. If it decides to execute the pre-oscillation effect, it sends a hold icon display command instructing the execution of the pre-oscillation effect to the image and sound control board 100 and the lamp control board 120.

<Pre-emptive staging based on first acquired information>
In connection with the execution of the above-mentioned pre-oscillation effects based on the first acquired information and the pre-oscillation effects based on the second acquired information, the main CPU 81 and sub-CPU 91 perform the above-mentioned processing, and Figure 25 illustrates the execution rates of the pre-oscillation effects under various conditions.

As illustrated in Figure 25, for example, if a game ball enters the first start slot 21 during the display of the first special symbol's variation in the normal game state (normal performance mode), and the right to determine the first special symbol is reserved and the first acquired information is obtained, and if pre-determination information is obtained indicating that the variation pattern of the first special symbol that will ultimately trigger a variation performance announcing the win or loss in a normal reach is selected at the start of the pre-read target variation, then if the result of the first special symbol determination identified based on that pre-determination information is "jackpot," the pre-fluctuation performance is executed with an execution rate of 8/100. If the result of this first special symbol determination is "miss," the pre-fluctuation performance is executed with an execution rate of 3/100.

Furthermore, as illustrated in Figure 25, for example, if a game ball enters the first start slot 21 during the display of the first special symbol's variation in the normal game state (normal performance mode), and the right to judge the first special symbol is reserved and the first acquired information is obtained, and if pre-determination information is obtained indicating that the variation pattern of the first special symbol that will ultimately trigger a variation performance announcing the win or loss in an SPSP reach is selected at the start of the pre-read target variation, then if the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment identified based on that pre-determination information is "jackpot," the pre-fluctuation performance is executed with an execution rate of 38/100. If the judgment result of this first special symbol judgment is "miss," the pre-fluctuation performance is executed with an execution rate of 13/100.

On the other hand, as illustrated in Figure 25, for example, if a game ball enters the first start slot 21 during the display of the second special symbol's variation in a probability variation game state (probability variation performance mode), and the right to determine the first special symbol is reserved and the first acquired information is obtained, then if the result of the first special symbol determination, which is identified from the pre-determination information obtained through the pre-determination processing based on this first acquired information, is "jackpot," then the pre-fluctuation performance is executed with an execution rate of 1/100. If the result of this first special symbol determination is "miss," then the pre-fluctuation performance is not executed (execution rate: 0/100).

As is clear from the explanation so far, even when executing the pre-swing animation in the same way based on the result of the pre-determination process related to the reserved right to determine the first special symbol, the execution rate of the pre-swing animation differs between the normal game state (normal animation mode) and the probability variation game state (probability variation animation mode). In this embodiment, it can be said that the probability of executing the pre-swing animation in response to the reserved right to determine the first special symbol is higher in the normal game state (normal animation mode) than in the probability variation game state (probability variation animation mode).

<Pre-emptive staging based on second acquired information>
Next, we will explain the pre-swing animation based on the second acquired information. As illustrated in Figure 25, for example, if a game ball enters the second start port 22 during the display of the second special symbol's variation in a probability variation game state (probability variation animation mode), and the right to judge the second special symbol is reserved and the second acquired information is acquired, and pre-judgment information is obtained indicating that the variation pattern of the second special symbol that will ultimately be used to announce the win or loss in an SP reach is selected at the start of the pre-read target variation, then if the judgment result of the second special symbol judgment identified based on that pre-judgment information is "jackpot", the pre-swing animation is executed with an execution rate of 10/100, and if the judgment result of this second special symbol judgment is "miss", the pre-swing animation is executed with an execution rate of 4/100.

Furthermore, as illustrated in Figure 25, for example, if a game ball enters the second start port 22 during the display of the second special symbol's variation in a probability variation game state (probability variation performance mode), and the right to judge the second special symbol is reserved and the second acquisition information is obtained, and if pre-determination information is obtained indicating that the variation pattern of the second special symbol that will ultimately trigger a variation performance announcing the win or loss in an SPSP reach is selected at the start of the pre-read target variation, then if the judgment result of the second special symbol judgment identified based on that pre-determination information is "jackpot," the pre-fluctuation performance is executed with an execution rate of 33/100. If the judgment result of this second special symbol judgment is "miss," the pre-fluctuation performance is executed with an execution rate of 11/100.

Up to this point, referring to Figure 25, we have explained the execution rate of the pre-swing animation performed in the normal game state (normal performance mode) and the execution rate of the pre-swing animation performed in the probability variation game state (probability variation performance mode). From this, it can be said that regardless of whether the right to judge the first special symbol is reserved or the right to judge the second special symbol is reserved, the first execution probability of the pre-swing animation being performed in the normal game state (normal performance mode) and the second execution probability of the pre-swing animation being performed in the probability variation game state (probability variation performance mode) are different from each other. In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the first execution probability is higher than the second execution probability.

Furthermore, even when the right to determine the first special symbol is reserved, the execution rate of the pre-flicker animation based on the pre-determination information related to that right differs depending on the game state (performance mode) at the time of the reservation.

Here, we have used the pre-spin animation as an example to explain the execution rate of pre-spin animations in normal gameplay (normal animation mode) and the execution rate of pre-spin animations in probability-increasing gameplay (probability-increasing animation mode). However, other animations (for example, win-indicating animations) may be executed in both normal gameplay (normal animation mode) and probability-increasing gameplay (probability-increasing animation mode) with a similar execution rate trend.

Furthermore, in the probability variation game state, it is advantageous to the right side, as shooting the game ball into the right game area 3R makes it easier to hit a jackpot than shooting it into the left game area 3L. As illustrated in Figures 6(B) and (C), all jackpots related to the second special symbol judgment are probability variation jackpots, whereas half of the jackpots related to the first special symbol judgment are regular jackpots. Therefore, executing a pre-swing animation in response to a game ball entering the first start opening 21 and the right to judge the first special symbol being reserved in the probability variation game state (probability variation performance mode) is undesirable because it may cause discomfort to the player.

Therefore, in the example shown in Figure 25, when a game ball enters the first starting port 21 during a probability variation game state (probability variation performance mode), and the right to determine the first special symbol is reserved, the pre-swing animation is executed at a rate of 1/100 only if the result of the first special symbol determination, which is specified by the pre-determination information, is "jackpot." However, this execution rate may be set to zero. In other words, when the right to determine the first special symbol is reserved in response to a game ball entering the first starting port 21 during a probability variation game state (probability variation performance mode), the pre-swing animation based on the pre-determination information related to this reservation may not be executed at all.

Thus, when the game is controlled in a probability variation game state (and the same applies to the time-saving game state), it is undesirable to execute pre-announcement effects such as pre-fluctuation effects based on pre-determination information related to the right to judge the reserved first special symbol. Therefore, when in a high base state (in this embodiment, the probability variation game state and the time-saving game state), it is conceivable to adopt a configuration in which the pre-determination processing itself related to the right to judge the reserved first special symbol is not executed. Accordingly, in Figure 28, which will be described later, when in a high base state (when "YES" is answered in step S218), the pre-determination processing in step S219 related to the right to judge the reserved first special symbol is not executed.

The following describes the RAM configuration of each control board and the processing performed by each control board, based on the diagrams up to Figure 25, which explain the game control and performance control functions described above.

[Example configuration of Main RAM 83]
Figure 26 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the memory areas of the main RAM 83 and the information stored in each memory area. As illustrated in Figure 26(A), the main RAM 83 is provided with the following memory areas for storing acquired information obtained when a game ball enters the first start opening 21: judgment memory area 830, special figure 1 first reserve memory area 831, special figure 1 second reserve memory area 832, special figure 1 third reserve memory area 833, and special figure 1 fourth reserve memory area 834. In addition, the main RAM 83 is provided with the above judgment memory area 830, special figure 2 first reserve memory area 835, special figure 2 second reserve memory area 836, special figure 2 third reserve memory area 837, and special figure 2 fourth reserve memory area 838.

The judgment memory area 830 is a memory area that stores various information used for special symbol judgment when the special symbol judgment is actually executed. Special Symbol 1, first hold memory area 831 to Special Symbol 1, fourth hold memory area 834 are memory areas that store various information related to the first special symbol judgment, while Special Symbol 2, first hold memory area 835 to Special Symbol 2, fourth hold memory area 838 are memory areas that store various information related to the second special symbol judgment. When both the first and second special symbol judgments are held, the second special symbol judgment is processed with priority over the first special symbol judgment. Therefore, when executing a held special symbol judgment, if the second special symbol judgment is held, the various information stored in Special Symbol 2, first hold memory area 835 is shifted to the judgment memory area 830; if only the first special symbol judgment is held, the various information stored in Special Symbol 1, first hold memory area 831 is shifted.

As illustrated in Figure 26(B), the reserved memory areas 831 to 838 are areas for storing information for reserving the right to determine special symbols, and each includes an area for storing jackpot random numbers acquired by the main CPU 81, an area for storing symbol random numbers, an area for storing reach random numbers, an area for storing variation pattern random numbers, and an area for storing pre-determination information, which is information indicating the pre-determination result.

Here, the jackpot random number, symbol random number, reach random number, and variation pattern random number are as described above. The pre-determination information is information obtained by the pre-determination process (see Figure 29) described later, based on the jackpot random number, symbol random number, reach random number, and variation pattern random number. Specifically, the pre-determination information includes information on the entry point, information indicating whether the result of the special symbol judgment is a jackpot, information indicating what type of jackpot it is if it is a jackpot, information indicating the variation pattern of the special symbol, and information indicating the game state of the game machine 1. Here, the entry point information is information indicating whether the jackpot random number, symbol random number, reach random number, and variation pattern random number stored in the same reserve memory area were acquired when the game ball entered the first entry point 21, or when the game ball entered the second entry point 22. This pre-determination information, including the information mentioned above, is stored in the same reserve memory area as the jackpot random number, symbol random number, reach random number, and variation pattern random number used in the pre-determination process.

In the game machine 1, each time a game ball enters the first starting opening 21, the five pieces of information described based on Figure 26(B) are stored sequentially in one of the special figure 1, first reserve storage area 831 to the special figure 1, fourth reserve storage area 834, starting from special figure 1, first reserve storage area 831. Furthermore, each time a game ball enters the second starting opening 22, the same five pieces of information are stored sequentially in one of the special figure 2, first reserve storage area 835 to the special figure 2, fourth reserve storage area 838, starting from special figure 2, first reserve storage area 835.

For example, if information is stored in the judgment memory area 830 and no information is stored in any of the special figure 1/first reserve memory areas 831 to 834, and a game ball enters the first start opening 21, then five pieces of information related to the first special symbol judgment, newly acquired in response to that entry, are stored in the special figure 1/first reserve memory area 831. Also, for example, if five pieces of information are stored in the judgment memory area 830, the special figure 1/first reserve memory area 831, and the special figure 1/second reserve memory area 832, and a game ball enters the first start opening 21, then five pieces of information related to the first special symbol judgment, newly acquired in response to that entry, are stored in the special figure 1/third reserve memory area 833.

Furthermore, when the first special symbol determination is performed, if the information stored in the special symbol 1/first reserved memory area 831 is shifted to the determination memory area 830, the information stored in the reserved memory areas related to the first special symbol determination, from the special symbol 1/second reserved memory area 832 onwards, is shifted to the special symbol 1/first reserved memory area 831. For example, if information is stored in each of the special symbol 1/first reserved memory areas 831 to 833, and the information stored in the special symbol 1/first reserved memory area 831 is shifted to the determination memory area 830, the information stored in the special symbol 1/second reserved memory area 832 is shifted to the special symbol 1/first reserved memory area 831, and the information stored in the special symbol 1/third reserved memory area 833 is shifted to the special symbol 1/second reserved memory area 832.

This type of information shifting is also performed in the special figure 2, first reserve storage area 835 to special figure 2, fourth reserve storage area 838, where information related to the second special figure determination is stored. In this embodiment of the gaming machine 1, when both the first and second special figure determinations are reserved, i.e., when information is stored in both the special figure 1, first reserve storage area 831 and the special figure 2, first reserve storage area 835, the shifting process targeting the special figure 2, first reserve storage area 835 to special figure 2, fourth reserve storage area 838 takes precedence over the shifting process targeting the special figure 1, first reserve storage area 831 to special figure 1, fourth reserve storage area 834.

Incidentally, even if a game ball enters the first start gate 21 or the second start gate 22 during the display of special symbols or during a jackpot game, and various random numbers are acquired, it is not possible to immediately perform special symbol judgment or display of special symbol fluctuations. Therefore, when various random numbers are acquired under such circumstances, the main CPU 81 stores the acquired random numbers, etc., as information reserving the right to judge special symbols in one of the reserved storage areas 831 to 838, as described above. On the other hand, if the special symbols are not being displayed, the special symbol judgment is not reserved, and a jackpot game is not in progress, the main CPU 81 directly stores the various random numbers, etc., acquired as a result of the ball entering the start gate in the judgment storage area 830.

[Interrupt processing by the main control board 80]
Next, the interrupt processing performed on the main control board 80 will be explained with reference to Figure 27. Here, Figure 27 is a flowchart illustrating the interrupt processing performed on the main control board 80. During normal operation, excluding special cases such as power-on or power-off, the main control board 80 repeatedly executes the series of processes illustrated in Figure 27 at regular intervals (for example, 4 milliseconds). The processing of the main control board 80, which will be explained based on the flowchart from Figure 27 onward, is performed according to instructions issued by the main CPU 81 based on the program stored in the main ROM 82.

First, the main CPU 81 performs a random number update process (step S1) to update various random numbers, including jackpot random numbers, symbol random numbers, reach random numbers, variation pattern random numbers, and normal symbol random numbers. Each time step S1 is performed, the jackpot random numbers, symbol random numbers, reach random numbers, variation pattern random numbers, and normal symbol random numbers are incremented by "1". A loop counter is used as the counter for this step S1 process, and each random number is reset to "0" and updated after reaching a preset maximum value.

Following the processing in step S1, the main CPU 81 executes a sensor detection process (step S2) that includes acquiring various random numbers in response to detection signals from the first start sensor 211, the second start sensor 221, and the gate sensor 251. This sensor detection process will be described in detail later based on Figure 28.

Following the processing in step S2, the main CPU 81 performs a special symbol determination, displays the special symbol in a variable manner on the first special symbol indicator 41 or the second special symbol indicator 42, and then performs special symbol processing, including stopping the display of the special symbol indicating the determination result of the special symbol determination (step S3). This special symbol processing will be described in detail later based on Figure 30.

Following the processing in step S3, the main CPU 81 performs a normal symbol determination, displays the normal symbols in a variable manner on the normal symbol display 43, and then performs normal symbol processing including stopping the normal symbol that indicates the result of the normal symbol determination (step S4).

Following the processing in step S4, the main CPU 81, after performing a normal pattern determination, determines that the second start port 22 should be opened. In this case, it controls the second start port solenoid 222, which operates the opening/closing member 23, to open and close the second start port 22 (step S5).

Following the processing in step S5, the main CPU 81, if it determines that a "jackpot" has been won in the jackpot determination process performed in the special symbol processing of step S3, executes a jackpot opening/closing control process (step S6) to control the first jackpot solenoid 262 (or the second jackpot solenoid 282) to open and close the first jackpot 26 (or the second jackpot 28). This jackpot opening/closing control process will be described in detail later based on Figures 34 to 36.

Following the processing in step S6, the main CPU 81 executes a prize ball processing operation (step S7) that controls the payout of prize balls according to the winning combination of game balls.

Following the processing in step S7, the main CPU 81 performs a transmission process (step S8) to send information necessary for determining various commands and performance content that were set (stored) in the main RAM 83 during the processing steps prior to step S7 to the sub-control board 90.

[Sensor detection processing by the main control board 80]
Figure 28 is a detailed flowchart of the sensor detection process in step S2 of Figure 27. As illustrated in Figure 28, following the random number update process in step S1, the main CPU 81 determines whether the gate sensor 251 has detected the passage of a game ball through the gate 25 based on the presence or absence of a detection signal input from the gate sensor 251 (step S201). If it is determined that the gate sensor 251 has detected the passage of a game ball through the gate 25 (step S201: YES), it is determined whether the number of reserved normal symbol judgments F stored in the main RAM 83 is less than the preset maximum number of reserved normal symbol judgments Fmax (in this embodiment, "4") (step S202).

If the main CPU 81 determines that the number of reserved balls F is less than "4" (step S202: YES), it updates the number of reserved balls F by adding "1" (step S203). It then obtains the value of the normal symbol random number, which is updated each time the random number update process in step S1 is performed, at the timing of detecting the passage of the game ball through the gate 25, and stores it in a predetermined area of the main RAM 83 (step S204).

On the other hand, when the main CPU 81 executes the process in step S204, if it determines that the gate sensor 251 has not detected the passage of a game ball through gate 25 (step S201: NO), or if it determines that the number of reserved balls F is not less than "4" (step S202: NO), it determines, based on the presence or absence of a detection signal input from the second start-up sensor 221, whether the second start-up sensor 221 has detected the entry of a game ball into the second start-up opening 22 (step S206). Here, if it determines that the second start-up sensor 221 has detected the entry of a game ball into the second start-up opening 22 (step S206: YES), it determines whether the number of reserved balls T2 for the second special symbol judgment stored in the main RAM 83 is less than the preset maximum number of reserved balls T2max for the second special symbol judgment (in this embodiment, "4") (step S207).

If the main CPU 81 determines that the number of reserved balls T2 is less than "4" (step S207: YES), it updates the number of reserved balls T2 by adding "1" (step S208). It then obtains the values for the jackpot random number, symbol random number, reach random number, and variation pattern random number, which are updated each time the random number update process in step S1 is performed, at the timing when the entry of a game ball into the second starting opening 22 is detected (step S209).

In this way, when the acquisition condition is met—that a game ball enters the second start opening 22 while the number of reserved balls T2 is less than the maximum number of reserved balls T2max—various random numbers related to the second special symbol determination are acquired. If the various random numbers are acquired in a situation where the second special symbol determination and the display of the second special symbol variation can be immediately executed, these random numbers are stored directly in the determination memory area 830. If the various random numbers are acquired in a situation where immediate execution is not possible, these random numbers are stored in one of the areas from the special symbol 2/first reserved memory area 835 to the special symbol 2/fourth reserved memory area 838.

When the main CPU 81 executes the process in step S209, it determines whether the current state is a high-base state or not (step S210). The main RAM 83 stores a time-saving game flag. This time-saving game flag is set to "OFF" when controlling the operation of the opening/closing member 23 to create a low-base state where it is difficult for game balls to enter the second start opening 22, and to "ON" when controlling the operation of the opening/closing member 23 to create a high-base state where it is easy for game balls to enter the second start opening 22. In step S210, the main CPU 81 determines whether the current state is a high-base state or not based on whether this time-saving game flag is set to "ON".

If the main CPU 81 determines that the current state is a high base state (step S210: YES), that is, if the time-saving game flag is set to "ON", it executes a pre-determination process related to the holding of the second special symbol judgment (step S211). Specifically, based on the various random numbers obtained in response to the game ball entering the second start opening 22, prior to the execution of the jackpot judgment process (see Figure 31) and the variation pattern selection process (see Figure 32) described later, it pre-determines whether or not a jackpot will occur based on the various random numbers obtained in the process of step S209, and also pre-determines which variation pattern will be selected as the variation pattern of the second special symbol when the second special symbol judgment is executed. The pre-determination information, which is the result of this pre-determination process, is stored in the same holding memory area where the jackpot random numbers used in the pre-determination process are stored.

Furthermore, if a game ball enters the second start port 22 when it is not during a jackpot game, nor when the special symbol is being displayed, and the number of reserved balls T2 for the second special symbol judgment is "0", the various random numbers acquired in response to that entry are directly stored in the judgment memory area 830, and the second special symbol judgment based on these random numbers is immediately executed. In this case, since the second special symbol judgment is not reserved, no pre-determination processing related to the second special symbol judgment is performed. This pre-determination processing will be described in detail later with reference to Figure 29.

If the main CPU 81 executes the process in step S211, or determines that the system is not in a high base state (step S210: NO), it sets a hold command related to the second special symbol determination in the main RAM 83 (step S212). This hold command notifies that the second special symbol determination has been held, and it is transmitted to the sub-control board 90 by the transmission process in step S8. If the process in step S212 is performed without the pre-determination process in step S211, a hold command without pre-determination information is transmitted to the sub-control board 90. On the other hand, if the process in step S212 is performed after the pre-determination process in step S211, a hold command including pre-determination information is transmitted to the sub-control board 90.

On the other hand, if the main CPU 81 executes the process in step S212, and determines that the second start-up sensor 221 has not detected a game ball entering the second start-up opening 22 (step S206: NO), or determines that the number of reserved entries T2 for the second special symbol judgment is not less than "4" (step S207: NO), it determines whether the first start-up sensor 211 has detected a game ball entering the first start-up opening 21 based on the presence or absence of a detection signal input from the first start-up sensor 211 (step S214). Here, if it determines that the first start-up sensor 211 has detected a game ball entering the first start-up opening 21 (step S214: YES), it determines whether the number of reserved entries T1 for the first special symbol judgment stored in the main RAM 83 is less than the preset maximum number of reserved entries T1max for the first special symbol judgment (in this embodiment, "4") (step S215).

If the main CPU 81 determines that the number of reserved balls T1 is less than "4" (step S215: YES), it updates the number of reserved balls T1 by adding "1" (step S216). It then obtains the values for the jackpot random number, symbol random number, reach random number, and variation pattern random number, which are updated each time the random number update process in step S1 is performed, at the timing when the game ball enters the first starting opening 21 (step S217).

Thus, when the acquisition condition is met—that the number of reserved balls T1 is less than the maximum number of reserved balls T1max—and the entry of a game ball into the first start opening 21 is detected, various random numbers related to the first special symbol determination are acquired. If the various random numbers are acquired in a situation where the first special symbol determination and the display of the first special symbol variation can be immediately executed, these random numbers are stored directly in the determination memory area 830. If the various random numbers are acquired in a situation where immediate execution is not possible, these random numbers are stored in one of the areas from the first reserved ball storage area 831 to the fourth reserved ball storage area 834 of the special symbol 1.

If the main CPU 81 executes the process in step S217, it determines whether the current state is a high-base state (step S218), similar to the process in step S210. If it determines that the current state is not a high-base state (step S218: NO), i.e., if the time-saving game flag is set to "OFF", it executes a pre-determination process related to the holding of the first special symbol judgment (step S219). Specifically, based on the various random numbers acquired in response to the game ball entering the first start opening 21, prior to the execution of the jackpot judgment process (see Figure 31) and the variation pattern selection process (see Figure 32) described later, it pre-determines whether a jackpot will occur based on the various random numbers acquired in step S217, and also pre-determines which variation pattern will be selected as the variation pattern for the first special symbol when the first special symbol judgment is executed. The pre-determination information, which is the result of this pre-determination process, is stored in the same holding memory area where the jackpot random numbers used in the pre-determination process are stored.

Furthermore, if a game ball enters the first start opening 21 when the number of reserved balls T1 for the first special symbol judgment is "0" (not during a jackpot game or when special symbols are being displayed), the various random numbers acquired in response to that entry are directly stored in the judgment memory area 830, and the first special symbol judgment based on these random numbers is immediately executed. In this case, the first special symbol judgment is not reserved, and therefore no prior judgment processing related to the first special symbol judgment is performed. This prior judgment processing will be described in detail later based on Figure 29.

If the main CPU 81 executes the process in step S219, or determines that a high base state is in effect (step S218: YES), it sets a hold command related to the first special symbol determination in the main RAM 83 (step S220). This hold command notifies that the first special symbol determination has been held, and is transmitted to the sub-control board 90 by the transmission process in step S8. If the process in step S220 is performed without the pre-determination process in step S219, a hold command without pre-determination information is transmitted to the sub-control board 90. On the other hand, if the process in step S220 is performed after the pre-determination process in step S219, a hold command including pre-determination information is transmitted to the sub-control board 90.

[Pre-determination processing by the main control board 80]
The pre-determination process performed by the main control board 80 will now be explained with reference to Figure 29. Figure 29 is a detailed flowchart of the pre-determination process in steps S211 and S219 of Figure 28. Here, the explanation will use the pre-determination process performed when the right to determine the first special symbol is reserved as an example, but the same pre-determination process will be performed when the right to determine the second special symbol is reserved, except that the random numbers and tables used are different.

If the main CPU 81 determines in step S210 of Figure 28 that the system is in a high-base state (step S210: YES), or if it determines in step S218 of Figure 28 that the system is not in a high-base state (step S218: NO), it executes a jackpot determination process (step S2191). Specifically, if the system is in a low-probability state (in this embodiment, this corresponds to the "normal game state" or the "time-saving game state"), it reads the jackpot random number table for low-probability states (see Figure 6(A)) from the main ROM 82 and sets it in the main RAM 83. On the other hand, if the system is in a high-probability state (in this embodiment, this corresponds to the "probability variation game state"), it reads the jackpot random number table for high-probability states (see Figure 6(A)) from the main ROM 82 and sets it in the main RAM 83. Then, based on whether the jackpot random number obtained in step S209 of Figure 28 (or in step S217 of Figure 28) matches any of the winning values stored in the jackpot random number table set in the main RAM 83, it is determined whether or not a jackpot will be determined at the start of the spin.

Next, the main CPU 81 determines, based on the result of step S2191, whether or not a jackpot is determined at the start of the variation (step S2192). If it determines that a jackpot is determined at the start of the variation (step S2192: YES), the jackpot variation pattern selection table is read from the main ROM 82 and set in the main RAM 83 (step S2193).

On the other hand, if the main CPU 81 determines that it is not a jackpot at the start of the spin (step S2192: NO), it determines whether or not a reach animation will occur during the spin (step S2194). Specifically, it determines whether or not a reach animation will occur during the spin based on whether or not the reach random number obtained together with the jackpot random number used in the jackpot determination process in step S2191 matches the winning value of the reach random number stored in the main ROM 82.

If the main CPU 81 determines that a reach animation is about to occur (step S2194: YES), it reads the variation pattern selection table for failed reaches from the main ROM 82 and sets it in the main RAM 83 (step S2195).

By the way, if the result of the first special symbol judgment is "miss" and no reach animation occurs during that spin, the variation pattern of the first special symbol is determined based on the number of reserved first special symbol judgments at the start of that spin. Furthermore, the number of reserved first special symbol judgments may differ before and after the reserved first special symbol judgments are consumed. Therefore, the variation pattern of the special symbol obtained before the first special symbol judgment is consumed may differ from the variation pattern of the special symbol selected when that first special symbol judgment is actually consumed. In other words, for the right to a first special symbol judgment in which no reach animation occurs during that spin, it may not be possible to obtain the accurate variation pattern of the first special symbol prior to that first special symbol judgment.

Therefore, if the main CPU 81 determines that no reach animation will occur (step S2194: NO), the process proceeds to step S212 (or step S220) in Figure 28 without performing the random number determination process in step S2196 (described later) or the process of storing the pre-determination information in step S2197. Thus, if the special symbol determination result is "miss" and a no-reach animation is performed, a hold command without pre-determination information will be set.

However, if a variation pattern is prepared for non-reach misses, regardless of the number of reserved balls at the start of the variation, it becomes possible to identify the variation pattern of the special symbol selected at the start of the pre-read variation through a pre-determination process. Therefore, for such variation patterns, it is possible to execute the processes described in step S2196 (the process of identifying the variation pattern selected at the start of the variation) and step S2197.

The main CPU 81, after setting the jackpot pattern selection table or the reach-miss pattern selection table, executes a random number determination process for the variation pattern (step S2196). Specifically, based on which random number in the variation pattern selection table set in the main RAM 83 matches the jackpot random number used in the process of step S2191, along with the random number obtained when the ball enters the starting slot, the CPU identifies the variation pattern of the special symbol that will be selected in the special symbol determination performed at the start of the variation.

When the main CPU 81 executes the process in step S2196, it generates pre-determination information and stores it in the main RAM 83 (step S2197). The area where this pre-determination information is stored is as described above, based on Figure 26.

Thus, the main CPU 81, based on the acquired information such as the jackpot random number obtained when a game ball enters the first starting opening 21 (or the second starting opening 22), acquires the variation pattern (i.e., variation time) of the first special symbol (or the second special symbol) before performing the jackpot determination process and variation pattern selection process based on this acquired information.

[Special pattern processing by the main control board 80]
Next, with reference to Figure 30, the details of the special pattern processing performed by the main control board 80 will be described. Here, Figure 30 is a detailed flowchart of the special pattern processing in step S3 of Figure 27.

As illustrated in Figure 30, the main CPU 81 determines whether a jackpot game is in progress based on whether the jackpot game flag stored in the main RAM 83 is set to "ON" (step S301). This jackpot game flag indicates whether a jackpot game is currently being played; it is set to "ON" at the start of the jackpot game and to "OFF" at the end of the jackpot game. If it is determined that a jackpot game is in progress (step S301: YES), the process proceeds to the normal symbol processing in step S4.

If the main CPU 81 determines that a jackpot game is not currently in progress (Step S301: NO), it determines whether or not the special symbol is currently being displayed (Step S302). If it determines that the special symbol is not currently being displayed (Step S302: NO), it determines whether the number of reserved symbols T2 stored in the main RAM 83 for the second special symbol determination is "1" or greater (Step S303). If it determines that the number of reserved symbols T2 is "1" or greater (Step S303: YES), it updates the number of reserved symbols T2 to a value obtained by subtracting "1" (Step S304).

If the main CPU 81 determines that the number of reserved symbols T2 is not "1" or greater (step S303: NO), it determines whether the number of reserved symbols T1 for the first special symbol judgment stored in the main RAM 83 is "1" or greater (step S305). If it determines that the number of reserved symbols T1 is "1" or greater (step S305: YES), it updates the number of reserved symbols T1 to a value obtained by subtracting "1" (step S306).

When the main CPU 81 executes the process in step S304 or step S306, it executes a shift process for the reserved storage area of the main RAM 83 (step S307). Specifically, when step S307 is executed following step S304, a shift process is executed to shift the information stored in the first reserved storage area 835 (Figure 2) to the determination storage area 830. If information is also stored in the reserved storage areas from the second reserved storage area 836 onwards (Figure 2), a shift process is also executed to shift this information to the first reserved storage area 835 (Figure 2). On the other hand, when the shift process is executed following step S306, a shift process is executed to shift the information stored in the first reserved storage area 831 (Figure 1) to the determination storage area 830. If information is also stored in the reserved storage areas from the second reserved storage area 832 onwards (Figure 1), a shift process is also executed to shift this information to the first reserved storage area 831 (Figure 1).

The main CPU 81 stores the information necessary for determining the second special symbol (or first special symbol), such as the jackpot random number and the symbol random number, in the determination memory area 830 through the shift process in step S307. Based on this information, it then executes the jackpot determination process in step S308 and the variation pattern selection process in step S309.

Furthermore, if a game ball enters the first starting slot 21 (or second starting slot 22) when both the number of reserved balls T1 for the first special symbol judgment and the number of reserved balls T2 for the second special symbol judgment are "0", the information such as the jackpot random number and symbol random number acquired in response to that entry is directly stored in the judgment storage area 830. In such cases, the jackpot judgment process and the variation pattern selection process are executed without the shift process in step S307.

The main CPU 81 executes a jackpot determination process based on random numbers stored in the determination memory area 830 (step S308). This jackpot determination process determines whether or not a jackpot has been won, and if so, the type of jackpot (jackpot symbol) is determined. Then, special symbol setting information indicating the results of these processes is set in the main RAM 83. This jackpot determination process will be described in detail later with reference to Figure 31.

Following the jackpot determination process in step S308, the main CPU 81 executes a variation pattern selection process to select a variation pattern for the special symbols (step S309). This variation pattern selection process will be described in detail later based on Figure 32.

Following the processing in step S309, the main CPU 81 sets a variation start command in the main RAM 83 (step S310). This command includes the special symbol setting information set in step S308, information indicating whether this special symbol setting information relates to the first special symbol determination or the second special symbol determination, the variation pattern setting information selected in step S309, and information regarding the game state of the gaming machine 1. This variation start command instructs the start of the performance associated with the variation display of the special symbols, and is transmitted to the sub-control board 90 by the transmission process in step S8. This initiates the variation performance, including the variation display of the performance symbols on the display screen 70.

Following the processing in step S310, the main CPU 81 starts displaying the special symbol's variation based on the variation pattern setting information included in the variation start command set in step S310 (step S311). If the processing in steps S308 to S310 is performed with information related to the first special symbol's determination stored in the determination storage area 830, the first special symbol's variation display on the first special symbol display unit 41 begins. On the other hand, if the processing in steps S308 to S310 is performed with information related to the second special symbol's determination stored in the determination storage area 830, the second special symbol's variation display on the second special symbol display unit 42 begins.

Next, the main CPU 81 begins measuring the elapsed time since the special symbol variation display started in step S311 (step S312). If the main CPU 81 has executed the process in step S312, or has determined that the special symbol variation display is in progress (step S302: YES), it determines whether the elapsed time measured in step S312 has reached the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection process in step S309 (step S313). If it is determined that the elapsed time has not reached the variation time (step S313: NO), the process proceeds to the normal symbol processing in step S4.

When the main CPU 81 determines that the elapsed time has reached the variation time (step S313: YES), it sets a variation termination command in the main RAM 83 to notify that the variation display of the special symbol has ended (step S314). This variation termination command is transmitted to the sub-control board 90 by the transmission process in step S8. This triggers processes such as stopping the display of the variation symbols on the display screen 70 in a manner that indicates the result of the special symbol determination.

Following the processing in step S314, the main CPU 81 terminates the display of the special symbol variation that was started in step S311 (step S315). Specifically, the special symbol (winning symbol or losing symbol) set in step S308 is stopped on the special symbol display that was displaying the variation. This stopped display of the special symbol continues until at least a predetermined symbol confirmation time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) has elapsed.

In this manner, the main CPU 81 displays the special symbols in a variable manner on the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42, and then displays the special symbol indicating the result of the jackpot determination process (jackpot symbol or losing symbol) in a fixed position on the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42.

Following the processing in step S315, the main CPU 81 resets the elapsed time that began measuring in step S312 (step S316) and executes special symbol stop processing, including processing to start the jackpot game if a jackpot is achieved (step S317). This special symbol stop processing will be described in detail later based on Figure 33.

[Big win determination processing by the main control board 80]
Figure 31 is a detailed flowchart of the jackpot determination process in step S308 of Figure 30. First, the main CPU 81 performs a jackpot determination based on the jackpot random number stored in the determination memory area 830 (step S3081). Specifically, it determines whether or not it is a jackpot based on whether or not the jackpot random number stored in the determination memory area 830 matches a pre-set winning value (see Figure 6(A)). The winning value here is the winning value for a jackpot defined in the high-probability jackpot random number table or the low-probability jackpot random number table. When the jackpot determination is performed in a high-probability state (in this embodiment, this corresponds to the "probability variation game state"), the winning value stored in the high-probability jackpot random number table is used. On the other hand, when the jackpot determination is performed in a low-probability state (in this embodiment, this corresponds to the "normal game state" and the "time-saving game state"), the winning value stored in the low-probability jackpot random number table is used.

Thus, when the main CPU 81 finds that the acquisition information, such as the jackpot random number obtained when a game ball enters the first or second start opening 21, is stored in the determination memory area 830, it determines whether or not to execute a jackpot game that is advantageous to the player, based on that jackpot random number.

Following the processing in step S3081, the main CPU 81 determines whether the jackpot determination result is a "jackpot" (step S3082). If it determines that the jackpot determination result is not a "jackpot" (step S3082: NO), i.e., the jackpot determination result is a "miss," the setting information for the missing symbol is set in the main RAM 83 (step S3083). As a result, during the processing in step S315, the missing symbol set here will be stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42. In this case, the jackpot game is not played.

Meanwhile, if the main CPU 81 determines that the result of the jackpot determination is "jackpot" (step S3082: YES), it executes a jackpot symbol selection process to select a jackpot symbol to be stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42 (step S3084). Specifically, if the symbol random number stored in the determination storage area 830 along with the jackpot random number used in the jackpot determination in step S3081 is related to the first special symbol determination, it selects one of the jackpot symbols based on whether that symbol random number matches the random value of a jackpot symbol defined in the symbol determination table for the first start-up entry (see Figure 6(B)). In this case, one of the jackpot symbols X1 to X2 exemplified in Figure 6(B) is selected. Furthermore, if the random number for the symbol is related to the determination of the second special symbol, one of the jackpot symbols is selected based on whether that random number matches the random value of a jackpot symbol specified in the symbol determination table for the second starting slot. In this case, one of the jackpot symbols Y1 to Y4 exemplified in Figure 6(C) is selected.

Then, the main CPU 81 sets the setting information for the selected jackpot symbol in the main RAM 83 (step S3085). As a result, during the processing in step S315, the jackpot symbol set here is displayed on the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42, and then the jackpot game corresponding to that jackpot symbol is played.

[Selection process of variation pattern by the main control board 80]
Figure 32 is a detailed flowchart of the variation pattern selection process in step S309 of Figure 30. After executing the jackpot determination process in step S308 of Figure 30, the main CPU 81 determines whether the result of step S3081 is a jackpot (step S3091). If it is determined to be a jackpot (step S3091: YES), the jackpot variation pattern selection table is read from the main ROM 82 and set in the main RAM 83 (step S3092).

On the other hand, if the main CPU 81 determines that it is not a jackpot (step S3091: NO), it determines whether or not to perform a reach animation that makes the player expect a jackpot, based on whether the reach random number stored in the judgment memory area 830 matches the winning value of the reach random number stored in the main ROM 82 (random value corresponding to the reach animation) (step S3093). If it determines to perform a reach animation (step S3093: YES), it reads the variation pattern selection table for reach misses from the main ROM 82 and sets it in the main RAM 83 (step S3094). Conversely, if it determines not to perform a reach animation (step S3093: NO), it reads the variation pattern selection table for no-reach misses from the main ROM 82 and sets it in the main RAM 83 (step S3095).

The main CPU 81 executes a random number determination process for the random number of

The main CPU 81, upon selecting a variation pattern, sets the setting information for the selected variation pattern in the main RAM 83 (step S3097). This variation pattern setting information, along with the symbol setting information set in the main RAM 83 by the jackpot determination process described in step S308, is included in the variation start command and transmitted to the sub-control board 90.

[Processing when special feature stops by the main control board 80]
Figure 33 is a detailed flowchart of the special feature stop processing in step S317 of Figure 30. After resetting the elapsed time by the processing in step S316, the main CPU 81 determines whether or not it is a jackpot, as illustrated in Figure 33, in the same way as the processing in step S3082 (see Figure 31) (step S3171). If it is determined to be a jackpot (step S3171: YES), the jackpot game flag stored in the main RAM 83 is set to "ON" (step S3172).

Next, the main CPU 81 sets the probability variation game flag stored in the main RAM 83 to "OFF" (step S3173), and also sets the time-saving game flag, also stored in the main RAM 83, to "OFF" (step S3174). Here, the probability variation game flag indicates whether or not the game is in a high-probability state where the probability of a jackpot being determined in the special symbol judgment is relatively high.

In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the game state is controlled by setting the probability variation game flag and the time reduction game flag. Specifically, when controlling the game state to the "probability variation game state," both the probability variation game flag and the time reduction game flag are set to "ON." When controlling the game state to the "normal game state," both the probability variation game flag and the time reduction game flag are set to "OFF." Furthermore, when controlling the game state to the "time reduction game state," the probability variation game flag is set to "OFF" and the time reduction game flag is set to "ON."

Following the processing in step S3174, the main CPU 81 sets an opening command in the main RAM 83 to notify that a jackpot game has started (step S3175). This opening command includes information such as the type of jackpot and the opening pattern of the first jackpot entry point 26 (or the second jackpot entry point 28 or V-entry point 287) during the jackpot game, and is transmitted to the sub-control board 90 by the transmission process in step S8.

On the other hand, if the main CPU 81 determines that it is not a jackpot (step S3171: NO), it determines whether the probability variation game flag is set to "ON" (step S3176). If it determines that the probability variation game flag is set to "ON" (step S3176: YES), that is, if the special symbol judgment is being performed in a high-probability state, it updates the remaining high-probability game count K stored in the main RAM 83 by subtracting "1" (step S3177). This remaining high-probability game count K indicates the remaining number of times the special symbol judgment will be performed in a high-probability state.

Following the processing in step S3177, the main CPU 81 determines whether the remaining number of high-probability games K is "0" (step S3178). If it determines that the remaining number of high-probability games K is "0" (step S3178: YES), the probability variation game flag is set to "OFF" (step S3179). This causes the special symbol judgment to be performed in a low-probability state.

If the main CPU 81 executes the process in step S3179, and determines that the probability variation game flag is not set to "ON" (step S3176: NO), or determines that the remaining number of high probability game rounds K is not "0" (step S3178: NO), it determines whether the time-saving game flag is set to "ON" (step S3180). If it determines that the time-saving game flag is set to "ON" (step S3180: YES), it updates the remaining number of time-saving game rounds J stored in the main RAM 83 by subtracting "1" (step S3181). This remaining number of time-saving game rounds J indicates the remaining number of times the special symbol judgment will be performed in the time-saving state (high base state).

Following the processing in step S3181, the main CPU 81 determines whether the remaining number of time-saving game rounds J is "0" (step S3182). If it determines that the remaining number of time-saving game rounds J is "0" (step S3182: YES), the time-saving game flag is set to "OFF" (step S3183). This disables the support function that facilitates the entry of game balls into the second starting opening 22.

[Main control board 80 controls opening and closing of the main prize slot]
Figures 34 to 36 are detailed flowcharts of the opening and closing control process for the jackpot in step S6 of Figure 27. Following the opening and closing control process for the second start gate in step S5 of Figure 27, the main CPU 81 determines whether the jackpot game flag is set to "ON" or not, as illustrated in Figure 34 (step S601). If it is determined that the jackpot game flag is not set to "ON" (step S601: NO), the process proceeds to the prize ball processing in step S7.

If the main CPU 81 determines that the jackpot game flag is set to "ON" (step S601: YES), it determines whether the game is in the opening period of the jackpot game based on whether the elapsed time since setting the opening command related to the jackpot game (for example, by the process in step S3175, see Figure 33) has reached a predetermined opening time (step S602).

If the main CPU 81 determines that the opening period for a jackpot game is underway (step S602: YES), it determines whether the opening time has elapsed (step S603). If it determines that the opening time has not elapsed (step S603: NO), the process proceeds to the prize ball processing in step S7. On the other hand, if the main CPU 81 determines that the opening time has elapsed (step S603: YES), it sets the number of rounds Rmax, operation pattern, etc., for the jackpot game and stores this setting information in the main RAM 103 (step S604). Specifically, the main CPU 81 sets the number of rounds Rmax based on the opening patterns of the large prize slots in each jackpot as illustrated in Figures 6(B) and (C), and sets the operation patterns of the opening/closing members 27, 29, and 285 respectively so that the first large prize slot 26, the second large prize slot 28, and the V prize slot 287 open according to the opening pattern corresponding to the type of jackpot.

When the process in step S604 is executed, various times related to the jackpot game are also set, including the interval time (the time between the end of one round of gameplay and the start of the next) and the ending time (after the final round of gameplay).

When the main CPU 81 executes the process in step S604, it updates the round number R stored in the main RAM 83 to a value obtained by adding "1" (step S605). This round number R is set to "0" before the start of a jackpot game, and is updated to a value obtained by adding "1" each time the process in step S605 is executed.

The main CPU 81, following the processing in step S605, determines whether the number of rounds R updated in step S605 is "1" (step S606). In this embodiment, as described above based on Figures 6(B) and (C), for all jackpots, the second large prize slot 28 is used for the first round of gameplay, and the first large prize slot 26 is used for the second round and subsequent rounds of gameplay. Therefore, if the main CPU 81 determines that the number of rounds R is "1" (step S606: YES), it starts the second large prize slot opening/closing control, which controls the opening and closing of the second large prize slot 28 (and the V prize slot 287) via the second large prize slot solenoid 282 (and the V prize slot solenoid 286) (step S607). Then, it sets a second large prize slot opening/closing round game start command in the main RAM 83 to notify that a round game in which the second large prize slot 28 is opened and closed is about to begin (step S808).

On the other hand, if the main CPU 81 determines that the number of rounds R updated in step S605 is not "1" (step S606: NO), that is, if the number of rounds R is "2" or greater, it starts the first large prize opening/closing control, which controls the opening and closing of the first large prize opening 26 via the first large prize opening solenoid 262 (step S609).

Following the processing in step S609, the main CPU 81 sets a command to start the first large prize slot opening/closing round game in the main RAM 83, notifying that a round game involving opening and closing the first large prize slot 26 is about to begin (step S610).

Furthermore, the command to start the second large prize slot opening/closing round game, set in step S608, and the command to start the first large prize slot opening/closing round game, set in step S610, are transmitted to the sub-control board 90 by the transmission process in step S8 shown in Figure 27.

On the other hand, if the main CPU 81 determines in step S602 that it is not the opening period of the jackpot game (step S602: NO), it determines whether it is the ending period of the jackpot game (step S613). Specifically, it determines whether it is the ending period based on whether the elapsed time since the end of the final round of the jackpot game has reached a predetermined ending time. If it is determined that it is the ending period (step S613: YES), the process proceeds to step S626 (see Figure 36), which will be described later.

If the main CPU 81 determines that it is not the ending period of a jackpot game (step S613: NO), it determines whether it is the interval period based on whether a predetermined interval time has elapsed since the end of the previous round of gameplay (step S614). If it determines that it is not the interval period (step S614: NO), the process proceeds to step S617 (see Figure 35), which will be described later.

If the main CPU 81 determines that it is currently in an interval period (step S614: YES), it determines whether the interval time set in step S604 has elapsed since the end of the previous round of gameplay (step S615). If it determines that the interval time has not elapsed (step S615: NO), the process proceeds to the prize ball processing in step S7. Conversely, if it determines that the interval time has elapsed (step S615: YES), the processes from step S605 onwards described above are executed.

If the main CPU 81 determines that it is not the interval period (step S614: NO), that is, if it is in the middle of a round of play, it determines whether the second large prize slot 28 is open or not, as illustrated in Figure 35 (step S617). Specifically, after executing the process in step S607, it determines whether the second large prize slot 28 is open or not based on whether either of the following conditions is met: a first termination condition for the opening and closing control of the second large prize slot 28, which is that a predetermined number of game balls enter the slot from the start of opening, and a second termination condition for the opening and closing control of the second large prize slot 28, which is that a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed from the start of opening. If neither the first nor the second termination condition is met, it can be determined that the second large prize slot 28 is open. If it is determined that the second major prize gate 28 is not open (Step S617: NO), the process proceeds to Step S621, which will be described later.

On the other hand, if the main CPU 81 determines that the second large prize slot 28 is open (step S616: YES), it determines whether the game ball has passed through the V prize slot 287 based on the presence or absence of a detection signal from the V prize slot sensor 283 (step S618). If it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the V prize slot 287 (step S618: NO), the process proceeds to step S621, which will be described later.

The main CPU 81, upon determining that the game ball has passed through the V-entry slot 287 (step S618: YES), sets the V-entry flag stored in the main RAM 83 to "ON" (step S619). This V-entry flag indicates whether or not the game ball has passed through the V-entry slot 287 (i.e., whether or not the game ball has entered the V-entry slot). While normally set to "OFF," it is set to "ON" when the V-entry slot sensor 283 detects the passage of the game ball.

Following the processing in step S619, the main CPU 81 sets a V-winning command in the main RAM 83 to notify that the game ball has entered the V-slot (step S620).

If the main CPU 81 executes the process in step S620, and determines that the second large prize slot 28 is not open (step S617: NO), or that the game ball has not passed through the V prize slot 287 (step S618: NO), it determines whether the opening and closing control of the second large prize slot (or the opening and closing control of the first

If the main CPU 81 determines that the control of opening and closing the large prize slot has finished (step S621: YES), it determines whether the number of rounds R stored in the main RAM 83 matches the number of rounds Rmax set in step S604 (step S622). If it is determined that the number of rounds R does not match the number of rounds Rmax (step S622: NO), the process proceeds to the prize ball processing in step S7.

If the main CPU 81 determines that the number of rounds R matches the number of rounds Rmax (step S622: YES), it starts measuring the ending time, which is the elapsed time since the start of the ending period (step S623), and sets an ending command in the main RAM 83 to notify that the ending period has started (step S624). This ending command is transmitted to the sub-control board 90 by the transmission process in step S8.

On the other hand, if the main CPU 81 determines in step S613 in Figure 34 that the game is in the ending period (step S613: YES), it determines whether the ending time has elapsed (step S626), as illustrated in Figure 36. Specifically, it determines whether the ending time has elapsed based on whether the ending time measured in step S623 has reached the ending time set in step S604. If it is determined that the ending time has not elapsed (step S626: NO), the process proceeds to the prize ball processing in step S7.

If the main CPU 81 determines that the ending time has elapsed (step S626: YES), it determines whether the V-winning flag stored in the main RAM 83 is set to "ON" (step S627). If it determines that the V-winning flag is set to "ON" (step S627: YES), it sets the probability variation game flag stored in the main RAM 83 to "ON" (step S628), sets the remaining high-probability game count K stored in the main RAM 83 to "100" (step S629), and, although not shown in Figure 36, sets the V-winning flag stored in the main RAM 83 to "OFF".

If the main CPU 81 has executed the process in step S629, or if it has determined that the V-winning flag is not set to "ON" (step S627: NO), it sets the time-saving game flag to "ON" (step S630). Then, for example, based on the information indicating the type of jackpot included in the opening command set in the main RAM 83 by the process in step S3175 (see Figure 33), it determines whether the jackpot that triggered the execution of this jackpot game is a jackpot with a time-saving round count of "100" (in this embodiment, 3R probability variation A, 10R probability variation A, or 3R probability variation B: see Figures 6(B) and (C)) (step S631).

The main CPU 81 determines that the jackpot triggering this jackpot game resulted in a jackpot with 100 bonus rounds (Step S631: YES), then sets the remaining bonus rounds J to 200 (Step S632). If it determines that the jackpot did not result in 100 bonus rounds (Step S631: NO), then sets the remaining bonus rounds J to 100 (Step S633). In either Step S632 or Step S633, the jackpot game flag is set to OFF (Step S634).

[Interrupt processing by sub-control board 90]
When the power to the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the sub-CPU 91 of the sub-control board 90 sets the interrupt period, which is the period for performing the interrupt processing described later. The sub-CPU 91 then repeats a random number update process, which updates the random numbers used to determine the content of the game's presentation, at a predetermined period shorter than the interrupt period. In other words, while the gaming machine 1 is running, the sub-CPU 91 repeats the random number update process at the predetermined period and also repeats the interrupt processing at the interrupt period.

The interrupt processing performed on the sub-control board 90 will now be explained with reference to Figure 37. Figure 37 is a flowchart illustrating the interrupt processing performed on the sub-control board 90. The sub-CPU 91 repeatedly executes the series of processes exemplified in Figure 37 at regular intervals (e.g., 4 milliseconds), similar to the interrupt processing performed on the main control board 80 (see Figure 27). The processing performed on the sub-control board 90, as described based on the flowchart from Figure 37 onward, is carried out according to instructions issued by the sub-CPU 91 based on the program stored in the sub-ROM 92.

The sub-CPU 91 first performs command reception processing (step S10) when it receives a command from the main control board 80, which processes the command accordingly. This command reception processing will be described in detail later based on Figure 38.

Following the processing in step S10, the sub-CPU 91 determines whether any of the first effect button 35, the second effect button 36, or the unshown directional pad shown in Figure 1 has been operated, based on the presence or absence of operation information input from the first effect button detection sensor 96, the second effect button detection sensor 97, or the key operation detection sensor shown in Figure 5 (step S30). If it is determined that the first effect button 35, the second effect button 36, or the directional pad has been operated (step S30: YES), an operation command to notify this fact is set in the sub-RAM 93 (step S31). This operation command is transmitted to the image and sound control board 100 and the lamp control board 120 through the processing in step S32, described later, thereby performing processing to realize the effect corresponding to the operation of the first effect button 35, the second effect button 36, or the directional pad.

The sub-CPU 91 executes the command transmission process (step S32) if it has completed the process in step S31, or if it determines that there is no operation (step S30: NO). Specifically, it transmits the commands set in the sub-RAM 93 by the command reception process in step S10 and the process in step S31 to the image and sound control board 100 (and the lamp control board 120). This command transmission process instructs the image and sound control board 100 to execute effects such as image display and sound output, and instructs the lamp control board 120 to execute effects such as lighting various lamps and movable parts.

Following the processing in step S32, the sub-CPU 91 performs data transfer processing (step S33). Specifically, data related to image and sound control is transmitted from the image and sound control board 100, and this data is transferred to the lamp control board 120. As a result, the lamp control board 120 controls the effects performed by the display means, such as the frame lamps 37, the panel lamps 5, and the movable decorative members 14, in synchronization with the effects performed by the display screen 70 and the speaker 38.

[Command reception processing by sub-control board 90]
Figure 38 is a detailed flowchart of the command reception process in step S10 of Figure 37. As illustrated in Figure 38, the sub-CPU 91 first determines whether or not it has received a command from the main control board 80 (step S11). If it is determined that no command has been received (step S11: NO), the process proceeds to step S30 described above.

If the sub-CPU 91 determines that it has received a command from the main control board 80 (step S11: YES), it determines whether the command is a pending command sent from the main control board 80 in accordance with the processing in step S212 or step S220 of Figure 28 (step S12). If it is determined that the command is not a pending command (step S12: NO), the process proceeds to step S15, which will be described later.

If the sub-CPU 91 determines that the received command is a pending command (step S12: YES), it executes the pending command reception process (step S13). This pending command reception process will be described in detail later based on Figure 40.

If the sub-CPU 91 determines that the received command is not a pending command (step S12: NO), it determines whether the command is a variation start command transmitted from the main control board 80 in accordance with the processing in step S310 of Figure 30 (step S15). If it is determined that the received command is not a variation start command (step S15: NO), the process proceeds to step S17, which will be described later.

If the sub-CPU 91 determines that the received command is a variation start command (step S15: YES), it executes the variation start command reception processing (step S16). This variation start command reception processing will be described in detail later based on Figure 44.

If the sub-CPU 91 determines that the received command is not a variation start command (step S15: NO), it determines whether the command is a variation end command transmitted from the main control board 80 in accordance with the processing in step S314 of Figure 30 (step S17). If the sub-CPU 91 determines that it is a variation end command (step S17: YES), it sets a variation performance end command in the sub-RAM 93, which instructs the execution of a process to terminate the variation display of the performance symbols and stop displaying the performance symbols in a manner that shows the result of the special symbol judgment executed at the start of the symbol variation (step S18).

When this variation effect termination command is transmitted to the image and sound control board 100 and the lamp control board 120 by the command transmission process in step S32, the special symbol indicating the result of the first special symbol judgment (or second special symbol judgment) is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41 (or second special symbol display 42), and consequently, the effect symbol indicating the result of the first special symbol judgment (or second special symbol judgment) is stopped and displayed on the display screen 70.

If the sub-CPU 91 determines that the received command is not a variation termination command (step S17: NO), it determines whether the command is an opening command transmitted from the main control board 80 in accordance with the processing in step S3175 of Figure 33 (step S19). If it determines that the received command is an opening command (step S19: YES), it sets an opening performance start command in the sub-RAM 93 to instruct the image and sound control board 100 (and lamp control board 120) to start the opening performance, which announces the type of jackpot and prompts the player to shoot to the right during the opening period of the jackpot game (step S20).

On the other hand, if the sub-CPU 91 determines that the received command is not an opening command (step S19: NO), it determines whether the command is a round game start command (step S21). That is, it determines whether it received a second large prize slot opening/closing round game start command transmitted from the main control board 80 in accordance with the processing in step S608 of Figure 34, or a first large prize slot opening/closing round game start command transmitted from the main control board 80 in accordance with the processing in step S610 of Figure 34.

If the sub-CPU 91 determines that the received command is a round game start command (step S21: YES), it executes a round game start command reception process that performs processing according to the received round game start command (step S22).

If the sub-CPU 91 determines that the received command is not a round game start command (step S21: NO), it determines whether the command is a V-winning command transmitted from the main control board 80 in accordance with the processing in step S620 of Figure 35 (step S23). If it determines that the received command is a V-winning command (step S23: YES), it executes the V-winning command reception processing, which performs processing according to that V-winning command (step S24). Specifically, it sets a V-winning notification command in the sub-RAM 93, which instructs the image and sound control board 100 (and lamp control board 120) to execute the V-winning notification effect illustrated in Figure 20.

On the other hand, if the sub-CPU 91 determines that the received command is not a V-winning command (step S23: NO), it executes an ending command reception process (step S25) which includes setting an ending sequence start command in the sub-RAM 93 to instruct the image and sound control board 100 (and the lamp control board 120) to execute a predetermined ending sequence. The ending sequence start command set in the sub-RAM 93 through this step S25 process is transmitted to the image and sound control board 100 (and the lamp control board 120), thereby executing the mode selection promotion sequence described above.

[Receiving and processing of pending commands by the sub-control board 90]
Figure 39 is a detailed flowchart of the pending command reception process in step S13 of Figure 38. If the subCPU 91 determines that the received command is a pending command (step S12: YES), it updates the number of pending special symbol judgments stored in the subRAM 93 to a value obtained by adding "1", as illustrated in Figure 39 (step S131). Specifically, if a pending command related to the first special symbol judgment is received, the number of pending first special symbol judgments is updated to a value obtained by adding "1", and if a pending command related to the second special symbol judgment is received, the number of pending second special symbol judgments is updated to a value obtained by adding "1".

Following the processing in step S131, the sub-CPU 91 determines whether the received hold command contains pre-determination information (step S132). If it determines that the received hold command does not contain pre-determination information (step S132: NO), it sets a hold icon display command in the sub-RAM 93 (step S133). This hold icon display command instructs the display of a hold icon that does not contain setting information related to various pre-read effects, such as setting information for icon change effects (icon change effect pattern information described later). This command is transmitted to the image and sound control board 100 and the lamp control board 120 via the command transmission process in step S32.

The image and sound control CPU 101 of the image and sound control board 100, for example, when it receives a pending icon display command related to the determination of the first special symbol that does not include setting information for the icon change effect, controls the drawing process by the VDP 104 to display a white pending icon in the pending icon display area 71. Since no settings related to the icon change effect are configured for this white pending icon, the aforementioned icon change effect is not performed.

On the other hand, if the sub-CPU 91 determines that the received pending command contains pre-determination information (step S132: YES), it stores that pre-determination information in the sub-RAM 93 (step S134). Next, the sub-CPU 91 executes an icon change animation pattern setting process to set the animation pattern for the icon change animation described above (step S135). This icon change animation pattern setting process will be described in detail later based on Figure 40.

Following the processing in step S135, the sub-CPU 91 executes a chance-eye animation pattern setting process to set the animation patterns for chance-eye animations, such as the weak chance-eye animation described above based on Figure 8(C) and Figure 12(C), and the strong chance-eye animation described above based on Figure 8(E) and Figure 12(G) (step S136). This chance-eye animation pattern setting process will be described in detail later based on Figure 41.

Following the processing in step S136, the sub-CPU 91 executes a pattern setting process for setting the performance patterns of the first performance pattern attention effect described above based on Figure 8(D) and Figure 12(D), and the second performance pattern attention effect described above based on Figure 8(F) and Figure 12(H) (step S137). This pattern setting process will be described in detail later with reference to Figure 42.

Following the processing in step S137, the sub-CPU 91 executes a pre-oscillation effect pattern setting process to set the effect pattern for the pre-oscillation effect described above, based on Figures 22(B), 24, 25, etc. (step S138). This pre-oscillation effect pattern setting process will be described in detail later based on Figure 43.

Following the processing in step S138, the sub-CPU 91 sets the hold icon display command in the sub-RAM 93 (step S139). Specifically, if information indicating the effect pattern of the icon change effect (icon change effect pattern information) is set in the sub-RAM 93 by the processing in step S135, the hold icon display command including that icon change effect pattern information is set in the sub-RAM 93 as the setting information for the icon change effect. Also, if information indicating the effect pattern of the chance effect (chance effect pattern information) is set in the sub-RAM 93 by the processing in step S136, the hold icon display command including that chance effect pattern information is set in the sub-RAM 93 as the setting information for the chance effect.

Furthermore, if, as a result of the processing in step S137, information indicating the performance pattern of the "Attention-Given Performance" (Attention-Given Performance Pattern Information) is set in sub-RAM 93, a hold icon display command including that Attention-Given Performance Pattern Information is set in sub-RAM 93 as the setting information for the Attention-Given Performance. Also, if, as a result of the processing in step S138, information indicating the performance pattern of the "Pre-Swing Performance" (Pre-Swing Performance Pattern Information) is set in sub-RAM 93, a hold icon display command including that Pre-Swing Performance Pattern Information is set in sub-RAM 93 as the setting information for the Pre-Swing Performance.

In this way, the hold icon display command set in the sub-RAM 93 during step S139 is transmitted to the image and sound control board 100 (and lamp control board 120) by the command transmission process in step S32 of Figure 37. In response, the image and sound control CPU 101 and lamp CPU 121 execute the necessary performance control based on the performance pattern information contained in the hold icon display command received from the sub-control board 90, thereby realizing the respective pre-read performances according to the performance patterns set in steps S135 to S138.

[Icon change animation pattern setting process by sub-control board 90]
Figure 40 is a detailed flowchart of the icon change animation pattern setting process in step S135 of Figure 39. Following the processing in step S134, the sub-CPU 91 executes a series of icon change animation pattern setting processes as illustrated in Figure 40.

The sub-CPU 91 first acquires a random number for the icon change animation and stores it in the sub-RAM 93 (step S1351). This random number for the icon change animation is incremented by "1" each time the random number update process described above is performed. The sub-CPU 91 then acquires the count value at the time it receives a hold command from the main control board 80 as the random number for the icon change animation.

Next, the sub-CPU 91 reads the icon change animation pattern selection table from the sub-ROM 92 and sets it in a predetermined area of the sub-RAM 93 (step S1352). This icon change animation pattern selection table associates the special symbol judgment result (jackpot, miss), the special symbol variation pattern, the icon change animation pattern (including animation patterns without icon change), and the random value to be compared with the icon change animation random number.

In response, the sub-CPU 91, following the processing in step S1352, executes an icon change animation pattern selection process to select an animation pattern for the icon change animation (step S1353). Specifically, based on the pre-determination information stored in the sub-RAM 93 in step S134 of Figure 39, it selects one animation pattern for the icon change animation by reading the result of the special symbol determination performed at the start of the pre-read target variation, the variation pattern of the special symbol selected at the start of the pre-read target variation, and the icon change animation random number obtained in the processing of step S1351 from the icon change animation pattern selection table set in the sub-RAM 93. Then, the icon change animation pattern information indicating the selected animation pattern is set in the sub-RAM 93 as setting information for the icon change animation (step S1354).

The setting information for this icon change effect is transmitted to the image and sound control board 100 (and lamp control board 120) by the command transmission process in step S32 described above (see Figure 37). In response, the image and sound control CPU 101 and lamp CPU 121 execute the necessary effect control based on the setting information for the icon change effect included in the pending icon display command received from the sub-control board 90. This results in the icon change effect being executed according to the effect pattern set by the icon change effect pattern setting process in Figure 40.

[Chance symbol effect pattern setting process by sub-control board 90]
Figure 41 is a detailed flowchart of the chance symbol animation pattern setting process in step S136 of Figure 39. Following the processing in step S135, the sub-CPU 91 executes a series of chance symbol animation pattern setting processes as illustrated in Figure 41. The chance symbol animation can be executed not only during the display of the first special symbol variation in the normal game state, but also during the display of the second special symbol variation in the probability variation game state (or time reduction game state). However, here we will explain the process that the sub-CPU 91 executes in order to execute the chance symbol animation during the display of the first special symbol variation in the normal game state, as described above based on Figures 8 and 12.

The sub-CPU 91 first determines whether the pre-target variation (see Figure 8), which occurs before the pre-target variation, is a non-reach, losing variation (step S1361).

In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, each time the main CPU 81 reserves the right to determine the first special symbol, a reserve command including pre-determination information is transmitted from the main control board 80. Each time the sub-CPU 91 receives this reserve command, it stores the pre-determination information in the sub-RAM 93 through the processing described in step S134. Therefore, based on the pre-determination information corresponding to the pre-target variation stored in the sub-RAM 93 before the pre-determination information corresponding to the pre-read target variation, it is possible to identify the variation pattern of the first special symbol selected by the main CPU 81 at the start of the pre-target variation. The sub-CPU 91 then executes the determination process in step S1361 based on the pre-determination information corresponding to the pre-target variation stored in the sub-RAM 93.

Here, if the sub-CPU 91 determines that the pre-target variation is not a non-reach/miss pattern variation (step S1361: NO), that is, if some kind of reach effect is performed during the pre-target variation, the chance-eye effect using the effect symbols displayed on the display screen 70 at the end of the pre-target variation cannot be executed. Therefore, the chance-eye effect pattern setting process ends without performing the processes from step S1362 onwards, and the process proceeds to step S137 in Figure 39.

Furthermore, when the right to determine the first special symbol corresponding to the pre-read target variation is reserved, if multiple pre-target variations are reserved, the determination process in step S1361 is executed for all of these pre-target variations. Only if all pre-target variations are symbol variations that result in a no-reach (miss) will the process in step S1362, described later, be executed.

If the sub-CPU 91 determines that the preceding spin was a losing spin without a reach (step S1361: YES), it acquires a random number for the chance event and stores it in the sub-RAM 93 (step S1362). This random number for the chance event is incremented by "1" each time the random number update process described above is performed, and the sub-CPU 91 acquires the count value at the time it receives the hold command from the main control board 80 as the random number for the chance event.

Next, the sub-CPU 91 determines whether or not to execute the chance-symbol animation based on whether the chance-symbol animation random number acquired and stored in step S1362 matches any of the multiple random numbers stored in the sub-ROM 92 (step S1363). In this embodiment, multiple random numbers (multiple random numbers for big wins) that are compared with the chance-symbol animation random number when the result of the first special symbol judgment, identified based on pre-judgment information corresponding to the pre-read target variation, is a "big win," and multiple random numbers (multiple random numbers for misses) that are compared with the chance-symbol animation random number when the result of the first special symbol judgment, identified based on pre-judgment information corresponding to the pre-read target variation, is a "miss," are stored separately in the sub-ROM 92.

Therefore, the sub-CPU 91 identifies the result of the first special symbol determination, which is performed by the main CPU 81 at the start of the pre-read target variation, based on the pre-determination information corresponding to the pre-read target variation stored in the sub-RAM 93. Based on this determination result, it selects either one of the multiple random values for the jackpot or the multiple random values for the loss, and then executes the process of step S1363 by referring to the selected set of multiple random values.

If the sub-CPU 91 determines that it will not execute the chance event animation (step S1363: NO), it executes the process in step S137 of Figure 39 without executing the processes described later in steps S1364 and beyond. Conversely, if it determines that it will execute the chance event animation (step S1363: YES), it reads the chance event animation pattern selection table from the sub-ROM 92 and sets it in a predetermined area of the sub-RAM 93 (step S1364). It then executes the chance event animation pattern selection process by referring to the set chance event animation pattern selection table (step S1365).

Although not shown in the diagram, the chance-eye effect pattern selection table associates the result of the first special symbol judgment, the variation pattern of the first special symbol, multiple chance-eye effect patterns, and a random value compared with the chance-eye effect random number. In step S1365, the sub-CPU 91, based on the pre-judgment information corresponding to the pre-read target variation stored in the sub-RAM 93 in step S134 of Figure 39, selects one chance-eye effect pattern by reading one effect pattern from the chance-eye effect pattern selection table set in the sub-RAM 93, which corresponds to the result of the first special symbol judgment performed at the start of the pre-read target variation, the variation pattern of the first special symbol selected at the start of the pre-read target variation, and the chance-eye effect random number obtained in step S1362. Then, the chance-eye effect pattern information indicating the selected effect pattern is set in the sub-RAM 93 as the chance-eye effect setting information (step S1366).

The setting information for this chance-trigger effect is transmitted to the image and sound control board 100 (and the lamp control board 120) by the command transmission process in step S32 described above (see Figure 37). In response, the image and sound control CPU 101 and the lamp CPU 121 execute the necessary effect control based on the setting information for the chance-trigger effect included in the hold icon display command received from the sub-control board 90. This results in the execution of the chance-trigger effect according to the effect pattern set by the chance-trigger effect pattern setting process shown in Figure 41.

[Processing of setting the performance pattern by the sub-control board 90]
Figure 42 is a detailed flowchart of the process for setting the featured symbol pattern in step S137 of Figure 39. Following the process in step S136, the sub-CPU 91 executes a series of featured symbol pattern setting processes as illustrated in Figure 42.

The sub-CPU 91 first determines, based on the processing in step S1366 of Figure 41, whether or not the setting information for the chance symbol effect is set in the sub-RAM 93, whether or not the chance symbol effect will be executed in the preceding spin (step S1370). In this embodiment, the effect symbol attention effect is an effect executed in conjunction with either a weak chance symbol effect or a strong chance symbol effect, as described above based on Figures 8 and 12. Therefore, if the sub-CPU 91 determines that the chance symbol effect will not be executed in the preceding spin (step S1370: NO), the processing from step S1371 onwards is not executed, and the process proceeds to step S138 in Figure 39.

Meanwhile, if the sub-CPU 91 determines that a chance symbol effect will be executed during the pre-target fluctuation (step S1370: YES), it acquires a random number for the effect symbol effect and stores it in the sub-RAM 93 (step S1371). This random number for the effect symbol effect is incremented by "1" each time the random number update process described above is performed, and the sub-CPU 91 acquires the count value at the time it receives the hold command from the main control board 80 as the random number for the effect symbol effect.

Next, the sub-CPU 91 determines whether or not a featured animation will be executed during the pre-read target variation (step S1372). In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, as described above based on Figures 8 and 9, if the result of the first special symbol judgment executed at the start of the pre-read target variation is "jackpot," and the variation progresses to an SPSP reach (second half battle), then the SPSP reach's result animation includes a victory animation (see, for example, Figure 9(Q)) along with a matching number symbol featured animation (see Figure 9(R)). The sub-ROM 92 stores information indicating which variation pattern of the first special symbol is selected by the main CPU 81 to trigger the victory animation or the matching number symbol featured animation.

Therefore, in the process of step S1372 described above, the sub-CPU 91 identifies the result of the first special symbol determination performed by the main CPU 81 at the start of the pre-read target variation, and the variation pattern of the first special symbol selected by the main CPU 81 at the start of the pre-read target variation, based on the pre-determination information corresponding to the pre-read target variation stored in the sub-RAM 93. Based on these identification results, it refers to the information in the sub-ROM 92 to determine whether or not the matching number symbol attention effect is executed during the pre-read target variation.

Sub-ROM 92 stores two tables: one for determining the execution of a special effect with a featured symbol, and another for determining the execution of a special effect without a featured symbol. If the sub-CPU 91 determines that a special effect with matching symbols will be executed during the pre-read target spin (step S1372: YES), it reads the special effect execution table for when a special effect is present from sub-ROM 92 and sets it in sub-RAM 93 (step S1373). Conversely, if the sub-CPU 91 determines that a special effect with matching symbols will not be executed during the pre-read target spin (step S1372: NO), it reads the special effect execution table for when a special effect is not present from sub-ROM 92 and sets it in sub-RAM 93 (step S1374).

Then, the sub-CPU 91, after setting one of the performance symbol focus performance execution decision tables in the sub-RAM 93 through the processing of step S1373 or step S1374, executes the performance symbol focus performance execution determination process (step S1375). Although not shown in the figure, the performance symbol focus performance execution decision table set in the sub-RAM 93 associates the determination result of the first special symbol determination, the variation pattern of the first special symbol, and the random value that is compared with the performance symbol focus performance random number. In the processing of step S1375, the sub-CPU 91 identifies the determination result of the first special symbol determination, which is executed at the start of the pre-read target variation, and the variation pattern of the first special symbol, which is also selected at the start of the pre-read target variation, based on the pre-determination information corresponding to the pre-read target variation stored in the sub-RAM 93. Then, based on whether the random number obtained through the process in step S1371 matches one of the multiple random values associated with the combination of the identified first special symbol judgment result and the variation pattern of the first special symbol in the performance symbol execution decision table set in sub-RAM 93, it is determined whether or not to execute the performance symbol attention effect during the pre-target variation.

Next, the sub-CPU 91 determines whether the result of the execution determination process in step S1375 is to execute the special effect animation during the pre-target variation (step S1376). If the result of the execution determination process is determined to be that the special effect animation will not be executed during the pre-target variation (step S1376: NO), the process in step S138 shown in Figure 39 is executed without executing the processes described later in steps S1377 and beyond.

On the other hand, if the sub-CPU 91 determines that the result of the execution judgment process is to execute the special effect symbol highlighting effect during the pre-target variation (step S1376: YES), it determines whether the special effect symbol highlighting effect performed during the pre-target variation is a weak special effect symbol highlighting effect or not, based on the setting information for the special effect symbol highlighting effect set in the sub-RAM 93 (step S1377). If it is determined to be a weak special effect symbol highlighting effect (see Figure 8(C)) (step S1377: YES), the setting information for the first special effect symbol highlighting effect (see Figure 8(D)) is set in the sub-RAM 93 (step S1378). If it is determined not to be a weak special effect symbol highlighting effect (step S1377: NO), i.e., a strong special effect symbol highlighting effect (see Figure 8(E)), the setting information for the second special effect symbol highlighting effect (see Figure 8(F)) is set in the sub-RAM 93 (step S1379).

The setting information for the first (or second) featured symbol highlighting effect is transmitted to the image and sound control board 100 (and the lamp control board 120) by the command transmission process in step S32 described above (see Figure 37). In response, the image and sound control CPU 101 and the lamp CPU 121 execute the necessary effect control based on the setting information for the first (or second) featured symbol highlighting effect included in the hold icon display command received from the sub-control board 90. This results in the featured symbol highlighting effect being executed according to the effect pattern set by the featured symbol highlighting effect pattern setting process in Figure 42.

Furthermore, the performance symbol highlighting execution decision table for when a highlighting performance is performed during a pre-read target fluctuation has more random values associated with it than the performance symbol highlighting execution decision table for when a highlighting performance is not performed during a pre-read target fluctuation. Therefore, when the process in step S1375 is executed by referring to the former table, the probability of executing the first performance symbol highlighting performance (or the second performance symbol highlighting performance) is higher than when the process in step S1375 is executed by referring to the latter table.

[Pre-motion animation pattern setting process by sub-control board 90]
Figure 43 is a detailed flowchart of the pre-oscillation effect pattern setting process in step S138 of Figure 39. Following the processing in step S137, the sub-CPU 91 executes a series of pre-oscillation effect pattern setting processes illustrated in Figure 43.

As illustrated in Figure 43, the sub-CPU 91 first determines, similar to the determination process in step S1361 of Figure 41 described above, whether the pre-target variation (see Figure 8) performed before the pre-read target variation is a non-reach, losing symbol variation (step S1381). If the sub-CPU 91 determines that the pre-target variation is not a non-reach, losing symbol variation (step S1381: NO), that is, if some kind of reach effect is performed during the pre-target variation, the pre-oscillation effect pattern setting process ends without performing the processes from step S1382 onwards, and the process proceeds to step S139 in Figure 39.

Furthermore, when the right to determine the first special symbol corresponding to the pre-read target variation is reserved, if multiple pre-target variations are reserved, the determination process in step S1381 is executed for all of these pre-target variations. Only if all pre-target variations are symbol variations that result in a no-reach (miss) will the process in step S1382, described later, be executed.

If the sub-CPU 91 determines that the pre-target fluctuation is a symbol fluctuation that does not result in a reach (step S1361: YES), it acquires a pre-fluctuation animation random number and stores it in the sub-RAM 93 (step S1382). This pre-fluctuation animation random number is incremented by "1" each time the random number update process described above is performed, and the sub-CPU 91 acquires the count value at the time it receives the hold command from the main control board 80 as the pre-fluctuation animation random number.

Next, the sub-CPU 91 determines whether the current performance mode is the normal performance mode based on the performance mode information stored in the sub-RAM 93 (step S1383). If it is determined that the current performance mode is the normal performance mode (step S1383: YES), that is, if the current game state is the normal game state, the pre-swing performance execution decision table for the normal performance mode is read from the sub-RAM 93 and set in the sub-RAM 93 (step S1384). Conversely, if it is determined that the current performance mode is not the normal performance mode (step S1383: NO), that is, if the current game state is the probability variation game state, the pre-swing performance execution decision table for the probability variation performance mode is read from the sub-RAM 93 and set in the sub-RAM 93 (step S1385).

Thus, after the sub-CPU 91 sets either the pre-oscillation effect execution decision table in the sub-RAM 93 through the processing in step S1384 or step S1385, it performs a pre-oscillation effect execution determination process to determine whether or not to execute the pre-oscillation effect described above, based on Figures 22(B), 24, 25, etc. (step S1386).

Although not shown in the diagram, the pre-swing animation execution decision table set in sub-RAM 93 associates the type of winning entry gate, the result of the special symbol judgment, the special symbol variation pattern, and the random value to be compared with the pre-swing animation random number. In step S1386, the sub-CPU 91 first identifies the type of entry gate, the result of the special symbol judgment executed at the start of the pre-swing target variation, and the special symbol variation pattern selected at the start of the pre-swing target variation, based on the pre-judgment information corresponding to the pre-read target variation stored in sub-RAM 93. Then, referring to the pre-swing animation execution decision table set in sub-RAM 93, it determines whether or not to execute the pre-swing animation based on whether the pre-swing animation random number obtained in step S1382 matches any of the multiple random values associated with the identified combination of winning entry gate type, special symbol judgment result, and special symbol variation pattern.

Then, based on the result of the execution determination process in step S1386, the sub-CPU 91 determines whether or not to execute the pre-motion animation (step S1387). If it determines to execute the pre-motion animation (step S1387: YES), it sets the pre-motion animation setting information in the sub-RAM 93 (step S1388).

This pre-oscillation effect setting information is transmitted to the image and sound control board 100 (and lamp control board 120) by the command transmission process in step S32 described above (see Figure 37). In response, the image and sound control CPU 101 and lamp CPU 121 execute the necessary effect control based on the pre-oscillation effect setting information included in the hold icon display command received from the sub-control board 90. This results in the pre-oscillation effect being executed according to the effect pattern set by the pre-oscillation effect pattern setting process shown in Figure 43.

Furthermore, regarding the processing in steps S1384 and S1385 described above, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, two execution decision tables are provided for determining whether or not to execute the pre-swing animation. These tables are a pre-swing animation execution decision table for the normal animation mode and a pre-swing animation execution decision table for the probability variation animation mode. By switching between and referencing these two tables, the pre-swing animation is executed according to the execution ratio described above, based on Figure 25.

[Reception processing of variation start command by sub-control board 90]
Figure 44 is a detailed flowchart of the process for receiving a variation start command in step S16 of Figure 38. If the sub-CPU 91 determines that the command received from the main control board 80 is a variation start command (step S15: YES), it executes the series of variation start command reception processes illustrated in Figure 44.

Specifically, the sub-CPU 91 acquires the value of the random numbers used for performance, which are updated as appropriate by the random number update process in the sub-control board 90, at the time it receives the variation start command from the main control board 80, and stores it in the sub-RAM 93 (step S161). Then, it analyzes the received variation start command (step S162).

This variation start command includes, as described above, setting information for the symbols indicating the result of the jackpot determination process, entry start information indicating whether this symbol setting information relates to the first special symbol determination or the second special symbol determination, setting information for the special symbol variation pattern, and information indicating the game state of the gaming machine 1. Therefore, by analyzing the variation start command, the type and result of the special symbol determination can be identified. That is, it can be determined whether it is a jackpot or a miss, and if it is a jackpot, what type of jackpot it is. Furthermore, by identifying whether the variation pattern is a miss pattern based on the variation pattern setting information, it is possible to determine whether a reach-in-a-win or reach-out-of-win animation should be performed. Also, based on the variation pattern setting information, the variation time of the special symbols can be identified. Finally, based on the information indicating the game state, the current game state of the gaming machine 1 can be identified.

The sub-CPU 91 analyzes the variation start command and, based on the analysis results, executes a variation pattern setting process to set the variation pattern for the variation display associated with the variation of special symbols (step S163). This variation pattern setting process determines the variation pattern of the display symbols, the presence or absence of a reach effect, the presence or absence of a pseudo-consecutive effect, the types of display symbols that make up the reach symbol, the type and content of the reach effect, the content of the pseudo-consecutive effect, and the types of display symbols that stop and are displayed. This variation pattern setting process will be described in detail later based on Figure 45.

Following the processing in step S163, the sub-CPU 91 executes a notification effect pattern setting process (step S164) to configure settings related to various notification effects that are executed when the effect symbols are displayed in the variation effect pattern set in step S163. This notification effect pattern setting process will be described in detail later based on Figure 46.

Next, the sub-CPU 91 sets a variable performance start command in the sub-RAM 93 (step S170) which instructs the start of the variable performance using the variable performance pattern set in step S163, and the execution of the pre-announcement performance using the pre-announcement performance pattern set in step S164.

This variation effect start command includes information indicating the variation effect pattern set by the processing in step S163 and information indicating the pre-announcement effect pattern set by the processing in step S164. It is transmitted to the image and sound control board 100 and the lamp control board 120 by the command transmission process in step S32. As a result, the variation effect and pre-announcement effect, whose effect patterns were determined on the sub-control board 90, are implemented by the image and sound control board 100 and the lamp control board 120.

Following the processing in step S170, the sub-CPU 91 updates the number of pending values stored in the sub-RAM 93 by subtracting "1" (step S171). Specifically, if the variation start command received from the main control board 80 notifies the start of the variation display of the first special symbol, the number of pending values for the first special symbol judgment is updated by subtracting "1". On the other hand, if the received variation start command notifies the start of the variation display of the second special symbol, the number of pending values for the second special symbol judgment is updated by subtracting "1".

[Setting of variable performance pattern by sub-control board 90]
Figure 45 is a detailed flowchart of the variable performance pattern setting process in step S163 of Figure 44. Following the process in step S162, the sub-CPU 91 executes a confirmed performance symbol setting process (step S1631) to set the performance symbol that will be finally confirmed and displayed (final stop) on the display screen 70 in conjunction with the stopping display of the first special symbol (or second special symbol).

Next, the sub-CPU 91 determines, based on the setting information for the special symbol variation pattern included in the received variation start command, whether or not a reach-inducing animation is necessary in conjunction with the current variation display of the special symbol (step S1632). If it is determined that a reach-inducing animation is not necessary (step S1632: NO), it sets a variation animation pattern for a non-reach animation (step S1633). For example, from a selection table of non-reach animation patterns, which associates multiple non-reach animation patterns for each special symbol variation pattern, it reads one variation animation pattern corresponding to the animation random number obtained in step S161 and sets the information indicating that variation animation pattern in the sub-RAM 93.

On the other hand, if the sub-CPU 91 determines that a reach-in animation is necessary (step S1632: YES), it sets a variation animation pattern for the reach-in animation (step S1634). For example, from a variation animation pattern selection table for reach-in animations, which associates multiple types of variation animation patterns for each combination of the special symbol judgment result and the special symbol variation pattern, it reads one variation animation pattern corresponding to the animation random number obtained in step S161 and sets the information indicating that variation animation pattern in the sub-RAM 93.

The processing in step S1633 or step S1634 determines the variation pattern of the display symbols, which reach animation to perform if one occurs, and the sequence of events in which the reach animation will develop if it is to be further developed.

In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, a variation effect start command, which instructs the start of a variation effect according to the variation effect pattern set in step S1633 (or step S1634), is transmitted from the sub-control board 90 to the image and sound control board 100 (and the lamp control board 120), thereby realizing a variation effect including the display of variation effects symbols.

[Preview animation pattern setting process by sub-control board 90]
Figure 46 is a detailed flowchart of the preview animation pattern setting process in step S164 of Figure 44. Following the variation animation pattern setting process in step S163, the sub-CPU 91 executes a series of preview animation pattern setting processes as illustrated in Figure 46. Specifically, it first executes a focus animation pattern setting process to set the animation patterns of various focus animations to be performed in the pre-read target variation (the variation in question) (step S165). This focus animation pattern setting process will be described in detail later based on Figure 47.

Next, the sub-CPU 91 sets the presentation patterns for other preview effects, such as step-up previews, dialogue previews (see Figure 23(D)), and cut-ins (see Figure 23(L)) (step S168). Note that the process of setting these preview effect patterns can be performed in the same way as before, so a detailed explanation is omitted here.

Next, the sub-CPU 91 executes a oscillation effect pattern setting process (step S169) based on Figure 23, which sets the various oscillation effect patterns to be executed based on the pre-read target fluctuations described above. This oscillation effect pattern setting process will be described in detail later based on Figure 48.

[Setting of featured performance pattern by sub-control board 90]
Figure 47 is a detailed flowchart of the process for setting the featured performance pattern in step S165 of Figure 46. Following the process in step S163 of Figure 44, the sub-CPU 91 executes a series of featured performance pattern setting processes as illustrated in Figure 47. Since the various featured performances described above based on Figure 9, etc., are executed during the display of the first special symbol's variation in the normal game state, here we will explain a series of processes related to the featured performance that the sub-CPU 91 executes when it receives a variation start command from the main control board 80 notifying that the display of the first special symbol's variation has started in the normal game state.

The sub-CPU 91 first determines whether or not the upcoming SPSP reach will develop during the variation display of the first special symbol, based on the variation pattern setting information set in the sub-RAM 93 during the variation pattern setting process in step S163 of Figure 44 (step S1651). If the sub-CPU 91 determines that the SPSP reach will not develop (step S1651: NO), the process proceeds to step S168 of Figure 46 without executing the process described in step S1652.

On the other hand, if the sub-CPU 91 determines that the game will develop into an SPSP reach (step S1651: YES), it determines whether or not the game will develop directly into an SPSP reach (step S1652). That is, it determines whether or not the game will develop directly into an SPSP reach without going through a normal reach (see Figure 8(L)) or an SP reach (see Figure 8(O)) by going through the reach establishment prompting animation shown in Figure 9(A) or the reach establishment animation shown in Figure 9(B). This determination process in step S1652 can be executed based on the setting information of the variable animation pattern set in the sub-RAM 93, similar to the determination process in step S1651.

If the sub-CPU 91 determines that the game will not directly develop into an SPSP reach (step S1652: NO), that is, if the game develops into an SPSP reach via a normal reach or an SP reach, it will not execute the reach symbol attention animation described above based on Figure 9(C), etc., and will therefore proceed to step S1655, described later, without executing the process in step S1653.

On the other hand, if the sub-CPU 91 determines that the game will directly develop into an SPSP reach (step S1652: YES), it determines whether the reach symbol is an odd-numbered symbol based on the setting information of the variable performance pattern set in the sub-RAM 93 (step S1653). If it determines that the reach symbol is not an odd-numbered symbol (step S1653: NO), it does not execute the reach symbol attention performance described above based on Figure 9(C), etc., and therefore proceeds to step S1655, described later, without executing the process in step S1654.

Next, if the sub-CPU 91 determines that the winning symbol is an odd-numbered symbol (step S1653: YES), it sets the setting information for the winning symbol attention effect shown in Figure 9(C) in the sub-RAM 93, which includes information indicating the type of winning symbol to be highlighted (in this case, any odd-numbered symbol) (step S1654). In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, a variable effect start command including this setting information for the winning symbol attention effect is transmitted to the image and sound control board 100 (and the lamp control board 120), and the winning symbol attention effect described above is executed based on Figures 13(G) to (I), etc.

Next, if the sub-CPU 91 has executed the process in step S1654, and determines that it will not directly develop into an SPSP reach (step S1652: NO), or determines that the reach symbol is not an odd-numbered symbol (step S1653: NO), it will execute the following process to select whether to display the reach symbol in a reduced size in the upper left and right areas as shown in Figure 9(E), or to display a background image representing the extremely small reach symbol as shown in Figure 9(L).

Specifically, the sub-CPU 91 acquires a random number for selecting the display mode of the reach symbol displayed during the SPSP reach (i.e., the display shown in Figure 9(E) or the display shown in Figure 9(L)) and stores it in a predetermined area of the sub-RAM 93 (step S1655). Next, it reads the reach symbol display mode selection table, which is referenced when selecting the reach symbol display mode, from the sub-ROM 92 and sets it in a predetermined area of the sub-RAM 93 (step S1656), and then executes the reach symbol display mode selection process (step S1657).

Although not shown in the diagram, the reach symbol display mode selection table associates the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment, the variation pattern of the first special symbol, the display mode of the reach symbol during SPSP reach, and the random value compared with the above symbol display mode selection random number. Note that the display mode of the reach symbol during SPSP reach here refers to either the first or second display mode. The first display mode is, for example, the display mode of the reach symbol when two reach symbols are displayed in a reduced size in the upper left and right areas, as shown in Figure 11(C). The second display mode is, for example, the display mode of the extremely small reach symbol when a background image representing the extremely small reach symbol is displayed, as shown in Figure 14(C).

In step S1657, the sub-CPU 91 first identifies the result of the main CPU 81's determination of the first special symbol and the variation pattern of the first special symbol selected by the main CPU 81, based on the analysis result of the variation start command in step S162 of Figure 44. Then, based on whether the random number for symbol display mode selection obtained in step S1655 matches the random number associated with the first display mode or the random number associated with the second display mode in the reach symbol display mode selection table, the sub-CPU 91 selects either the first or second display mode as the display mode for the reach symbol during SPSP reach.

Although not shown in the diagram, in the reach symbol display mode selection table, for the "jackpot" result of the first special symbol judgment, the second display mode is associated with more random values than the first display mode. Conversely, for the "miss" result of the first special symbol judgment, the first display mode is associated with more random values than the second display mode. Therefore, when selecting the reach symbol display mode during an SPSP reach by referring to the reach symbol display mode selection table, the probability of a jackpot is higher when the reach symbol is displayed in the second display mode (for example, when the reach symbol is displayed as a very small reach symbol, as in Figure 14(C)) than when the reach symbol is displayed in the first display mode (for example, when the reach symbol is displayed in a reduced size in the upper left and right areas, as in Figure 11(C)). This is as described above based on Figure 19.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 47, following the processing in step S1657, the sub-CPU 91 sets the setting information for the SPSP reach symbol display effect in the sub-RAM 93 (step S1658). This SPSP reach symbol display effect setting information includes type information indicating the type of reach symbol displayed during the SPSP reach, and selection information (information indicating the result of the selection process in step S1657) on whether to display the reach symbol in a first display mode or a second display mode. When a variable effect start command containing this SPSP reach symbol display effect setting information is transmitted to the image and sound control board 100 (and lamp control board 120), the reach symbol will either be displayed in the first display mode during the SPSP reach (as shown in Figure 11(C)) or in the second display mode (as shown as a very small reach symbol, as shown in Figure 14(C)).

Next, the sub-CPU 91 determines whether or not to display the reach symbols in the upper left and right areas during the SPSP reach, based on the setting information set in the sub-RAM 93 by the processing in step S1658 (step S1659). In other words, it determines whether or not to display the reach symbols in the first display mode during the SPSP reach. Here, if the sub-CPU 91 determines to display the reach symbols in the upper left and right areas (step S1659: YES), it executes the following processing to control the execution of the first possibility suggestion effect described above, based on Figure 9(H) and Figure 11(E).

In other words, the sub-CPU 91 acquires a random number for the first possibility suggestion animation and stores it in a predetermined area of the sub-RAM 93 (step S1660). Specifically, regarding the random number for the first possibility suggestion animation, which is updated as appropriate each time the random number update process is performed on the sub-control board 90, the value at the time the current variation start command is received from the main control board 80 is acquired and stored in the sub-RAM 93 as the random number for the first possibility suggestion animation. Then, the sub-CPU 91 determines whether or not to execute the first possibility suggestion animation based on whether the acquired random number for the first possibility suggestion animation matches any of the multiple random values stored in the sub-ROM 92 (which are compared with the random number for the first possibility suggestion animation) (step S1661).

Subsequently, the sub-CPU 91 determines whether or not to execute the first possibility indication animation based on the result of the execution determination process in step S1661 (step S1662). If it determines to execute the first possibility indication animation (step S1662: YES), it executes the following process. That is, as described above based on Figures 9(H) and 11(E), in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, two types of possibility indication characters are provided for display by the first possibility indication animation: "CHANCE" and "VERY GOOD CHANCE". Therefore, the sub-CPU 91 executes a first possibility indication animation pattern selection process to select one of these two types of possibility indication characters, for example, by a random number lottery process (step S1663). Then, the information indicating the selection result of step S1663 is set in a predetermined area of the sub-RAM 93 as setting information for the first possibility indication animation (step S1664).

Thus, the setting information for the first possibility suggestion effect, set in a predetermined area of the sub-RAM 93, is included in the variable effect start command and transmitted to the image and sound control board 100 (and lamp control board 120) by the command transmission process in step S32 described above (see Figure 37). In response, the image and sound control CPU 101 and the lamp CPU 121 execute the necessary effect control based on the setting information for the first possibility suggestion effect included in the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, thereby realizing the first possibility suggestion effect as illustrated in Figure 11(E).

On the other hand, if the sub-CPU 91 determines that the winning symbols should not be displayed in the upper left and right areas (step S1659: NO), it executes the following process to control the execution of the second possibility suggestion animation described above, based on Figure 9(P) and Figure 14(G).

Specifically, the sub-CPU 91 acquires a random number for the second possibility suggestion animation and stores it in a predetermined area of the sub-RAM 93 (step S1666). More precisely, regarding the random number for the second possibility suggestion animation, which is updated as appropriate each time the random number update process is performed on the sub-control board 90, the value at the time the current variation start command is received from the main control board 80 is acquired and stored in the sub-RAM 93 as the random number for the second possibility suggestion animation. Then, the sub-CPU 91 determines whether or not to execute the second possibility suggestion animation based on, for example, whether the acquired random number for the second possibility suggestion animation matches any of the multiple random values stored in the sub-ROM 92 (which are compared with the random number for the second possibility suggestion animation) (step S1667).

Subsequently, the sub-CPU 91 determines whether or not to execute the second possibility suggestion animation based on the result of the execution determination process in step S1667 (step S1668). If it determines to execute the second possibility suggestion animation (step S1668: YES), it executes the following process. That is, as described above based on Figures 9(H) and 14(G), the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment only provides one type of display pattern for the second possibility suggestion animation: a strip-shaped image representing the word "SUPER" is displayed on the left side of the display screen 70, and a strip-shaped image representing the word "CHANCE!" is displayed on the right side of the display screen 70. Therefore, the sub-CPU 91 executes a second possibility suggestion animation pattern selection process to definitively select this one type of animation pattern, for example, by a random number lottery process (step S1669). It then sets the information indicating the selection result of step S1669 as setting information for the second possibility suggestion animation in a predetermined area of the sub-RAM 93 (step S1670).

Thus, the setting information for the second possibility suggestion effect, set in a predetermined area of the sub-RAM 93, is included in the variation effect start command and transmitted to the image and sound control board 100 (and lamp control board 120) by the command transmission process in step S32 described above (see Figure 37). In response, the image and sound control CPU 101 and the lamp CPU 121 execute the necessary effect control based on the setting information for the second possibility suggestion effect included in the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, thereby realizing the second possibility suggestion effect as illustrated in Figure 14(G).

Next, if the sub-CPU 91 executes the process in step S1664, the process in step S1670, determines that the first possibility indication effect should not be executed (step S1662: NO), or determines that the second possibility indication effect should not be executed (step S1668: NO), it determines, based on the analysis results of step S162 in Figure 44, whether the result of the first special symbol determination is a "jackpot" (step S1671). If it determines that the result of the first special symbol determination is a "jackpot" (step S1671: YES), it sets the setting information for the matching number effect symbol attention effect described above in Figure 9(R), Figures 15(B) to (E), and Figures 16(G) to (H) into the sub-RAM 93 (step S1672).

The setting information for the "Double Number Symbol Attention" feature includes type information indicating the types of the three symbols representing the double numbers displayed in the win notification feature, and display mode information indicating whether the display mode of the reach symbols during the SPSP reach is the first display mode or the second display mode. This information is included in the variable feature start command and transmitted to the image and sound control board 100 (and lamp control board 120) by the command transmission process in step S32 described above (see Figure 37). In response, the image and sound control CPU 101 and lamp CPU 121 execute the necessary feature control based on the setting information for the "Double Number Symbol Attention" feature included in the variable feature start command received from the sub-control board 90, thereby realizing the "Double Number Symbol Attention" feature as exemplified in Figures 15(B) to (E) and Figures 16(G) to (H).

[Setting the oscillation effect pattern by the sub-control board 90]
Figure 48 is a detailed flowchart of the oscillation effect pattern setting process in step S169 of Figure 46. The sub-CPU 91 executes a series of oscillation effect pattern setting processes illustrated in Figure 48, following the process in step S168 of Figure 46, in order to execute and control various oscillation effects to be performed in the aforementioned pre-read target fluctuation (the fluctuation) based on Figures 23 and 24.

The sub-CPU 91 first acquires a random number for the oscillation effect and stores it in the sub-RAM 93 (step S1691). This random number for the oscillation effect is incremented by "1" each time the random number update process described above is performed. The sub-CPU 91 then acquires and stores the count value at the time it receives the oscillation start command from the main control board 80 as the random number for the oscillation effect.

Next, the sub-CPU 91 performs an execution determination process for the oscillation effect that does not correspond to the operation at the start of the fluctuation, based on Figure 23(B), etc. (step S1692). Specifically, for example, it determines whether or not to execute the oscillation effect that does not correspond to the operation at the start of the fluctuation based on whether or not the oscillation effect random number obtained by the process in step S1691 matches any of the multiple random numbers stored in the sub-ROM 92 (which are compared with the oscillation effect random number).

Here, if the result of the determination process in step S1692 is to execute the "Oscillation Performance Not Responding to Operation at Start of Fluctuation" (step S1693: YES), the setting information for the "Oscillation Performance Not Responding to Operation at Start of Fluctuation" is set in the sub-RAM 93 (step S1694). This setting information for the "Oscillation Performance Not Responding to Operation at Start of Fluctuation" includes information indicating the oscillation pattern of the robot-type gimmick 15, which involves oscillating the robot-type gimmick 15 at high speed for 2 seconds (see Figures 23(B) and 24).

Next, if the sub-CPU 91 has executed the process in step S1694, or if the result of the determination process in step S1692 is that the oscillation effect not corresponding to the operation at the start of the fluctuation will not be executed (step S1693: NO), then, for example, based on the setting information stored in the sub-RAM 93 by the setting process in step S168 of Figure 46, it determines whether or not the dialogue announcement (see Figure 23(D)) will be executed (step S1695).

Here, if the sub-CPU 91 determines that a dialogue announcement should be executed (step S1695: YES), it performs a determination process for executing the pre-reach operation corresponding oscillation effect based on Figure 23(E), etc. (step S1696). Specifically, for example, it determines whether to execute the pre-reach operation corresponding oscillation effect based on whether the oscillation effect random number obtained by the process in step S1691 matches any of the multiple random numbers stored in the sub-ROM 92 (which are compared with the oscillation effect random number). Note that the multiple random numbers referenced in this step S1696 process are different from the multiple random numbers referenced in the process in step S1692.

Here, if the result of the judgment process in step S1696 is to execute the pre-reach operation corresponding swinging effect (step S1697: YES), the setting information for the pre-reach operation corresponding swinging effect is set in the sub-RAM 93 (step S1698). This setting information for the pre-reach operation corresponding swinging effect includes information indicating the swinging pattern of the robot-type gimmick 15, which swings the robot-type gimmick 15 at a medium speed for 3.5 seconds (see Figures 23(E) and 24).

Next, if the sub-CPU 91 has executed the process in step S1698 and determines that the dialogue announcement will not be executed (step S1695: NO), or if the result of the determination process in step S1696 is that the pre-reach operation corresponding oscillation effect will not be executed (step S1697: NO), then, for example, based on the information indicating the fluctuation effect pattern stored in the sub-RAM 93 by the fluctuation effect pattern setting process in step S163 of Figure 44, it determines whether or not to develop into an SP reach (step S1699).

Here, if the sub-CPU 91 determines that the game will develop into an SP reach (step S1699: YES), it performs an execution determination process for the SP reach operation-independent oscillation effect based on Figure 23(I), etc. (step S1700). Specifically, for example, it determines whether to execute the pre-reach operation-compatible oscillation effect based on whether the oscillation effect random number obtained by the process in step S1691 matches any of the multiple random numbers stored in the sub-ROM 92 (which are compared with the oscillation effect random number). Note that the multiple random numbers referenced in this step S1700 are different from the multiple random numbers referenced in the process in step S1692 and the multiple random numbers referenced in the process in step S1696.

Here, if the result of the judgment process in step S1700 is to execute the SP reach operation-incompatible swinging effect (step S1701: YES), the setting information for the SP reach operation-incompatible swinging effect is set in the sub-RAM 93 (step S1702). This setting information for the SP reach operation-incompatible swinging effect includes information indicating the swinging pattern of the robot-type gimmick 15, which swings the robot-type gimmick 15 at a low speed for 4.5 seconds (see Figures 23(I) and 24).

Next, if the sub-CPU 91 determines, after executing the process in step S1702, that it will not develop into an SP reach (step S1699: NO), or if the result of the determination process in step S1700 is that the non-operation-compatible oscillation effect during the SP reach will not be executed (step S1701: NO), then it determines whether or not to develop into an SPSP reach based on, for example, the information indicating the fluctuation effect pattern stored in the sub-RAM 93 by the fluctuation effect pattern setting process in step S163 of Figure 44 (step S1703).

Here, if the sub-CPU 91 determines that the game will develop into an SPSP reach (step S1703: YES), it determines, for example, based on the analysis results of step S162 in Figure 44, whether the result of the first special symbol determination is a "jackpot" (step S1704). Here, the aforementioned jackpot-indicating oscillation effect, as shown in Figure 23(O), is always executed when a jackpot notification effect is performed in an SPSP reach, even if the player does not operate the second effect button 36. Therefore, if the sub-CPU 91 determines that the result of the first special symbol determination is a "jackpot" (step S1704: YES), it sets the setting information for the jackpot-indicating oscillation effect in the sub-RAM 93 (step S1705). This setting information for the jackpot-indicating oscillation effect includes information indicating the oscillation pattern of the robot-type gimmick 15, which involves oscillating the robot-type gimmick 15 at an extremely slow speed for 10 seconds (see Figures 23(O) and 24).

The setting information set in sub-RAM 93 during the processing of step S1694, the setting information set in sub-RAM 93 during the processing of step S1698, the setting information set in sub-RAM 93 during the processing of step S1702, and the setting information set in sub-RAM 93 during the processing of step S1705 are included in the fluctuation effect start command and are transmitted to the image and sound control board 100 (and lamp control board 120) by the command transmission processing of step S32 (see Figure 37) described above. In response, the lamp CPU 121 of the lamp control board 120 controls the drive of the robot-type gimmick oscillating motor 154 based on the setting information included in the fluctuation effect start command received from sub-control board 90, thereby realizing the various oscillating effects described above, as shown in Figures 23, 24, etc.

In this explanation, the execution determination processes in steps S1692, S1696, and S1700 were described using the example of performing the execution determination process by referencing multiple different random values stored in the sub-ROM 92. However, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, if the result of the first special symbol determination performed at the start of the pre-read target variation is "jackpot," the multiple random values referenced will differ depending on the type of jackpot.

In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, as described above based on Figure 6(B), there are two types of jackpots related to the first special symbol determination in the normal game state: "3R probability variation A" and "3R normal". In this regard, the sub-CPU 91, for example, if the result of the first special symbol determination is "3R normal", determines in step S1692 whether the fluctuating effect random number obtained in step S1691 matches any of the X (for example, 50) random values stored in the sub-ROM 92. On the other hand, if the result of the first special symbol determination is "3R probability variation A", the sub-CPU 91 determines in step S1692 whether the fluctuating effect random number obtained in step S1691 matches any of the Y (for example, 80) random values stored in the sub-ROM 92.

Thus, when the result of the first special symbol judgment in the normal game state is a jackpot, and the type of jackpot is "3R probability variation A," more random values are used in the execution judgment process compared to when it is "3R normal." Therefore, in the process of step S1692 described above, when it is "3R probability variation A," it is more likely than when it is "3R normal" to determine that the unresponsive oscillation effect at the start of the variation should be executed.

As is clear from the explanation so far, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the number of random values referenced when it is a "3R probability variation A" is greater than the number of random values referenced when it is a "3R normal" win. Therefore, as described above based on Figure 24, the swing animation that does not correspond to the operation at the start of the variation, the swing animation that corresponds to the operation before the reach, and the swing animation that does not correspond to the operation during the SP reach are each more likely to be executed when it is a probability variation jackpot than when it is a normal jackpot.

[Interrupt processing by the image and sound control board 100]
Next, the interrupt processing performed in the image and sound control board 100 will be described with reference to Figure 49. Here, Figure 49 is a flowchart illustrating the interrupt processing performed in the image and sound control board 100. During normal operation, excluding special cases such as power-on or power-off, the image and sound control board 100 repeatedly executes the series of processes exemplified in Figure 49 at regular intervals (for example, 33 milliseconds).

First, the image and sound control CPU 101 executes image display control processing to control the image display on the display screen 70 based on commands received from the sub-control board 90 (step S71). This image display control processing will be described in detail later with reference to Figure 50.

Following the processing in step S71, the image and sound control CPU 101 executes sound output control processing to output various sound effects from the speaker 38, either synchronously or asynchronously with the screen display on the display screen 70 (step S72).

Following the processing in step S72, the image and sound control CPU 101 executes data transmission control processing (step S73). Specifically, it transmits data related to image and sound control performed on the image and sound control board 100 to the sub-control board 90. The sub-control board 90 then forwards the data received from the image and sound control board 100 to the lamp control board 120. This controls the frame lamps 37, the panel lamps 5, the movable decorative members 14, etc., in synchronization with the effects performed by the display screen 70 and the speaker 38.

[Image display control processing by the image and sound control board 100]
Figure 50 is a detailed flowchart of the image display control process in step S71 of Figure 49. First, the image and sound control CPU 101 determines whether or not it has received a command transmitted from the sub-control board 90 (step S711). If it is determined that no command has been received (step S711: NO), the process proceeds to step S72.

Meanwhile, when the image and sound control CPU 101 determines that it has received a command from the sub-control board 90 (step S711: YES), it sets the setting information contained in that command into the control RAM 103 (step S712). Based on the setting information set in the control RAM 103, it determines how the performance image should be displayed on the display screen 70, creates a display list to control the drawing process of the VDP 104, stores it in a predetermined area of the control RAM 103 (step S713), and sets that display list into the display list storage area of the VRAM 106 (step S714). The VDP 104 then executes the drawing process based on the display list set in this display list storage area, thereby realizing the performance display instructed by the sub-control board 90.

[Interrupt processing by the lamp control board 120]
Next, the interrupt processing performed on the lamp control board 120 will be explained with reference to Figure 51. Here, Figure 51 is a flowchart illustrating the interrupt processing performed on the lamp control board 120. During normal operation, excluding special cases such as power-on or power-off, the lamp control board 120 repeatedly executes the series of processes exemplified in Figure 51 at regular intervals based on commands from the sub-control board 90 and data related to image and sound control transmitted from the image and sound control board 100 via the sub-control board 90.

The lamp CPU 121 of the lamp control board 120 first determines whether or not power has been supplied to the lamp control board 120 (step S801). This determination of whether or not power has been supplied can be made by any process that can determine whether or not power has been supplied to the lamp control board 120. However, in this embodiment, the lamp CPU 121 determines whether or not power has been supplied to the lamp control board 120 based on whether or not it has started the calculation process for controlling the operation of the frame lamp 37, the panel lamp 5, the movable decorative member 14, the robot-type gimmick 15, the performance indicator 125, the first special effect hold indicator 126, the second special effect hold indicator 127, etc. If it is determined that power has not been supplied to the lamp control board 120 (step S801: NO), that is, if it is not the timing for power supply to the lamp control board 120 to be started, the process proceeds to step S803 without performing the process in step S802.

On the other hand, when the lamp CPU 121 determines that power has been supplied to the lamp control board 120 (step S801: YES), that is, when it is the timing for power supply to the lamp control board 120 to begin, it starts the pre-speed change oscillation performance by the robot-type gimmick 15 (step S802). As described above based on Figures 21 to 25, etc., the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is configured to execute multiple oscillation performances that cause the robot-type gimmick 15 to oscillate in various oscillation patterns. However, the pre-speed change oscillation performance causes the robot-type gimmick 15 to oscillate in a different oscillation pattern than these multiple oscillation performances, and is also different from the above multiple oscillation performances in that it is performed only when power is supplied to the lamp control board 120, and not during the display of special symbols. Furthermore, while the multiple oscillation effects described here are realized by the lamp CPU 121 performing the necessary effect control based on the fluctuation start command transmitted from the sub-control board 90, the preceding speed change oscillation effect differs from the above multiple oscillation effects in that it is an oscillation effect that the lamp CPU 121 executes independently of the command from the sub-control board 90.

As described above, for example, in the case of a pre-swing animation (see Figure 22(B)), the robot-type gimmick 15 is swinged at high speed for 1 second. Also, for example, in the case of an SP reach-incompatible swing animation (see Figure 23(I)), the robot-type gimmick 15 is swinged at low speed for 4.5 seconds. In contrast, the pre-speed change oscillation effect uses a composite oscillation pattern that combines the oscillation patterns of the robot-type gimmick 15 in the pre-oscillation effect (see Figure 22(B)), the oscillation pattern of the robot-type gimmick 15 in the oscillation effect that does not respond to operation at the start of the variation (see Figure 23(B)), the oscillation pattern of the robot-type gimmick 15 in the oscillation effect that responds to operation before a reach (see Figure 23(E)), the oscillation pattern of the robot-type gimmick 15 in the oscillation effect that does not respond to operation during an SP reach (see Figure 23(I)), and the oscillation pattern of the robot-type gimmick 15 in the oscillation effect that suggests a win (see Figure 23(O)).

In other words, during the pre-speed change oscillation effect, the robot-type gimmick 15 performs oscillation effects that appear to be executed in succession, including a pre-oscillation effect, an unresponsive oscillation effect at the start of the variation, an unresponsive oscillation effect before a reach, an unresponsive oscillation effect during an SP reach, and a swing indication oscillation effect. Because the oscillation speed (oscillation rate) of the robot-type gimmick 15 differs from that of the other multiple oscillation effects, when the pre-speed change oscillation effect is performed, the oscillation speed of the robot-type gimmick 15 appears to change multiple times during the process.

Although not shown in the diagram, the lamp ROM 122 stores not only the oscillation pattern data for the robot-type gimmick 15 corresponding to each of the multiple oscillation effects described above, but also oscillation pattern data specifically for the pre-speed variable oscillation effect. When the lamp CPU 121 determines that power has been supplied to the lamp control board 120 (step S801: YES), in step S802, it reads the oscillation pattern data specifically for the pre-speed variable oscillation effect from the oscillation pattern data for the robot-type gimmick 15 stored in the lamp ROM 122 into the lamp RAM 123 and starts driving control of the robot-type gimmick oscillation motor 154 (see Figure 5).

Next, if the lamp CPU 121 has executed the process in step S802, or if it has determined that it is not the power-on start timing (step S801: NO), it determines whether or not it has received an operation check start command from the sub-control board 90 (step S803). This operation check start command is a command that the sub-CPU 91 sends to the image and sound control board 100 and the lamp control board 120 when power is supplied to the gaming machine 1. The operation check start command sent to the lamp control board 120 is a command that instructs the execution of an operation check of the movable decorative member 14. Unlike the variation effect start command, it is not sent repeatedly, but is sent only once immediately after power is supplied to the gaming machine 1.

When the lamp CPU 121 determines that it has received a command to start operation verification from the sub-control board 90 (step S803: YES), it starts the movable decorative member control process (step S804). Specifically, it reads the operation pattern data for the movable decorative member 14 from the operation pattern data stored in the lamp ROM 122 into the lamp RAM 123, and starts drive control of the movable decorative member motor 141 (see Figure 5) that operates the movable decorative member 14. This verifies whether the movable decorative member 14 is operating correctly.

Next, if the lamp CPU 121 executes the process in step S805, or if it determines that it has not received an operation check start command (step S803: NO), it determines whether the operation check time has elapsed (step S805). Specifically, when the lamp CPU 121 executes the process in step S804, it counts the elapsed time from the execution timing, and determines whether the operation check time has elapsed based on whether the counted elapsed time exceeds the operation check time stored in the lamp ROM 122.

Here, if the lamp CPU 121 determines that the operation check time has elapsed (step S805: YES), it determines whether the operation check of the movable decorative member 14 has been completed successfully (step S806).

In this embodiment, the movable decorative member 14 is normally positioned in the initial position illustrated in Figure 2. However, when a performance is performed that activates the movable decorative member 14, the movable decorative member 14 drops from its initial position to an operating position that covers most of the display screen 70. Afterward, the movable decorative member 14 returns to its initial position due to the driving force from the movable decorative member motor 141. In contrast, the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is provided with an initial position detection sensor that detects when the movable decorative member 14 is in its initial position, and an operating position detection sensor that detects when the movable decorative member 14 is in its operating position.

In step S806, the lamp CPU 121 determines whether the operation check of the movable decorative member 14 has been successfully completed, based on whether, for example, a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the movable decorative member control process in step S804, the operation position detection sensor has detected that the movable decorative member 14 is in the operating position, and whether, at the time the operation check period has elapsed, the initial position detection sensor has detected that the movable decorative member 14 is in the initial position.

Here, if the lamp CPU 121 determines that the operation check of the movable decorative member 14 has been completed successfully (step S806: YES), it terminates the pre-speed change oscillation effect started in step S802 (step S807). Conversely, if it determines that the operation check of the movable decorative member 14 has not been completed successfully (step S806: NO), it executes a movable decorative member error notification (step S808). Specifically, it sends a command to the sub-control board 90 notifying that the operation check of the movable decorative member 14 has not been completed successfully. Upon receiving this command, the sub-CPU 91 uses the display screen 70 and speaker 35 to announce the movable decorative member error.

As is clear from the explanation so far, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, when power is supplied to the lamp control board 120, the robot-type gimmick 15 first starts a pre-speed change oscillation effect, and then, a short delay later, the movable decorative member 14 starts moving for the purpose of checking its operation. Therefore, the staff of the hall where the gaming machine 1 is installed can visually confirm whether the robot-type gimmick 15 and the movable decorative member 14 are functioning correctly.

Furthermore, power to the gaming machine 1 (lamp control board 120) is not limited to when a hall employee switches on the so-called island power supply while the gaming machine 1 is powered on, before the hall opens. For example, power may also be restored to the gaming machine 1 (lamp control board 120) when lightning strikes while a player is playing on the gaming machine 1, temporarily interrupting the power supply.

In contrast, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, even when power is turned on (or restarted) during gameplay by a player, the robot-type gimmick 15 initiates a pre-speed-shifting oscillation effect prior to the operation check of the movable decorative member 14. Therefore, while the operation check of the movable decorative member 14 is being performed, the player can enjoy watching the robot-type gimmick 15.

Furthermore, when the movable decorative member 14 is being tested, the display screen 70 is also being tested. Therefore, information not directly related to the game is displayed on the display screen 70. In contrast, in the game machine 1 of this embodiment, the pre-speed change oscillation effect is performed while this information not directly related to the game is displayed on the display screen 70. This allows the player's gaze to be guided to the robot-type gimmick 15, thus keeping the player entertained even while the game machine 1's operational checks, which are not particularly enjoyable for the player, are being performed.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 51, the lamp CPU 121, after executing the process in step S807, after executing the process in step S808, or after determining that the operation confirmation time has not elapsed (step S805: NO), determines whether the specified time has elapsed (step S809). Specifically, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the specified time required for the pre-speed change oscillation effect by the robot-type gimmick 15 is stored in the lamp ROM 122. The lamp CPU 121 determines whether the specified time has elapsed based on whether the elapsed time since the start of the pre-speed change oscillation effect in step S802 exceeds the specified time.

Then, if the lamp CPU 121 determines that a specified time has elapsed (step S809: YES), it determines whether the robot-type gimmick 15 is operating based on whether the movable decorative member motor 141 is operating (step S810). If it determines that the robot-type gimmick 15 is operating (step S810: YES), it returns the robot-type gimmick 15 to its initial position (see Figure 21(A)) and terminates the pre-speed variable oscillation effect started in step S802 (step S811).

Next, if the lamp CPU 121 has executed the process in step S811 and determines that the specified time has not elapsed (step S809: NO), or determines that the robot-type gimmick 15 is not operating (step S810: NO), it executes a data reception process to receive data related to image and sound control transmitted from the image and sound control board 100 via the sub-control board 90 (step S812). Based on the image and sound control data received in step S812, the lamp CPU 121 controls the frame lamp 37, the panel lamp 5, the movable decorative member 14, the robot-type gimmick 15, etc., in synchronization with the effects of the display screen 70 and the speaker 38.

Following the processing in step S812, the lamp CPU 121 determines whether or not it has received a variable effect start command transmitted from the sub-control board 90 (step S813). If it determines that the variable effect start command has been received (step S813: YES), it reads the light emission pattern data corresponding to the setting information contained in the received variable effect start command from the lamp ROM 122 and sets it in the lamp RAM 123, thereby setting the light emission patterns of the frame lamp 37, the panel lamp 5, and the LEDs built into the movable decorative member 14 (step S814). Then, the lamp CPU 121 starts controlling the light emission of each light emission means based on the set light emission pattern data (step S815). At this time, the light emission pattern of the LEDs built into the robot-type gimmick 15 may also be set to perform a light emission effect using the robot-type gimmick 15.

Following the processing in step S815, the lamp CPU 121 determines, based on the setting information contained in the received variation effect start command, whether or not it is instructed to perform a special effect that operates the movable decorative member 14 during the current symbol variation (step S816). If it is determined that it is instructed to perform the special effect (step S816: YES), the operation pattern data corresponding to the setting information contained in the received variation effect start command is read from the lamp ROM 122 and set in the lamp RAM 123, thereby setting the operation pattern of the movable decorative member 14 (step S817).

If the lamp CPU 121 has executed the process in step S817, or if it has determined that it has not been instructed to perform a special effect (step S816: NO), it determines, based on the setting information contained in the received variation effect start command, whether or not it has been instructed to perform a rocking effect that rocks the robot-type gimmick 15 during the current symbol variation (step S818). If it has determined that it has been instructed to perform a rocking effect (step S818: YES), it reads the rocking pattern data corresponding to the setting information contained in the received variation effect start command from the lamp ROM 122 and sets it in the lamp RAM 123, thereby setting the rocking pattern of the robot-type gimmick 15 (step S819).

If the lamp CPU 121 executes the process in step S819, and determines that the execution of the swaying effect has not been instructed (step S818: NO), or determines that it has not received a command to start the fluctuation effect (step S813: NO), it determines whether or not the operation pattern of the movable decorative member 14 is set, based on whether or not the operation pattern data for the movable decorative member 14 is set in the lamp RAM 123 (step S821).

Here, if the lamp CPU 121 determines that the operation pattern of the movable decorative member 14 has been set (step S821: YES), it determines, for example, whether it is the start timing for the operation of the movable decorative member 14 based on the image and sound control data received by the data reception processing in step S812 (step S822). If it determines that it is the start timing for the operation of the movable decorative member 14 (step S822: YES), it executes the movable decorative member control processing (drive control of the movable decorative member motor 141) (step S823). As a result, the special effect using the movable decorative member 14 is executed.

If the lamp CPU 121 executes the process in step S823, and determines that the operation pattern for the movable decorative member 14 is not set (step S821: NO), or determines that it is not the timing for the movable decorative member 14 to start operation (step S822: NO), it determines whether the swinging pattern data for the robot-type gimmick 15 is set based on whether or not the swinging pattern data for the robot-type gimmick 15 is set in the lamp RAM 123 (step S824).

Here, if the lamp CPU 121 determines that a swaying pattern for the robot-type gimmick 15 has been set (step S824: YES), it determines, for example, whether it is the timing for the robot-type gimmick 15 to start swaying, based on the image and sound control data received by the data reception processing in step S812 (step S825). If it determines that it is the timing for the robot-type gimmick 15 to start swaying (step S825: YES), it starts the robot-type gimmick control processing (drive control of the robot-type gimmick swaying motor 154) (step S826). This executes the swaying effect using the robot-type gimmick 15.

If the lamp CPU 121 executes the process in step S826, and determines that the oscillation pattern of the robot-type gimmick 15 is not set (step S824: NO), or that it is not the timing for the oscillation start of the robot-type gimmick 15 (step S825: NO), it determines whether or not it has received the fluctuation effect end command transmitted from the sub-control board 90 (step S827). If it determines that the fluctuation effect end command has been received (step S827: YES), it executes light emission control for the confirmation effect that announces the win or loss (step S828). Specifically, it reads the light emission pattern data corresponding to the setting information contained in the received fluctuation effect end command from the lamp ROM 122 and sets it in the lamp RAM 123, thereby setting the light emission patterns of the LEDs built into the frame lamp 37, the panel lamp 5, the movable decorative member 14, etc. Then, based on the set light emission pattern data, the lamp CPU 121 executes light emission control of each light emission means until the confirmation time has elapsed.

[Second Embodiment]
A second embodiment of the present invention will now be described. The gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment is basically capable of performing all the game control and performance control that the gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment can perform, and in addition, it is capable of performing performances described later based on Figures 53 to 61, a series of processes described later based on Figures 62 to 66, and performances described later based on Figures 67 to 74. In the following description of the second embodiment, explanations of configurations and processes common to the gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment will be omitted, and the explanation will focus on the differences from the first embodiment.

<Regarding the peripheral configuration of the performance control board 90>
First, with reference to Figure 52, the peripheral configuration of the performance control board 90 included in the gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment will be described. Here, Figure 52 is a block diagram showing an example of the peripheral configuration of the performance control board 90 included in the gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment.

In the first embodiment, as described above with reference to Figure 5, the case in which the first performance button detection sensor 96, the second performance button detection sensor 97, etc., are electrically connected to the sub-control board 90 was explained as an example.

In contrast, the sub-control board 90 of the gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment is electrically connected to a directional pad 161, a volume control key 162, and a light intensity control key 163, in addition to the first performance button detection sensor 96 and the second performance button detection sensor 97.

The directional pad 161, although not shown in the diagram, is located on the front frame 31 in close proximity to the first performance button 35 (see Figure 1). This directional pad 161 consists of four keys: an up key, a down key, a left key, and a right key. By operating any of these keys, the player can change the selection of items displayed on the display screen 70, highlight an item other than the currently highlighted item, or move the display objects displayed on the display screen 70.

The volume control key 162, although not shown in the figure, is located at a predetermined position on the front frame 31 and consists of an up key for increasing the volume and a down key for decreasing the volume. The sub-RAM 93 stores volume setting information indicating the current volume of the sound effects (voice, music, background music, sound effects, etc.) output from the speaker 38. The sub-CPU 91 updates the volume setting information in the sub-RAM 93 to increase the volume of the sound effects output from the speaker 38 based on an operation signal indicating that the up key of the volume control key 162 has been pressed. Similarly, the sub-CPU 91 updates the volume setting information in the sub-RAM 93 to decrease the volume of the sound effects output from the speaker 38 based on an operation signal indicating that the down key of the volume control key 162 has been pressed.

The light intensity adjustment key 163, although not shown in the figure, is located on the front frame 31 in close proximity to the volume adjustment key 162. This light intensity adjustment key 163 consists of an upper key for increasing the light intensity of the display screen 70 and a lower key for decreasing the light intensity. The sub-RAM 93 stores light intensity setting information indicating the current light intensity of the display screen 70. The sub-CPU 91 updates the light intensity setting information in the sub-RAM 93 to increase the light intensity of the display screen 70 based on an operation signal indicating that the upper key of the light intensity adjustment key 163 has been operated. Similarly, the sub-CPU 91 updates the light intensity setting information in the sub-RAM 93 to decrease the light intensity of the display screen 70 based on an operation signal indicating that the lower key of the light intensity adjustment key 163 has been operated.

<Features of each performance mode>
Next, the characteristics of each performance mode will be explained with reference to Figure 53. Here, Figure 53 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the characteristics of each performance mode. In the gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment, similar to the gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, the game is controlled by the main CPU 81 in one of the following game states: normal game state, probability variation game state, or time-saving game state. In contrast, the sub-CPU 91 controls the performance in the normal performance mode when the game is controlled in the normal game state, controls the performance in the probability variation performance mode when the game is controlled in the probability variation game state, and controls the performance in the time-saving performance mode when the game is controlled in the time-saving game state.

When the game is controlled in normal game mode, the background image for normal game mode is displayed in full screen on the display screen 70, as illustrated in Figure 53. Also, when the game is controlled in normal game mode, a game symbol consisting of a number (any of 1 to 9), a decorative image to adorn the number, and a character image specific to the number is displayed on the display screen 70. Furthermore, when the game is controlled in normal game mode, the background music for normal game mode or a selected song chosen by the player is output from the speaker 38. Additionally, when the game is controlled in normal game mode, icons in the normal game mode configuration are displayed, indicating that the first special symbol is currently being displayed in a variable state, or as a hold icon indicating that the right to determine the first special symbol is reserved.

On the other hand, when the game is controlled in the probability variation mode, a background image for the probability variation mode is displayed in full screen on the display screen 70, as illustrated in Figure 53. Furthermore, a game symbol consisting of a number (any of 1 to 9) and a decorative image to decorate the number is displayed on the display screen 70. In addition, background music for the probability variation mode and a selected song chosen by the player are output from the speaker 38. In this embodiment of the game machine 1, when the game is controlled in the probability variation mode, it is possible to output a selected song from the speaker 38 that is not output when the game is controlled in the normal mode, based on the player's operation. Also, when the game is controlled in the probability variation mode, icons in the probability variation mode are displayed as an icon indicating that the second special symbol is currently changing during the probability variation game state, or as a hold icon indicating that the right to judge the second special symbol is reserved.

Furthermore, when the performance is controlled in the time-saving performance mode, a background image for the time-saving performance mode is displayed in full screen on the display screen 70, as illustrated in Figure 53. Also, a performance symbol consisting of a number (any of 1 to 9) and a decorative image decorating the number is displayed on the display screen 70. In addition, background music for the time-saving performance mode and selected music chosen by the player are output from the speaker 38. In this embodiment of the gaming machine 1, when the performance is controlled in the time-saving performance mode, it is possible to output selected music from the speaker 38 based on the player's operation, similar to when the performance is controlled in the probability variation performance mode. Furthermore, when the performance is controlled in the time-saving performance mode, icons in the probability variation performance mode are displayed as an icon indicating that the second special symbol is currently changing during the time-saving game state, or as a reserved icon indicating that the right to judge the second special symbol is reserved.

Thus, in the gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment, different background images are displayed on the display screen 70 depending on the performance mode, and different performance symbols are displayed on the display screen 70. Furthermore, different background music (BGM) or selected songs can be output from the speaker 38 depending on the performance mode, and different display modes of hold icons and the icons themselves are displayed.

<About the animation during the pause display>
Next, with reference to Figure 54, we will explain the stop-display effects that are performed during the non-variable display period when the special symbols are not displayed in a variable state. Here, Figure 54 is a time chart illustrating the flow of stop-display effects in each effect mode. In the gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment, during the "variable display period" when the first special symbol (or second special symbol) is displayed in a variable state, a variable effect including the display of the effect symbols is performed in conjunction with the variable display of the first special symbol (or second special symbol) (see Figures 54(A) and (B)). Then, when the variable display of the special symbols ends while neither the right to judge the first special symbol nor the right to judge the second special symbol is reserved, and the "variable display period" ends and the game transitions to the "non-variable display period" (stop display period) when the special symbols are displayed in a stop state, a different stop-display effect is then performed according to the current effect mode.

(Performance during stop display in normal performance mode)
Figure 54(A) illustrates a stop-display animation that is executed when transitioning from a variable display period to a non-variable display period while the animation is controlled in normal animation mode. As illustrated in Figure 54(A), when transitioning to a non-variable display period while the animation is controlled in normal animation mode (i.e., when the game is controlled in normal gameplay mode), a prize-winning waiting animation using the display screen 70 is started. As will be described in detail later, this prize-winning waiting animation consists of a character performance animation and an animation customization promotion animation (see, for example, Figure 57(A)), and in this embodiment, its execution time is set to 35 seconds.

Furthermore, the number of times the prize-winning waiting animation is executed during the non-variable display period is not limited to one. Multiple prize-winning waiting animations can be executed, interspersed with the customer-waiting demo movie playback animation described later. Figure 54(A) illustrates the execution of two prize-winning waiting animations: the first and second. In this embodiment, the explanation uses the case where no sound is output from speaker 38 during the prize-winning waiting animation. However, for example, during the prize-winning waiting animation, background music for the character performance animation may be output from speaker 38, or operation sounds corresponding to player actions may be output from speaker 38.

As will be explained in detail later, during the waiting-for-winning animation, the player can use the directional pad 161 to change the background music (BGM) output from speaker 38 during the special symbol display, customize the animation settings performed on the gaming machine 1, or, conversely, perform a custom reset to return the current animation settings to their default settings. Furthermore, during the waiting-for-winning animation, the volume of the animation sound output from speaker 38 can be changed by operating the volume adjustment key 162, and the brightness of the display screen 70 can be changed by operating the brightness adjustment key 163.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 54(A), if 35 seconds have elapsed since the start of the first prize-winning waiting sequence without the player operating the first sequence button 35, the second sequence button 36, or the directional pad 161, the first customer-waiting demo movie playback sequence using the display screen 70 will begin. As illustrated in Figure 54(A), when this customer-waiting demo movie playback sequence is executed, the following are displayed in order: a sequence introduction introducing the sequences performed in the game machine 1, a character introduction introducing the characters appearing in the sequences performed in the game machine 1, a company information display showing information about the company that manufactures or sells the game machine 1, and a warning display about addiction to alert the player to potential gambling addiction. In this embodiment, the execution time of this customer-waiting demo movie playback sequence is set to 50 seconds.

Next, during either the first prize-winning animation or the first customer-waiting demo movie playback animation, if the first animation button 35, the second animation button 36, or the directional pad 161 are not pressed, and 50 seconds have elapsed since the start of the first customer-waiting demo movie playback animation, the second prize-winning animation will be performed. The execution time of this second prize-winning animation is the same as the first prize-winning animation, 35 seconds. During the second prize-winning animation, if the first animation button 35, the second animation button 36, or the directional pad 161 are not pressed, and 35 seconds have elapsed since the start of the second prize-winning animation, the second customer-waiting demo movie playback animation will begin.

Thus, in the gaming machine 1 according to this embodiment, if, during the non-variable display period in the normal performance mode, the first performance button 35, the second performance button 36, or the directional pad 161 are not operated even once, the winning animation and the customer waiting demo movie playback animation will alternately repeat.

On the other hand, if the player operates the first action button 35, the second action button 36, or the directional pad 161 during the customer waiting demo movie playback sequence, the customer waiting demo movie playback sequence will end and the prize winning sequence will begin. Since this prize winning sequence is configured to include a sequence that promotes sequence customization, as described above, it can be said that by operating the first action button 35, the second action button 36, or the directional pad 161 during the customer waiting demo movie playback sequence, it becomes possible to customize the sequence, change the background music, or perform a custom reset.

As described above, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, if the first performance button 35, the second performance button 36, or the directional key 161 is operated during the customer waiting demo movie playback sequence, the customer waiting demo movie playback sequence ends prematurely, and the prize winning sequence begins. On the other hand, if the player operates the volume adjustment key 162 or the light intensity adjustment key 163 during the customer waiting demo movie playback sequence, it is not necessary to start the sequence customization promotion sequence. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, if the player's operation during the customer waiting demo movie playback sequence is the operation of the volume adjustment key 162 or the light intensity adjustment key 163, the ongoing customer waiting demo movie playback sequence is not terminated prematurely, but continues as is.

(Stop display effects in probability variation mode and time reduction mode)
Figure 54(B) illustrates a stop display animation that is executed when transitioning from a variable display period to a non-variable display period while the animation is controlled in a probability variation animation mode or a time reduction animation mode. As illustrated in Figure 54(B), when the animation is controlled in a probability variation animation mode or a time reduction animation mode (i.e., the game is controlled in a probability variation game state or a time reduction game state), five seconds have elapsed since transitioning to a non-variable display period, and a game animation using the display screen 70 is started. As will be described in detail later, this game animation is an item drop animation that shows an item (setting change item) that enables animation customization falling, and in this embodiment, its execution time is set to 25 seconds.

In this embodiment, we will explain using the example where the time from transitioning to the non-variable display period until the start of the game animation is set to 5 seconds, but this time may be other times. That is, in this embodiment, we will explain using the example where the time from transitioning to the non-variable display period until the start of the game animation (5 seconds in this embodiment) is shorter than the time from transitioning to the non-variable display period until the start of the prize-winning waiting animation (10 seconds in this embodiment). However, the former time related to the game animation may be the same as the latter time related to the prize-winning waiting animation, or it may be longer than the latter time related to the prize-winning waiting animation.

Furthermore, the execution time of the game animation is not limited to 25 seconds; it may be the same as the execution time of the prize-winning waiting animation (35 seconds in this embodiment), or it may be longer than the execution time of the prize-winning waiting animation.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 54(B), the number of times the game animation is executed during the non-variable display period is not limited to one. Multiple game animations can be executed, interspersed with the customer waiting demo movie playback animation. Figure 54(B) illustrates the execution of the first, second, and third game animations. In this embodiment, the explanation uses the example where no sound is output from speaker 38 during the game animation (during the item drop animation). However, for example, during the game animation, dedicated background music for the game animation may be output from speaker 38, or a predetermined drop sound may be output from speaker 38 when a setting change item drops.

As will be explained in detail later, during a game sequence, the player can perform a predetermined operation to end the sequence and initiate the prize-winning sequence described above, based on Figure 54(A). Therefore, even when the sequence is controlled in a probability variation or time-saving sequence and a non-variable display period occurs, it is possible to change the background music output from speaker 38 during the variation display of special symbols, perform sequence customization by arbitrarily changing the settings related to the sequences performed on the gaming machine 1, or conversely, perform a custom reset to return the current sequence settings to their default settings, just as when the sequence is controlled in normal sequence and a non-variable display period occurs. Furthermore, during the game sequence, the volume of the sequence sound output from speaker 38 can be changed by operating the volume adjustment key 162, and the brightness of the display screen 70 can be changed by operating the brightness adjustment key 163.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 54(B), after transitioning to the non-variable display period, if the first game sequence begins without the player operating the first performance button 35, the second performance button 36, or the directional pad 161, and 25 seconds (the execution time of the game sequence) have elapsed, the first customer-waiting demo movie playback sequence using the display screen 70 will begin. Figure 54(B) illustrates how, after transitioning to the non-variable display period, if the player does not operate the first performance button 35, the second performance button 36, or the directional pad 161, the first customer-waiting demo movie playback sequence is executed following the first game sequence during the non-variable display period in the probability variation mode or time reduction mode, and the second customer-waiting demo movie playback sequence is executed after the second game sequence. These customer-waiting demo movie playback sequences are performed in the same way as the customer-waiting demo movie playback sequence performed during the non-variable display period in the normal mode (see Figure 54(A)), so a detailed explanation is omitted here.

In the gaming machine 1 according to this embodiment, if, during the non-variable display period in the probability variation mode or the time reduction mode, the first effect button 35, the second effect button 36, or the directional pad 161 are not operated even once, the game effect and the customer waiting demo movie playback effect will be repeated alternately.

Furthermore, if the player operates the first performance button 35, the second performance button 36, or the directional pad 161 while the demo movie playback sequence shown in Figure 54(B) is running, the demo movie playback sequence will end and the game sequence will begin. On the other hand, if the volume adjustment key 162 or the brightness adjustment key 163 is operated while the demo movie playback sequence is running, the volume adjustment or brightness adjustment process will be performed without ending the demo movie playback sequence.

It goes without saying that the time shown in Figure 54 is merely an example, and other times could also be used.

<Regarding the performance settings that can be executed in each performance mode>
Next, with reference to Figure 55, we will explain the performance settings that can be implemented in each performance mode. Here, Figure 55 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the performance settings that can be implemented in each performance mode.

(Effect settings that can be executed in any effect mode)
As illustrated in Figure 55, when the game is controlled in normal gameplay mode and the effects are controlled in normal effect mode, the player can arbitrarily change the settings for each effect, including volume adjustment, brightness adjustment, premium enhancement, pre-read custom, music selection, and hidden button suggestion.

Here, the volume adjustment function controls the volume of the sound effects output from speaker 38. The player can change the volume as desired by operating the volume adjustment key 162 (see Figure 52). The light intensity adjustment function controls the light intensity of the display screen 70. The player can change the light intensity as desired by operating the light intensity adjustment key 163 (see Figure 52).

Furthermore, volume and brightness can be adjusted at any time. That is, volume and brightness can be adjusted regardless of whether the effects are controlled in normal mode, bonus mode, or time-saving mode. Specifically, for example, during the variable display period in Figure 54(A) (i.e., during the variable display of special symbols in normal performance mode), during the variable display period in Figure 54(B) (i.e., during the variable display of special symbols in probability variation performance mode or time reduction performance mode), during jackpot gameplay, during the period from the transition to the non-variable display period in Figure 54(A) until the start of the first prize-winning waiting performance, during the prize-winning waiting performance (see Figure 54(A)), during the customer-waiting demo movie playback performance (see Figures 54(A) and (B)), during the game performance (see Figure 54(B)), and during the period from the transition to the non-variable display period in Figure 54(B) until the start of the first game performance, the player can arbitrarily change the volume by operating the volume adjustment key 162, and arbitrarily change the brightness by operating the brightness adjustment key 163.

The "Premium Up" function allows you to set a state where premium effects, which do not appear when the special symbol judgment result is a "miss" but appear in some cases when it is a "jackpot," are more likely to appear than usual. The "Pre-read Custom" function allows you to set a state where the jackpot reliability of pre-read effects such as icon change effects, weak chance effect effects (see Figure 12(C)), and strong chance effect effects (see Figure 12(G)) is increased. The "Music Selection" function allows the player to arbitrarily select the music output from speaker 38. The "Hidden Button Indication" function allows you to set the button lamp built into the first effect button 35 to light up during the effective period of a hidden button effect that does not involve an action prompting the player to operate the first effect button 35. By setting the hidden button indication function to "ON," the player can recognize that the effective period for the hidden button effect is currently active.

Furthermore, these premium upgrades, pre-read customizations, music selections, and hidden button hints can be changed regardless of whether the display period is active or not, and regardless of whether the performance is controlled in normal performance mode, probability variation performance mode, or time-saving performance mode. For example, settings can be changed even during the winning waiting performance described later. The methods for changing these premium upgrades, pre-read customizations, music selections, and hidden button hints will be described in detail later based on Figures 56 to 58.

(Effect settings that can only be executed in the probability variation mode or time reduction mode)
As illustrated in Figure 55, when the game is in a probability variation state (or a time-saving state), the effects are controlled, and when the effects are controlled in a probability variation effect mode (or a time-saving effect mode), the player can arbitrarily change the settings for each of the effects, including the addition of new music, the addition of an effect explanation character, the addition of a reliability indicator character, the even number matching is extremely exciting, and the addition of a new background image.

Here, "Add New Song" is a function that allows you to select songs that are not played when the effects are controlled in normal performance mode. "Add Performance Explanation Character" is a function that adds a new character that provides explanations for the effects. "Add Reliability Indicator Character" is a function where a character appears when various pre-announcement effects occur, and that character indicates the reliability of the pre-announcement effect numerically. When the "Add Reliability Indicator Character" function is not enabled, the probability of a big win is indicated by the type and display color of the image related to the pre-announcement effect that occurred. In contrast, when the "Add Reliability Indicator Character" function is enabled, a character will appear when a pre-announcement effect occurs, and that character will indicate the probability of a big win numerically.

The "Even Number Tenpai Super Hot" feature significantly increases the probability of a jackpot when even-numbered symbols complete a reach (a winning combination). The "New Background Image Addition" feature allows players to select and display full-screen background images on the display screen 70, which are not normally shown when the game's effects are controlled in the regular game mode.

These additions—new music tracks, explanatory characters, reliability indicator characters, even-numbered combinations (high-excitement), and new background images—are performance settings that become active in response to the operation of the directional pad 161 during the game performance described above, based on Figure 54(B). Therefore, simply transitioning to the probability variation performance mode or time-saving performance mode after a player hits a jackpot during normal gameplay will not activate the functions related to the new music tracks, explanatory characters, reliability indicator characters, even-numbered combinations (high-excitement), and new background images. To activate these functions, the player must stop launching the game balls after transitioning to the probability variation performance mode or time-saving performance mode, enter a non-variable display period, and then perform the prescribed operation during the subsequent game performance.

Thus, the addition of new music, additional characters for explaining the effects, additional characters for indicating reliability, the "even number tenpai is super hot" indicator, and the addition of new background images are all effects settings that cannot be activated or configured unless the player performs the prescribed operation during the game's effects in the probability variation mode (or time reduction mode). Therefore, these effects settings are unique to the probability variation mode or time reduction mode and cannot be configured in the normal mode.

<Performance customization promotion during the variation display period in normal performance mode>
Next, with reference to Figure 56, we will explain the animation customization promotion animation during the variation display period in normal animation mode. Here, Figure 56 is a screen diagram illustrating the animation customization promotion animation in normal animation mode.

Figure 56(A) illustrates how the performance symbols are displayed in the performance symbol display area 73 in conjunction with the variation of the first special symbol in the normal performance mode (i.e., the normal gameplay state). Specifically, it illustrates how the scrolling display of the middle row of symbols is performed while the left 5 symbol and the right 6 symbol are in a pseudo-stopped state. Note that, for the sake of explanation, Figure 56(A) omits the illustration of the decorative image and character image (see Figure 53) that constitute the performance symbols in the normal performance mode. However, the left 5 symbol actually consists of the number "5", a decorative image decorating the number "5", and a character image representing character E. The right 6 symbol actually consists of the number "6", a decorative image decorating the number "6", and a character image representing character F.

As illustrated in Figure 56(A), the display screen 70 includes a hold icon display area 71, a said icon display area 72, and a performance symbol display area 73, as well as a performance sub-symbol display area 75 corresponding to Special Feature 1 and a performance sub-symbol display area 76 corresponding to Special Feature 2.

(Special Feature 1 corresponding small symbol display area 75)
The Special Feature 1 Corresponding Performance Small Symbol Display Area 75 (see Figure 56(A)) is a display area where three performance small symbols indicating whether or not the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable state are displayed, and it is a smaller display area than the performance symbol display area 73. Three performance small symbols, the left performance small symbol, the middle performance small symbol, and the right performance small symbol, are displayed in this Special Feature 1 Corresponding Performance Small Symbol Display Area 75. When the performance is controlled in normal performance mode, the performance symbol display area 73 displays a highly decorative performance symbol consisting of numbers, decorative images, and character images, as described above based on Figure 53. In contrast, the Special Feature 1 Corresponding Performance Small Symbol Display Area 75 displays a performance small symbol consisting of only numbers among the numbers, decorative images, and character images.

In the Special Feature 1 corresponding sub-symbol display area 75, as the fluctuation display of the first special symbol and the three performance symbols begins, the high-speed fluctuation display of the left performance symbol, the middle performance symbol, and the right performance symbol also begins. Figure 56(A) illustrates how the three performance symbols are displayed at high speed in the Special Feature 1 corresponding sub-symbol display area 75 while the first special symbol and the performance symbols are fluctuating.

Furthermore, in the Special Feature 1 corresponding sub-symbol display area 75, as the first special symbol and the three sub-symbols are displayed in a stopped state, the three sub-symbols are displayed in a manner that notifies the result of the first special symbol judgment performed at the start of the variation (see Figure 56(B)). Figure 56(B) illustrates a state in which, as the left 5 symbol, the middle 8 symbol, and the right 6 symbol are displayed in the sub-symbol display area 73 in a stopped state, the three sub-symbols showing the same "586" pattern as these three sub-symbols are displayed in the Special Feature 1 corresponding sub-symbol display area 75 in a stopped state.

Furthermore, the small symbols displayed in the Special Feature 1 corresponding small symbol display area 75 have the following characteristics. Specifically, the three small symbols displayed in the small symbol display area 73 change their display position, size, or temporarily disappear, as is clear from the notation in Figures 10 and 11. In contrast, the small symbols displayed in the Special Feature 1 corresponding small symbol display area 75 do not change their display position, size, or disappear.

Furthermore, regarding the three performance symbols displayed in the performance symbol display area 73, a reach may be established using the left and right performance symbols, followed by a reach animation (see, for example, Figures 10(I) and 11(A)). In contrast, regarding the performance sub-symbols displayed in the special figure 1 corresponding performance sub-symbol display area 75, a reach cannot be established using these sub-symbols, nor is a reach animation performed using these sub-symbols.

Furthermore, while the performance symbols displayed in the performance symbol display area 73 may be shown as pseudo-stops during the variation display of the first special symbol, the performance sub-symbols displayed in the special symbol 1 corresponding performance sub-symbol display area 75 will never be shown as pseudo-stops during the variation display of the first special symbol.

(Special Feature 2 corresponding small symbol display area 76)
The Special Feature 2 corresponding small performance symbol display area 76 (see Figure 56(A)) is a display area in which three small performance symbols indicating whether or not the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable state are displayed, and it is a smaller display area than the performance symbol display area 73. In this Special Feature 2 corresponding small performance symbol display area 76, three small performance symbols are displayed: the left small performance symbol, the middle small performance symbol, and the right small performance symbol, similar to the Special Feature 1 corresponding small performance symbol display area 75.

Although not shown in the diagram, in the Special Feature 2 corresponding sub-symbol display area 76, as the display of the second special symbol and the three performance symbols begins to change, the high-speed change display of the left, middle, and right sub-symbols also begins. Then, in the Special Feature 2 corresponding sub-symbol display area 76, as the second special symbol and the three performance symbols are displayed in a stopped state, the three performance symbols are displayed in a manner that indicates the result of the second special symbol judgment performed at the start of the change (see Figures 56(A) and (B)). Figures 56(A) and (B) illustrate a state where the three performance symbols showing the "214" combination are displayed in the Special Feature 2 corresponding sub-symbol display area 76 in a stopped state to indicate that the result of the final second special symbol judgment was "miss."

Furthermore, the characteristics of the sub-symbols displayed in the sub-symbol display area 76 corresponding to Special Feature 2 are the same as those of the sub-symbols displayed in the sub-symbol display area 75 corresponding to Special Feature 1, as described above. Therefore, a detailed explanation is omitted here.

(Performance customization promotion)
Next, with reference to Figure 56, the performance customization promotion performance in the normal performance mode will be described. In the gaming machine 1 according to this embodiment, the performance customization promotion performance is performed when the performance is controlled in the normal performance mode (that is, when the game is controlled in the normal game state) (see Figures 56(A) and (B)).

Figure 56(A) illustrates the process of performing a performance customization promotion effect while the first special symbol is being displayed in the normal performance mode. Figure 56(B) illustrates the process of performing a performance customization promotion effect immediately after the display of the first special symbol in the normal performance mode has ended and the game has transitioned to the non-display period described above, based on Figure 54(A).

This performance customization promotion effect displays a performance customization promotion effect image on the display screen 70 to encourage the player to customize the performance. As illustrated in Figures 56(A) and (B), this performance customization promotion effect image consists of a directional pad image resembling a directional pad 161, two text images representing the word "BGM" displayed to the left and right of the directional pad image, a text image representing the word "Custom" displayed below the directional pad image, and a text image representing the words "Custom Reset" displayed above the directional pad image.

While this performance customization promotion image is displayed, all operations on the up, left, right, and down keys of the directional pad 161 are active. Because the performance customization promotion image is configured as described above, players who view the performance customization promotion image can easily recognize that they can change the background music (BGM) output from speaker 38 during the display of the first special symbol in normal performance mode by operating the left or right key of the directional pad 161. Furthermore, players who view the performance customization promotion image can easily recognize that they can customize the performance by operating the down key of the directional pad 161, and that they can revert the performance settings changed by the customization to their default settings by operating the up key of the directional pad 161.

Furthermore, in situations where important effects indicating whether or not a jackpot has been won are being performed, such as during an SPSP reach, simply adopting a configuration that displays the effect customization promotion effect image, as explained based on Figure 56, on the display screen 70 in order to execute the effect customization promotion effect may reduce the visibility of the effect images related to the SPSP reach, and thus reduce the enjoyment of the SPSP reach.

Therefore, in the gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment, during the display of the first special symbol's variation in the normal performance mode, the performance customization promotion effect is executed during the no-reach performance shown in Figure 8(H), the pre-reach performance shown in Figure 8(J), and the normal reach shown in Figure 8(L), while the performance customization promotion effect is not executed during the SP reach shown in Figure 8(O) and the SPSP reach shown in Figure 8(P).

Up to this point, we have explained the effect customization promotion image displayed on the display screen 70 based on Figure 56. The actual method of effect customization will be described in detail later, based on Figures 57 and 58.

<Customization of the animation during the waiting animation for winning in normal animation mode>
Next, with reference to Figures 57 and 58, we will explain the customization of the animation during the waiting animation in the normal animation mode. Here, Figures 57 and 58 are screen diagrams illustrating the character performance animation and the animation customization promotion animation during the non-changing display period in the normal animation mode.

As described above based on Figure 54(A), during the non-variable display period in normal performance mode, a prize-winning waiting performance consisting of a character performance performance and a performance customization promotion performance is executed. Here, the character performance performance is a performance that displays a character performance performance image on the display screen 70, representing the character images constituting the performance symbols displayed in the performance symbol display area 73 during normal performance mode, performing a martial arts demonstration.

For example, if neither the right to determine the first special symbol nor the right to determine the second special symbol is reserved, and a losing symbol is displayed as the first special symbol, the three performance symbols indicating the "586" combination may stop in the performance symbol display area 73, as illustrated in Figure 56(B), and transition to a non-variable display period. In such a case, after 10 seconds have elapsed since transitioning to the non-variable display period, with no performance symbols displayed, an animation showing the character E representing the left 5 symbol, the character H representing the middle 8 symbol, and the character F representing the right 6 symbol performing a martial arts routine will begin playing on the display screen 70.

By having a prize-winning animation featuring such character animations, players can anticipate which characters will appear in the animations performed on game machine 1.

Next, regarding the performance customization promotion effect, as is clear from the notation in Figures 56(A)-(B) and 57(A), when the performance is controlled in normal performance mode, if the display transitions from a variable display period to a non-variable display period, the performance customization promotion effect image that was displayed during the variable display of the first special symbol will continue to be displayed during the symbol character performance after the transition to the non-variable display period.

The non-variable display period is the period during which neither the first special symbol nor the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Therefore, the symbol character performance and performance customization promotion performance are executed with three performance sub-symbols displayed in the special symbol 1 corresponding performance sub-symbol display area 75, and three performance sub-symbols displayed in the special symbol 2 corresponding performance sub-symbol display area 76. Figure 57(A) illustrates a state where three performance sub-symbols indicating the "586" scatter pattern are displayed in the special symbol 1 corresponding performance sub-symbol display area 75, and three performance sub-symbols indicating the "214" scatter pattern are displayed in the special symbol 2 corresponding performance sub-symbol display area 76.

Although not shown in the diagram, the sub-RAM 93 stores BGM type information indicating the type of BGM output from the speaker 38 during the variation display of the first special symbol in the normal performance mode. As illustrated in Figure 57(A), when the character performance and performance customization promotion performance are running in parallel, and the player operates the left or right key of the directional pad 161, the sub-CPU 91 updates the BGM type information stored in the sub-RAM 93 so that a different BGM from the one output from the speaker 38 during the variation display period before transitioning to the non-variation display period is output from the speaker 38 during the variation display of the first special symbol, which begins when a game ball newly enters the first starting gate 21. Then, although not shown in Figure 57(A), information indicating the BGM identified based on the updated BGM type information (song title) is displayed on the display screen 70 for a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds).

As is clear from the explanation so far, when the performance customization promotion animation shown in Figure 57(A) is in progress, the player can select a background music track to be output from speaker 38 by operating the left or right key on the directional pad 161.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment, as described above based on Figure 55, when the performance is controlled in normal performance mode, in addition to the music selection described above, the performance settings for premium upgrade, pre-read custom, and hidden button suggestion can be changed. When the character performance and performance customization promotion performance exemplified in Figure 57(A) are being performed in parallel, if the player operates the down key of the directional key 161 once, the premium upgrade setting image will be displayed on the display screen 70 instead of the performance customization promotion performance image (see Figure 57(A)) (see Figure 57(B)). Then, with this premium upgrade setting image displayed, if the player operates the down key of the directional key 161 once, the pre-read custom setting image will be displayed on the display screen 70 instead of the premium upgrade setting image (see Figure 57(B)) (see Figure 58(A)). Then, while this pre-read custom setting image is displayed, if the player presses the down key on the directional pad 161 once, the hidden button suggestion setting image will be displayed on the display screen 70 instead of the pre-read custom setting image (see Figure 58(A)) (see Figure 58(B)).

Thus, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, starting from a state where the performance customization promotion performance image is displayed (see Figure 57(A)), each time the player operates the down key of the directional pad 161, the setting images can be changed in the following order: premium-up setting image (see Figure 57(B)), pre-read custom setting image (see Figure 58(A)), and hidden button suggestion setting image (see Figure 58(B)).

(Premium upgrade settings image)
The Premiere Upgrade settings image (see Figure 57(B)) is an image used to configure the Premiere Upgrade settings described above, based on Figure 55. Figure 57(B) shows an example of a Premiere Upgrade settings image that includes the words "Premium Upgrade" to indicate that the displayed settings image is for configuring Premiere Upgrade settings, the word "Normal" to indicate that the current setting for Premiere Upgrade is "Normal", and a right-pointing arrow located to the right of the word "Normal".

When this premium enhancement setting image is displayed, if the player operates the right key on the directional pad 161 in accordance with the right-pointing arrow, the setting information regarding the premium enhancement stored in the sub-RAM 93 is updated by the sub-CPU 91 so that the state changes from one where the premium enhancement is less likely to appear to one where it is more likely to appear. Also, although not shown in Figure 57(B), the word "Normal" shown in the premium enhancement setting image changes to "Increased Appearance Rate." When the word "Increased Appearance Rate" is displayed, a left-pointing arrow appears to its left, and the player can operate the left key on the directional pad 161 in accordance with this left-pointing arrow to return from the state where the premium enhancement is more likely to appear to one where it is less likely to appear.

Furthermore, the text "1/3" is displayed in the upper right corner of the premium upgrade setting image exemplified in Figure 57(B). Based on this text, players can easily recognize that the first of the three setting images—the premium upgrade setting image (see Figure 57(B)), the pre-read custom setting image (see Figure 58(A)), and the hidden button suggestion setting image (see Figure 58(B))—is currently being displayed.

Furthermore, the premium-up setting image exemplified in Figure 57(B) displays black upward and downward arrows, respectively, above and below it. Players can easily recognize that they can change the displayed setting image from the premium-up setting image to another setting image (pre-read custom setting image or hidden button suggestion setting image) by operating the up or down key on the directional pad 161 according to these arrows.

(Predictive custom settings image)
The pre-read custom settings image (see Figure 58(A)) is an image used to configure the pre-read custom settings described above, based on Figure 55. Figure 58(A) shows an example of a pre-read custom settings image that includes the words "Pre-read Custom" to indicate that the displayed settings image is for configuring pre-read custom settings, the word "Normal" to indicate that the current setting for pre-read custom is "Normal", and a right-pointing arrow located to the right of the word "Normal".

When this pre-read custom setting image is displayed, if the player operates the right key on the directional pad 161 in accordance with the right-pointing arrow, the setting information related to the pre-read custom stored in the sub-RAM 93 is updated by the sub-CPU 91 so that the probability of a jackpot in the pre-read animation changes from a relatively low state to a relatively high state. Also, although not shown in Figure 58(A), the word "Normal" displayed in the pre-read custom setting image changes to "Increased Probability." When the word "Increased Probability" is displayed, a left-pointing arrow appears to its left, and the player can operate the left key on the directional pad 161 in accordance with this left-pointing arrow to return the probability of a jackpot in the pre-read animation from a relatively high state to a relatively low state.

Furthermore, the text "2/3" is displayed in the upper right corner of the pre-read custom setting image exemplified in Figure 58(A). Based on this text, the player can easily recognize that the second of three setting images is currently being displayed: the premium-up setting image (see Figure 57(B)), the pre-read custom setting image (see Figure 58(A)), and the hidden button suggestion setting image (see Figure 58(B)).

Furthermore, above and below the pre-read custom setting image exemplified in Figure 58(A), black upward and downward arrows are displayed, respectively. Players can easily recognize that by operating the up or down key on the directional pad 161 according to these arrows, they can change the currently displayed setting image from the pre-read custom setting image to another setting image (premium-up setting image or hidden button suggestion setting image).

(Image hinting at hidden button settings)
The hidden button suggestion setting image (see Figure 58(B)) is an image used to configure the hidden button suggestion settings described above, based on Figure 55. Figure 58(B) shows an example of a hidden button suggestion setting image that includes the words "Hidden Button Suggestion" to indicate that the displayed setting image is for configuring the hidden button suggestion settings, the word "OFF" to indicate the current setting for the hidden button suggestion, and a right-pointing arrow located to the right of the word "OFF".

When this hidden button hint setting image is displayed, if the player operates the right key on the directional pad 161 in accordance with the right-pointing arrow, the setting information related to the hidden button hint stored in the sub-RAM 93 is updated by the sub-CPU 91 so that the hidden button hint function changes from "OFF" to "ON". Also, although not shown in Figure 58(B), the word "OFF" displayed on the hidden button hint setting image changes to "ON". When the word "ON" is displayed, a left-pointing arrow appears to its left, and the player can return the hidden button hint function from "ON" to "OFF" by operating the left key on the directional pad 161 in accordance with this left-pointing arrow.

Furthermore, the upper right corner of the hidden button suggestion setting image exemplified in Figure 58(B) displays the text "3/3". Based on this text, the player can easily recognize that the third of the three setting images—the premium-up setting image (see Figure 57(B)), the pre-read custom setting image (see Figure 58(A)), and the hidden button suggestion setting image (see Figure 58(B))—is currently being displayed.

Furthermore, the hidden button suggestion setting image exemplified in Figure 58(B) displays black upward and downward arrows, respectively, above and below it. Players can easily recognize that by operating the up or down key on the directional pad 161 according to these arrows, they can change the currently displayed setting image from the hidden button suggestion setting image to another setting image (pre-read custom setting image or premium-up setting image).

On the other hand, when the player operates the up key on the directional pad 161 while the performance customization promotion image exemplified in Figure 57(A) is displayed, a selection image will appear allowing the player to choose whether or not to reset the current performance settings related to premium upgrades, pre-read customization, and hidden button indications to their default settings. Although not shown in the figure, this selection image displays the message "Do you want to reset the performance settings to default settings?" along with the words "Yes" and "No". In this selection image, the cursor is positioned on either "Yes" or "No," and the player can move the cursor from "Yes" to "No" or vice versa by operating the left or right key on the directional pad 161. Then, with the cursor positioned on "Yes," the player can confirm their custom reset selection by operating the first performance button 35.

As explained based on Figures 57 and 58, during the winning animation in normal animation mode, the player can change the animation customization promotion image to one of the setting images, or change the animation settings related to premium upgrades, pre-read customization, and hidden button hints by operating the directional keys 161. However, as is clear from the notation in Figures 57 and 58, the character performance animation continues even while the player is customizing the animation according to the animation customization promotion image or one of the setting images.

Up to this point, we have explained how to customize the effects during the waiting-for-winning animation in normal animation mode, referring to Figures 57 and 58. However, as illustrated in Figure 56(A), the effects customization promotion image is displayed during the variation display in normal animation mode, just as it is during the waiting-for-winning animation. Therefore, it is possible to customize the effects during the variation display period in normal animation mode, just as it is during the non-variation display period in normal animation mode.

Furthermore, during the normal performance mode's customer waiting demo movie playback (see Figure 54(A)), the performance customization promotion animation is not performed (i.e., the performance customization promotion animation is not displayed on the display screen 70). However, during the customer waiting demo movie playback in normal performance mode, the player can interrupt the customer waiting demo movie playback by operating either the directional keys 161, the first performance button 35, or the second performance button 36, thereby starting the character performance animation and the performance customization promotion animation shown in Figure 57(A). This enables performance customization.

<Customization of gameplay effects during the bonus round mode>
Next, with reference to Figures 59 to 61, we will explain how to customize the animations during the waiting sequence in the probability variation mode. Here, Figures 59 to 61 are screen diagrams illustrating game animations in the probability variation mode (or time-saving mode). Here, we will explain how to customize the animations during the waiting sequence in the probability variation mode, but it is possible to customize the animations during the waiting sequence in the time-saving mode in the same way.

As described above based on Figure 54(B), during the non-variable display period in the probability variation mode, game animations are executed. Here, the game animations are designed to allow for animation customization that cannot be performed in the normal mode. During these game animations, an animation is displayed showing setting change items falling, allowing for animation customization that cannot be performed in the normal mode. If the character appearing in the game animation (game character) catches a setting change item, the animation customization corresponding to the caught item is performed. In other words, the act of the game character catching the setting change item itself constitutes the animation customization.

For example, when the game is controlled in a probability variation mode (i.e., when the game is controlled in a probability variation state), if neither the right to determine the first special symbol nor the right to determine the second special symbol is reserved, and a losing symbol is displayed as the second special symbol, then, although not shown in the diagram, three performance symbols indicating the "826" pattern may stop on the display screen 70 and transition to a non-variable display period. In this case, three sub-performance symbols indicating the same "826" pattern as the three performance symbols will stop and be displayed in the special symbol 2 corresponding sub-performance symbol display area 76, and transition to a non-variable display period (see Figure 59(A)).

Thus, when 5 seconds have elapsed since transitioning from the probability variation mode to the non-variable display period, the game animation begins as described above based on Figure 54(B) (see Figure 59(A)). Figure 59(A) illustrates the appearance of the following items as setting change items during the game animation: a new song addition item for song Y, a character addition item indicating reliability, a new song addition item for song X, and a character addition item explaining the animation. Furthermore, during the game animation, the message "Catch it and change the settings!" is displayed in the upper area of the display screen 70 to inform the player that catching the setting change items will customize the animation (see Figure 59(A)).

As illustrated in Figure 59(A), during game sequences, the game character and a cross-pad image are displayed on the display screen 70. This cross-pad image is different from the cross-pad image displayed during the sequence customization promotion sequence described above (based on Figure 56, etc.). As illustrated in Figure 59(A), during game sequences, a cross-pad image representing a cross-pad 161 with the left and right keys blacked out is displayed.

Furthermore, for this directional pad image, as illustrated in Figure 59(A), the words "Move Left" are displayed on the left side, and the words "Move Right" are displayed on the right side. Also, as illustrated in Figure 59(A), left-pointing arrows and right-pointing arrows are displayed on both the left and right sides of the game character, respectively. Therefore, based on these visual indicators, the player can easily recognize that operating the left key on the directional pad 161 will move the game character to the left, and operating the right key will move the game character to the right. In this way, the player can participate in game effects (item drop effects) by operating the left or right key on the directional pad 161.

During gameplay, as illustrated in Figure 59(A), an image of the first performance button 35 and the words "Game End" are displayed in the lower right area of the display screen 70. The player can terminate the gameplay midway by operating the first performance button 35 during gameplay.

(Customization of the presentation to add characters that indicate trustworthiness)
Figure 59(B) illustrates how the game character moves to the left when the player operates the left key on the directional pad 161, and how the game character catches a falling item that adds a character indicating reliability. When the game character catches the item that adds a character indicating reliability, the message "Nice catch!" is displayed in the lower left area of the display screen 70, and the same audio is output from the speaker 38. In addition, to notify that the performance customization for adding a character indicating reliability has been performed, the words "Character indicating reliability added" are displayed in the upper right area of the display screen 70 (see Figure 59(B)).

Here, "Character Reliability Indication" is a function, as described above based on Figure 55, in which a character appears when various pre-announcement effects occur, and that character numerically indicates the reliability of the pre-announcement effect. Before the game character catches the character reliability indicator item, even if a pre-announcement effect occurs during the display of the second special symbol in the probability variation mode, no character will appear in conjunction with that pre-announcement effect. Instead, the type of image and display color related to the occurring pre-announcement effect indicate the probability of a big win.

In response, the sub-CPU 91 repeatedly performs a catch determination process (see step S461 in Figure 66) during gameplay to determine whether the game character has caught any of the setting change items. If it determines that the game character has caught a reliability indicator character addition item, it stores the reliability indicator character addition setting information in the sub-RAM 93 to enable the reliability indicator character addition function. After the reliability indicator character addition setting information is stored in the sub-RAM 93, when the player resumes playing to the right and the display of the second special symbol variation in the probability variation mode begins anew, a character will appear when a pre-announcement effect occurs, and that character will indicate the probability of a big win numerically.

(Character addition and customization of the performance explanation)
As illustrated in Figures 59(B) and 60(A), when a game character catches a reliability indicator character addition item and the reliability indicator character addition item is removed from the display screen 70, a new background image addition item containing the words "Fierce Battle Background" is newly displayed. This new background image addition item is used to customize the new background image addition effect as described above. Figures 59(B) and 60(A) illustrate how the game character moves to the right when the player operates the right key on the directional pad 161, and how the game character catches a falling effect explanation character addition item. When the game character catches the effect explanation character addition item in this way, the message "Nice catch!" is displayed in the lower left area of the display screen 70, and the same audio is output from the speaker 38. In addition, to notify that the effect customization for the effect explanation character addition has been performed, the words "Effect Explanation Character Added" are displayed in the upper right area of the display screen 70 (see Figure 60(A)).

Here, "Adding a Character for Explanation" is a function that adds a new character to provide explanations of the game's presentation, as described above based on Figure 55. Before the game character catches the "Adding a Character for Explanation" item, the explanation character will not be displayed during the display of the second special symbol in the probability variation mode.

In response to this, if the sub-CPU 91 determines that a game character has caught an item to add an explanatory character during gameplay, it stores the setting information for adding the explanatory character in the sub-RAM 93 in order to enable the explanatory character addition function. After the setting information for adding the explanatory character is stored in the sub-RAM 93, when the player resumes playing and the display of the second special symbol variation in the probability variation mode begins anew, the explanatory character will be permanently displayed in a predetermined area on the display screen 70. Then, for example, an explanatory character may appear to deliver a message such as, "A 7 symbol match is super exciting!" or "A green reserve indicates a chance of developing into an SP reach or higher."

(Customizing the presentation for the newly added song (Song X))
As illustrated in Figures 60(A) and (B), when the game character catches the character addition item for explaining the performance and the character addition item for explaining the performance disappears from the display screen 70, a new even-numbered super-hot item containing the text "4, super hot, 4" is displayed. This even-numbered super-hot item is an item used to customize the performance of the even-numbered super-hot as described above. Figures 60(A) and (B) illustrate how the game character moves to the left when the player operates the left key of the directional pad 161, and how the game character catches the new song addition item for song X that has fallen. When the game character catches the new song addition item for song X in this way, the message "Nice catch!" is displayed in the lower left area of the display screen 70, and the same audio is output from the speaker 38. In addition, to notify that the performance customization for adding song X has been performed, the text "Song X added" is displayed in the upper right area of the display screen 70 (see Figure 60(B)).

Here, "Add New Song" is a function that allows you to select songs that are not output when the performance is controlled in normal performance mode, as described above based on Figure 55. Before the game character catches the "Add New Song" item for song X, during the display of the second special symbol in the probability variation performance mode, song X cannot be selected as the song output from speaker 38, and therefore song X will not be output from speaker 38.

Although not shown in the diagram, the sub-RAM 93 stores music setting information indicating the types of music that can be output from speaker 38 during the fluctuation display of the second special symbol in the probability variation mode, and the type of music currently selected from these music options. Before the game character catches the new music addition item for music X, music X is not included in the types of music that can be output from speaker 38 during the fluctuation display of the second special symbol in the probability variation mode.

In response, if the sub-CPU 91 determines that a game character has picked up a new song addition item for song X during gameplay, song X is added to the list of songs that can be output from speaker 38 during the display of the second special symbol in the probability variation mode. The sub-CPU 91 also updates the song setting information in sub-RAM 93 so that the currently selected song type is song X. After the song setting information in sub-RAM 93 is updated for song X, when the player resumes playing to the right and the display of the second special symbol in the probability variation mode begins anew, the output of song X begins.

(Adding a new background image (intense battle background) and customizing the visual effects)
As illustrated in Figures 60(B) and 61(A), when a game character catches the new song addition item for song X and the new song addition item for song X is removed from the display screen 70, a new background image addition item containing the words "Vacation Background" is displayed. This new background image addition item allows the player to select and display background images that are not displayed in normal performance mode (for example, the fierce battle background or the vacation background).

Figures 60(B) and 61(A) illustrate how the game character moves further to the left when the player operates the left key on the directional pad 161, and how the game character catches a falling item that adds a new background image to the battle background. When the game character catches the item, the message "Nice catch!" is displayed in the lower left area of the display screen 70, and the same audio is output from the speaker 38. Furthermore, to indicate that the animation for adding a new background image to the battle background has been customized, the words "Battle Background Added" are displayed in the upper right area of the display screen 70 (see Figure 61(A)).

Here, "Add New Background Image" is a function that allows the player to arbitrarily select a background image that is not displayed when the performance is controlled in normal performance mode, and display it in full screen on the display screen 70, as described above based on Figure 55. Before the game character catches the "Add New Background Image" item for the "Fierce Battle Background," the "Fierce Battle Background" will not be displayed in full screen on the display screen 70 during the display of the second special symbol in the probability variation performance mode, nor can the "Fierce Battle Background" be selected as the background image to be displayed in full screen on the display screen 70.

Although not shown in the diagram, the sub-RAM 93 stores background image setting information indicating the types of background images that can be displayed in full screen on the display screen 70 during the fluctuation display of the second special symbol in the probability variation mode, and the type of background image currently selected from these background images. Before the game character catches the new background image addition item for the fierce battle background, the types of background images that can be displayed in full screen on the display screen 70 during the fluctuation display of the second special symbol in the probability variation mode do not include the fierce battle background.

In response, if the sub-CPU 91 determines that a game character has caught a new background image item for the "Fierce Battle" background during gameplay, it adds the "Fierce Battle" background to the types of background images displayed full-screen on the display screen 70 during the variation display of the second special symbol in the probability variation mode. It also updates the background image setting information in the sub-RAM 93 so that the currently selected background image type becomes the "Fierce Battle" background. Thus, when the background image setting information in the sub-RAM 93 is updated regarding the "Fierce Battle" background, although not shown in Figure 61(A), the background image for the probability variation mode displayed full-screen on the display screen 70 immediately changes to the "Fierce Battle" background.

Thus, in the gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment, the player can customize the game's presentation simply by operating the left or right key of the directional pad 161 during gameplay to capture either setting change item. This allows for a truly game-like experience of customizing the presentation.

Up to this point, we have explained using the example of four animation customizations being performed in sequence: adding a character to indicate reliability, adding a character to explain the animation, adding a new song (song X), and adding a new background image (battle background). However, the number of animation customizations that can be performed during a game animation is not limited to four; it is possible to perform three or fewer customizations. Furthermore, as shown in Figure 61(A), it is possible to perform five or more animation customizations by continuing the game animation even after the game character has caught the item that adds a new background image for the battle background.

(End of game presentation)
Figure 61(B) illustrates the state of the display screen 70 immediately after the game animation ends, when the player operates the first animation button 35 immediately after the game character catches the new background image addition item for the fierce battle background, as shown in Figure 61(A). Assume that the right to judge the first special symbol is not reserved, and the right to judge the second special symbol is not reserved, and that the result of the last judged second special symbol was a "miss," by stopping the display of the three animation symbols indicating the scattered "826" numbers on the display screen 70, and transitioning from the variable display period to the non-variable display period. In this case, as described above based on Figure 54(B), the game animation starts 5 seconds after the transition to the non-variable display period, and consequently, the three animation symbols indicating the scattered "826" numbers become invisible.

Then, during the subsequent game animation, if the player performs the game end operation, the three animation symbols indicating the "826" combination will be displayed again on the display screen 70, as illustrated in Figure 61(B).

Furthermore, if the player operates the first performance button 35 during a game performance in the probability variation mode to end the game, a performance customization promotion performance will begin, displaying a performance customization promotion image, just as it does when the performance is controlled in normal performance mode.

Furthermore, the performance customization promotion sequence in the normal performance mode and the performance customization promotion sequence in the probability variation performance mode differ in the following respects. Specifically, in the probability variation performance mode, after the game performances shown in Figures 59-50 and 61(A), the player can select song X, which was added in the game performance shown in Figure 60(B), by operating the left or right key on the directional pad 161. In contrast, in the performance customization promotion sequence in the normal performance mode (see Figures 56 and 57(A)), the player cannot select song X even if they operate the left or right key on the directional pad 161.

Furthermore, in the normal performance mode, during the performance customization promotion performance, each time the player operates the down key on the directional pad 161, the display images on the display screen 70 can be changed in the following order: performance customization promotion performance image (see Figure 57(A)), premium upgrade setting image (see Figure 57(B)), pre-read custom setting image (see Figure 58(A)), and hidden button suggestion setting image (see Figure 58(B)).

In contrast, as described above, after the game's presentation in Figures 59-60 and 61(A) has been customized by adding a new song X, a character indicating reliability, a character explaining the presentation, and a new background image, the display images on the display screen 70 will change in the following order each time the player operates the down key on the directional pad 161: presentation customization promotion image, premium upgrade setting image, pre-read custom setting image, hidden button indication setting image, reliability indication character addition setting image, presentation explanation character addition setting image, and background setting image.

As is clear from this, in the second embodiment of the gaming machine 1, when the effects are controlled in the probability variation mode, it is possible to perform effect customization related to the effect settings unlocked by the game effects, in addition to the effect customization that can be performed when the effects are controlled in the normal mode.

Furthermore, when the game is controlled in normal game mode, even if the player operates the down key on the directional pad 161 while the game customization promotion image is displayed, the reliability indicator character addition setting image, the game explanation character addition setting image, and the background setting image will not be displayed. In the second embodiment, the game machine 1 is configured so that game customization, which becomes possible through game effects in the probability variation game mode (or time reduction game mode), cannot be performed in normal game mode.

By the way, among players in arcades where gaming machines are installed, there are some who deliberately interrupt their right-hand play when the game is controlled by a probability-increasing mode (or time-saving mode), hoping to increase their chances of hitting a jackpot, or who interrupt their right-hand play simply to take a break.

In the second embodiment, the gaming machine 1, when the game transitions to a non-variable display period in the probability variation mode (or time reduction mode) due to such an interruption of right-hand play, executes game effects that would not be executed when transitioning to a non-variable display period in the normal mode. The game is configured to allow customization of these effects by operating the directional keys 161 during these game effects.

Therefore, when the second special symbol is not displayed in the probability variation mode (or time-saving mode), the player can enjoy the game's presentation by simply pressing the left or right key on the directional pad 161. Furthermore, in the second embodiment, since the game presentation itself functions as a presentation customization feature, the player can change the presentation style of the variation in the probability variation mode (or time-saving mode) by participating in the game presentation. As a result, it is possible to effectively enhance the entertainment value of the variation presentation during the probability variation mode (or time-saving mode).

In this embodiment, as described above based on Figure 61, the example described is one in which a performance customization promotion image is displayed after the game performance in the probability variation performance mode (or time reduction performance mode) has ended, allowing performance customization to be performed in the same manner as during the winning waiting performance in the normal performance mode. In contrast, in other embodiments, the performance customization promotion image shown in Figure 61(B) may be displayed during the game performance in the probability variation performance mode (or time reduction performance mode) (see Figures 59 to 60 and Figure 61(A)), allowing performance customization based on the performance customization promotion image to be performed during the game performance.

[Receiving a command for waiting for a prize by the sub-control board 90]
Figure 62 is a detailed flowchart of the prize-waiting command reception process executed by the performance control board 90 in the game machine 1 according to the second embodiment. Although not shown in the figure, when the main CPU 81 has not reserved the right to determine the first special symbol or the right to determine the second special symbol, and the display of the variable first special symbol (or second special symbol) that is currently being executed has finished, it sends a prize-waiting command to the sub-control board 90 to notify that it is in a state of waiting for a game ball to enter the first start opening 21 (or second start opening 22) (i.e., transitioning from a variable display period to a non-variable display period).

In response, the sub-CPU 91 determines whether or not it has received a prize-winning wait command from the main control board 80, as illustrated in Figure 62 (step S401). If it is determined that no prize-winning wait command has been received (step S401: NO), the process proceeds to step S404, which will be described later.

Meanwhile, if the sub-CPU 91 determines that it has received a prize-winning wait command (step S401: YES), it begins measuring the elapsed time since receiving the prize-winning wait command (i.e., the elapsed time since transitioning to the non-variable display period described above, based on Figure 54) (step S402). Specifically, it stores the elapsed time information, indicating the time since receiving the prize-winning wait command, in the sub-RAM 93 and begins updating the elapsed time information each time an interrupt is processed in the sub-control board 90. The sub-RAM 93 also stores a measurement flag indicating whether or not elapsed time is being measured. Following the process in step S402, the sub-CPU 91 sets this measurement flag to "ON" (step S403).

Next, if the sub-CPU 91 has executed the process in step S403, or if it has determined that it has not received a prize-winning command (step S401: NO), it determines whether the measurement flag in the sub-RAM 93 is set to "ON" (step S404). If it is determined that the measurement flag is not set to "ON" (step S404: NO), the series of prize-winning command reception processes ends, and processing returns to step S401.

If the sub-CPU 91 determines that the measurement flag is set to "ON" (step S404: YES), it determines whether the machine is in a low-base state (in this embodiment, a normal game state) (step S405). In the game machine 1, a variation start command containing information indicating the game state of the game machine 1 is transmitted from the main control board 80 when the variation display of the first special symbol (or second special symbol) begins. Therefore, the sub-CPU 91 can determine whether the machine is in a low-base state based on the game state information contained in this variation start command.

If the sub-CPU 91 determines that it is in a low base state (step S405: YES), it determines whether the elapsed time identified by the elapsed time information in the sub-RAM 93 matches the first hour (for example, 10 seconds: see Figure 54(A)) (step S406). If it determines that the elapsed time is the first hour (step S406: YES), it starts the prize-winning waiting animation described above based on Figure 54(A) and Figure 57, etc. (step S407). Specifically, it sends a command to the image and sound control board 100 (and the lamp control board 120) to instruct the start of the prize-winning waiting animation.

As described above based on Figure 54(A), in the gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment, if time elapses without a predetermined operation being performed by the player after transitioning to the non-variable display period in the normal performance mode, the prize-winning waiting performance and the customer-waiting demo movie playback performance are repeatedly executed alternately. Therefore, in this embodiment, multiple first time periods are stored in the sub-ROM 92 to enable the execution of multiple prize-winning waiting performances during a single non-variable display period. Specifically, for example, there are 10 seconds to start the first prize-winning waiting performance and 95 seconds to start the second prize-winning waiting performance (= 10 seconds + 35 seconds, which is the execution time of the first prize-winning waiting performance in Figure 54(A) + 50 seconds, which is the execution time of the first customer-waiting demo movie playback performance).

If the sub-CPU 91 executes the process in step S407, or if it determines that the elapsed time since transitioning to the non-variable display period is not the first hour (step S406: NO), it determines whether the elapsed time since transitioning to the non-variable display period is the second hour (in this case, 45 seconds) based on whether the elapsed time specified by the elapsed time information in the sub-RAM 93 matches the second hour (for example, 45 seconds (= 10 seconds in Figure 54(A) + 35 seconds, which is the execution time of the prize waiting animation)) (step S408). If it determines that the elapsed time is the second hour (step S408: YES), it starts the customer waiting demo movie playback animation described above based on Figure 54(A) (step S409). Specifically, it sends a command to the image and sound control board 100 (and the lamp control board 120) to instruct the start of the customer waiting demo movie playback animation.

As described above based on Figure 54(A), in the gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment, if time elapses without a predetermined operation being performed by the player after transitioning to the non-variable display period in the normal performance mode, the prize-winning waiting performance and the customer-waiting demo movie playback performance are repeatedly executed alternately. Therefore, in this embodiment, multiple second time periods are stored in the sub-ROM 92 to enable the execution of multiple customer-waiting demo movie playback performances during a single non-variable display period. Specifically, for example, there are 45 seconds to start the first customer-waiting demo movie playback performance and 130 seconds to start the second customer-waiting demo movie playback performance (= 10 seconds + 35 seconds, which is the execution time of the first prize-winning waiting performance in Figure 54(A) + 50 seconds, which is the execution time of the first customer-waiting demo movie playback performance + 35 seconds, which is the execution time of the second prize-winning waiting performance).

On the other hand, if the sub-CPU 91 determines that it is not in a low base state (step S405: NO), that is, if it is in a probability variation game state or a time reduction game state, it determines whether the elapsed time since transitioning to the non-variable display period is the third hour (in this case, 5 seconds) based on whether the elapsed time specified by the elapsed time information in the sub-RAM 93 matches the third hour (for example, 5 seconds: see Figure 54(B)) (step S411). If it determines that the elapsed time is the third hour (step S411: YES), it starts the game presentation described above based on Figure 54(B) and Figures 59 to 61 (step S412). Specifically, it sends a command to the image and sound control board 100 (and the lamp control board 120) to instruct the start of the game presentation.

As described above based on Figure 54(B), in the gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment, if time elapses without a predetermined operation being performed by the player after transitioning to the non-variable display period in the probability variation performance mode (or time reduction performance mode), the game performance and the customer waiting demo movie playback performance are repeatedly executed alternately. For this reason, in this embodiment, multiple third time periods are stored in the sub-ROM 92 so that multiple game performances can be executed during one non-variable display period in the gaming machine 1. Specifically, for example, there are 5 seconds to start the first game sequence (see Figure 54(B)), 80 seconds to start the second game sequence (= 5 seconds + 25 seconds, which is the execution time of the first game sequence in Figure 54(B) + 50 seconds, which is the execution time of the first customer waiting demo movie playback sequence), and 155 seconds to start the third game sequence (= 5 seconds + 25 seconds, which is the execution time of the first game sequence in Figure 54(B) + 50 seconds, which is the execution time of the first customer waiting demo movie playback sequence + 25 seconds, which is the execution time of the second game sequence + 50 seconds, which is the execution time of the second customer waiting demo movie playback sequence).

If the sub-CPU 91 executes the process in step S412, or if it determines that the elapsed time since transitioning to the non-variable display period is not the third hour (step S411: NO), it determines whether the elapsed time since transitioning to the non-variable display period is the fourth hour (in this case, 30 seconds) based on whether the elapsed time specified by the elapsed time information in the sub-RAM 93 matches the fourth hour (for example, 30 seconds (= 5 seconds in Figure 54(B) + 25 seconds, which is the execution time of the first game performance)) (step S413). If it determines that the elapsed time is the fourth hour (step S413: YES), it executes the process in step S409 to start the customer waiting demo movie playback performance.

As described above based on Figure 54(B), in the gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment, if time elapses without a predetermined operation being performed by the player after transitioning to the non-variable display period in the probability variation mode (or time reduction mode), the game performance and the customer waiting demo movie playback performance are repeatedly executed alternately. Therefore, in this embodiment, multiple fourth time periods are stored in the sub-ROM 92 to enable the execution of multiple customer waiting demo movie playback performances during a single non-variable display period. Specifically, for example, there are 45 seconds (= 5 seconds + 25 seconds) to start the first customer waiting demo movie playback performance and 105 seconds (= 5 seconds + 25 seconds, which is the execution time of the first game performance in Figure 54(B) + 50 seconds, which is the execution time of the first customer waiting demo movie playback performance + 25 seconds, which is the execution time of the second game performance) to start the second customer waiting demo movie playback performance.

[Operation response processing by sub-control board 90]
Figures 63 to 65 are detailed flowcharts of the operation response processing performed on the performance control board 90 in the gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment. As illustrated in Figure 63, the sub-CPU 91 determines whether the volume adjustment key 162 has been operated based on whether an operation signal indicating that the up key or down key of the volume adjustment key 162 has been operated has been input (step S421). If it is determined that the volume adjustment key 162 has been operated (step S421: YES), a volume setting update process is executed to update the volume setting information stored in the sub-RAM 93 based on the operation signal from the volume adjustment key 162 (step S422).

Furthermore, if the sub-CPU 91 has executed the process in step S422, or if it has determined that the volume adjustment key 162 has not been operated (step S421: NO), it determines whether the light intensity adjustment key 163 has been operated based on whether an operation signal indicating that the up or down key of the light intensity adjustment key 163 has been operated has been received (step S423). If it has determined that the light intensity adjustment key 163 has been operated (step S423: YES), it executes a light intensity setting update process to update the light intensity setting information stored in the sub-RAM 93 based on the operation signal from the light intensity adjustment key 163 (step S424).

As is clear from the explanation so far based on Figure 63, in the gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment, volume and brightness adjustments can be made at any time, regardless of what kind of effects are being displayed on the display screen 70.

Next, if the sub-CPU 91 has executed the process in step S424, or if it has determined that the light intensity adjustment key 163 has not been operated (step S423: NO), it determines whether the left key of the directional pad 161 has been operated based on whether an operation signal indicating that the left key of the directional pad 161 has been operated has been input (step S425). If it is determined that the left key has not been operated (step S425: NO), the process proceeds to step S433 (see Figure 64), which will be described later.

On the other hand, if the sub-CPU 91 determines that the left key has been operated (step S425: YES), it determines whether or not the directional key image related to the performance customization promotion effect (see, for example, Figures 56, 57(A), and 61(B)) is currently being displayed (step S426). In the game machine 1 according to the second embodiment, similar to the game machine 1 according to the first embodiment, data related to image and sound control is transmitted from the image and sound control board 100 to the sub-control board 90 by the data transmission control process in step S73 of Figure 49. Therefore, in the processing of step S426, the sub-CPU 91 can determine whether or not the directional key image related to the performance customization promotion effect is currently being displayed based on this data related to image and sound control.

If the sub-CPU 91 determines that the directional key image related to the performance customization promotion performance is currently being displayed (step S426: YES), it executes a BGM change process (step S427). As described above, the sub-RAM 93 stores music setting information indicating the types of music that can be output from the speaker 38 and the type of music currently selected from among these music. In step S427, the sub-CPU 91 executes a process to update the music setting information in the sub-RAM 93 so that the currently selected music type indicates a different music. Furthermore, if any music is being output from the speaker 38 at the time the left key of the directional key 161 is operated, the sub-CPU 91 also executes a process to send a command to the image and sound control board 100 instructing it to change the currently playing music based on the updated music setting information.

Next, if the sub-CPU 91 has executed the process in step S427, or if it has determined that the directional key image related to the performance customization promotion performance is not currently being displayed (step S426: NO), it determines whether one of the following setting images is currently being displayed: the premium upgrade setting image (see Figure 57(B)), the pre-read custom setting image (see Figure 58(A)), the hidden button suggestion setting image (see Figure 58(B)), the reliability suggestion character addition setting image (not shown), the performance explanation character addition setting image (not shown), the background setting image (not shown), etc. (step S428). This determination process in step S428 can be executed by referring to the image and sound control data transmitted from the image and sound control board 100, similar to the determination process in step S426.

If the sub-CPU 91 determines that any setting image is currently being displayed (step S428: YES), it executes a setting change process (step S429). Specifically, for example, if the premium enhancement setting image showing the text "Increased Appearance Rate" is being displayed, the sub-CPU 91 changes the text "Increased Appearance Rate" to "Normal" in response to the operation of the left key on the directional pad 161, and updates the setting information related to the premium effect stored in the sub-RAM 93 so that the premium effect appears less frequently than before. Also, for example, if the hidden button suggestion setting image showing the text "ON" is being displayed, the sub-CPU 91 changes the text "ON" to "OFF" in response to the operation of the left key on the directional pad 161, and updates the setting information related to the hidden button suggestion stored in the sub-RAM 93 so that the hidden button suggestion function changes from "ON" to "OFF".

Next, if the sub-CPU 91 has executed the process in step S429, or if it determines that the setting image is not currently being displayed (step S428: NO), it refers to data related to image and sound control transmitted from the image and sound control board 100 to determine whether or not a game presentation is in progress (step S430). If it determines that a game presentation is in progress (step S430: YES), it moves the game character displayed on the display screen 70 to the left in response to the operation of the left key on the directional pad 161 (step S431). Specifically, it sends a command to the image and sound control board 100 instructing the game character to move to the left.

Next, if the sub-CPU 91 has executed the process in step S431, and determines that the game is not in progress (step S430: NO), or determines that the left key has not been pressed (step S425: NO), it determines whether the right key of the directional pad 161 has been pressed based on whether an operation signal indicating that the right key of the directional pad 161 has been pressed has been input, as illustrated in Figure 64 (step S433). If it is determined that the right key has not been pressed (step S433: NO), the process proceeds to step S441, which will be described later.

On the other hand, if the sub-CPU 91 determines that the right key has been operated (step S433: YES), it determines whether or not the directional key image related to the performance customization promotion effect is currently being displayed, similar to the process in step S426 (see Figure 63) described above (step S434). If it determines that the directional key image related to the performance customization promotion effect is currently being displayed (step S434: YES), it executes the BGM change process (step S435). As described above, the sub-RAM 93 stores music setting information indicating the types of music that can be output from the speaker 38 and the type of music currently selected from among these music. In response to this, in step S435, the sub-CPU 91 executes a process to update the music setting information in the sub-RAM 93 so that the type of music currently selected indicates another music. If any music is being output from the speaker 38 at the time the right key of the directional key 161 is operated, the sub-CPU 91 also executes a process to send a command to the image and sound control board 100 to change the music being played based on the updated music setting information.

Next, if the sub-CPU 91 has executed the process in step S435, or if it determines that the directional key image related to the performance customization promotion performance is not currently being displayed (step S434: NO), it determines whether or not one of the following setting images is currently being displayed, similar to the process in step S428 (see Figure 63) described above: the premium upgrade setting image (see Figure 57(B)), the pre-read custom setting image (see Figure 58(A)), the hidden button suggestion setting image (see Figure 58(B)), the reliability suggestion character addition setting image (not shown), the performance explanation character addition setting image (not shown), the background setting image (not shown), etc. (step S436).

If the sub-CPU 91 determines that any setting image is currently being displayed (step S436: YES), it executes a setting change process (step S437). Specifically, for example, if the premium-up setting image showing the word "Normal" (see Figure 57(B)) is being displayed, the sub-CPU 91 changes the word "Normal" to "Increased Appearance Rate" in response to the operation of the right key on the directional pad 161, and updates the setting information related to the premium effect stored in the sub-RAM 93 so that the premium effect appears more frequently than it did not. Also, for example, if the hidden button suggestion setting image showing the word "OFF" (see Figure 58(B)) is being displayed, the sub-CPU 91 changes the word "OFF" to "ON" in response to the operation of the right key on the directional pad 161, and updates the setting information related to the hidden button suggestion stored in the sub-RAM 93 so that the hidden button suggestion function changes from "OFF" to "ON".

Next, if the sub-CPU 91 has executed the process in step S437, or if it has determined that the setting image is not currently being displayed (step S436: NO), it determines whether or not a game animation is in progress, similar to the process in step S430 (see Figure 63) (step S438). If it determines that a game animation is in progress (step S438: YES), it moves the game character displayed on the display screen 70 to the right in response to the operation of the right key on the directional pad 161 (step S439). Specifically, it sends a command to the image and sound control board 100 instructing the game character to move to the right.

If the sub-CPU 91 executes the process in step S439, and determines that it is not currently in the middle of a game presentation (step S438: NO), or determines that the right key on the directional pad 161 has not been pressed (step S433: NO), it determines whether the up key on the directional pad 161 has been pressed based on whether an operation signal indicating that the up key on the directional pad 161 has been pressed has been input (step S441). If it is determined that the up key has not been pressed (step S441: NO), the process proceeds to step S447 in Figure 65, which will be described later.

If the sub-CPU 91 determines that the up key of the directional pad 161 has been pressed (step S441: YES), it determines whether the directional pad image related to the performance customization promotion effect is currently being displayed (step S442), similar to the process in step S426 (see Figure 63). If it determines that the directional pad image related to the performance customization promotion effect is currently being displayed (step S442: YES), it executes a custom reset process (step S443). Specifically, it executes a process to reset all setting information related to each performance setting stored in the sub-RAM 93 to its initial settings.

Next, if the sub-CPU 91 has executed the process in step S443, or if it determines that the directional key image related to the performance customization promotion performance is not currently being displayed (step S442: NO), it determines whether or not one of the following setting images is currently being displayed, similar to the process in step S428 (see Figure 63): the premium upgrade setting image (see Figure 57(B)), the pre-read custom setting image (see Figure 58(A)), the hidden button suggestion setting image (see Figure 58(B)), the reliability suggestion character addition setting image (not shown), the performance explanation character addition setting image (not shown), the background setting image (not shown), etc. (step S444). If it determines that a setting image is currently being displayed (step S444: YES), it sends a command to the image and sound control board 100 to instruct it to display another setting image (step S445). For example, if the hidden button suggestion setting image (see Figure 58(B)) is being displayed, a command is sent to the image and sound control board 100 instructing it to display the pre-read custom setting image (see Figure 58(A)), which is the setting image immediately preceding the hidden button suggestion setting image, in response to the operation of the up key on the directional pad 161.

If the sub-CPU 91 executes the process in step S445 and determines that the setting image is not currently being displayed (step S444: NO), or determines that the up key of the directional pad 161 has not been pressed (step S441: NO), it determines whether the down key of the directional pad 161 has been pressed (step S447), as illustrated in Figure 65. Specifically, it determines whether the down key of the directional pad 161 has been pressed based on whether an operation signal indicating that the down key of the directional pad 161 has been pressed has been input. If it is determined that the down key of the directional pad 161 has not been pressed (step S447: NO), the process proceeds to step S452, which will be described later.

Meanwhile, if the sub-CPU 91 determines that the down key of the directional pad 161 has been pressed (step S447: YES), it determines whether the directional pad image related to the performance customization promotion effect is currently being displayed, similar to the process in step S426 (see Figure 63) (step S448). If it determines that the directional pad image related to the performance customization promotion effect is currently being displayed (step S448: YES), it displays the setting image as described above based on Figures 57(A) and (B) (step S449). Specifically, it sends a command to the image and sound control board 100 instructing it to execute a process to change the display of the performance customization promotion effect image, including the directional pad image, to one of the setting images.

Next, if the sub-CPU 91 has executed the process in step S449, or if it determines that the directional key image related to the performance customization promotion performance is not currently being displayed (step S448: NO), it determines whether or not one of the following setting images is currently being displayed, similar to the process in step S428 (see Figure 63): the premium upgrade setting image (see Figure 57(B)), the pre-read custom setting image (see Figure 58(A)), the hidden button suggestion setting image (see Figure 58(B)), the reliability suggestion character addition setting image (not shown), the performance explanation character addition setting image (not shown), the background setting image (not shown), etc. (step S450). If it determines that a setting image is currently being displayed (step S450: YES), it sends a command to the image and sound control board 100 to instruct it to display another setting image (step S451). For example, if the Premiere Up setting image (see Figure 57(B)) is being displayed, pressing the down key on the directional pad 161 will send a command to the image and sound control board 100 instructing it to display the pre-read custom setting image (see Figure 58(A)), which is the setting image immediately following the Premiere Up setting image.

If the sub-CPU 91 has executed the process in step S451, and determines that the setting image is not currently being displayed (step S450: NO), or that the down key of the directional pad 161 is not being pressed (step S447: NO), it determines whether the first effect button 35 (or the second effect button 36) has been pressed based on whether an operation signal indicating that the first effect button 35 (or the second effect button 36) has been pressed (step S452). If it determines that the first effect button 35 (or the second effect button 36) has been pressed (step S452: YES), it determines whether a game effect is currently in progress, similar to the process in step S430 (see Figure 63) described above (step S453).

If the sub-CPU 91 determines that a game animation is in progress (step S453: YES), it executes a game termination process (step S454). Specifically, as described above based on Figures 61(A) and (B), it sends a command to the image and sound control board 100 instructing it to terminate the game animation and return to the screen display before the game animation started. Note that in the above explanation based on Figures 61(A) and (B), the player can terminate the game animation by operating the first animation button 35. However, as is clear from this explanation, the player can also terminate the game animation by operating the second animation button 36 instead of the first animation button 35 during the game animation.

On the other hand, if the sub-CPU 91 has executed the process in step S454, or has determined that the game is not currently in progress (step S453: NO), it determines whether the first special symbol (or the second special symbol) is currently being displayed in a variation state, based on, for example, whether it is in a state between receiving a variation start command transmitted from the main control board 80 and receiving a variation end command corresponding to that variation start command (step S455).

Then, if the sub-CPU 91 determines that the first special symbol (or the second special symbol) is currently being displayed in a variable state (step S455: YES), it determines, based on the setting information related to the予告演出 (preview effect) stored in the sub-RAM 93, whether or not the effective period for the operation prompt effect that prompts the player to operate the first effect button 35 (or the second effect button 36) is currently active (step S456). If it determines that the effective period for the operation prompt effect is currently active (step S456: YES), it sends a command to the image and sound control board 100 (and the lamp control board 120) to instruct the execution of the operation-responding effect, based on the setting information for the operation-responding effect also stored in the sub-RAM 93 (step S457). An example of an operation-responding effect here is a cut-in (see Figure 11(G)).

[Game presentation processing by sub-control board 90]
Next, with reference to Figure 66, the in-game performance processing that is repeatedly executed by the sub-control board 90 during the game performance described above, based on Figures 59 to 61, will be explained. Here, Figure 66 is a detailed flowchart of the in-game performance processing executed by the performance control board 90 in the amusement machine 1 according to the second embodiment. As illustrated in Figure 66, the sub-CPU 91 executes a catch determination process to determine whether or not a game character appearing in the game performance has caught one of the falling setting change items (step S461). As described above, in this embodiment, data related to image and sound control is transmitted from the image and sound control board 100, so the sub-CPU 91, for example, refers to the data related to image and sound control and determines whether or not the game character has caught a setting change item based on whether or not there is an overlapping area between the display area of the game character performance image representing the game character and the display area of one of the setting change items.

Next, the sub-CPU 91 determines, based on the result of step S461, whether the game character has caught any of the setting change items (step S462). If it determines that the game character has caught any of the setting change items (step S462: YES), it executes an effect setting process to change the effect settings corresponding to the caught setting change item (step S463). The effect setting process in step S463 is as described above, based on Figures 59 to 60 and Figure 61(A).

Following the processing in step S463, the sub-CPU 91 executes a setting change notification process (step S464) to notify that the performance setting corresponding to the setting change item has been changed, in response to the game character catching any of the setting change items. This setting change notification process in step S464 is also as described above based on Figures 59-60 and 61(A). For example, as illustrated in Figure 59(B), if the game character catches a reliability indicator character addition item, a command is sent to the image and sound control board 100 instructing it to execute a process that displays the text "Reliability Indicator Character Added" in the upper right area of the display screen 70.

Up to this point, we have mainly referred to Figures 54 to 66 to explain the performance customization that can be performed in the gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment, as well as the processes related to performance customization. In the gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment, when the performance is controlled in the normal performance mode (an example of the "first performance mode"), the sub-CPU 91 executes a first performance setting process to change the performance settings, such as premium upgrades, pre-read customizations, and hidden button suggestions, in response to the player's operation during the execution of the winning waiting performance (an example of the "stop display performance"), as described above based on Figures 55, 57, and 58. Based on the performance settings from this first performance setting process, the first performance, such as the premium performance, pre-read performance, and hidden button suggestion performance, is executed.

On the other hand, when the game is controlled in a probability variation mode or a time-saving mode (an example of a "second performance mode"), the sub-CPU 91 executes a second performance setting process to change the performance settings, such as adding a character to indicate reliability, adding a character to explain the performance, adding music X, and adding a battle background, in response to the player's actions during the execution of the game performance (an example of a "stop display performance"). Based on the performance settings from this second performance setting process, the sub-CPU 91 executes a second performance, such as a予告演出 (preview performance) in which a character numerically indicates the probability of a big win, a performance explanation by a character, a performance that plays music X, and a performance that displays the battle background in full screen on the display screen 70.

In this embodiment, the sub-CPU 91, when controlling the performance in normal performance mode, does not execute the second performance setting process described above, even if the player performs an action during the execution of the winning-waiting performance. This configuration differentiates the winning-waiting performance in normal performance mode from the game performance in probability-increasing performance mode (or time-saving performance mode).

<Flow and specific examples of special variation effects>
Next, with reference to Figures 67 to 69, the flow and specific examples of special variation effects performed in the gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment will be described. Here, Figure 67 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the flow of a series of effects that constitute the special variation effect performed in the gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment. Figures 68 and 69 are screen diagrams showing specific examples of special variation effects. The special variation effect in the second embodiment is a variation effect that is performed when the main CPU 81 performs a first special symbol determination in the normal game state and selects a specific variation pattern for the special variation effect as the variation pattern of the first special symbol.

In normal gameplay, when the main CPU 81 performs a first special symbol determination, the display of the first special symbol's variation begins, and simultaneously, the display of the effect symbols' variation begins (see Figures 67(A) and 68(A)). Figure 68(A) illustrates how, in response to the first special symbol determination corresponding to the earliest held icon displayed in the held icon display area 71, the display of the first special symbol's variation begins, the earliest held icon displayed in the held icon display area 71 shifts to the corresponding icon display area 72, and the scrolling display of the three symbol rows begins.

Thus, after a predetermined amount of time has elapsed since the start of the display of the first special symbol and the performance symbol during normal gameplay, a special symbol called the mission symbol may be displayed as the middle symbol in a pseudo-stopping animation, for example, after a reach is achieved with the left and right symbols (for example, a reach with the two left symbols and the two right symbols) (see Figures 67(B) and 68(B)). This mission symbol display animation is the trigger for the execution of the first half of the mission animation, and when the mission symbol display animation is performed, the first half of the mission animation begins (see Figures 67(C) and 68(C)).

In this embodiment, the first half of the mission sequence is structured as a special sequence in which the main character attempts to find a special character alone. Figure 68(C) illustrates this sequence, showing the main character searching for the special character alone, with the two reduced left symbols displayed in a pseudo-stopped state in the upper left area of the display screen 70, and the two reduced right symbols displayed in a pseudo-stopped state in the upper right area of the display screen 70. In this first half of the mission sequence, if the main character finds the special character alone, a win notification sequence is performed (see Figure 67(D)). Conversely, if the main character fails to find the special character alone, a loss notification sequence is usually performed (see Figure 67(D)).

Furthermore, during this first half of the mission sequence, the following sequences may occur as so-called "chance-up" sequences. Specifically, after a predetermined amount of time has elapsed since the start of the first half of the mission sequence, a sequence prompting the player to operate the first sequence button may occur (see Figures 67(E) and 68(D)). This sequence prompting the player to operate the first sequence button 35 is a sequence that encourages the player to operate the first sequence button 35. In this sequence, as illustrated in Figure 68(D), a first sequence button image resembling the first sequence button 35 and an effective period gauge indicating the remaining time during which the operation of the first sequence button 35 is valid are displayed on the display screen 70.

During the effective period related to the operation-promoting animation in the first half of the mission, if the player operates the first animation button 35, the first half operation-corresponding animation will be performed according to that operation (see Figures 67(F) and 68(E)). In this embodiment, the first half operation-corresponding animation is a meteor shower animation depicting shooting stars (see Figure 68(E)). This meteor shower animation includes a small number of meteors (e.g., 3) and a large number of meteors (e.g., 7). The latter, the large number of meteors animation, has a higher probability of triggering a jackpot than the former, the small number of meteors animation. Figure 68(E) illustrates the latter, the large number of meteors animation.

Please note that the action-prompting sequences during the first half of the mission (see Figures 67(E) and 68(D)) and the action-responsive sequences during the first half of the mission (see Figures 67(F) and 68(E)) are not guaranteed to occur if the mission progresses to the first half; these sequences may not always be performed.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 67, after the operation-prompting and operation-response sequences during the first half of the mission sequence have been performed, a predetermined complex change sequence may occur (see Figure 67(G)). This complex change sequence is not shown in Figure 68, but it will be described in detail later based on Figures 72 to 74.

Furthermore, the combined transformation sequence (see Figure 67(G)) is not necessarily executed after the initial operation response sequence (see Figure 67(F)). As is clear from the notation in Figure 67, the combined transformation sequence may or may not occur after the initial operation response sequence.

Next, towards the end of the first half of the mission sequence, a scene may occur where the main character turns around (see Figures 67(H) and 68(F)). Note that, for the sake of clarity, Figure 68(F) omits the illustration of the animation display related to the turning-around scene.

Although not shown in Figure 68, if a special character appears behind the main character after the recap sequence (see Figures 67(H) and 68(F)), the mission is successful, and the win notification sequence (see Figure 67(D)) follows the first half of the mission sequence. In the example shown in Figure 68, since a reach with two symbols is achieved during the first half of the mission sequence, the win notification sequence following the first half of the mission sequence displays three symbols showing the repeating numbers "222" in the symbol display area 73 as a pseudo-stop. As the jackpot symbol is displayed as the first special symbol, the win notification sequence then shows these three symbols stopping permanently.

On the other hand, although not shown in Figure 68, if, after the recap sequence (see Figures 67(H) and 68(F)), there is no one behind the main character, the mission is considered a failure, and a losing notification sequence (see Figure 67(D)) follows the first half of the mission sequence. In the example shown in Figure 68, since a reach with two symbols is achieved during the first half of the mission sequence, as a losing notification sequence following the first half of the mission sequence, for example, three symbols indicating a "232" reach failure are pseudo-stopped and displayed in the symbol display area 73. As the losing symbol is displayed as the first special symbol, a losing notification sequence is performed in which these three symbols are actually stopped.

Furthermore, as illustrated in Figures 67 and 68, a character appearance animation (see Figures 67(I) and 68(G)) may occur following a character turn animation (see Figures 67(H) and 68(F)). This character appearance animation is designed to show that, as a result of the main character turning around during the character turn animation, a character other than a special character, a different ally character, is standing behind the main character. Figure 68(G) illustrates this by showing the ally character appearing in the right-hand area of the display screen 70 and uttering the line, "Let's search together!"

When such an ally character appearance sequence occurs, neither a win notification sequence nor a loss notification sequence follows the first half mission sequence. Instead, the second half mission sequence begins immediately after the ally character appearance sequence (see Figures 67(I) and 68(G)) (see Figures 67(J) and 68(H)). In this embodiment, the second half mission sequence is structured as a special sequence in which the main character cooperates with the ally character (who appeared through the ally character appearance sequence) to find a special character. Figure 68(H) illustrates the scene where the main character cooperates with the ally character to search for the special character, with the two reduced left symbols displayed in a pseudo-stopped state in the upper left area of the display screen 70, and the two reduced right symbols displayed in a pseudo-stopped state in the upper right area of the display screen 70. In this second half mission sequence, if the main character cooperates with the ally character to find the special character, a win notification sequence is performed (see Figure 67(P)). Conversely, if the main character cooperates with the ally character but fails to find the special character, a loss notification sequence is performed (see Figure 67(S)).

Furthermore, during the latter half of the mission sequence, the following effects may occur as so-called "chance-up" effects. Specifically, after a predetermined amount of time has elapsed since the start of the latter half of the mission sequence, an effect prompting the player to operate the second action button 36 may occur (see Figures 67(K) and 68(I)). This effect prompting the player to operate the second action button 36 is a second action button operation prompting effect. In this effect, as illustrated in Figure 68(I), a second action button image resembling the second action button 36 and an effective period gauge indicating the remaining time during which the operation of the second action button 36 is valid are displayed on the display screen 70.

During the effective period related to the operation-promoting animation in the latter half of the mission, if the player operates the second animation button 36, the latter half operation-responsive animation will be performed according to that operation (see Figures 67(L) and 69(A)). In this embodiment, the latter half operation-responsive animation displays the ally character that appeared in the ally character appearance animation, along with text indicating the probability of a big win, on the display screen 70 (see Figure 69(A)). In this embodiment, this latter half operation-responsive animation includes a low-probability indication animation that displays the word "CHANCE" along with the ally character on the display screen 70, and a high-probability indication animation that displays the word "BIG CHANCE!" along with the ally character on the display screen 70. The latter high-probability indication animation indicates a higher probability of a big win than the former low-probability indication animation, and Figure 69(A) illustrates how the latter high-probability indication animation is performed.

Furthermore, the action-prompting sequences during the later stages of the mission (see Figures 67(K) and 68(I)) and the action-responsive sequences during the later stages of the mission (see Figures 67(L) and 69(A)) are not guaranteed to be executed when the mission progresses to the later stages; these sequences may not always be performed. This is clear from the notation in Figure 67.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 67, after a predetermined amount of time has elapsed since the start of the second half of the mission sequence in Figure 67(J), a golden text dialogue display sequence may occur (see Figures 67(M) and 69(B)). This golden text dialogue display sequence displays the lines of the two main characters and allied characters appearing in the second half of the mission sequence in golden text. Figure 69(B) shows an example where the golden text dialogue of both characters, "I can see something over there!", is displayed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the gold text dialogue display effect can be executed in some cases when the result of the first special symbol judgment, which is performed at the start of the symbol change in the special change effect, is "Big Win," but it is not executed when the result is "Loss." Therefore, if the gold text dialogue display effect occurs during the latter half of the mission effect, it is highly likely to be a big win.

Next, towards the end of the second half of the mission sequence, a build-up sequence is performed to heighten the player's anticipation of the protagonist and allied characters discovering a special character (see Figures 67(N) and 69(C)). In the build-up sequence illustrated in Figure 69(C), the special character's voice is output from speaker 38, and the protagonist and allied characters are shown looking in surprise towards the source of the voice.

Here, if the result of the first special symbol judgment performed at the start of this symbol change is "Big Win," then a build-up animation (see Figures 67(N) and 69(C)) will be followed by a mission success indication animation (see Figures 67(O) and 69(D)) and a win notification animation (see Figures 67(P) and 69(E)). The mission success indication animation is an animation that suggests the mission has been successful, and Figure 69(D) shows an example of the main character and allied characters rejoicing after discovering a special character modeled after a snowman. The winning notification sequence that follows this mission success indication sequence displays three symbols showing repeating numbers (in the example shown in Figure 69, "222") in a pseudo-stop display. As the jackpot symbol stops as the first special symbol, these three symbols showing repeating numbers are then brought to a full stop. Figure 69(E) illustrates this pseudo-stop display of the three symbols showing the repeating numbers "222".

Note that while this explanation uses the example of a mission success indication sequence following the second half of the mission sequence, the mission success indication sequence can also be performed when the win notification sequence occurs without progressing from the first half of the mission sequence to the second half. In this case, although not shown in the diagram, a mission success indication sequence will be performed showing the main character happily discovering a special character on their own.

On the other hand, if the result of the first special symbol judgment performed at the start of this symbol change is "miss," the following sequences will occur in order: a tease sequence (see Figures 67(N) and 69(C)), a mission failure indication sequence (see Figures 67(Q) and 69(F)), a group image display sequence (see Figures 67(R) and 69(G)), and a miss notification sequence (see Figures 67(S) and 69(H)-(I)). The mission failure indication sequence is a sequence that suggests the mission has failed. Figure 69(F) illustrates this by showing the main character and allied characters disappointed at not being able to find the special character, with the line "Where are you..." displayed in the center of the display screen 70.

The group image display sequence that follows the mission failure indication sequence displays all characters appearing in the sequence performed on the game machine 1. Figure 68(G) shows an example of how all characters appear on the display screen 70. As is clear from the notation in Figures 68(F) and (G), when the group image display sequence is in progress, the sequence symbols are hidden to avoid reducing the visibility of the characters displayed on the display screen 70.

For the sake of clarity, although not shown in Figure 69(G), the small symbols in the display area 75 corresponding to Special Feature 1 (see, for example, Figure 56(A)) and the small symbols in the display area 76 corresponding to Special Feature 2 (see, for example, Figure 56(A)) continue to be displayed even while the group image display is in progress.

In this embodiment, the "special performance image" is described as a group image representing all the characters appearing in the performance performed by the gaming machine 1. However, the content of the "special performance image" is not limited to this; for example, the "special performance image" may be a performance image representing text or pictures that show an episode related to a special character.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 69, the losing notification sequence following the group image display sequence involves a pseudo-stop display of three symbols indicating a losing combination (in the example sequence of Figure 69, "232"). As the losing symbol stops as the first special symbol, these three symbols indicating the losing combination are then stopped. Figure 69(H) shows an example of the pseudo-stop display of the three symbols indicating the losing combination "232," while Figure 69(I) shows an example of the actual stop display of the three symbols indicating the losing combination "232."

Note that while this explanation uses the example of a mission failure indication sequence following the second half of the mission sequence, the mission failure indication sequence can also occur when the game does not progress from the first half of the mission sequence to the second half, but instead displays a failed notification sequence. In this case, although not shown in the diagram, a mission failure indication sequence will be displayed showing the main character being disappointed at not being able to find the special character on their own.

On the other hand, the group image display sequence (see Figures 67(R) and 69(G)) is executed following the mission failure indication sequence (see Figures 67(Q) and 69(F)), which suggests the outcome of the second half of the mission sequence. It is characterized by the fact that the group image display sequence is never executed following the mission failure indication sequence, which suggests the outcome of the first half of the mission sequence.

In the second embodiment of the gaming machine 1, a configuration is adopted in which the probability of winning a jackpot in the second half of the mission sequence is higher than that of the first half of the mission sequence. Therefore, there is a concern that if a losing notification sequence is displayed despite progressing to the second half of the mission sequence, the player may become disappointed, and as a result, their expectation of winning a jackpot may be significantly reduced.

In contrast, in the second embodiment of the gaming machine 1, if the mission failure indication sequence (see Figure 67(Q)) is executed following the build-up sequence in Figure 69(N), the group image display sequence (see Figure 67(R)), exemplified in Figure 69(G), is executed immediately afterward. This group image display sequence is a rare sequence that does not appear during symbol changes when a win notification sequence is performed. By executing this group image display sequence prior to the loss notification sequence in Figure 67(S), it is expected that the disappointment of the player caused by the loss notification sequence occurring despite progressing to the later mission sequence can be reduced.

<Characteristics of special effects performed during special variations>
Next, referring to Figures 70 and 71, we will explain the characteristics of each effect in the special variation, which is a pattern variation in which the special variation effects described above are performed, based on Figures 67 to 69. Here, Figures 70 and 71 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the characteristics of each effect performed in the special variation.

(First half mission presentation)
In this embodiment, the probability of a jackpot occurring during the first half of the mission sequence (see Figures 67(C) and 68(C)) is set to approximately 18% (see Figure 70). When this first half of the mission sequence is performed, as described above based on Figures 67(C) and (D), etc., a mission success indication sequence (not shown) and a jackpot notification sequence (see Figure 67(D)) may occur as result of the first half of the mission sequence. For this reason, the first half of the mission sequence can be said to be an expectation sequence that makes the player expect a jackpot notification sequence to be performed.

In this embodiment, the probability of a jackpot during the first half of the mission sequence is set to approximately 18%, while the probability of a jackpot during the second half of the mission sequence (see Figures 67(J) and 68(H)) is set to approximately 35% (see Figures 70 and 71). Therefore, the first half of the mission sequence can be considered a low-suggestion sequence, indicating a relatively low probability of a jackpot notification sequence being performed (see Figure 70).

Furthermore, during the first presentation period, when the first half of the mission is presented, the first half of the mission presentation images (an example of the "first presentation images": see Figure 68(C)) are displayed on the display screen 70, and the background music for the first half of the mission is output from the speaker 38 (see Figure 70).

Furthermore, during the first performance period, when the first half of the mission sequence is performed, various lights, such as the panel lamp 5, the frame lamp 37, and the multiple color LEDs built into the movable decorative member 14, are illuminated using a lighting pattern for the first half of the mission sequence (see Figure 70).

(An action prompt during the first half of the mission)
The operation prompting effect during the first half of the mission (see Figures 67(E) and 68(D)) is, in this embodiment, a first-stage button operation prompting effect (an example of an "input prompting effect") that prompts the player to operate the first stage button 35 during the first half of the mission. During the first half of the mission, and before the start of the operation prompting effect during the first half of the mission, as described above, the background music for the first half of the mission is output from the speaker 38. In contrast, while the operation prompting effect during the first half of the mission is being executed, the background music for the first half of the mission is not output from the speaker 38 (see Figure 70). This is because the sub-CPU 91 sends a variation start command to the image and sound control board 100 at the start of the variation, instructing it not to output any sound effects such as background music for the first half of the mission while the operation prompting effect during the first half of the mission is being executed.

As illustrated in Figure 70, the probability of a jackpot occurring during the operation-promoting animation in the first half of the mission sequence is set to approximately 11%. As described above based on Figure 67, during the first half of the mission sequence, there are two cases: one in which the operation-promoting animation (see Figure 67(E)) is executed, and another in which it is not. The former case is characterized by a higher likelihood of the jackpot notification animation (see Figures 67(D) and (P)) being executed than the latter case (see Figure 70).

Furthermore, there are two scenarios: one where the "Operation Prompt During First Mission Sequence" (see Figure 67(E)) is executed during the first mission sequence, and another where it is not executed. The former scenario is more likely to lead to the second mission sequence (see Figure 67(J)) than the latter (see Figure 70).

(First half operation response effects)
In this embodiment, the probability of a jackpot in the early-game operation-dependent effects (see Figure 67(F)) is set to be between approximately 9% and approximately 34% (see Figure 70). That is, in this embodiment, as described above based on Figures 67(F) and 68(E), there are two types of early-game operation-dependent effects: one in which a small number of meteor showers are performed, and another in which a large number of meteor showers are performed. The probability of a jackpot in the small number of meteor showers is set to approximately 9%, and the probability of a jackpot in the large number of meteor showers is set to approximately 34%.

Thus, the initial operation-based effects have the characteristic that the likelihood of a win notification effect being executed and the likelihood of developing into the second-half mission effect differ depending on the effect type (in this embodiment, the number of shooting stars).

In this embodiment, a predetermined period during the first half of the mission sequence is set as the effective period for the operation-promoting sequence during the first half of the mission sequence. Therefore, while the group image is displayed (i.e., during the execution of the group image display sequence described above based on Figures 67(R) and 69(G)), even if the player operates the first sequence button 35, the first half operation-corresponding sequence will not be executed (see Figure 70).

Therefore, it is easy to suppress problems such as a decrease in the visibility of the group image caused by the execution of a small or large meteor shower effect during the group image display effect.

(Combined transformation effect)
In this embodiment, the combined change effect (see Figure 67(G)) has a jackpot reliability set to approximately 21%, and can be described as a pre-announcement effect that foreshadows the possibility of a jackpot notification effect being performed before the jackpot notification effect or the loss notification effect is performed. This combined change effect will be described in detail later based on Figures 72 to 74, but similar to the effects corresponding to the first half of the operation, the combined change effect is not performed while the group image is displayed (i.e., while the group image display effect described above is being performed based on Figures 67(R) and 69(G)).

(Ally character appearance animation)
In this embodiment, the appearance of ally characters (see Figures 67(I) and 69(G)) has a jackpot probability set to approximately 33% (see Figure 70).

As described above based on Figure 70, during the first presentation period in which the first half of the mission is performed, background music (BGM) for the first half of the mission is output from speaker 38. However, if an ally character appearance animation is performed, at the start of the second presentation period in which the ally character appearance animation is performed, a predetermined appearance sound (sound effect) is output from speaker 38 as a different sound from the BGM for the first half of the mission, in order to enhance the visual effect of the display animation showing the appearance of the ally character.

Furthermore, as is clear from the notation in Figures 68(F) and (G), when the ally character appearance animation is performed, the animation symbols are hidden, and the ally character appearance animation image exemplified in Figure 68(G) is displayed on the display screen 70. For the sake of explanation, although not shown in Figure 68(G), the animation symbols in the animation symbol display area 75 corresponding to Special Feature 1 (see, for example, Figure 56(A)) and the animation symbols in the animation symbol display area 76 corresponding to Special Feature 2 (see, for example, Figure 56(A)) continue to be displayed even while the ally character appearance animation is running.

Furthermore, at the start of the second animation period in which the ally character appearance animation is performed, a predetermined appearance sound is output from speaker 38 as described above. However, during the second animation period after this appearance sound is output, the background music for the first half of the mission animation is not output from speaker 38, and the ally character appearance animation is displayed on the display screen 70 with a lower volume of sound effects than during the first animation period in which the first half of the mission animation is performed (see Figure 70).

In this embodiment, when executing the ally character appearance animation, the sub-CPU 91 updates the volume setting information in the sub-RAM 93 and temporarily sets the volume of the sound output from the speaker 38 to zero. Alternatively, without updating the volume setting information in the sub-RAM 93 (i.e., while the volume remains at a non-zero level), the output of the sound during the ally character appearance animation may be prohibited by, for example, sending a predetermined command to the image and sound control board 100 instructing it not to output the sound during the ally character appearance animation.

In this embodiment, in order to enhance the effect of drawing attention to the appearance of allied characters, a configuration is adopted in which the speaker 38 does not output any sound effects during the second performance period after the appearance sound is output. However, in other embodiments, for example, a different sound effect from the background music for the first half of the mission performance may be output from the speaker 38 at a volume lower than the background music for the first half of the mission performance during the first performance period.

Furthermore, as described above based on Figure 70, in the gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment, during the first performance period in which the first half mission performance takes place, a lighting effect is executed in which various lamps, such as the panel lamp 5, the frame lamp 37, and the multiple color LEDs built into the movable decorative member 14, are illuminated in a lighting pattern for the first half mission performance. In contrast, during the second performance period in which the ally character appearance performance takes place, the above-mentioned lighting effect is not executed in order to prevent a decrease in the effect of drawing the player's attention to the ally character appearance performance image due to the player's gaze being guided to the various lamps.

Furthermore, in the game machine 1, as described above based on Figure 67, there are cases where the ally character appearance animation (see Figure 67(I)) is performed during special variations, and cases where the ally character appearance animation is not performed. However, as described above based on Figure 70, in this embodiment, the jackpot reliability of the ally character appearance animation is set to a relatively high value of approximately 33%, and the jackpot notification animation is more likely to be performed when the ally character appearance animation is performed than when it is not performed.

(Second half mission presentation)
In this embodiment, the probability of a jackpot occurring during the second half of the mission sequence (see Figures 67(J) and 68(H)) is set to approximately 35% (see Figure 70). When this second half of the mission sequence is performed, as described above based on Figures 67(O) and (P), the results of the second half of the mission sequence may include a mission success indication sequence (see Figure 67(O)) and a jackpot notification sequence (see Figure 67(P)). For this reason, the second half of the mission sequence can be said to be an expectation sequence that makes the player anticipate the execution of a jackpot notification sequence.

In this embodiment, as illustrated in Figures 70 and 71, the probability of a jackpot during the first half of the mission sequence is set to approximately 18%, while the probability of a jackpot during the second half of the mission sequence is set to approximately 35%. Therefore, the second half of the mission sequence can be considered a high-suggestion sequence, indicating a relatively high probability of a jackpot notification sequence being performed (see Figure 71).

Furthermore, during the third presentation period, when the second half of the mission presentation takes place, the second half mission presentation image (see Figure 68(H)) is displayed on the display screen 70, and the background music for the second half mission presentation is output from the speaker 38 (see Figure 71).

Furthermore, during the third performance period, when the second half of the mission sequence takes place, various lights, including the panel lamp 5, frame lamp 37, and multiple color LEDs built into the movable decorative member 14, are illuminated using a lighting pattern specific to the second half of the mission sequence (see Figure 71).

Furthermore, during special variations where special variation effects are performed, the background music for the pre-reach variation effect is output from speaker 38 during the period from the start of the symbol variation in Figure 67(A) until the start of the first half mission effect (see Figure 67(C)). Also, as mentioned above, during the first half mission effect, the background music for the first half mission effect is output from speaker 38 (see Figure 70), and during the second half mission effect, the background music for the second half mission effect is output from speaker 38 (see Figure 71).

In this case, if the first mission sequence does not progress to the second mission sequence, at least two songs—the background music for the pre-reach variation sequence and the background music for the first mission sequence—are output from speaker 38. Conversely, if the first mission sequence progresses to the second mission sequence, at least three songs—the background music for the pre-reach variation sequence, the background music for the first mission sequence, and the background music for the first mission sequence—are output from speaker 38. Therefore, it can be said that more songs are output when the second mission sequence is performed than when the first mission sequence is performed but the second mission sequence is not.

(A prompt to encourage operation during the second half of the mission sequence)
The second-half mission performance operation prompting effect (see Figures 67(K) and 68(I)) is, in this embodiment, a second performance button operation prompting effect (an example of an "input prompting effect") that prompts the player to operate the second performance button 36 during the second-half mission performance. During the second-half mission performance, before the start of the second-half mission performance operation prompting effect, as described above, the background music for the second-half mission performance is output from the speaker 38. In contrast, while the second-half mission performance operation prompting effect is being executed, the background music for the first-half mission performance and the background music for the second-half mission performance are not output from the speaker 38 (see Figure 71). This is because the sub-CPU 91 sends a variation performance start command to the image and sound control board 100 at the start of the variation, instructing it not to output performance sounds such as the background music for the first-half mission performance and the background music for the second-half mission performance while the second-half mission performance operation prompting effect is being executed.

As illustrated in Figure 71, the operation-promoting animation during the second half of the mission sequence has a jackpot probability set at approximately 17%. As described above based on Figure 67, during the second half of the mission sequence, there are two cases: one in which the operation-promoting animation during the second half of the mission sequence (see Figure 67(K)) is executed, and another in which it is not executed. The former case is characterized by a higher probability of the jackpot notification animation (see Figure 67(P)) being executed than the latter case (see Figure 71).

(Second half operation response effect)
In this embodiment, the probability of winning a jackpot in the second half of the game (see Figure 67(L)) is set to be between approximately 15% and approximately 47% (see Figure 71). That is, in this embodiment, as described above based on Figures 67(L) and 69(A), the second half of the game includes a low-probability suggestion sequence that displays the word "CHANCE" together with the ally character, and a high-probability suggestion sequence that displays the word "BIG CHANCE!" together with the ally character (see Figure 69(A)). The probability of winning a jackpot in the low-probability suggestion sequence is set to approximately 15%, and the probability of winning a jackpot in the high-probability suggestion sequence is set to approximately 47%.

Thus, the latter-stage operation-based animations have the characteristic that the likelihood of a win notification animation being executed differs depending on the animation style (in this embodiment, the content of the text displayed alongside the ally character).

In this embodiment, a predetermined period during the second half of the mission sequence is set as the effective period for the operation-promoting sequence during the second half of the mission sequence. Therefore, while the group image is displayed (i.e., during the execution of the group image display sequence described above based on Figures 67(R) and 69(G)), even if the player operates the second sequence button 36, the second half operation-responsive sequence will not be executed (see Figure 71).

Therefore, it is possible to easily suppress problems such as a decrease in the visibility of the group image due to the execution of a low-confidence or high-confidence indication effect during the execution of the group image display effect.

(Gold text dialogue display effect)
The gold text dialogue display effect (see Figures 67(M) and 69(B)) is an effect that displays specific characters during the third performance period, when the result of the first special symbol judgment performed at the start of the special variation is "Big Win," and is not performed when the result of the first special symbol judgment is "Miss." Therefore, the gold text dialogue display effect can be said to be a guaranteed indication that a big win is highly likely when it occurs (see Figure 71).

(Suggestion of mission success)
The Mission Success Indication演出 (see Figures 67(O) and 69(D)) is an indication in advance that the Win Notification演出 (see Figure 67(P)) will be performed. It is characterized in that it is performed before the Win Notification演出 if it is performed, but not if the Loss Notification演出 (see Figure 67(S)) is performed (see Figure 71).

(Winning notification animation)
The winning notification effect (see Figure 67(P)) is an effect in which, as described above based on Figure 69(E), three effect symbols showing matching numbers are pseudo-stopped just before the end of the symbol variation in which the special variation effect is performed, and as the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, these three effect symbols showing matching numbers are stopped in their actual state. In this way, when the three effect symbols that notify the jackpot are stopped and displayed as the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, a jackpot-specific sound effect (an example of "other effect sound") that is different from the BGM for the pre-reach variation effect, the BGM for the first half mission effect, and the BGM for the second half mission effect is output from speaker 38.

(Scene suggesting mission failure)
The Mission Failure Indication演出 (see Figures 67(Q) and 69(F)) is an indication in advance that the Loss Notification演出 (see Figure 67(S)) will be performed. It is characterized in that it is performed before the Loss Notification演出 if it is performed, but the Mission Failure Indication is not performed if the Win Notification演出 (see Figure 67(P)) is performed (see Figure 71).

(Image of all members together displayed)
The group image display animation (see Figures 67(R) and 69(G)) is an animation that displays a group image after the second half mission animation (see Figure 67(J)) is performed, when the losing notification animation (see Figure 67(S)) is performed after the second half mission animation (see Figure 67(J)) is performed. The group image display animation in this embodiment has the characteristic that the group image display animation is not performed (i.e., the group image is not displayed) when the winning notification animation (or losing notification animation) of Figure 67(D) is performed after the first half mission animation (see Figure 67(C)) is performed, without progressing to the second half mission animation (see Figure 67(J)), or when the winning notification animation (see Figure 67(P)) is performed after the second half mission animation is performed (see Figure 67(P)) (see Figure 71).

Furthermore, as described above based on Figure 71, during the execution of the second half mission sequence (see Figure 67(J)), the background music for the second half mission sequence is output from speaker 38. However, if the group image display sequence is executed after the second half mission sequence, the group image is displayed without outputting any background music, including the background music for the second half mission sequence (see Figure 71).

In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, it is possible to execute music output sequences that output background music for the pre-reach variation sequence, the first half mission sequence, and the second half mission sequence. However, during the execution of the group image display sequence, that is, while the group image is displayed, these music output sequences are not executed in order to direct the player's attention to the group image.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the sub-CPU 91 is configured to execute the first-half operation response sequence (see Figure 67(F)) in response to the player operating the first performance button 35 during the effective period related to the operation promotion sequence during the first-half mission sequence (see Figure 67(E)), and to execute the second-half operation response sequence (see Figure 67(L)) in response to the player operating the second performance button 36 during the effective period related to the operation promotion sequence during the second-half mission sequence (see Figure 67(K)). On the other hand, the sub-CPU 91 does not set an effective period for the first performance button 35 (or the second performance button 36) while the group image is displayed, i.e., while the group image display sequence is being executed. In order not to obstruct the view of the group image, the sub-CPU 91 does not execute the operation response sequence even if the first performance button 35 (or the second performance button 36) is operated while the group image is displayed (see Figure 71).

Furthermore, the sub-CPU 91 can execute a possibility indication animation, such as a gold-lettered dialogue display animation during the second half of the mission animation, but it will not execute such a possibility indication animation while the group image is displayed (see Figure 71). Other examples of possibility indication animations include the gold-lettered dialogue display animation mentioned above, as well as animations corresponding to the first half of the game (see Figure 67(F)), animations corresponding to the second half of the game (see Figure 67(L)), and cut-ins (see Figure 11(G)).

Furthermore, while the sub-CPU 91 can execute an operation-promoting animation during the first half of the mission (see Figure 67(E)) and an operation-promoting animation during the second half of the mission (see Figure 67(K)), it refrains from executing such animations during the display of the group image, i.e., while the group image is being displayed, in order to avoid interfering with the visibility of the group image (see Figure 71).

Furthermore, even if the player operates the volume adjustment key 162 or the brightness adjustment key 163 during the execution of the group image display sequence, the visibility of the group image will not be obstructed. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, if the volume adjustment key 162 is operated during the execution of the group image display sequence, the volume setting information in the sub-RAM 93 is updated based on the operation signal from the volume adjustment key 162. Similarly, if the brightness adjustment key 163 is operated during the execution of the group image display sequence, the brightness setting information in the sub-RAM 93 is updated based on the operation signal from the brightness adjustment key 163.

On the other hand, while the group image display animation is running, the sub-CPU 91 does not display the animation customization prompt animation image. Furthermore, while the group image is displayed, even if the first animation button 35, the second animation button 36, or the directional pad 161 are operated, it does not perform any animation customization other than volume and brightness adjustments.

(Losing notification effect)
The losing notification effect (see Figure 67(S)) is an effect in which, as described above based on Figures 69(H) to (I), three effect symbols indicating a losing combination are pseudo-stopped just before the end of the symbol variation in which the special variation effect is performed, and as the losing symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, these three effect symbols indicating a losing combination are stopped and displayed as they are. In this way, when the three effect symbols that notify a losing combination are stopped and displayed as the losing symbol is stopped and displayed, the sub-CPU 91 stops and displays the three effect symbols without outputting effect sounds such as the BGM for the pre-reach variation effect, the BGM for the first half mission effect, the BGM for the second half mission effect, and the sound effects for the jackpot from the speaker 38, at a volume of effect sounds lower than during the first effect period in which the first half mission effect is performed and the third effect period in which the second half mission effect is performed.

In this embodiment, when executing the losing notification animation, the sub-CPU 91 updates the volume setting information in the sub-RAM 93 and temporarily sets the volume of the sound output from the speaker 38 to zero. Alternatively, without updating the volume setting information in the sub-RAM 93 (i.e., while the volume remains at a non-zero level), the output of the sound during the losing notification animation may be prohibited by, for example, sending a variable animation termination command to the image and sound control board 100 that includes information instructing that the sound not be output during the losing notification animation.

In this embodiment, the sub-CPU 91 performs the above processing, resulting in silence during the loss notification animation. However, in other embodiments, a different sound effect—different from the background music for the pre-reach variation animation, the background music for the first half mission animation, the background music for the second half mission animation, and the sound effects specifically for jackpots—may be output from the speaker 38 at a lower volume than during the first animation period when the first half mission animation is performed, or the third animation period when the second half mission animation is performed.

Furthermore, while this embodiment describes an example where the group image display sequence is performed prior to the loss notification sequence, in other embodiments, the group image display sequence may be performed in the middle of the loss notification sequence, for example, when the three symbols indicating a losing combination are displayed in a pseudo-stop state.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the above-described special variation effect is explained using Figures 67 to 71 as an example, where it is executed during the variation display of the first special symbol in the normal game state. However, in other embodiments, for example, a configuration in which the above-described special variation effect is executed during the variation display of the second special symbol in the probability variation game state, or a configuration in which the above-described special variation effect is executed during the variation display of the second special symbol in the time-saving game state, may be adopted.

<About complex transformation effects>
Next, with reference to Figures 72 to 74, we will explain the complex change effects that are performed during the first half of the mission. Here, Figure 72 is a flowchart illustrating the flow of each effect that makes up the complex change effect. Figures 73 and 74 are screen diagrams showing specific examples of the complex change effect. As mentioned above based on Figure 68, during the first half of the mission, the left symbol, which is a reach symbol, is displayed in a reduced state as a pseudo-stop in the upper left area of the display screen 70, and similarly, the right symbol, which is also a reach symbol, is displayed in a reduced state as a pseudo-stop in the upper right area of the display screen 70. However, in Figures 73 and 74, for the sake of explanation, we will explain by assuming that these reach symbols are displayed large in the effect symbol display area 73.

In the second embodiment of the gaming machine 1, a variation performance start command, which includes setting information for a complex variation performance, is transmitted by the sub-CPU 91 to the image and sound control board 100 (and the lamp control board 120) as a variation performance start command to instruct the start of a variation performance associated with the variation display of the first special symbol during normal gameplay. In response, the image and sound control CPU 101 and the lamp CPU 121 execute performance control based on the setting information, thereby realizing the complex variation performance described below.

As described above based on Figure 67, in the gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment, a complex change effect (see Figure 67(G)) may be executed during the first half mission sequence. This complex change effect is a combination of a予告 (preview) effect that temporarily changes the first preview image displayed on the display screen 70 to a second preview image and then returns it to the first preview image, and multiple effects that use various effect means.

The above-mentioned pre-announcement effect, which uses a pre-announcement image, is an effect that foreshadows the possibility of a winning notification effect being executed. As illustrated in Figure 72, it consists of a first change effect that changes the first pre-announcement image displayed on the display screen 70 to a second pre-announcement image, and a second change effect that changes the second pre-announcement image, which has been changed by the first change effect, back to the first pre-announcement image (i.e., returns it to the first pre-announcement image). In Figure 72, the pre-announcement image in the process of changing from the first pre-announcement image to the second pre-announcement image by the first change effect is indicated as the "first change effect image," and the pre-announcement image in the process of changing from the second pre-announcement image to the first pre-announcement image by the second change effect is indicated as the "second change effect image."

As shown in Figure 72, in this embodiment, the first time required for the first transformation effect (1 second in this embodiment) and the second time required for the second transformation effect (1.5 seconds in this embodiment) are set to different times.

Figure 73(A) illustrates the state in which the first preview image is displayed before the start of the first change effect. Figure 73(A) illustrates that, before the start of the first change effect, the icon in its normal display mode (with a white display color) is displayed in the icon display area 72, a reach effect is performed in the effect symbol display area 73, and the effect sub-symbols in the special effect 1 corresponding effect sub-symbol display area 75 are displayed in a variable state. At this time, the movable decorative member 14 is in its initial position, and since the second special symbol is not displayed in a variable state, the effect sub-symbol showing the "526" pattern is displayed in the special effect 2 corresponding effect sub-symbol display area 76. Also, a red hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 71 as the earliest hold icon.

Furthermore, when the movable decorative member 14 is in its initial position, as described above based on Figure 2, most of the movable decorative member 14 is hidden behind the decorative member 13, with only the lower end of the movable decorative member 14 visible (see Figure 2). However, for the sake of clarity, the decorative member 13 is omitted from the illustration in Figures 73 and 74.

As described above, since the pre-announcement effect is an effect that foreshadows the possibility of a winning notification effect being performed, when the display effect in Figure 73(A) is being performed, the effect image displayed in the effect symbol display area 73, the icon displayed in the icon display area 72, and the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 71 can be said to be the "first pre-announcement image" described above.

Furthermore, when the display effect shown in Figure 73(A) for displaying the "First Preview Image" is being performed, as illustrated in Figure 72, background music for the first half of the mission is output from speaker 38, and various lamps, such as the panel lamp 5, frame lamp 37, and multiple color LEDs built into the movable decorative member 14, are illuminated in the light emission pattern for the first half of the mission.

In this state, the first transformation sequence begins, resulting in the following sequence. Specifically, on the display screen 70, as illustrated in Figure 72, the first transformation sequence, which changes the first preview image to the second preview image, and the third transformation sequence, which displays related images associated with the first preview image and changes the related images in conjunction with the first transformation sequence, are executed in parallel.

Figures 73(A) to (C) illustrate the first transformation effect, in which the upper edge of the first preview image moves downward, creating the effect of the first preview image being compressed from top to bottom. Figures 73(A) to (C) also illustrate the third transformation effect, in which a related image is displayed in the upper area of the display screen 70, which was created by the change in the first preview image caused by the first transformation effect. As the first preview image changes, the display area of the related image expands downward.

Thus, the "first transformation animation image" described above, based on Figure 72, is an animation image in which the first preview image changes as if being crushed from top to bottom. As described above, when the first transformation animation begins, the third transformation animation begins in conjunction with the first transformation animation. However, when the first and third transformation animations are running in parallel, that is, when the "first transformation animation image" is displayed, the first light emission mode change animation shown in Figure 72 is performed, although it is not shown in Figure 73.

This first light emission pattern change effect involves changing the light emission pattern of at least one of the multiple color LEDs built into the panel lamp 5, frame lamp 37, and movable decorative member 14. As described above based on Figure 72, before the first change effect, which changes the first preview image, and the third change effect, which changes the related image, begin, a light emission effect is performed in which various lamps, such as the panel lamp 5, frame lamp 37, and the color LEDs of the movable decorative member 14, illuminate using the light emission pattern for the first half of the mission.

In contrast, in the gaming machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the first and third transformation effects begin, a first light emission mode change effect is performed, in which all the color LEDs of the play surface lamp 5, frame lamp 37, and movable decorative member 14 are turned off. By turning off all the various lamps in this way, it is possible to prevent the player's gaze from being drawn to the various lamps, thereby enhancing the effect of the combined transformation effects.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 73, Figure 73(C) illustrates the state immediately after the completion of the first change effect, which changes the first preview image, and the third change effect, which changes the related image. It shows a second preview image, which is a compressed image from above so that the vertical width of the first preview image is less than half, and a related image, whose display area is expanded downwards so that it is larger than that of the second preview image.

Thus, once the first and third transformation sequences are complete and the second preview image and related images are displayed, a "state change sequence" is performed to change the state of the movable decorative member 14, as illustrated in Figure 72. Specifically, as illustrated in Figures 73(C) and (D), the support for the movable decorative member 14 is released, allowing it to move from its initial position to its operating position. This "state change sequence" then causes the multiple color LEDs built into the movable decorative member 14, positioned in the operating position, to illuminate in a specific light emission pattern.

As described above based on Figure 72, during the execution of the first and third transformation effects, the "first light emission pattern change effect" causes the multiple color LEDs built into the movable decorative member 14 to turn off. In contrast, the "state change effect" performed after the "first light emission pattern change effect" causes the movable decorative member 14, positioned at the operating location, to begin emitting light in a specific light emission pattern, making it easy to guide the player's gaze to the central area of the display screen 70.

Thus, in the gaming machine 1 according to this embodiment, a state change effect is performed during the period between the end of the first change effect and the start of the second change effect, changing the state of the movable decorative member 14 from the first effect state (in this embodiment, the state in which the movable decorative member 14 is positioned in its initial position and the color LED of the movable decorative member 14 is turned off) to the second effect state (in this embodiment, the state in which the movable decorative member 14 is positioned in its operating position and the color LED of the movable decorative member 14 emits light in the specific light emission pattern described above).

It goes without saying that the first and second performance states described here are not limited to the performance states described above, but may include other performance states as well.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as is clear from the notation in Figure 72, the "state change effect" of the movable decorative member 14 begins after a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the completion of the first and third change effects. However, because the execution time of the first and third change effects is set to a short period of "1 second," it is possible to give the player the impression that the movable decorative member 14 has crushed the first preview image downwards.

Next, when the state change animation causes the movable decorative member 14 to be positioned in its operating position and the color LEDs of the movable decorative member 14 to illuminate in a specific light emission pattern, a related image is displayed on the display screen 70 (see Figure 72). This related image is an animation image displayed on the display screen 70 during the period between the end of the first change animation and the start of the second change animation, that is, while the second preview image is being displayed, and is an animation image related to both the second preview image and the movable decorative member 14.

Figure 74(A) illustrates a state where the movable decorative member 14 is positioned in its operating position, and the related image and the second preview image are displayed vertically on the display screen 70. The related image shows three characters standing above the second preview image, attempting to push up the movable decorative member 14.

Thus, in the gaming machine 1 according to this embodiment, a presentation is performed using relational images representing three characters, which are related to the second preview image and also to the movable decorative member 14 positioned at the operating position. Therefore, it is possible to give the player the impression that the three characters are pushing up the movable decorative member 14, thereby attempting to return the second preview image to the first preview image.

Furthermore, during the display period of the second preview image, which features a presentation using such related images, a predetermined in-transformation sound effect, different from the background music for the first half of the mission presentation that was output from speaker 38 before the start of the first transformation presentation (and the second transformation presentation), is output from speaker 38 (see Figure 72).

Therefore, during the display period of the second preview image, a high level of visual effect can be achieved through the synergistic effect of the sound effect output from speaker 38, the state change effect using the movable decorative member 14, and the effect using related images.

In this embodiment, the display time for the second preview image is set to 2.5 seconds. After a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the second preview image display, a state return effect using the movable decorative member 14 is initiated (see Figures 72 and 74(B)). This state return effect returns the movable decorative member 14 to its original state before the complex change effect began. Figures 74(B) to 74(D) illustrate how the movable decorative member 14, which was positioned in the operating position, returns to its initial position due to the driving force of the movable decorative member motor 141.

Next, 2.5 seconds after the start of displaying the second preview image, the second and fourth transformation effects begin, as illustrated in Figure 72. Here, the second transformation effect is a display effect that changes the second preview image displayed on the display screen 70 back to the first preview image; in other words, it is a display effect that returns the second preview image displayed on the display screen 70 back to the first preview image. Figures 74(B) to (D) illustrate this by showing how the boundary line between the second preview image and the related image moves upward, causing the second preview image to return to the first preview image. On the other hand, the fourth transformation effect is an effect that changes the related image in conjunction with the second transformation effect. Figures 74(B) to (D) illustrate how the lower edge of the related image is pushed upward, causing the related image to disappear from the display screen 70 as the first preview image returns to a full-screen display on the display screen 70.

Furthermore, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the state restoration effect using the movable decorative member 14 began, the "second light emission pattern change effect" is initiated (see Figure 72). As described above based on Figure 72, the first light emission pattern change effect, which is executed in conjunction with the start of the first and third change effects, causes all of the multiple color LEDs built into the panel lamp 5, frame lamp 37, and movable decorative member 14, which were emitting light in the light emission pattern for the first half of the mission, to turn off. In contrast, the "second light emission pattern change effect" is an effect that restores the light emission patterns of the multiple color LEDs built into the panel lamp 5, frame lamp 37, and movable decorative member 14 to their original state. As illustrated in Figure 72, when the "second light emission pattern change effect" is executed, the light emission effect using the light emission pattern for the first half of the mission is resumed by the multiple color LEDs built into the panel lamp 5, frame lamp 37, and movable decorative member 14.

Thus, in the combined change effect of this embodiment, not only does the preview image displayed on the display screen 70 change, but various effects using different effects means are also combined. Therefore, by executing the combined change effect, it is possible to perform an extremely entertaining effect.

In this embodiment of the gaming machine 1, during the display of the first予告画像 (pre-announcement image) before the start of the complex change effect (see, for example, Figure 73(A)), and during the display of the second予告画像 (pre-announcement image) during the execution of the complex change effect (see, for example, Figure 73(D)), the "predetermined images" include the small symbols in the small symbol display area 75 corresponding to special symbol 1 and the small symbols in the small symbol display area 76 corresponding to special symbol 2. However, as is clear from the notation in Figures 73(A) to (D), the small symbols displayed in these small symbol display areas 75 and 76 do not change in position, size, angle, etc., even when the first予告画像 changes to the second予告画像. Therefore, even if, for example, the left four symbols and the right four symbols are compressed by the complex change effect, temporarily reducing the visibility of these symbols, it is still possible to easily recognize that the first special symbol is changing based on the small symbols displayed in the small symbol display area 75 corresponding to special symbol 1.

In this embodiment, the first transformation effect that changes the first preview image to the second preview image was described as an effect that changes the vertical height of the first preview image. However, the first transformation effect may be a different effect from the one exemplified in this embodiment. This first transformation effect is not limited to an effect that changes the size and shape of the first preview image; it may also be an effect that changes the size of the first preview image, an effect that changes the shape of the first preview image, an effect that rotates the first preview image, or an effect that changes the angle of the first preview image. Furthermore, a combination of two or more of these effects may be executed as the first transformation effect.

Furthermore, while this embodiment describes the case where the combined change effect (see Figure 67(G)) is executed during the first half of the mission sequence, the timing of the combined change effect is not limited to this. For example, the combined change effect may be executed during the second half of the mission sequence, or during the SP Reach or SPSP Reach as described in the first embodiment. Also, the combined change effect may be executed not only during the display of the first special symbol's variation in the normal game state, but also during the display of the second special symbol's variation in the probability variation game state (or time-saving game state).

[others]
The inventions related to the embodiments disclosed herein are disclosed below as reference inventions. It goes without saying that the parenthetical statements added to each reference invention are included to facilitate understanding of the reference invention and do not limit the content of the reference invention to what is stated in the parentheses.

(Reference Invention 1)
The gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-1 is,
A determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot game) (for example, the main CPU 81 that executes the jackpot determination process in step S308 of Figure 30: see Figure 5),
A special symbol display control means (for example, a main CPU 81 that executes the processes of steps S311 and SS315 in Figure 30) causes a special symbol (for example, a first special symbol) to be displayed in a variable manner on a special symbol display means (for example, a first special symbol display 41) and then causes a special symbol indicating the result of the determination to be displayed in a stopped state,
When the special game is executed, if a special symbol indicating that the determination means has determined that the special game has been executed (for example, a jackpot symbol X1 or a jackpot symbol X2: see Figure 6(B)) is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display means, the special game execution means (for example, a main CPU 81 that executes the jackpot opening and closing control processing illustrated in Figures 34 to 36) executes the special game,
It includes a performance control means (for example, a sub-CPU 91: see Figure 5) for controlling the performance,
The aforementioned performance control means is
The special symbol is displayed to change in conjunction with the display of the special symbol, and the special symbol is displayed to stop in conjunction with the display of the special symbol,
It is possible to perform attention-grabbing effects that draw attention to the aforementioned symbols (for example, attention-grabbing effects for reach symbols: see Figures 9(C), 13(G) to (I)),
The aforementioned symbols include a first symbol (for example, an even-numbered symbol) and a second symbol (for example, an odd-numbered symbol).
The aforementioned performance control means is
The present invention is characterized in that it is possible to perform the attention-grabbing performance (for example, the reach symbol attention-grabbing performance exemplified in Figures 13(G) to (I)) that draws attention to the second performance symbol (for example, an odd-numbered symbol), while not performing the attention-grabbing performance that draws attention to the first performance symbol (for example, an even-numbered symbol) (see, for example, Figure 9).

According to the gaming machine of this Reference Invention 1-1, while a focus-enhancing effect that draws attention to the second display symbol may be executed, a focus-enhancing effect that draws attention to the first display symbol is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem where the effect of drawing attention to the second display symbol is reduced and the overall enjoyment decreases due to the execution of both the focus-enhancing effect on the first and second display symbols, while still achieving a high level of performance effect through the focus-enhancing effect on the second display symbol.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-2 is, in the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-1,
The aforementioned performance control means is
The present invention is characterized in that, when a reach is achieved using the performance symbols, it is possible to perform an attention-grabbing performance that draws attention to the second performance symbol (for example, an odd-numbered symbol) (for example, the reach achievement performance in Figure 9(B) that notifies that a reach has been achieved using an odd-numbered symbol is followed by the reach symbol attention performance in Figure 9(C)), but it does not perform an attention-grabbing performance that draws attention to the first performance symbol (for example, an even-numbered symbol) (for example, if the reach achievement performance in Figure 9(B) that notifies that a reach has been achieved using an even-numbered symbol is performed, the reach symbol attention performance in Figure 9(C) is not performed).

According to the gaming machine of this reference invention 1-2, when a reach is achieved using the featured symbols, a focus-enhancing effect is executed to draw attention to the second featured symbol. Therefore, a high level of visual effect can be achieved through the synergistic effect of the effect that establishes the reach using the featured symbols and the focus-enhancing effect that draws attention to the second featured symbol.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-2 described above,
The aforementioned performance control means is
A key feature is that, when a reach animation is not being performed, other attention-grabbing animations different from the one that draws attention to the second animation symbol (for example, the first animation symbol attention-grabbing animation in Figure 8(D) or the second animation symbol attention-grabbing animation in Figure 8(F)) can be performed.

However, in the configuration of Reference Invention 1-2 described above, where a focus-enhancing effect is performed to draw attention to the second focus-enhancing symbol when a reach is achieved using the featured symbols, it is possible to draw attention to the featured symbols (second focus-enhancing symbol) when a reach is achieved. However, it is not possible to draw attention to the featured symbols at other times, raising concerns that sufficient visual effect from the display of the featured symbols cannot be obtained.

In contrast, according to the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-3, when a reach animation is not being performed, other attention-grabbing animations (different from the attention-grabbing animation that draws attention to the second animation symbol) may be performed. Therefore, attention can be drawn to the animation symbols even when a reach animation is not being performed, and as a result, the reduction in the effectiveness of the animation caused by the animation displaying the animation symbols can be suppressed, making it possible to obtain a sufficient animation effect.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-3 described above,
The aforementioned performance control means is
The present invention is characterized in that it is possible to perform both of the following as other attention-grabbing effects: a first effect symbol attention effect that draws attention to the first effect symbol (for example, an even-numbered symbol) (see, for example, Figures 8(D) and 12(D)), and a second effect symbol attention effect that draws attention to the second effect symbol (for example, an odd-numbered symbol) (see, for example, Figures 8(F) and 12(H)).

According to the gaming machine of this reference invention 1-4, both the first and second symbol-focusing effects can be executed. Therefore, compared to configurations that can only execute one of these effects, it is possible to execute a wider variety of other focus effects.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-5 is a gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-3 or Reference Invention 1-4,
The aforementioned performance control means is
The present invention is characterized in that it is possible to further execute a different attention-grabbing performance that is different from both the second performance symbol and the other attention-grabbing performance (for example, a performance that draws attention to matching numbers: see Figures 9(R), 15(D) to (E), and 16(G) to (H)).

According to the gaming machine of this reference invention 1-5, it is possible to implement a focus-enhancing effect that draws attention to the second display symbol, as well as other focus-enhancing effects that are different from the other focus-enhancing effects. Therefore, a higher level of performance can be achieved through the synergistic effect of the focus-enhancing effect that draws attention to the second display symbol, the other focus-enhancing effects, and the other focus-enhancing effects.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-6 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-5 described above,
The aforementioned performance control means is
The system is characterized in that, when the determination means determines that the special game will be performed, the other attention-grabbing performance will be performed (for example, when the winning notification performance in Figure 9(S) is performed, the matching number performance symbol attention-grabbing performance in Figure 9(R) will be performed), while when the determination means determines that the special game will not be performed, the other attention-grabbing performance will not be performed (for example, when the losing notification performance in Figure 9(J) is performed, the matching number performance symbol attention-grabbing performance in Figure 9(R) will not be performed).

According to the gaming machine of this reference invention 1-6, the attention-grabbing effect that draws attention to the second display symbol, and other attention-grabbing effects that are different from the other attention-grabbing effects, are only executed when it is determined that a special game should be played. Therefore, the player can recognize that a special game will be played based on the execution of the other attention-grabbing effect, and can enjoy the game while anticipating the execution of the other attention-grabbing effect.

(Reference Invention 2)
The gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-1 is,
A determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot game) (for example, the main CPU 81 that executes the jackpot determination process in step S308 of Figure 30: see Figure 5),
A special symbol display control means (for example, a main CPU 81 that executes the processes of steps S311 and SS315 in Figure 30) causes a special symbol (for example, a first special symbol) to be displayed in a variable manner on a special symbol display means (for example, a first special symbol display unit 41: see Figure 5), and then causes a special symbol indicating the result of the determination to be displayed in a stopped manner.
When the special game is executed, if a special symbol indicating that the determination means has determined that the special game has been executed (for example, a jackpot symbol X1 or a jackpot symbol X2: see Figure 6(B)) is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display means, the special game execution means (for example, a main CPU 81 that executes the jackpot opening and closing control processing illustrated in Figures 34 to 36) executes the special game,
It includes a performance control means (for example, a sub-CPU 91: see Figure 5) for controlling the performance,
The aforementioned performance control means is
The special symbol is displayed to change in conjunction with the display of the special symbol, and the special symbol is displayed to stop in conjunction with the display of the special symbol,
Prior to the win notification animation that announces that the special game will be performed (see, for example, Figure 9(S)), it is possible to perform an expectation animation that makes the player anticipate that the win notification animation will be performed (for example, a post-reach animation that is started when the reach formation animation in Figure 9(B) is performed: see Figure 9), and then to perform an attention animation that draws attention to the animation symbols that suggest the special game will be performed (for example, an attention animation for matching numbers animation symbols: see Figure 9(R)).
After the aforementioned expected performance begins, there is a first case in which the performance symbols are displayed in a first display mode (for example, when the reach symbols are displayed in a reduced size in the upper left and right areas: see Figure 9(E)), and a second case in which the performance symbols are displayed in a second display mode different from the first display mode (for example, when a background image representing a very small reach symbol is displayed: see Figure 9(L)).
The second case is characterized in that the aforementioned attention-grabbing effect (for example, the matching number effect; see Figure 9(R)) is more likely to be performed than the first case (for example, see Figure 19).

According to the gaming machine of this Reference Invention 2-1, when the performance symbols are displayed in the second display mode, the attention-grabbing performance that suggests the execution of a special game is more likely to occur than when the performance symbols are displayed in the first display mode. Therefore, by displaying the performance symbols in the second display mode, it is possible to effectively increase the player's expectation that the attention-grabbing performance and the winning notification performance (and special game) will be executed.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-1 described above,
The second display mode's animation pattern (see, for example, Figure 14(C)) is characterized in that it is smaller than the animation pattern of the first display mode's animation pattern (see, for example, Figure 16(F)).

According to the gaming machine of this reference invention 2-2, displaying a second performance symbol that is smaller than the performance symbol in the first display mode makes it easier to execute the performance that draws attention than displaying the performance symbol in the first display mode. Therefore, players can enjoy the anticipated performance while paying attention to the size of the performance symbol.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-3 is a gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-1 or Reference Invention 2-2,
The aforementioned performance control means is
It is possible to perform a possibility indication animation (see, for example, Figures 9(H) and (P)) that suggests that the aforementioned winning notification animation may be performed.
The aforementioned possibility suggestion performance is characterized by comprising a first possibility suggestion performance (see, for example, Figures 9(E) and (H)) which is performed when the performance symbols are displayed in the first display mode, and a second possibility suggestion performance (see, for example, Figures 9(L) and (P)) which is performed when the performance symbols are displayed in the second display mode.

Incidentally, in a configuration where the performance symbols are displayed in a second display mode, making it easier to execute the featured performance than in a first display mode, there is a concern that displaying the performance symbols in the first display mode will reduce the player's expectation of the featured performance. In contrast, according to the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-3 described above, the first possibility suggestion performance may be executed even when the performance symbols are displayed in the first display mode. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem of reduced player expectation of the featured performance occurring when displaying the performance symbols in the first display mode, while still making the player expect (the featured performance and) the win notification performance to be executed.

Furthermore, according to the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-3 described above, a second possibility suggestion effect may be executed when the performance symbols are displayed in the second display mode. Therefore, the synergistic effect of the effect of displaying the performance symbols in the second display mode and the second possibility suggestion effect makes it possible to dramatically increase the player's expectation of the attention effect and the winning notification effect being executed.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-3 described above,
The aforementioned performance control means is
The first possibility suggestion performance is not performed when the performance symbols are displayed in the second display mode (for example, the first possibility suggestion performance is not performed when a background image representing a very small reach symbol is displayed: see Figures 9(L) and (H)), and the second possibility suggestion performance is not performed when the performance symbols are displayed in the first display mode (for example, the second possibility suggestion performance is not performed when the reach symbol is displayed in a reduced size in the upper left and right areas: see Figures 9(E) and (P)).

By the way, for example, if the display of the symbols is in a configuration where both the first and second possibility suggestion sequences can be executed when the symbols are displayed in the first display mode, and also when the symbols are displayed in the second display mode, there is a concern that this could lead to excessive presentation and actually decrease the overall enjoyment.

In contrast, according to the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-4 described above, when the performance symbols are displayed in the second display mode, the first possibility suggestion performance is not executed, and when the performance symbols are displayed in the first display mode, the second possibility suggestion performance is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to execute highly entertaining performances while suppressing the problem of excessive performances mentioned above.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-5 is a gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-3 or Reference Invention 2-4,
A means for reserving the right to make the aforementioned determination up to a predetermined number (see, for example, Figure 26),
The system includes a pre-determination means (for example, a main CPU 81 that performs the pre-determination processing in steps S211 and S219 of Figure 28) that performs a pre-determination on whether or not to execute the special game before the determination is made on the rights that have been reserved by the reservation means,
The aforementioned performance control means is
The system can display a pending indication image (e.g., a pending icon) that suggests the right to make the said determination is reserved, and can perform a change effect (e.g., an icon change effect) that changes the display mode of the pending indication image currently displayed based on the result of the prior determination corresponding to the right to make the said determination.
The present invention is characterized in that when the aforementioned change animation is performed, the possibility suggestion animation is performed with a higher probability compared to when the aforementioned change animation is not performed (see, for example, Figure 19).

According to the gaming machine of this reference invention 2-5, when a change animation is performed, the probability of a possibility indication animation being performed is higher than when the change animation is not performed. Therefore, by performing the change animation, the player can be made to anticipate the possibility indication animation being performed, and the synergistic effect of the change animation and the possibility indication animation effectively increases the player's expectation that a winning notification animation will be performed in the display of the special symbols corresponding to the hold indication image.

(Reference Invention 3)
The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-1 is,
A movable, actionable device (for example, a robot-type gimmick 15: see Figures 1 and 21),
A determination means (for example, the main CPU 81 that performs the jackpot determination process in step S308 of Figure 30: see Figure 5) that determines whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot game),
If the determination means determines that the special game is to be executed, the special game execution means (for example, the main CPU 81 that executes the opening and closing control process for the big prize slot as illustrated in Figures 34 to 36) executes the special game,
It includes a performance control means (for example, a sub-CPU 91: see Figure 5) for controlling the performance,
The aforementioned performance control means is
It is possible to perform a predetermined pre-performance (for example, a performance before the start of an SPSP reach: see Figures 22 and 23), a subsequent performance that can be performed after the pre-performance (for example, a performance after the start of an SPSP reach: see Figure 23), and a swinging performance that swings the performance movable body (for example, various swinging performances illustrated in Figures 21 and 24).
The aforementioned oscillating effect includes a first oscillating effect that oscillates the movable part of the effect during the preceding effect (for example, a pre-oscillating effect (see Figure 22(B)), an unresponsive oscillating effect at the start of variation (see Figure 23(B)), an unresponsive oscillating effect before a reach (see Figure 23(E)), and an unresponsive oscillating effect during an SP reach (see Figure 23(I))), and a second oscillating effect that oscillates the movable part of the effect during the subsequent effect (for example, a oscillating effect that suggests a win: see Figure 23(O)).
The present invention is characterized in that, when the preceding effect is performed and then the subsequent effect is performed, there are cases in which the second oscillating effect is performed without performing the first oscillating effect, and cases in which the second oscillating effect is performed after the first oscillating effect (see, for example, Figures 22 and 23).

According to the gaming machine of this Reference Invention 3-1, even if the first swaying effect is not executed during the preceding effect, the second swaying effect may be executed during the subsequent effect. Therefore, while suppressing the problem of the player's expectation of the second swaying effect decreasing due to the failure of the first swaying effect, it is possible to achieve a high level of performance effect through the synergistic effect of the first and second swaying effects.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-1 described above,
The aforementioned performance control means is
The present invention is characterized in that, if the first oscillating effect is performed during the preceding effect, the second oscillating effect is performed during the subsequent effect with a higher probability than if the first oscillating effect is not performed during the preceding effect (see, for example, Figure 24).

According to the gaming machine of this reference invention 3-2, the second shaking effect is more likely to occur during the subsequent effect when the first shaking effect is performed than when the first shaking effect is not performed. Therefore, by performing the first shaking effect during the preceding effect, it is possible to effectively increase the player's expectation that the second shaking effect will occur during the subsequent effect.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-3 is a gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-1 or Reference Invention 3-2,
The second oscillation time required from the start to the end of the second oscillation effect (for example, 10 seconds: see Figure 24) is longer than the first oscillation time required from the start to the end of the first oscillation effect (for example, any of 1 second, 2 seconds, 3.5 seconds, or 4.5 seconds: see Figure 24).

According to the gaming machine of this reference invention 3-3, the second time period, from the start to the end of the second oscillation effect, is longer than the first time period, from the start to the end of the first oscillation effect. Therefore, it is possible to perform an oscillation effect that is highly engaging while suppressing the problem of the oscillation effect becoming monotonous and consequently less engaging due to the first and second times being the same length.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-4 is a gaming machine of any of the above Reference Inventions 3-1 to 3-3,
The present invention is characterized in that, during the preceding performance, the first oscillation performance is more likely to be executed than the second oscillation performance, and during the succeeding performance, the second oscillation performance is more likely to be executed than the first oscillation performance (see, for example, Figures 22 and 23).

According to this reference invention 3-4, the first oscillation effect is more likely to be executed than the second oscillation effect during the preceding effect, and the second oscillation effect is more likely to be executed than the first oscillation effect during the succeeding effect. Therefore, there is an advantage in that the oscillation effects are more likely to occur in the order of the first oscillation effect followed by the second oscillation effect.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-5 is a gaming machine of any of the above Reference Inventions 3-1 to 3-4,
The aforementioned performance control means is
It is possible to execute predetermined action-based effects in response to the player's actions.
The aforementioned operation-responsive effects include a first operation-responsive effect (for example, a dialogue preview: see Figure 23(D)) and a second operation-responsive effect different from the first operation-responsive effect (for example, a strong cut-in: see Figure 23(L)).
The present invention is characterized in that the second oscillation animation (for example, a winning indication oscillation animation: see Figure 23(O)) is more likely to be executed when the second operation-response animation is executed than when the first operation-response animation is executed (for example, see Figure 24).

According to the gaming machine of this reference invention 3-5, the execution of the second operation-dependent animation is more likely to result in the execution of the second oscillation animation than the execution of the first operation-dependent animation. Therefore, by executing the second operation-dependent animation, it is possible to effectively increase the player's expectation that the second oscillation animation will be executed.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-6 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-5 described above,
The aforementioned performance control means is
The first oscillation animation (for example, a pre-oscillation animation (see Figure 22(B)), an operation-independent oscillation animation at the start of variation (see Figure 23(B)), and an operation-independent oscillation animation during SP reach (see Figure 23(I))) is executed when the operation-independent oscillation animation is not being performed.

According to the gaming machine of this reference invention 3-6, since the first oscillation effect is executed when the operation-responsive effect is not being performed, it is possible to improve the entertainment value of the effect that is performed when the operation-responsive effect is not being performed.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-7 is a gaming machine of any of the above Reference Inventions 3-1 to 3-6,
The oscillation pattern of the movable body in the first oscillation effect includes a first oscillation pattern and a second oscillation pattern that is different from the first oscillation pattern (see, for example, Figure 24).
The aforementioned performance control means is
When the first oscillating effect is executed at the first execution timing, the first oscillating effect is executed in which the movable effect body is oscillated in the first oscillating pattern (for example, when the oscillating effect that does not correspond to operation at the start of variation is executed at the start of variation, the robot-type gimmick 15 is oscillated at high speed for 2 seconds: see Figure 23(B)),
The first swaying effect is performed when the first swaying effect is performed at the second execution timing, and the first swaying effect is performed in which the effect movable body is swayed in the second swaying pattern (for example, when the swaying effect that does not support operation during SP reach is performed during SP reach, the robot-type gimmick 15 is swayed at a low speed for 4.5 seconds: see Figure 23(I)).

According to the gaming machine of this reference invention 3-7, since the oscillation pattern of the movable element changes depending on the execution timing of the first oscillation effect, it is possible to perform a more entertaining first oscillation effect compared to a case where the oscillation pattern of the movable element is fixed regardless of the execution timing of the first oscillation effect.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-8 is a gaming machine of any of the above Reference Inventions 3-1 to 3-7,
The aforementioned performance control means is
In response to player actions, predetermined action-dependent animations (for example, the appearance of ally characters (see Figure 23(N)), the victory animation (see Figure 23(P))) can be executed.
The present invention is characterized in that the second oscillation animation (for example, the winning indication oscillation animation: see Figure 23(O)) is executed when the aforementioned operation-responding animation is being executed.

According to the gaming machine of this reference invention 3-8, since the second oscillation effect is executed while the operation-responsive effect is running, a high level of performance effect can be obtained through the synergistic effect of the operation-responsive effect and the second oscillation effect.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-9 is a gaming machine of any of the above Reference Inventions 3-1 to 3-8,
A means of reservation that allows the right to make the aforementioned determination to be reserved,
The system includes a pre-determination means that performs a pre-determination on whether or not to perform the special game before the determination is made on the rights that the holding means has held,
The aforementioned performance control means is
As the first oscillation effect, a pre-oscillation effect based on the result of the pre-determination (see, for example, Figure 22(B)) can be executed.
The performance is controlled in one of a plurality of performance modes, which include a first performance mode in which the pre-fluctuation performance is executed with a first execution probability, and a second performance mode in which the pre-fluctuation performance is executed with a second execution probability different from the first execution probability (see, for example, Figure 25).
In the first performance mode, the second performance (for example, the winning indication performance: see Figure 23(O)) is more likely to be performed when the pre-performance performance is performed than when the pre-performance performance is not performed (see, for example, Figure 24).

According to the gaming machine of this reference invention 3-9, in the first performance mode, the second performance is more likely to occur when the pre-swing performance is executed than when the pre-swing performance is not executed. Therefore, by executing the pre-swing performance, it is possible to effectively increase the player's expectation of the second performance, and a high performance effect can be obtained through the synergistic effect of the pre-swing performance and the second performance.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-10 is a gaming machine of any of the above Reference Inventions 3-1 to 3-9,
The aforementioned performance control means is
Based on the result of the above determination, a winning notification animation (see, for example, Figure 23(R)) can be executed to notify that the special game will be performed.
The aforementioned winning notification effect includes a first effect symbol display effect that displays multiple first effect symbols to notify that the special game will be executed (for example, an effect that displays three effect symbols showing even numbers), and a second effect symbol display effect that displays multiple second effect symbols to notify that the special game will be executed (for example, an effect that displays three effect symbols showing odd numbers).
The second oscillation effect (for example, the oscillation effect that suggests a win: see Figure 23(O)) is an effect that suggests that the win notification effect will be executed.
The aforementioned performance control means is
The present invention is characterized in that, when the first performance symbol display performance is executed, the second oscillating performance and when the second performance symbol display performance is executed, the performance movable body can be oscillated with a common oscillating pattern (see, for example, Figure 24).

By the way, if the second oscillation animation, performed when the first animation symbol display animation is executed, and the second oscillation animation, performed when the second animation symbol display animation is executed, use different oscillation patterns for the animation's movable body, there is a concern that it will become difficult to understand what the second oscillation animation is meant to convey.

In contrast, according to the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-10 described above, the second oscillation animation when the first animation symbol display animation is performed and the second oscillation animation when the second animation symbol display animation is performed both involve the animation's movable body oscillating with a common oscillation pattern. Therefore, while suppressing the above-mentioned problems, it is possible to clearly indicate that a win notification animation is being performed through the second oscillation animation.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-11 is a gaming machine of any of the above Reference Inventions 3-1 to 3-10,
The system includes a game control means (for example, a main CPU 81: see Figure 7) that controls the game in one of a plurality of game states, including a first game state (for example, a normal game state: see Figure 25) and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state (for example, a probability variation game state: see Figure 25),
The present invention is characterized in that the probability of executing the oscillating effect in the first game state and the probability of executing the oscillating effect in the second game state are different from each other (see, for example, Figure 25).

According to the gaming machine of this reference invention 3-11, the probability of executing the oscillating effect in the first game state and the probability of executing the oscillating effect in the second game state are different from each other. Compared to the case where these probabilities are the same, it is possible to execute the oscillating effect with a more appropriate probability according to each game state.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-12 is a gaming machine of any of the above Reference Inventions 3-1 to 3-11,
The aforementioned performance control means is
Based on the result of the above determination, a winning notification animation (see, for example, Figure 23(R)) can be executed to notify that the special game will be performed.
The aforementioned winning notification effect includes a first effect symbol display effect that displays multiple first effect symbols to notify that the special game will be executed (for example, an effect that displays three effect symbols showing even numbers), and a second effect symbol display effect that displays multiple second effect symbols to notify that the special game will be executed (for example, an effect that displays three effect symbols showing odd numbers).
The present invention is characterized in that the possibility of the first oscillating effect being performed prior to the first symbol display effect and the possibility of the first oscillating effect being performed prior to the second symbol display effect are different from each other.

According to the gaming machine of this reference invention 3-12, the possibility of the first swaying animation being performed prior to the first animation symbol display animation and the possibility of the first swaying animation being performed prior to the second animation symbol display animation are different. Therefore, players can enjoy the game by predicting which animation, the first animation symbol display animation or the second animation symbol display animation, will be performed based on the execution of the first swaying animation.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-13 is a gaming machine of any of the above Reference Inventions 3-1 to 3-12,
The system includes a game control means (e.g., a main CPU 81) that controls the game in one of a plurality of game states, including a first game state (e.g., a normal game state) and a second game state (e.g., a probability variation game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state.
The present invention is characterized in that the probability of executing the first oscillating effect in the first game state and the probability of executing the first oscillating effect in the second game state are different from each other (see, for example, Figure 25).

According to the gaming machine of this reference invention 3-13, the probability of executing the first oscillating effect in the first game state and the probability of executing the first oscillating effect in the second game state are different from each other. Compared to the case where these probabilities are the same, it is possible to execute the first oscillating effect with a more appropriate probability according to each game state.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-14 is a gaming machine of any of the above Reference Inventions 3-1 to 3-13,
A means of reservation that allows the right to make the aforementioned determination to be reserved,
The system includes a pre-determination means that performs a pre-determination on whether or not to perform the special game before the determination is made on the rights that the holding means has held,
The aforementioned performance control means is
As the first oscillation effect, it is possible to execute a first oscillation effect based on the result of a pre-determination by the pre-determination means (for example, a pre-oscillation effect: see Figure 22(B)), and a second first oscillation effect based on the result of a determination by the determination means (for example, an oscillation effect that does not correspond to operation at the start of the fluctuation (see Figure 23(B)), an oscillation effect that corresponds to operation before a reach (see Figure 23(E)), and an oscillation effect that does not correspond to operation during an SP reach (see Figure 23(I))).
The present invention is characterized in that the oscillation pattern of the movable element oscillating due to the first oscillation effect and the oscillation pattern of the movable element oscillating due to the second oscillation effect are different from each other (see Figure 24).

According to the gaming machine of this reference invention 3-14, since the oscillation pattern of the movable element oscillating due to the first oscillation effect and the oscillation pattern of the movable element oscillating due to the second oscillation effect are different from each other, the player can easily determine, based on the oscillation pattern of the movable element, whether the first oscillation effect is based on the result of a pre-determination by the pre-determination means or on the result of a determination by the determination means.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-15 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-14 described above,
The first oscillation effect causes the movable body to oscillate (for example, an ultra-high-speed oscillation for 1 second: see Figure 22(B)) and the second oscillation effect causes the movable body to oscillate (for example, an ultra-low-speed oscillation for 10 seconds: see Figure 23(O)) to oscillate, and these oscillation patterns are different from each other.

According to the gaming machine of this reference invention 3-15, the oscillation pattern of the movable element oscillating due to the first oscillation effect and the oscillation pattern of the movable element oscillating due to the second oscillation effect are different from each other. Therefore, while suppressing the problem of the oscillation effect becoming monotonous and resulting in insufficient performance effect due to the oscillation effect being the same as the oscillation pattern of the movable element oscillating due to the first oscillation effect and the oscillation pattern of the movable element oscillating due to the second oscillation effect, it is possible to obtain a high performance effect through the synergistic effect of the first oscillation effect and the second oscillation effect.

(Reference Invention 4)
The gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-1 is,
A movable, actionable device (for example, a robot-type gimmick 15: see Figures 1 and 21),
A determination means (for example, the main CPU 81 that performs the jackpot determination process in step S308 of Figure 30: see Figure 5) that determines whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot game),
If the determination means determines that the special game is to be executed, the special game execution means (for example, the main CPU 81 that executes the opening and closing control process for the big prize slot as illustrated in Figures 34 to 36) executes the special game,
It includes a performance control means (for example, a sub-CPU 91: see Figure 5) for controlling the performance,
The aforementioned performance control means is
The aforementioned movable performance body can perform rocking motion effects (for example, various rocking motion effects as illustrated in Figures 21 and 24),
The aforementioned oscillating effects include a first oscillating effect (for example, various oscillating effects performed during the preceding effects shown in Figures 22 and 23) and a second oscillating effect different from the first oscillating effect (for example, a winning suggestion oscillating effect: see Figure 23(O)).
The aforementioned performance control means is
When the first swaying effect is executed at the first execution timing, the movable effect body is swayed in the first swaying pattern (for example, when the swaying effect that does not respond to operation at the start of variation is executed at the start of variation, the robot-type gimmick 15 is swayed at high speed for 2 seconds: see Figure 23(B)), and when the first swaying effect is executed at the second execution timing, the movable effect body is swayed in a second swaying pattern different from the first swaying pattern (for example, when the swaying effect that does not respond to operation during SP reach is executed during SP reach, the robot-type gimmick 15 is swayed at low speed for 4.5 seconds: see Figure 23(I)).
The second oscillation effect causes the movable body to oscillate for a longer period (for example, 10 seconds; see Figure 23(O)) than the first oscillation effect causes the movable body to oscillate for a longer period (for example, see Figure 24).

According to the gaming machine of this Reference Invention 4-1, since the oscillation pattern of the movable element changes depending on the execution timing of the first oscillation effect, it is possible to perform a first oscillation effect that is more entertaining compared to a case where the oscillation pattern of the movable element is fixed regardless of the execution timing of the first oscillation effect. Furthermore, since the oscillation time of the movable element caused by the second oscillation effect is longer than the oscillation time of the movable element caused by the first oscillation effect, it is possible to suppress the problem of the oscillation effect becoming monotonous due to the oscillation times of the movable element caused by the first oscillation effect and the oscillation time of the movable element caused by the second oscillation effect being the same, while achieving a high performance effect through the synergistic effect of the first and second oscillation effects.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-1 described above,
The aforementioned performance control means is
It is possible to execute predetermined action-based effects in response to the player's actions.
The aforementioned operation-responsive effects include a first operation-responsive effect (for example, a dialogue preview: see Figure 23(D)) and a second operation-responsive effect different from the first operation-responsive effect (for example, a strong cut-in: see Figure 23(L)).
The present invention is characterized in that the second oscillation animation (for example, a winning indication oscillation animation: see Figure 23(O)) is more likely to be executed when the second operation-response animation is executed than when the first operation-response animation is executed (for example, see Figure 24).

According to the gaming machine of this reference invention 4-2, the execution of the second operation-dependent animation is more likely to result in the execution of the second oscillation animation than the execution of the first operation-dependent animation. Therefore, by executing the second operation-dependent animation, it is possible to effectively increase the player's expectation that the second oscillation animation will be executed.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-2 described above,
The aforementioned performance control means is
It is possible to perform a predetermined pre-performance (see, for example, Figures 22 and 23) and a subsequent performance that may be executed after the pre-performance (see, for example, Figure 23).
The first operation-corresponding effect (for example, a dialogue preview: see Figure 23(D)) is an effect that can be executed during the preceding effect (for example, see Figure 23),
The second operation-dependent effect (for example, a strong cut-in: see Figure 23(L)) is characterized in that it is an effect that can be executed during the subsequent effect (for example, see Figure 23).

According to the gaming machine of this reference invention 4-3, the first operation-response effect is an effect executed during the preceding effect, and the second operation-response effect is an effect executed during the subsequent effect. Therefore, even if the first operation-response effect is not executed during the preceding effect, the player can enjoy the game while expecting the second operation-response effect to be executed during the subsequent effect, thus maintaining the player's expectation of the second oscillation effect being executed over a long period of time.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-4 is a gaming machine of any of the above Reference Inventions 4-1 to 4-3,
The aforementioned performance control means is
It is possible to execute predetermined action-based effects in response to the player's actions.
The first oscillation effect (for example, a pre-oscillation effect (see Figure 22(B)), an operation-independent oscillation effect at the start of the variation (see Figure 23(B)), and an operation-independent oscillation effect during an SP reach (see Figure 23(I))) is characterized in that it is a different effect from the operation-dependent effect.

According to the gaming machine of this reference invention 4-4, the first swaying effect is a different effect from the operation-responsive effect and is executed independently of the player's operation. Therefore, by executing the first swaying effect at a timing that is unexpected for the player, it is possible to obtain a high level of visual effect.

(Reference Invention 5)
The gaming machine of reference invention 5-1 is,
A movable, actionable device (for example, a robot-type gimmick 15: see Figures 1 and 21),
A determination means (for example, the main CPU 81 that performs the jackpot determination process in step S308 of Figure 30: see Figure 5) that determines whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot game),
When the determination is made, a special symbol display control means (for example, the main CPU 81 that executes steps S311 and SS315 in Figure 30) causes a special symbol to be displayed in a variable manner on a predetermined special symbol display means (for example, the first special symbol display unit 41: see Figure 5), and then causes a special symbol indicating the result of the determination to be displayed in a stopped state.
When the special game is executed, if a special symbol indicating that the determination means has determined that the special game has been executed (for example, a jackpot symbol X1 or a jackpot symbol X2: see Figure 6(B)) is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display means, the special game execution means (for example, a main CPU 81 that executes the jackpot opening and closing control processing illustrated in Figures 34 to 36) executes the special game,
It includes a performance control means (for example, a sub-CPU 91: see Figure 5) for controlling the performance,
The aforementioned performance control means is
Based on the result of the determination, during the display of the special symbol variation that is performed in accordance with the determination, it is possible to perform an action animation (e.g., an oscillating animation) that operates the performance movable body in a first action pattern (e.g., an oscillating pattern illustrated in Figure 24) (for example, with respect to each oscillating animation in Figure 24, the process of step S826 in Figure 51 is performed).
Prior to the aforementioned action performance, a preliminary action performance (for example, a preliminary speed change oscillation performance) can be executed after power is supplied to the gaming machine, in which the performance movable body is operated with a second action pattern different from the first action pattern (for example, an oscillation pattern for a preliminary speed change oscillation performance) (for example, if "YES" is determined in step S801 of Figure 51, the preliminary speed change oscillation performance is started).

According to the gaming machine of this reference invention 5-1, a preliminary action sequence is performed before the actual action sequence, making it possible to verify the operation of the moving parts in advance. Furthermore, since the moving parts in the preliminary action sequence operate with a different motion pattern than the actual action sequence, it is easy to prevent problems such as players mistaking the preliminary action sequence for the actual action sequence.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, a rocking motion is performed to move the movable mechanism. However, by changing the operating mechanism of the robot-type gimmick 15, for example, a rotational motion may be performed by rotating the robot-type gimmick 15 with the vertical direction as the axis, or a combined motion may be performed by combining the rocking motion and the rotational motion.

(Reference Invention 6)
The gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-1 is,
A determination means for determining whether or not to perform a special game that is advantageous to the player,
Once the determination is made, a symbol display control means causes a symbol to change and display on a predetermined symbol display means, and then stops displaying a symbol indicating the result of the determination.
When the special game is executed and a symbol indicating that the determination means has determined to be executed is stopped and displayed on the symbol display means, the special game execution means executes the special game,
It comprises a performance control means for controlling the performance,
The aforementioned performance control means is
The performance can be controlled using any of several performance modes, including a first performance mode and a second performance mode that is different from the first performance mode.
After the variable display period in which the aforementioned symbols are displayed in a variable manner ends and the display transitions to a stopped display period in which the aforementioned symbols are displayed in a stationary manner, a predetermined stop display effect can be executed.
When the performance is controlled in the first performance mode, the first performance setting process is executed in response to the player's operation during the execution of the performance while the stop display is running. On the other hand, when the performance is controlled in the second performance mode, a second performance setting process different from the first performance setting process can be executed in response to the player's operation during the execution of the performance while the stop display is running.
If the first performance setting process described above is executed, the first performance based on the performance settings from the first performance setting process can be executed.
The present invention is characterized in that, when the second performance setting process is executed, the second performance based on the performance settings obtained by the second performance setting process can be executed.

According to the gaming machine of this reference invention 6-1, the first (or second) performance is executed with different performance settings depending on the performance mode, making it possible to execute more engaging performances for each performance mode. Furthermore, since the player can arbitrarily choose whether or not to perform the performance settings in either the first or second performance mode through their own operation, it is possible to execute effective performances that are more suited to the player's preferences.

(Reference Invention 6-2)
Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-1 described above,
The aforementioned performance control means is
The present invention is characterized in that, when the performance is controlled in the first performance mode, the second performance setting process will not be executed even if the player performs an operation while the performance is in progress.

According to the gaming machine of this reference invention 6-2, when the performance is controlled in the first performance mode, the second performance setting process will not be executed even if the player performs an operation during the execution of the performance while the display is stopped. Therefore, it is possible to make a player who desires the second performance setting process to expect the performance to be controlled in the second performance mode.

(Reference Invention 6-3)
Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-3 is a gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-1 or Reference Invention 6-2,
The aforementioned performance control means is
The first performance setting process can be executed in response to the player's operation during the execution of the stop display performance, not only when the performance is controlled in the first performance mode, but also when the performance is controlled in the second performance mode.

According to the gaming machine of this reference invention 6-3, the first performance, based on the performance settings obtained through the first performance setting process, can be executed not only in the first performance mode but also in the second performance mode. Therefore, it is possible to easily suppress problems such as a decrease in the entertainment value of the performance in the second performance mode due to the first performance not being executed in the second performance mode.

(Reference Invention 6-4)
Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-4 is a gaming machine of any of the above Reference Inventions 6-1 to 6-3,
The system includes a game control means that controls the game in one of a plurality of game states, including a first game state and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state.
The aforementioned game control means is
After the completion of the special game, the game can be controlled in the second game state.
The aforementioned performance control means is
The present invention is characterized in that when the game is controlled in the first game state, the effects are controlled in the first effects mode, and when the game is controlled in the second game state, the effects are controlled in the second effects mode.

According to the gaming machine of this reference invention 6-4, when the game is controlled in the first game state, the first performance setting process is executed in response to the player's operations during the execution of the stop display performance. When the game is controlled in the second game state, the second performance setting process is executed in response to the player's operations during the execution of the stop display performance. Since different performance setting processes are executed depending on the game state, controlling the game in the second game state not only allows the game to progress in a more advantageous state for the player than in the first game state, but also makes it possible to create favorable changes regarding the performance settings.

(Reference Invention 7)
The gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-1 is,
A determination means for determining whether or not to perform a special game that is advantageous to the player,
When the above determination is made, a special symbol display control means causes a special symbol to be displayed in a variable manner on a predetermined special symbol display means, and then stops displaying the special symbol indicating the result of the determination.
When the special game is executed and a special symbol indicating that the determination means has determined to be executed is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display means, the special game execution means executes the special game,
It comprises a performance control means for controlling the performance,
The aforementioned performance control means is
The special symbol is displayed in conjunction with the display of its variation, and the performance symbol indicating the result of the determination is displayed in conjunction with the display of the special symbol's stop.
During the first performance period while the special symbol is being displayed, a first performance control is provided which displays a first performance image and outputs a performance sound,
During the display of the special symbols, in the second performance period which is after the first performance period, a second performance control is provided which displays the second performance image with a lower volume of performance sound than in the first performance period.
When the aforementioned special game is performed, a special symbol indicating that it has been determined by the determination means is stopped and displayed, and a third performance control is performed which stops and displays the performance symbol and outputs a different performance sound from the performance sound output during the first performance period,
The present invention is characterized in that, when the special game is not performed, a special symbol indicating that the determination means has determined to be not performed is stopped and displayed, and a fourth performance control is performed, in which the performance symbol is stopped and displayed at a volume lower than that of the first performance period, without outputting any other performance sounds.

According to the gaming machine of this Reference Invention 7-1, during the second performance period, the second performance image is displayed with a lower volume of performance sound than during the first performance period. Therefore, compared to displaying the second performance image while outputting performance sound at the same or higher volume as the first performance period, it is possible to direct the player's attention more towards the second performance image, thereby improving the performance effect of the performance displaying the second performance image. Furthermore, if it is determined that a special game will not be performed, not only is the volume of performance sound lower than during the first performance period, but other performance sounds that would be output if a special game were to be performed are not output, and the performance symbols are displayed in a stopped state. Therefore, it is possible to easily suppress the problem of the player feeling discomfort and the performance effect being reduced by outputting performance sound at the same or higher volume as during the first performance period, or by outputting the other performance sounds mentioned above, when the special symbols indicating that a special game will not be performed are displayed in a stopped state.

(Reference Invention 7-2)
Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-2 is, in the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-1,
The aforementioned performance control means is
There are cases in which the second performance control is executed after the first performance control, and cases in which the second performance control is not executed.
The present invention is characterized in that, when the second performance control is executed, the special symbols indicating that the special game has been determined to be executed by the determination means are more likely to stop and be displayed than when the second performance control is not executed.

According to the gaming machine of this reference invention 7-2, special gameplay is more likely to occur when the second performance control is executed than when the second performance control is not executed. Therefore, players can enjoy the game while expecting the second performance image to be displayed at a lower volume than during the first performance period.

(Reference Invention 7-3)
Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-3 is a gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-1 or Reference Invention 7-2,
The aforementioned performance control means is
The second performance period is characterized in that the volume of the performance sound is lower than that of the first performance period, and the second performance image is displayed with the performance symbols hidden.

According to the gaming machine of this reference invention 7-3, when the second presentation image is displayed during the second presentation period, not only is the volume of the presentation sound lower than during the first presentation period, but the presentation symbols are also hidden. Therefore, compared to the case where the presentation symbols are displayed while the second presentation image is shown, it is easier to guide the player's gaze to the second presentation image, and it is possible to further improve the presentation effect of the presentation that displays the second presentation image.

(Reference Invention 7-4)
Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-4 is a gaming machine of any of the above Reference Inventions 7-1 to 7-3,
The aforementioned performance control means is
The present invention is characterized by outputting a different sound effect at the start of the second performance period than the sound effect output during the first performance period, and thereafter displaying the second performance image with a lower volume of sound effect than during the first performance period.

According to the gaming machine of this reference invention 7-4, a different sound effect is output at the start of the second performance period than the sound effect output during the first performance period. Therefore, the player can be easily notified that the second performance period has begun, and a high level of performance effect can be achieved through a synergistic effect with the display of the second performance image.

(Reference Invention 7-5)
Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-5 is a gaming machine of any of the above Reference Inventions 7-1 to 7-4,
Equipped with a light-emitting means capable of emitting light,
The aforementioned performance control means is
The present invention is characterized in that a light-emitting effect, in which the light-emitting means emits light in a predetermined light-emitting pattern, can be performed during the first effect period, while the light-emitting effect is not performed during the second effect period.

Furthermore, in a configuration where the light-emitting effect is performed not only during the first effect period but also during the second effect period, there is a concern that the player's gaze will be drawn to the conspicuous light-emitting device, resulting in a decrease in the effectiveness of the effect displayed during the second effect image.

In contrast, according to the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-5 described above, the second presentation image is displayed while the light-emitting means are not performing a light-emitting effect. Therefore, the problem of reduced performance effect from the presentation displaying the second presentation image due to the performance being performed while the light-emitting effect is displayed can be easily suppressed, making it possible to obtain a high performance effect from the presentation displaying the second presentation image.

(Reference Invention 7-6)
Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-6 is a gaming machine of any of the above Reference Inventions 7-1 to 7-5,
The aforementioned performance control means is
The invention is characterized in that, if the determination means determines that the special game is being performed, specific characters can be displayed after the end of the second performance period.

According to the gaming machine of this reference invention 7-6, if it is determined that a special game will be played, specific characters will be displayed after the end of the second performance period. Therefore, it is possible to easily increase the player's anticipation for the special symbols indicating that a special game will be played to stop and be displayed.

(Reference Invention 8)
The gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-1 is,
A determination means for determining whether or not to perform a special game that is advantageous to the player,
When the above determination is made, a special symbol display control means causes a special symbol to be displayed in a variable manner on a predetermined special symbol display means, and then stops displaying the special symbol indicating the result of the determination.
When the special game is executed and a special symbol indicating that the determination means has determined to be executed is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display means, the special game execution means executes the special game,
It comprises a performance control means for controlling the performance,
The aforementioned performance control means is
Based on the result of the above determination, it is possible to execute a winning notification sequence that notifies that the special game will be executed, and a notification sequence that foretells that there is a possibility that the winning notification sequence will be executed.
The aforementioned preview effect comprises a first change effect that changes a first preview image into a second preview image, and a second change effect that changes the second preview image back into the first preview image after the first change effect has been performed.
The aforementioned performance control means is
The system outputs a first sound effect before the start of the first transformation effect, and can output a second sound effect different from the first sound effect during the period between the end of the first transformation effect and the start of the second transformation effect.
The first time required for the first transformation effect and the second time required for the second transformation effect are different from each other.

According to the gaming machine of this Reference Invention 8-1, during the period between the end of the first transformation sequence and the start of the second transformation sequence, that is, while the second予告画像 (pre-announcement image) is displayed, a second sound different from the first sound output before the start of the first transformation sequence is output. Because a second sound different from the first sound is output after the end of the first transformation sequence, it is possible to effectively notify the player that the first announcement image has changed to the second announcement image. The synergistic effect of the sequence displaying the second announcement image and the sequence outputting the second sound makes it possible to achieve a high level of performance effect. Furthermore, because the first time required for the first transformation sequence and the second time required for the second transformation sequence are different, it is possible to easily suppress the problem of the announcement sequence becoming monotonous due to the first and second times being the same.

(Reference Invention 8-2)
Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-2 is, in the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-1,
The aforementioned performance control means is
The present invention is characterized in that it is possible to further execute a third transformation effect, which displays related images related to the first transformation effect and changes the related images in accordance with the first transformation effect.

According to the gaming machine of this reference invention 8-2, since the related images change as the first preview image changes to the second preview image, it is possible to perform a more entertaining presentation compared to a presentation where the third change presentation is not performed in conjunction with the first change presentation.

(Reference Invention 8-3)
Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-3 is a gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-1 or Reference Invention 8-2,
The aforementioned performance control means is
A predetermined image can be displayed while the first preview image is being displayed and while the second preview image is being displayed.
The present invention is characterized in that even if the first preview image changes to the second preview image, the display position of the predetermined image does not change.

According to the gaming machine of this reference invention 8-3, even if the first preview image changes to the second preview image, the display position of the predetermined image does not change. Therefore, the problem of reduced visibility of the predetermined image due to the execution of the first change effect can be easily suppressed, and the first change effect can be executed without impeding the visibility of the predetermined image.

(Reference Invention 8-4)
Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-4 is a gaming machine of any of the above Reference Inventions 8-1 to 8-3,
Equipped with a light-emitting means capable of emitting light,
The aforementioned performance control means is
The present invention is characterized in that, during the execution of the aforementioned preview effect, a light emission mode change effect can be further executed, which changes the light emission mode of the light emission means.

According to the gaming machine of this reference invention 8-4, since the emission pattern of the light-emitting means changes in accordance with the pre-announcement effect, a high level of performance effect can be obtained through the synergistic effect of the change in the pre-announcement image and the change in the emission pattern of the light-emitting means.

(Reference Invention 8-5)
Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-5 is a gaming machine of any of the above Reference Inventions 8-1 to 8-4,
Equipped with movable, actionable parts,
The aforementioned performance control means is
The present invention is characterized in that, during the period between the end of the first transformation effect and the start of the second transformation effect, a state change effect can be performed to change the performance state of the performance movable body from the first performance state to the second performance state.

According to the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-5 described above, since the performance state of the performance-moving mechanism changes during the display of the second予告画像 (preview image), a high performance effect can be obtained through the synergistic effect of the performance displaying the second preview image and the performance of the state change.

(Reference Invention 8-6)
Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-6 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-5 described above,
The aforementioned performance control means is
The present invention is characterized in that, during the period between the end of the first transformation effect and the start of the second transformation effect, it is possible to display a related image that is related to both the second preview image and the performance movable body.

According to the gaming machine of this reference invention 8-6, since a related image is displayed that is relevant to both the second予告 (preview) image and the movable part of the performance, it is possible to give the player the impression that the performance displaying the second preview image and the state change performance are linked, and as a result, it is possible to further improve the performance effect.

(Reference Invention 9)
The gaming machine of Reference Invention 9-1 is,
A determination means for determining whether or not to perform a special game that is advantageous to the player,
When the above determination is made, a special symbol display control means causes a special symbol to be displayed in a variable manner on a predetermined special symbol display means, and then stops displaying the special symbol indicating the result of the determination.
When the special game is executed and a special symbol indicating that the determination means has determined to be executed is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display means, the special game execution means executes the special game,
It comprises a performance control means for controlling the performance,
The effects based on the result of the aforementioned determination include a winning notification effect that indicates that the special game will be performed, a losing notification effect that indicates that the special game will not be performed, and an expectation effect that makes the player anticipate that the winning notification effect will be performed.
The aforementioned performance control means is
It is possible to perform the aforementioned expectation effect and then the aforementioned failure notification effect,
The aforementioned expectation effects include low-suggestion effects that suggest a relatively low probability of the winning notification effect being performed, and high-suggestion effects that suggest a relatively high probability of the winning notification effect being performed.
The aforementioned performance control means is
In cases where the aforementioned high-suggestion effect is performed before the aforementioned loss notification effect is performed, a special effect image can be displayed after the high-suggestion effect is performed.

According to the gaming machine of this reference invention 9-1, when a high-suggestion effect is performed followed by a loss notification effect, a special effect image is displayed after the high-suggestion effect. Therefore, instead of a low-suggestion effect that suggests a relatively low probability of a win notification effect, a high-suggestion effect that suggests a relatively high probability of a win notification effect is performed, yet a loss notification effect is executed, it is possible to perform a highly entertaining effect that can mitigate the player's disappointment caused by such an event.

(Reference Invention 9-2)
Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 9-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 9-1 described above,
The aforementioned performance control means is
In cases where the low-suggestion effect is performed before the loss notification effect is performed, the special effect image is not displayed after the low-suggestion effect is performed.

According to the gaming machine of this reference invention 9-2, when a low-suggestion effect is performed followed by a loss notification effect, the special effect image is not displayed. Therefore, by adopting a configuration that displays the special effect image even when a low-suggestion effect is performed followed by a loss notification effect, it is possible to suppress the problem of the special effect image display becoming too frequent, resulting in a decrease in the appeal of the special effect image display, while still achieving a high effect from the special effect image display.

(Reference Invention 9-3)
Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 9-3 is a gaming machine of Reference Invention 9-1 or Reference Invention 9-2,
The aforementioned performance control means is
During the execution of the aforementioned highly suggestive effect, it is possible to output a sound effect.
When the special performance image is displayed after the high-suggestion performance is executed, the special performance image is displayed without outputting the performance sound.

By the way, if a system is simply adopted where a losing notification is performed after a high-suggestion effect, while simultaneously outputting the same sound effect as during the high-suggestion effect and displaying a special effect image, it may give the player the impression that the high-suggestion effect is continuing even after the losing notification effect has ended. This could potentially decrease the player's enjoyment rather than increase it, which would be an attempt to enhance it.

In contrast, according to the gaming machine of Reference Invention 9-3 described above, the special effect image is displayed without the output of the sound effect that is normally emitted during the execution of a high-suggestion effect. Therefore, it is possible to effectively execute an effect that displays the special effect image while suppressing the occurrence of the above-mentioned problem.

(Reference Invention 9-4)
Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 9-4 is a gaming machine of any of the above Reference Inventions 9-1 to 9-3,
When the aforementioned high-suggestion effect is performed, more songs are output than when the aforementioned low-suggestion effect is performed.
The aforementioned performance control means is
The special effect image is displayed when neither the music output when the high-suggestion effect is performed nor the music output when the low-suggestion effect is performed is being output.

According to the gaming machine of this reference invention 9-4, the special effect image is displayed when neither the music output during a high-suggestion effect nor the music output during a low-suggestion effect is being output. Therefore, it is possible to effectively display the special effect image while suppressing the problem of causing discomfort to the player by outputting the same music used during a high-suggestion effect (or low-suggestion effect) even when a losing notification effect is being executed, thereby reducing the appeal of the special effect image display.

(Reference Invention 9-5)
Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 9-5 is a gaming machine of any of the above Reference Inventions 9-1 to 9-4,
The aforementioned performance control means is
This system is characterized by the ability to change settings related to the special effects in response to input from the player while the special effects image is being displayed.

According to the gaming machine of Reference Invention 9-5 described above, the settings related to the special effect can be changed in response to input from the player while the special effect image is being displayed. Therefore, it is possible to display the special effect image without compromising usability.

(Reference Invention 9-6)
Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 9-6 is a gaming machine of any of the above Reference Inventions 9-1 to 9-5,
The aforementioned performance control means is
While the aforementioned expected performance is being executed, a predetermined input-response performance can be executed in response to input from the player, whereas while the special performance image is being displayed, the aforementioned input-response performance will not be executed even if input is made by the player.

According to the gaming machine of this reference invention 9-6, since the input-response animation is not executed while the special animation image is displayed, it is possible to suppress the problem of the animation effect being reduced due to the player's attention being directed to the input-response animation, while still executing an effective animation that displays the special animation image.

(Reference Invention 9-7)
Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 9-7 is a gaming machine of any of the above Reference Inventions 9-1 to 9-6,
The aforementioned performance control means is
During the execution of the aforementioned expectation-generating performance, an input-prompting performance is executed to prompt the player to make an input, and a predetermined input-response performance can be executed in response to the player's input.
The system is characterized by outputting a predetermined sound effect before the start of the input prompting effect, while not outputting the sound effect during the execution of the input prompting effect.

According to the gaming machine of this reference invention 9-7, by not outputting the sound effect that was previously output before the input prompting effect started during the effect, the player's attention can be directed to the input prompting effect, making it possible to effectively encourage the player to input.

(Reference Invention 10)
The gaming machine of reference invention 10-1 is,
A determination means for determining whether or not to perform a special game that is advantageous to the player,
When the above determination is made, a special symbol display control means causes a special symbol to be displayed in a variable manner on a predetermined special symbol display means, and then stops displaying the special symbol indicating the result of the determination.
When the special game is executed and a special symbol indicating that the determination means has determined to execute the special game is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display means, the special game execution means executes the special game,
It comprises a performance control means for controlling the performance,
The effects based on the result of the aforementioned determination include a winning notification effect that indicates that the special game will be performed, a losing notification effect that indicates that the special game will not be performed, and an expectation effect that makes the player anticipate that the winning notification effect will be performed.
The aforementioned performance control means is
When the aforementioned expectation animation is performed and then the aforementioned failure notification animation is performed, there are cases where a special animation image is displayed after the expected animation is performed.
A gaming machine characterized in that it does not perform a predetermined effect while the special effect image is being displayed.

According to the gaming machine of this reference invention 10-1, since the predetermined effects are not executed while the special effect image is displayed, it is possible to execute an effective effect that displays the special effect image while suppressing the problem that the entertainment value of the effect displaying the special effect image would actually decrease if the predetermined effect were executed while the special effect image was displayed.

(Reference Invention 10-2)
Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 10-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 10-1 described above,
The aforementioned performance control means is
A gaming machine characterized in that, as a predetermined performance, a possibility indication performance that suggests the possibility of the winning notification performance being performed can be performed during the expectation performance, while the possibility indication performance is not performed while the special performance image is displayed.

According to the gaming machine of this reference invention 10-2, when a special effect image is displayed and a losing notification effect is executed, the possibility suggestion effect, which indicates the possibility of a winning notification effect being executed, is not executed while the special effect image is being displayed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively execute the special effect image display while suppressing the problem of causing discomfort to the player by executing a possibility suggestion effect that leads to the expectation of a winning notification effect even though a losing notification effect has been executed.

(Reference Invention 10-3)
Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 10-3 is a gaming machine of Reference Invention 10-1 or Reference Invention 10-2,
The aforementioned performance control means is
As a predetermined performance, an input prompting performance can be executed that prompts the player to make a predetermined input.
The input prompting effect can be executed during the expected effect, while the input prompting effect is not executed while the special effect image is displayed.

According to the gaming machine of the above-mentioned Reference Invention 10-3, since the input prompting effect is not executed while the special effect image is displayed, it is possible to easily suppress the problem that would occur if the input prompting effect were executed while the special effect image was displayed, which would cause the player's attention to be directed to the input prompting effect and consequently reduce the appeal of the effect that displays the special effect image, while still being able to execute an effective effect that displays the special effect image.

(Reference Invention 10-4)
Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 10-4 is a gaming machine of any of the above Reference Inventions 10-1 to 10-3,
The aforementioned performance control means is
As the aforementioned predetermined performance, an input-response performance can be executed in response to input from the player.
The aforementioned input-response animation can be executed during the aforementioned expectation animation, while the aforementioned input-response animation will not be executed even if the player makes an input while the special animation image is being displayed.

According to the gaming machine of this reference invention 10-4, since input-responsive effects are not executed while the special effect image is displayed, it is possible to easily suppress the problem that would occur if the input-responsive effects were executed while the special effect image was displayed, which would cause the player's attention to be directed to the input-responsive effects and consequently reduce the appeal of the effect that displays the special effect image, while still being able to execute an effective effect that displays the special effect image.

(Reference Invention 10-5)
Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 10-5 is a gaming machine of any of the above Reference Inventions 10-1 to 10-4,
The aforementioned performance control means is
As a predetermined performance, it is possible to execute a music output performance that outputs a predetermined song,
The aforementioned music output performance can be executed during the aforementioned expectation performance, while the music output performance is not executed while the special performance image is displayed.

According to the gaming machine of Reference Invention 10-5 described above, since the music output effect is not executed while the special effect image is displayed, it is possible to easily suppress the problem of the player's attention being drawn to the music output effect, which would result in a decrease in the appeal of the effect displaying the special effect image, while still effectively executing the effect of displaying the special effect image.

(Reference Invention 10-6)
Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 10-6 is a gaming machine of any of the above Reference Inventions 10-1 to 10-5,
The aforementioned performance control means is
This system is characterized by the ability to change settings related to the special effects in response to input from the player while the special effects image is being displayed.

According to the gaming machine of this reference invention 10-6, the settings related to the special effect can be changed in response to input from the player while the special effect image is being displayed. Therefore, it is possible to display the special effect image without compromising usability.

Furthermore, multiple inventions from Reference Inventions 1-1 to 10-6 above may be combined.

[Variations]
In the above embodiment, the present invention was described in the case where it is applied to a type 1 pachinko game machine known as a V-ST machine. However, the present invention may also be applied to other game machines such as a type 1 pachinko game machine known as a probability variation loop type, a type 1 pachinko game machine known as a ST machine, or a type 1 and type 2 mixed type pachinko game machine.

Furthermore, the configuration of the gaming machine 1 and the operating modes of each component described in the above embodiment are merely examples, and it goes without saying that the present invention can be realized with other configurations and operating modes. Also, the processing order, set values, random values, and threshold values used for judgment in the flowchart described above are merely examples, and it goes without saying that the present invention can be realized with other orders and values as long as they do not deviate from the scope of the present invention. The drawings and other illustrations provided in the above embodiment are also merely examples, and other configurations may also be used.

1. Gaming machine (pachinko game machine), 7. Image display device, 15. Robot-type gimmick, 21. First start port, 22. Second start port, 23. Opening/closing member, 26. First major prize port, 28. Second major prize port, 41. First special symbol display, 42. Second special symbol display, 70. Display screen, 80. Main control board, 81. Main CPU, 90. Sub control board, 91. Sub CPU, 100. Image and sound control board, 101. Image and sound control CPU, 211. First start port sensor, 221. Second start port sensor, 261. First major prize port sensor, 262. First major prize port solenoid, 281. Second major prize port sensor, 282. Second major prize port solenoid, 283. V prize port sensor, 284. Discharge port sensor, 285. Slide member, 286. V prize port solenoid, 287. V Prize Entrance.

Claims (1)

A movable, actionable display unit,
A determination means for determining whether or not to perform a special game that is advantageous to the player,
When the above determination is made, a symbol display control means causes a special symbol to be displayed in a variable manner on a predetermined symbol display means, and then stops displaying the special symbol indicating the result of the determination.
When the special game is executed and a special symbol indicating that the determination means has determined to be executed is stopped and displayed on the symbol display means, the special game execution means executes the special game,
It comprises a performance control means for controlling the performance,
The aforementioned performance control means is
The special symbol is displayed in conjunction with the display of its variation, and the performance symbol indicating the result of the determination is displayed in conjunction with the display of the special symbol's stop.
The performance can be controlled using any of several performance modes, including a first performance mode and a second performance mode that is different from the first performance mode.
After the variable display period in which the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner ends and the display transitions to a stop display period in which the special symbol is displayed in a stationary manner, a predetermined stop display effect can be executed.
When the performance is controlled in the first performance mode, the first performance setting process is executed in response to the player's operation during the execution of the performance while the stop display is running. On the other hand, when the performance is controlled in the second performance mode, a second performance setting process different from the first performance setting process can be executed in response to the player's operation during the execution of the performance while the stop display is running.
If the first performance setting process described above is executed, the first performance based on the performance settings from the first performance setting process can be executed.
If the second performance setting process described above is executed, the second performance based on the performance settings from the second performance setting process can be executed .
The effects controlled by the aforementioned effect control means include a swinging effect that swings the effect movable body, and an attention effect that draws attention to an effect symbol in a manner that indicates the execution of the special game while the effect symbol is being displayed in a changing state.
The aforementioned performance control means is
During the display of the aforementioned performance symbols, there are two modes of display: one in which the performance symbols are displayed in a first display mode, and another in which the performance symbols are displayed in a second display mode.
The aforementioned rocking effect includes a first rocking effect, a second rocking effect, and a third rocking effect.
When the performance symbols are displayed in the second display mode, the third oscillation effect and the attention effect are more likely to be executed than when the performance symbols are displayed in the first display mode.
When the first oscillation effect is performed, the third oscillation effect and the attention effect are more likely to be performed than when the first oscillation effect is not performed.
A gaming machine characterized in that the third shaking effect and the attention effect are more likely to be performed when the second shaking effect is performed than when the second shaking effect is not performed .